GIFT OF

L.
A.

Williams

IMM

LATIN FOR BEGINNERS

BY

BENJAMIN
PROFESSOR
IN

L.

D'OOGE,

Ph.D.

THE MICHIGAN STATE NORMAL COLLEGE

GINN AND COMPANY

BOSTON
\ll

AVI

NEW YORK CHICAGO LONDON DAM AS SW KKANCISCO COLUMBUS

COPYRIGHT, 1909, 1911, BY BENJAMIN L. D'OOGE ENTERED AT STATIONERS' HALL

ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
611;.

lO

EDUCATION DEPTr

GINN AND COMPANY PROPRIETORS BOSTON U.S.A.

QUI

FILIOLO MEO ME NON SOLUM DICENDA SED ETIAM TACENDA DOCUIT HOC OPUSCULUM EST DEDICATUM

7()<>942

PREFACE
To make
of lessons.
tematic, thorough, clear,

the course preparatory to Caesar at the same time sy& and interesting is the purpose of this series

The
guage,

first
its

pages are devoted to a brief discussion of the Latin

lan-

history,

and

its

educational value.
is

The body

of the book,

consisting of seventy-nine lessons,

divided into three parts.

Part

I is

devoted to pronunciation, quantity, accent, and kindred

work through the first sbcty lessons, and is devoted to the study of forms and vocabulary, together with some elementary constructions, a knowledge of which is necessary for the
translation of the exercises

introductory essentials. Part II carries the

and reading matter. The

first

few lessons

have been made unusually simple, to meet the wants of pupils not
well
is concerned primarily with the study of syntax and of subjunctive and irregular verb forms. The last three of these lessons constitute a review of all the constructions

grounded in English grammar. Part III contains nineteen lessons, and

presented in the book.

in order to secure
translation,

no new

There is abundant easy reading matter and, proper concentration of effort upon syntax and vocabularies are introduced, but the vocabularies
;

in Part II are reviewed.

It is

hoped that the following features

:

will

commend

themselves to

teachers

The forms
for the

most

appendix. other directions being reduced to a minimum while this is going on. The forms of the subjunctive are studied in correlation with the
subjunctive constructions.

are presented in their natural sequence, and are given, part, in the body of the book as well as in a grammatical The work on the verb is intensive in character, work in

VI

PREFACE
The vocabulary has been
"

Lodge's Dictionary of Word List " as a basis.

sive of proper

and Browne's Latin Secondary Latin There are about six hundred words, excluthe special vocabularies, and these are
in the language.

selected with the greatest care, using " "

names,

in

among

the simplest and

commonest words

More

than ninety-five per cent of those chosen are Caesarian, and of these more than ninety per cent are used in Caesar five or more times.

The few words

Cicero, Vergil,

not Caesarian are of such frequent occurrence in

to justify their appearance here. But teachers desiring to confine word study to Caesar can easily do so, as the Caesarian words are printed in the vocabularies in distinctive

and other authors as

compounds and

Concrete nouns have been preferred to abstract, root words to derivatives, even when the latter were of more frequent occurrence in Caesar. To assist the memory, related English words
type.

are added in each special vocabulary. To insure more careful preparation, the special vocabularies have been removed from their
respective lessons and placed by themselves. The general vocabulary contains about twelve hundred words, and of these above eighty-five

per cent are found in Caesar. The syntax has been limited to those essentials which recent
gations, such as those of Dr.

investi-

shown

to belong properly to

Lee Byrne and his collaborators, have the work of the first year. The construc-

from the standpoint of English, the English usage being given first and the I^atin compared or contrasted with it. Special attention has been given to the constructions of participles, the gerund and gerundive, and the infinitive in indirect
tions are presented, as far as possible,

statements.

Constructions having a logical connection are not sepa-

rated but are treated together. Exercises for translation occur throughout, those for translation into Latin being, as a rule, only half as long as those for translation into English.

In Part III a few of the commoner idioms

in

Caesar are introduced and the sentences are drawn mainly from that author. From first to last a consistent effort is made to instill a

proper regard for Latin word order, the

laid

first

principles of which are

down

early in the course.

PREFACE
Selections for reading are unusually

Vll

abundant and are introduced

in

from the

earliest possible

moment.

These increase

number and

length as the book progresses, and, for the most part, are made an integral part of the lessons instead of being massed at the end of the

book. This arrangement insures a more constant and thorough drill in forms and vocabulary, promotes reading power, and affords a breathing
spell

torical

between succeeding subjects. The material is drawn from hisand mythological sources, and the vocabulary employed includes

but few words not already learned.

The book

closes with a continued

of a Roman boy. The chapters record his experiences in Caesar's army, and contain much information that will facilitate the interpretation of the Commentaries.
story which recounts the chief incidents in the
last
life

The

early emphasis placed

on word order and sentence

structure, the

simplicity of the syntax,

and the

familiarity of the vocabulary,

make

the reading selections especially useful for work in sight translation. Reviews are called for at frequent intervals, and to facilitate this

branch of the work an Appendix of Reviews has been prepared, covering both the vocabulary and the grammar. The illustrations are numerous, and will,
it

is

hoped, do

much

to

stimulate interest in the ancient world and to create true and lasting impressions of Roman life and times.

consistent effort has been

made

to use simple language

and

clear

explanation throughout.

As an

aid to teachers using this

" book a Teacher's Manual " has

been prepared, which contains, in addition to general suggestions, notes on each lesson.

The author wishes to express his gratitude to the numerous teachers who tested the advance pages in their classes, and, as a result of their experience, have given much valuable aid by criticism and suggestion.
Particular

acknowledgments are due

to

Miss A. Susan Jones of the

Central High School, Grand Rapids, Michigan; to Miss Clara Allison of the High School at Hastings, Michigan ; and to Miss Helen B. Muir and Mr. Orland O. Norris, teachers of Latin in this institution.

BENJAMIN
Michigan State Normal Collbok

L.

D'OOGE

CONTENTS
LESSON

To THE Student

By way of Introduction
I.

PAGE
o
.

1-4

PART

THE PRONUNCIATION OF LATIN

5-11

Alphabet, Sounds of the Letters, Syllables, Quantity, Accent, How TO Read Latin

PART
I-VI.
ber,

II.

WORDS AND FORMS

Inflection,

VTI-VIII.

NumFirst Principles Subject and Predicate, Nominative Possessive Genitive, Agreement of Dialogue Indirect Verb, Direct 12-24 First or ^-Declension Gender, Agreement of Adjectives,
Subject,
Object,
Object, etc.
. .
.

Word Order IX-X. Second or (9-Declension General Rules for DeDialogue Predicate Noun, Apposition clension XL Adjectives of the First and Second Declensions Germania XII. Nouns in -ius and -ium XIIL Second Declension {Continued) Nouns in -er and -ir
.

25-30

31-35
36-37

Dialogue Italia XIV. Possessive Adjective Pronouns XV. Ablative denoting With Cause, Means, AccompaniThe Romans Prepare for War ment, Manner XVI. The Nine Irregular Adjectives Dialogue XVII. The Demonstrative is, ea, id

38-39
39-4i

42-43

44-46
46-47

XVIII. Conjugation

Present, Imperfect, and Future of sum

. .

48-50
5^-53

Dialogue XIX. Present Active Indicative of amo and mone5 XX. Imperfect Active Indicative of amo and moneo Meaning of the Imperfect ^lo^Y. AND her Children. XXI. Future Active Indicative of am5 and moneo Niobe AND HER Children {Concluded) XXII. Review of Verbs The Dative with Adjectives Cornelia AND HER Jewels
.

54-56
56-57

5^-59
'

59~6i

viii

CONTENTS
LESSON

ix

XXIII. Present Activk Indicative of

Cornelia and her Jewels (Concluded) .... XXIV. Imperfect Active Indicative of reg6 and audiO

wg6 and

andiS

PAGE
61-63 63-65

ne Dative with
XXVI. Verbs
in -15

Special Intransitive Verbs

....
.

XXV. Future Active Indicative of

Present, Imperfect, and Future Active Indicative of capid The Imperative

reg6

and audid

65-66 66-68

XXVII. Passive Voice

Indicative of

Present,

Imperfect, and Future

am5 and moneo

Perseus and An

dromeda

68-72

XX VIII.

Present, Imperfect, and Future Indicative Perseus and Passive of regS and audi5

Andromeda

{Continued)

72-73

XXIX. Present, Imperfect, and Future Indicative

Passive of -16 Verbs tive and Imperative

Present Passive Infini-

XXX. Synopses

the Four Conjugations The Ablative denoting From Place from Which, Sepain

73-75

ration , Personal

Agent

75-78
79-81

XXXI. Perfect, Pluperfect, and Future Perfect of sum Dialogue XXXII. Perfect Active Indicative of the Four Regular
Conjugations
seus

il/^-aw/w^j

0/ the Perfect

Per-

AND Andromeda {Continued) XXXIII. Pluperfect and Future Perfect Active Indicative

81-83 84-85 86-87

XWIV.
V
.

Review of the Active Voice Perseus and

Perfect Active Infinitive

{Concluded)

Andromeda

XXXVI. Review OF Principal Parts Prepositions,

I No Questions XXXVII. Conjugation of possum The Infinitive

Passive Perfects of the Indicative Perfect Passive and Future Active Infinitive .
.

88-90
9^-93

Yes-or-

English

Accusative

used as in

Subject of

an

Infinitive

93-96

The Faithless Tarpeia XXXVIII. The Relative Pronoun and the Interrogative Pronoun Agreement ofthe PeUUive The Faithless

XXXIX-XLI. The Third Declension Consonant Stems

XLII. Review Lesson
XLIII. Third Declension

Tarpeia {Concluded)

Terror Cimbrk /-Stems.

.

97-101 101-106
107

loS-iio

X
LESSON

CONTENTS

XLIV. Irregular Nouns of the Third Declension Gender IN THE Third Declension The First Bridge over THE Rhine XLV. Adjectives of the Third Declension The Romans Invade the Enemy's Country XLVI. The Fourth OR ^-Declension XLVII. Expressions of Place Place to Which, Placefrom Which, Place at or in Which, the Locative Declension of domus D^DALUS and Icarus XLVIII. The Fifth or ^-Declension Ablative of Time DAEDALUS AND Icarus (C^;?^/^^) XLIX. Pronouns Personal and Reflexive Pronouns D.^da\M% K^n \(ZKm5^ {Concluded) L. The Intensive Pronoun ipse and the Demonstrative idem How Horatius Held the Bridge ..... LI. The Demonstratives hie, iste, ille A German Chieftain Addresses his Followers How Horatius Held the Bridge [Continued) LII. The Indefinite Pronouns How Horatius Held the Bridge {Concluded) LI II. Regular Comparison of Adjectives LIV. Irregular Comparison of Adjectives Ablative with

PAGE

111-112

113-115
116-117

117-121

121-123

123-126
126-127

128-130
130-132 ^33-i35

Comparatives

LV. Irregular Comparison of Adjectives {Continued)

Declension of
pliis

135-136
137-138

LVI. Irregular Comparison of Adjectives {Concluded) Ablative of the Measure of Difference 138-139 LVII. Formation and Comparison of Adverbs 140-142 Partitive Genitive LVIII. Numerals 142-144 Caesar in LIX. Numerals {Contijiued) Accusative of Extent

Gaul LX. Deponent Verbs Prepositions

144-146
with the Accusative
. . .

146-147

PART

III.

CONSTRUCTIONS

Inflection of the Present LXI. The Subjunctive Mood 1 48-1 Indicative and Subjunctive Compared 51 LXII. The Subjunctive OF Purpose 151-153 LXIII. Inflection of the Imperfect Subjunctive Sequence

of Tenses

53-^55

LXIV. Inflection of the Perfect and Pluperfect Subjunctive

Substantive

Clauses of Purpose

156-159

CONTENTS
LRSSON

xi
fM.H
160-161

LXV. Subjunctive OF possum

LXVL The
I.

Participles

Tenses and
vo15,

/>r*j <//i'<in>ix'

Declension
n616,

161-164
/M/Z/V/^r

WIT. The Irregular Verbs

Absolute
1 1 1.
1

malS

XV

HE Irregular Verb fi6 167-168 Subjunctive of /Vj.. LXIX. Subjunctive OF Characteristic Predicate Accusative 169-171 LXX. Constructions WITH cum Ablative of Specification 1 71-173 LXXI. Vocabulary Review Gerund and Gerundive Predi-

164-166

cate Genitive

LXXII. The Irregular Verb e6

I.XXIII.

Vocabulary

Review The

Indirect Statements ....

Irregular Verb
fero

*73-i77

177-180

LXXIV.

LXXV.

Dative with Compounds 1 81-183 Vocabulary ^v.wv.w Subjunctive in Indirect Questions 183-185 Vocabulary Review Dative of Purpose or End for

Which

LXXVI. Vocabulary Review

or Description

Genitive and Ablative of Quality

185-186

LXXVII. Review op Agreement

Rcoiew of the Genitive, Dative,

.

186-188

and Accusative LXXVIII. Review of THE Ablative LXXIX. Review ok the Syntax of Verbs
.

189-190
191-192
'92-193

READING MATTER
Introductory Suggestions The Labors of Hercules P. Cornelius Lentulus: The Story of a Roman Boy
194-195

....

196-203

204-225

APPENDIXES AND VOCABULARIES

Appendix I. Tables of Declensions, Conjugations, Numerals, etc Appendix II. Rules of Syntw Appendix III. Reviews Special Vocabularies Latin-English Vocabulary English-Latin Vocabulary
*

226-260
261-264
265-282

283-298
.

299-331

332-343

'NDEX

3^.348

ILLUSTRATIONS
Plate
I

IN

COLOR
PAGE
.

LENTULUS AD VILLAM SUAM PROPERAVIT"

By

Frontispiece

E. Forti, Rome. From a facsimile colored under the direction of the artist.

Plate

II

"STABIANA PORTA URBEM INGRESSI SUNT"

52

By

E. Forti,

Rome. From
artist.

a facsimile colored under the

direction of the

Plate

III

CAPTIVI INTERROGANTUR

48

By Edmund H.
in
oil.

Garrett, Boston.

From an

original painting

Plate IV
"ECCE CAESAR NUNC TRIUMPHAT"
2I_'

By Edmund H.
in
oil.

Garrett, Boston.

From an

original painting

Map
italia antiqua
.

LATIN FOR BEGINNERS

TO THE STUDENT BY WAY OF INTRODUCTION
What
is

Latin ?

If

site f)age,

you

will find

west coast a

district

you will look at the map of Italy on the opponear the middle of the peninsula and facing the called Latium,^ and Rome its capital. The Latin

language, meaning the language of Latium, was spoken by the ancient Romans and other inhabitants of Latium, and Latin was the name
applied to
it

after the armies of

Rome had

carried the

knowledge of

her language far beyond its original boundaries. As the English of to-day is not quite the same as that spoken two or three hundred
years ago, so Latin was not always the same at all times, but changed more or less in the course of centuries. The sort of Latin you are

going to learn was in use about two thousand years ago. And that period has been selected because the language was then at its best

and the greatest works of

This period, because of
its

Roman
supreme

literature

excellence,

were being produced. is called the Golden

Age

of

Roman

letters.

the

The Spread of Latin. For some centuries after Rome was founded, Romans were a feeble and insignificant people, their territory was
and
their existence

limited to Latium,

constandy threatened by warlike

Rome's power She conquered all Italy, then reached out for the lands across the sea and beyond the Alps, and finally ruled over the whole
neighbors.
third century before Christ,

But after the

grew

rapidly.

ancient world

The empire
*

thus established lasted for

more than four

Pronounce Ld^ski-Am.
I

TO THE STUDENT
years.

hundred

The importance

Roman
became

power, ind what h^d been a

the, univj^rs^ langitag^.

of latin increased with the growth of dialect spoken by a single tribe

Gradually the language changed somewhat, iieyTe].op5i;ig; diffefentlydti different countries. In Italy it has become Italian, in Spain Spanish, and in France French. All these
nations, therefore, are speaking a

modernized form of Latin.

The Romans and the Greeks. In their career of conquest the Romans came into conflict with the Greeks. The Greeks were inferior to the Romans in military power, but far superior to them in culture. They excelled in art, literature, music, science, and philosophy. Of all these pursuits the Romans were ignorant until contact with
Greece revealed to them the value of education and
filled

them with

the thirst for knowledge. And so it came about that while Rome conquered Greece by force of arms, Greece conquered Rome by force of her intellectual superiority and became her schoolmaster. It was

soon the established custom for young

Romans

to

go

to

Athens and the

and

to other centers of

Greek learning

to finish their training,

knowledge of the Greek language among the educated universal. At the same time many cultured Greeks
orators,

and philosophers

classes

became
and

poets, artists,
schools,

flocked to

Rome, opened

Indeed, the preeminence of Greek culture became so great that Rome almost lost her ambition to be original, and her writers vied with each other in their efforts to reproduce in Latin

taught their arts.

what was choicest

to

in

Greek

literature.

As a consequence
art.

of

all this,

the civilization and national

life

of

Rome became
and her

largely Grecian,

and

Greece she owed her

literature

the Modern World. After conquering the world, Rome her language, laws, customs of living, and modes of impressed

Rome and

thinking upon the subject nations, and they became Roman; and the world has remained largely Roman ever since. Latin continued

and the knowledge of Latin was the only light of learning that burned steadily through the dark ages that followed the downfall of the Roman Empire. Latin was the common language of scholars and remained so even down to the days of Shakespeare. Even yet it is
to live,

1()

IHE STUDENT

more nearly than any other tongue the universal language of the learned. The life of to-day is much nearer the life of ancient Rome
than the lapse of centuries would lead one to suppose. You and I are Romans still in many ways, and if Caesar and Cicero should appear

among us, we should not find them, except much unlike men of to<iay.
Latin and English.
in the

for dress

and language,

Do you know

that

more than

half of the

words

English dictionary are Latin, and that you are speaking more or less Latin every day ? How has this come about ? In the year

066 William the Conqueror invaded England with an army of NorThe Normans spoke French which, you remember, is and spread their language to a considerable descended from Latin
1

mans.

Norman-French played an important formation of English and forms a large proportion of our vocabulary. Furthermore, great numbers of almost pure Latin words have been brought into English through the writings of scholars, and
extent over England, and so
part in the

every new scientific discovery is marked by the addition of new terms of Latin derivation. Hence, while the simpler and commoner words
of our mother tongue are Anglo-Saxon, and Anglo-Saxon forms the
staple of our colloquial language, yet in the realms of literature,
especially in poetry,

and

Also in

words of Latin derivation are very abundant the learned professions, as in law, medicine, and engineering,
is

a knowledge of Latin
technical

necessary for the successful interpretation of

and

scientific terms.

Why study Latin ? The foregoing paragraphs make it clear why Latin forms so important a part of modem education. have seen that our civilization rests upon that of Greece and Rome, and that

We

we must look to the past if we would understand the present. It is obvious, too, that the knowledge of Latin not only leads to a more exact and effective use of our own language, but that it is of vital
literary

importance and of great practical value to any one preparing for a or professional career. To this it may be added that the

in general

study of Latin throws a flood of light upon the structure of language and lays an excellent foundation for all grammatical study.

4
Finally,
it

TO THE STUDENT
of strengthening the

means

has been abundantly proved that there is no more effective mind than by the earnest pursuit of this

branch of learning.

Review Questions. Whence does Latin get its name ? Where is Latium ? is Rome ? Was Latin always the same ? What sort of Latin are we to study ? Describe the growth of Rome's power and the spread of Latin. What can you say of the origin of Italian, French, and Spanish ? How did

Where

the ancient Greeks and

Romans compare ? How

?

did Greece influence

How
What

did

Rome

influence the world

In what sense are

Rome? we Romans still?

tion of English

did Latin have to do with the formation of English ? What proporwords are of Latin origin, and what kind of words are they?

Why should we

study Latin?

PART

THE PRONUNCIATION OF LATIN

THE ALPHABET
1.

The

cept that
2.

Latin alphabet contains the same letters as the English and no/ it has no

The

vowels, as in English, are

dr, ^, /,

o, ,

y.

The

other letters

c consonants.
3.
in
>i

/ is

used both as a vowel and as a consonant.

syllable
it

Before a vowel
is

the

same

has the value of a consonant and

called

sonant.
in lu-li-us the first
/ is

Thus

a consonant, the second a vowel.

SOUNDS OF THE LETTERS

4.

Latin was not pronounced like English. The Romans at the beginning of the Christian era pronounced their language substantially described below.
5.

The vowels have

Vowels*

the following sounds

Latin Examples
hac, stas 4'-mit, ci'-naa
te'-lS,

a as \n father & like the first a in a/ia\ never as in hat

8 as in they

me'-ti
mir'-ces
pra'-ti

* as in
i

as in

met machiiu

tfe'-nSt,
sftr'-ti,

1 N.B. The sounds of the letters are best learned by hearing them correctly pronounced. The matter in this section is, therefore, intended for reference rather than for assignment as a lesson. As a first step it is suggested that the

teacher pronounce the examples in class, the pupils following. * Long vowels are marked -, short ones ^.

_L.

6
Vowels
1

PRONUNCIATION
Latin Examples
si'-tis, bi'-bi

as in bit

' as in holy 8 as in wholly^ never as in hot

Ro'-mK,

5'-ris

mS'-dQ, b6'-nos
u'-m6r, tti'-ber
lit,

u
ii

as in rude^ or as oo in boot

as infull^ or as oo

mfoot

tu'-tiis

Note. It is to be observed that there is a decided difference in sound, except in the case of a, between the long and the short vowels. It is not merely a matter of quantity but also of quality.
6.

In diphthongs (two-vowel sounds) both vowels are heard

in a

single syllable.

Diphthongs
ae as ai in aisle

Latin Examples
tae'-dae

au as ou in out
ei as ei in eight

gau'-dSt
hei

eu as ^'oo
in

(a short e

followed by a short u
seu
foe'-diis

one

syllable)

oe like oi in toil
ui like do' I (a short u followed by a short / in one syllable. Cf. English we)

cui, huic

slur over

Note. Give all the vowels and diphthongs their proper sounds and do not them in unaccented syllables, as is done in English.
7.

Consonants are pronounced as in English, except that

Consonants
c is always like c in cat, never as in cent g is always like in get, never as in gem

Latin Examples
cS'-do, ci'-biis, ce'-nS

g6'-m6, gig'-no

consonant
c,

n before

always like y in yes qu, or g is like ng in sing (comis

iam,

ifi'-ciis

pare the sound of n in anchor) qu, gu, and sometimes su before a vowel have the sound of qw, gw, and sw.

Sn'-cd-ri (ang'-ko-ra)

Here u has the value of consonant v and is not counted a vowel

s is like s in sea, t is

in'-quit, qui, lln'-guS,

sSn'-guIs, sua'-d6-6
r5'-sS, !s

never as in ease

always nation

like / in native,

never as in
ra'-ti-6, na'-ti-6

SYLLABLES
Consonants
Latin Examplks

T is like w in wine^ never as in vine vi'-nfim, vlr z has the value of two consonants (^j or ^j) and is like x in extract, not as in exact 6x'-tra, 6x-ac'-tfia bs is like ps and bt like pt iirbs, 0b-tI'-n&-5 ch, ph, and th are like c,p, t pfir-ch6r, Phoe'-be,th6^'-triim
a. In combinations of consonants give each its distinct sound. Doubled consonants should be pronounced with a slight pause between the two sounds. Thus pronounce // as in rat-trap, not as in rattle; pp as in

hop-pole, not as in upper.

Examples, mlt'-t6,

Ap'pl-tta, bir-lfim.

SYLLABLES
8.

Latin word has as

many

syllables as

it

has vowels and diph-

thongs.
a.

Thus

aes-ta'-tg has three syllables, au-di-gn'-dtts has four.

syllable,

Two

vowels with a consonant between them never make one

as

is

so often the case in English.

Compare English

inside with Latin

in-ai'-^i.

9.

Words

are divided into syllables as follows

1. A single consonant between two vowels goes with the second. Thus a-mi'-bi-Us, m6-m6'-ri-a, iii-t6'-r6-ft, i'-bgst, p6-r6'-git.^ 2. Combinations of two or more consonants
:

a.

A consonant

followed by / or r goes with the /or

r.

Thus

p&'-bU-cfis,

Exception. Prepositional compounds of this nature, as also foUow rule d. Thus ib'-lfi-e, Xb-riim'-p5, UMd, f6r'-rttm.
d.

//

and

rr,

In

all

other conibinations of consonants the

first

consonant goes with

htts'-pds,

the preceding vowel.*

in'-nfia, sfi-b&c'-tiis.

Thus

mig'-niis,

e-g6s'-tas, vic-t6'-ri-a,

3.

The

last syllable

of a

word

is

called the ul'-ti-ma; the

one next
.

to the last, the pe-nult' ; the

^

one before the penult, the an

-te-pe-nulf

In writing and printing

it is

customary to divide the parts of a compound,

as inter-eA, ab-est, sub-Actus, per-figit, contrary to the correct phonetic rule. ' The combination net is divided nc-t, as fOnc-tfls, sJLnc-tfia.

8
10.

QUANTITY
EXERCISE

Divide the words in the following passage into syllables and pronounce

them, placing the accent as indicated

tiam

Vade ad formicam, O piger, et considera vias eiiis et disce sapienquae cum non habeat diicem nee praeceptorem nee principem,
:

parat in aestate cibum sibi et congregat in messe

quod comedat.
:

[Go

to the ant, thou sluggard

which, having no guide, overseer, or ruler, provideth her meat summer and gathereth her food in the harvest.]

consider her ways, and be wise in the

QUANTITY
quantity of a vowel or a syllable is the time it takes to it. Correct pronunciation and accent depend upon the pronounce of quantity. observance proper
11. 12. Quantity of Vowels.

The

Vowels are

either long (-) or short (-).

to

In

this

book the long vowels are marked. Unmarked vowels are

short.
;

be considered
1.

2.

A vowel is short before another vowel or h as p6-e'-ta, trS'-ho. and nd, before final m or A vowel is short before and,
7it
/,

except in words of one

syllable,

before final

or

r.

Thus a'-m5nt,
Thus
in^-fe-ro,

a-man'-dus, a-ma'-bSm, a-ma'-bSt, a'-ni-mSl, a'-m6r.

3.

vowel

is

long before

nf^

ns,

nx, and nd.

re^-gens, san'-xi, sanc'-tus.

4.

Diphthongs are always long, and are not marked.

Syllables are either long or short,

13. Quantity of Syllables.

their quantity
I.

and

must be

carefully distinguished from that of vowels.

A
If

syllable is short,
it

a.

ends

in a short

vowel; as S'-mS,

pi'-gri.

nant.

Note. In final syllables the short vowel may be followed by a final consoThus the word m6-m6'-ri-im contains four short syllables. In the first
last

three a short vowel ends the syllable, in the by a final consonant.

the short vowel

is

followed

ACCENT
2.

A
If

syllable is long,
it

a.

contains a long vowel or a diphthong, as

cfl'-rO,

poe'-nae,

aes-ti'-te.
/'.

If

it

ends

in

a consonant which

is

followed by another consonant,

as cor'-pus, mag'-nus.

Note. The vowel in a long syllable may be either long or short, and should be pronounced accordingly. Thus in ter'-ra, in'-ter, the first syllable is long, but the vowel in each case is short and should be given the short sound. In words like saxum the first syllable is long because x has the value of two
consonants
3.
(cs

or gs).
is

In determining quantity h

not counted a consonant.

to the long syllables as to the short

Note. Give about twice as much time

ones.
It

takes about as long to pronounce a short vowel plus a consonant as it does to pronounce a long vowel or a diphthong, and so these quantities are considered equally long. For example, it takes about as long to say cflr'-ro as
it

does

cu'-r5,

mo'-lis, a-mis'-si

and so each of these and a-mi'-si.

first

syllables

is

long.

Compare

mdr-lis and

ACCENT
14.

Words Words

of two syllables are accented on the

first,

as mCn'-sa,

Cae'-sar.

15.
if

the penult

Thus

on the penult accent the long. antepenult. mo-n6'-mus, re'-gi-tur, a-gri'-co-la, a-man'-4u8.
of
syllables are accented
is

more than two

If the penult is short,

of the syllable

Note. Observe that the position of the accent and not by the length of the vowel

is

determined by the length

(Cf. 13. 2,

in the syllable.

Note.)
little words called enclit'ics^ which have no separate are added to and pronounced with a preceding word. The existence,

16. Certain

The

most common are -que, and ; -vc, or; and -ne, the question sign. syllable before an enclitic takes the accent, regardless of its
quantity.

Thus

populus'que, dea'que, rfigna've, audit 'ne.

^ Enclitic means leaning baek^ and that is, as you see, just what these little words do. They cannot stand alone and so they lean back for support upon the preceding word.

lO

EXERCISE IN PRONUNCIATION

HOW
'

TO READ LATIN
not so
difficult, if

17.

To

read Latin well

is

you begin

right.

Cor-

rect habits of reading should

be formed now.

Notice the quantities

carefully, especially the quantity of the penult, to insure

the accent

on the

right syllable.

(Cf. 15.)

proper sound and every syllable its mind that we should read Latin as we read English, in phrases rather than in separate words. Group together words that are closely connected in thoughts
18.

your getting Give every vowel its proper length. Then bear in

No good

reader halts at the end of each word.

Read the

stanzas of the following

poem by

Longfellow, one at a

time, first the English and then the Latin version. The syllables inclosed in parentheses are to be slurred or omitted to secure smoothness of meter.

EXCELSIOR [HIGHER]
The shades of night were falling fast, As through an Alpine village passed A youth, who bore, 'mid snow and ice,
I bat

1
!

-Cadebant noctis umbrae,

per vicum Alpicum

dum

Gelu nivequ(e) adolescens,

Vexillum

A banner with

the strange device. Excelsior

!

cum sign5 ferens, Excelsior

!

His brow was sad

his eye beneath, ; Flashed like a falchion from its sheath,

like a silver clarion

Frons

tristis,

micat oculus
;

And
The

rung
tongue.

Velut e vagina gladius Sonantque similes tubae

accents of that

unknown
!

Accentus lingu(ae) incognitae.

Excelsior
!

Excelsior

In happy homes he saw the light Of household fires gleam warm and

In domibus videt claras

bright
;

Foc5rum

luces calidas
acris,

Above, the spectral glaciers shone. And from his lips escaped a groan.
Excelsior
"
!

Relucet glades

Et rumpit gemitus
Excelsior
!

labris,

"

the old man said Try not the Pass Dark lowers the tempest overhead,
!

"

Dicit senex,

"

Ne

transeas
;

Supra

nigrescit tempestas

Translation by C.

W. Goodchild

in Praeco Laiinus, October, 1898.

EXERCISE IN PRONUNCIATION
The

II

And

roaring torrent is deep and wide loud that clarion voice replied,
Excelsior
!

Latus et altus est torrgns."

Clara venit vox respondns,
Excelsior
!

At break

The

of day, as heavenward pious monks of Saint Bernard Uttered the oft-repeated prayer,

lam

Kicescebat, et fratrs

SanctI Bernard! vigiles

A
A

voice cried through the starded Excelsior

!

air,

Cum

Orabant preces solitas, vox clamavit per auras.

Excelsior
!

traveler,

by the

faithful

hound.

Semi-sepultus viator
Can(e) a fido reperltur,

Half-buried in the
Still

grasping in That banner with the strange device,

Excelsior
!

snow was found. his hand of ice

Comprendens pugno
Illud vexillum

gelido

cum
!

signo.

Excelsior

There

in the twilight cold

and gray,
lay,

lacet corpus

exanimum
;

Lifeless, but beautiful,

he

And from

the sky, serene and far,

like

Sed luce frigida pulchrum Et caelo procul exiens

!

voice

fell,

a falling star,
!

Excelsior

Cadit vox, ut Stella cadens. Excelsior

PART

II

WORDS AND FORMS

LESSON
19. Subject and Predicate,
I

FIRST PRINCIPLES
i.

Latin, like English, expresses thoughts

is

by means
single fact.

of sentences.

sentence
its

a combination of words that

is

expresses a thought, and in

simplest form

the statement of a

Thus,
Galba is a farmer Galba est agricola

The sailor fights Nauta pugnat

:

In each of these sentences there are two parts

Galba
Galba

is

a farmer

Subject

Predicate-

est agricola
I

The sailor Nauta

fights

pugnat

2. The subject is that person, place, or thing about which something is said, and is therefore a noun or some word which can serve the same purpose.

" Pronouns, as their name implies (/n?, instead of," and noun\ often take the place of nouns, usually to save repeating the same noun, as, Galba is a farmerj he is a sturdy fellow.
a.

3.
sists
a.

The predicate is that which is said about the subject, and conof a verb with or without modifiers.

verb

is

word which

asserts

something (usually an

act)

concerning

a person, place, or thing.

FIRST PRINCIPLES
20.

The

Object.

The

ball hit the boy, the

In the two sentences, Tfie boy hit the ball and same words are used, but the meaning is

different,

act, that about

and depends upon the order of the words. The doer of the which something is said, is, as we have seen above, the subject. That to which something is done is the direct object of

the verb.

The boy

hit the ball

is

therefore analyzed as follows

Subject

Predicate
hit the ball
(verb) (direct object)

The boy
n.

tence above,

verb whose action passes over to the object directly, as in the senis called a transitive verb. A verb which does not admit of a

direct object is called intransitive, as,

/ walk, he

conies.

21.

The Copula. The verb

was,
it

etc.

does not

to be in its different

forms
;

are,

is,

tell

govern an object. It words in the predicate that possess a

is,

us anything about the subject neither does simply connects the subject with the word or
distinct

meaning.

Hence

it is

called the copula, that

the joiner or link.

22.

In the following sentences pronounce the Latin and

objects, predicates,
2.

name

the

nouns, verbs, subjects,

I.

copulas

America est patria mea / merica is fatherland my

.

Agricola fQiam
(

amat

The) farmer {his) daughter loves

et agricola sunt in insula

3.

Filia est liilia

4. is

liilia

{His) daughter
5.

Julia
6.

Julia

and {the)farmer are on {the)island

liilia

aqnam

Julia water
7.

portat carries

Rosam

liilia

est puella pulchra

is {a)

8.

in comis habet {A) rose in {her) hair {she) has Domina filiam pulchram habet

Julia
a.

girl pretty

{^he) lady {a) daughter beautiful has

The

sentences above

show

that

Ladn does not express some words

all,

which are necessary

in English.

First of

Latin has no article

the

or a;

thus agrkoia may mean the farmer, a farmer, or sirnp\y farmer. Then, too, the personal pronouns, /, you, he, she, etc., and the possessive pronouns,

my, your,
is

his, her, etc., are

not expressed

if

the meaning of the sentence

clear without them.

14

FIRST PRINCIPLES

LESSON
FIRST PRINCIPLES
23. Inflection.

II
(Continued)
their 'forms to indicate

Words may change

some
;

is, change farmer, farmer' s ; woman, women. This flection of a noun, adjective, or pronoun

in sense or use, as,

are ; was, were ; who, whose,

is
is

whom
The

called inflection.

in-

called its declension, that

of a verb

its

conjugation.

plural.

Latin, like English, has two numbers, singular and In English we usually form the plural by adding -s or -es to the singular. So Latin changes the singular to the plural by changing the ending of the word. Compare

24.

Number.

Naut-& pugnat Naut-ae pugnant 25.

itt

The sailorfights The sailors fight

Rule.

Nouns

that

end

in -a in the singular

end

i7t

-ae

the plural.

26. Learn the following nouns so that you can give the English for the Latin or the Latin for the English. Write the plural of each.
agri'cola, j^rw^r (agriculture)
^

fuga, flight (fugitive)

iniu'ria,

aqua, water (aquarium) causa, cause, reason

do'mina, lady of the house,
jnistress (dominate)
filia,

wrong, injury

luna, 7noon (lunar)

nauta,

j-//<?r (nautical)

puel'la, girl
silva, _/i?r^j/ (silvan) terra,

fortn'na.,

daughter (filial) fortune

the sentences

land (terrace)

27.

Compare again

Nauta pugna-t Nautae pugna-nt

In the
first

The sailorfights The sailors fight

the second sentence pugna-nt

sentence the verb pugna-t is in the third person singular, in is in the third person plural.

1 The words in parentheses are English words related to the Latin. When the words are practically identical, as causa, cause, no comparison is needed.

FIRST PRINCIPLES
28.
in the

29.

Rule. Agreement of Verb. A finite verb miist always be same person and number as its subject. Rule. /// the conjugation of the Latin verb the third per-
-f ,

son singular active ends in

the third person plural in

-nt.

The endings which show the person and number of the verb
are called personal endings.
30. Learn the following verbs and write the plural of each. The personal pronouns he, she, it^ etc., which are necessary in the inflection of the English verb, are not needed in the Latin, because the personal endings

by a pronoun the sailor fights^ not the sailor he fights.

ama-t
lab5'ra-t

take their place. Of course, translate the personal ending

if

the verb's subject is expressed we do not thus nauta pugnat is translated ;

he
"
^

{she^ if) loves^ is loving^

"

" " "

does love (amity, amiable) labors^ is laboring^ does labor

is

nuntia-t
porta-t

"
"

" " "

announces,

announcing, does announce

carries, is carrying, does carry (porter)

pugna-t

"

"

fights, is fighting, does fight (pugnacious)

31.
I.

EXERCISES
I.

The daughter
4.

loves, the
3.

daughters love.

2.

The

sailor

is

carrying, the sailors carry.

labor.

The farmer does

girls

labor, the farmers

5.

The

girl

is*

announcing, the

do announce.
Puella
4.

The

ladies are carrying, the lady carries.

II.
1.

Nauta pugnat, nautae pugnant.

3.

2.

amat, puellae

amant.

labCrant.

Agricola portat, agricolae portant. 5. Nauta nuntiat, nautae nuntiant.

Filia laborat, filiae

6.

Dominae amant,

domina amat.
*

The u

in nflntid is

long by exception. (Cf.

12. 2.)

DOMINA

FIRST PRINCIPLES

LESSON

III
(Continued)

FIRST PRINCIPLES

32. Declension of Nouns. We learned above (19, 20) the difference between the subject and object, and that in English they may be distinguished by the order of the words. Sometimes, however, the order is such that we are left in doubt. For example, the sentence

TAe lady her daughter loves might mean either that the lady loves her daughter, or that the daughter loves the lady. If the sentence were in Latin, no doubt could arise, because the I
.

subject and the object are distinguished, not by the order of the words,

but by the endings of the words themselves. Compare the following sentences
:

Domina

filiam
,

amat
.

1
I

Filiam domina amat

Amat

domina Domina amat filiam

filiam

j^.

)
1

The lady loves her daughter -^ ^

^,

dominam amat Dominam filia amat Amat dominam filia Filia amat dominam
Filia

The daughter loves the lady

a. Observe that in each case the subject of the sentence ends in -a and the object in -am. The form of the noun shows how it is used in the sentence, and the order of the words has no effect on the essential

meaning.
2.

As

stated above ( 23), this change of ending

different

is

called declen-

sion,

and each

ending produces what

is

called a case.

When

give all its different cases, or changes of endings. In English we have three cases, nominative, possessive, and objective but, in nouns, the nominative and objective have the same form,
decline a noun,

we

we

and only the possessive case shows a change of ending, by adding

or the apostrophe.
declension,

'j

The

interrogative pronoun, however, has the fuller

who

whose ?

whom

FIRST PRINCIPLES

17

33. The following table shows a comparison between English and Latin declension forms, and should be thoroughly memorized
:

Engush Casbs

l8

FIRST PRINCIPLES

LESSON IV
FIRST PRINCIPLES
35.
(Continued)

We

learned from the table ( 33) that the Latin nominative,

genitive, and accusative correspond, in general, to the nominative, possessive, and objective in English, and that they are used in the same

way.

This

will

be made even clearer by the following sentence

Fnia agricolae nautam amat, t/ie farmer'' s daughter (or the daughter of the farmer) loves the sailor

What
case

is

the

subject.''

ject? foi the direct object?

is it ?

the direct object? What case is used for the subWhat word denotes the possessor? In what

Rule. Nominative Subject. The subject of a finite verb is in the Nominative and answers the question Who ? or What ? 37. Rule. Accusative Object. The direct object of a transitive
36.

verb

is in

the Accusative

and answers

the question

Whom ?

or

What?
38.

Rule. Genitive of the Possessor. The word denoting the owner or possesi^or of something is in the Genitive and answers the qitestion Whose ?

DIANA SAGITTAS PORT AT ET FERAS NECAT

FIRST PRINCIPLES
39.
First
I.

EXERCISES
leam the
special vocabulary, p. 283.
2.

I.

Diana

est dea. est

7.

Lt6na est dea.

5.

3.

Diana

et

Latona sunt
6.

deae.

4.

Diana

dea lunae.

Diana

est

filia

Latonae.

Latona
Ferae

Dianam amat.
9.

Diana
portat.

est 10.

dea silvarum.

8.

Diana silvam amat.

necat.
11.

Diana

sagittas

DiSna feras

silvae

terrarum pugnanL
For the order of words imitate the Latin above.
II.
I.

The daughter

of Latona does love the forests.

3.

2.

Latona's

daughter carries arrows.

farmers' daughters do labor. 4. The farmer's daughter loves the waters of the forest. 5. The sailor is
girls' flight.
6.

The

announcing the

The

girls
8.

farmer's daughter labors. 7. wild beasts of the land.

40.

The

announce the sailors' wrongs. Diana's arrows are killing the

CONVERSATION
them
in Latin.

Translate the questions and answer found in the exercises preceding.

1.

The answers may be

?

2.

Quis est Diana ? Cuius filia est Diana Quis Dianam amat?

4.
>

Quis silvam amat

5.
6.

3.

Quis sagittas portat ? Cuius filiae laborant?

LESSON V
FIRST PRINCIPLES
(Continued)

41. The Dative Case. In addition to the relationships between words expressed by the nominative, genitive (possessive), and accusative (objective) cases, there are other relationships, to express which in English we use such words as from, withy by\ to, for, in, at}

but often it Latin, too, makes frequent use of such prepositions expresses these relations without them by means of case forms which
;

Words

like to, for, by, from, in. etc.,

which define the relationship between

words, are called prepositions.

20

FIRST PRINCIPLES
One
is

English does not possess.

of the cases found in the Latin declen-

sion and lacking in English

called the dative.

42.

When

the nominative singular ends in -a, the dative singular

in -is.

ends

in -ae

and the dative plural

that the genitive singular, the dative singular, and the nominative plural all have the same ending, -ae ; but the uses of the three cases are entirely different. The general meaning of the sentence usually

Note. Observe

makes

clear

which case

is

intended.

a. Form the dative singular and plural of the following nouns: fuga, causa, fortuna, terra, aqua, puella, agricola, nauta, domina.

43.

The Dative Relation. The

conveyed
in English

dative case

is

used to express the

relations

by the prepositions/^, towards^ for.

These prepositions are often used in English in expressions of motion, such as She went to towtt, He ran towards the horse, Columbus sailed for America. In such cases the dative is not used in Latin, as motion through space is foreign to the dative relation. But the dative is used to denote
that to or
directed, or that j^r

towards which a benefit, injury, purpose, feeling, or which something serves or exists.
dative relations

quality is

a.

What

do you discover

in the following

teacher gave a prize to John because he replied so promptly to all a good example for the rest of us. It is a pleasure to us to her questions hear him recite. Latin is easy for him, but it is very hard for me. Some

The

are fitted for one thing

and others for another.

44. The Indirect Object.

Examine the sentence

Nauta fugam nuntiat, the sailor announces the flight

Here

accusative case.

the verb, nuntiat, governs the direct object, fugam, in the If, however, we wish to mention the persons to whom
flight, as,

the sailor announces the

The

sailor announces the flight to

the farmers, the verb will have two objects:

1.

Its direct oh]Qct, flight

Its indirect oh]ect,

(fugam)

2.

farmers

According to the preceding section, to the farmers is a relation covered by the dative case, and we are prepared for the following rule
:

FIRST PRINCIPLES
45.

21
object of

Rule.

Datiye Indirect Object.

The indirect

verb
a.

is in the

Dative,

The

indirect object usually stands before the direct object

46.
sailor

We may now complete the translation of the sentence The announces the flight to the farmers, and we have
Nauta
agricolis

fugam nuntiat

47.

EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 283.

Point out the direct

possessor.

and

indirect objects

and

the genitive

of the

I. I. Quis nautis pecuniam dat? 2. Filiae agricolae nautis pecuniam dant. 3. Quis fortunam pugnae nuntiat? 4. Galba agricolis

fortunam pugnae nuntiat. 5. Cui domina fabulam narrat? 6. Filiae agricolae domina fabulam narrat. 7. Quis Dianae coronam dat?
8.

Puella Dianae coronam dat quia

Dianam amat.
10.

9.

Dea

lunae

sagittas portat et feras silvarum necat.

Cuius victoriam Galba

nuntiat

11.

Nautae victoriam Galba

nuntiat.
exercise.

Imitate the
II.
I.

word order of the preceding

To whom do
Julia,

the girls give a wreath?

2.

The

girls give

because Julia loves wreaths. 3. The sailors tell the ladies* a story, because the ladies love stories. 4. The farmer gives his ( 22. <i) daughter water. 5. Galba announces the cause of the

wreath to

battle to the sailor.

the forest.
1

7.

6. The goddess of Whose wreath is Latona

in
it,

the

moon

loves the waters of

Diana's.

carrying?

Observe that

sition to to

mark

especially

English the indirect object often stands without a prepowhen it precedes the direct object

22

FIRST PRINCIPLES

LESSON VI
FIRST PRINCIPLES
48.
(Continued)

The Ablative

Case.

Another
is

in the fuller Latin declension,

case, lacking in English but found the ab^la-tive.

49.

When

the nominative singular ends in -a, the ablative singular

ablative plural in -is.
final -S of

ends
a.

in -a

and the

Observe that the

is

the nominative

is

short, while the final -a

of the ablative

long, as,

Nom.
b.
c.

fnia

AbL

filia

Form

Observe that the ablative plural is like the dative plural. the ablative singular and plural of the following nouns

fuga,

causa, fortuna, terra, aqua, puella, agricola, nauta, domina.

50. The Ablative Relation. The ablative case is used to express the relations conveyed in English by the prepositions ^^v/w, with, by, at, in. It denotes
1.

That from which something

it is

or of which
2.

it
'

hy from. That with which something is associated or by means of which is done translated by with or by. trans3. The place where or the time when something happens

deprived

is

separated, from which

it

starts,

generally translated

lated
a.

by in or

at.

What

ablative relations

do you discover

in the following

come from home with

In our class there are twenty boys and girls. Daily at eight o'clock they their books, and while they are at school they study Latin with great zeal. In a short time they will be able to read with ease

the books written by the Romans.

in this world can

By

patience and perseverance

all

things

be overcome.
While, as stated above (41), many relations by prepositions are in Latin expressed by case

51. Prepositions.

expressed
forms,

in English

still

prepositions are of frequent occurrence, but only with the

accusative or ablative.

FIRST PRINCIPLES
52.

23

Rule. Object of a Preposition. A noun governed by a preposition must be in the Accusative or Ablative case.
53. Prepositions denoting the ablative relations //ww, with^ in, on, are naturally followed by the ablative case. Among these are

&

or ab,

from, away from

of

^<kyfrom, down from 8 ^ or ex, from, out from, out

I.

cum, with in, in, on

land,

down from

Translate into Latin, using prepositions. In the water, on the the forest, with the fortune, out of the forests, from

the victory, out of the waters, with the sailors,

54. Adjectives.
Puella parva

down from

the moon.

Examine the sentence

little

bonam deam amat, the

{little)

girl loves the good goddess

In

this

sentence parva

are descriptive words expressing quality.

tives,^

and bonam {good) are not nouns, but Such words are called adjec-

and they are

said to belong to the

noun which they

describe.

You can tell by its ending to which noun an adjective belongs. The ending of parva shows that it belongs to puella, and the ending of bonam that it belongs to deam. Words that belong together are said to agree, and
its

the belonging-together is called agreement. noun agree in number and case,

Observe that the adjective and

55. Examine the sentences

Puella est parva, the girl is little Puella parva bonam deam amat, the little girl loves the good goddess

In the first sentence the adjective parva is separated from its noun by the verb and stands in the predicate. It is therefore called a predicate adjective. In the second sentence the adjectives parva and
^

a and h are used only before words beginning with a consonant

ab and ex

are used before either vowels or consonants.

Pick out the aJjfctives in the following : "When I was a little boy, I that one cold winter's morning I was accosted by a smiling man with an ax on his shoulder. ' My pretty boy,' said he, ' has your father a
^

remember

'

grindstone?' Will you let

'Yes,
me

sir,'

said

I.

'You
* **

arc a fine

little

fellow,' said he.

grind

my

ax on

it ?

24
bonam

FIRST PRINCIPLES
are closely attached to the nouns puella
called attributive adjectives.
:

and deam

respectively,

and are
a.

Pick out the attributive and the predicate adjectives in the following

Do

you think Latin

is

hard? Hard studies make strong brains.

Lazy

students dislike hard studies.

We

are not lazy.

56.

DIALOGUE
Julia and Galea

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 283.

I.

Quis, Galba, est Diana

G. Diana, lulia, est pulchra dea I. Cuius filia, Galba, est Diana ?

Itinae et silvarum.

G. Latonae
I.

filia, lulia,

est Diana.

Quid Diana portat ? G. Sagittas Diana portat. I. Cur Diana sagittas portat ?
G. Diana sagittas portat, lulia, quod malas feras silvaemagnae necat I. Amatne Latona fiUam }

G. Amat, et
I.

filia

Latonam amat.

Quid filia tua parva portat ? G. Coronas pulchras fiha mea parva
tua coronas pulchras dat G. Dianae coronas dat.
I.
filia
I.

portat.
?

Cui

Quis est cum fiha tua ? Estne sola ? G. Sola non est filia mea parva est cum
;

ancilla

mea.

a. When a person is called or addressed, the case used is called the " to call "). In form the vocative is regularly like voc'ative (Latin vocare, the ?wminative. In English the name of the person addressed usually

stands

The Latin vocative rarely stands first. Point first in the sentence. out five examples of the vocative in this dialogue. b. Observe that questions answered by yes or no in English are answered

in Latin

by repeating the verb. Thus, if you wished to answer in Latin the question Is the sailor fighting f Pugnatne nauta ? you would say Pugnat, he is fighting, or Non pugnat, he is not fighting.

THE FIRST DECLENSION

LESSON
VII

25

THE FIRST OR il-DECLENSION

57. In the preceding lessons we have now gone over all the cases, singular and plural, of nouns whose nominative singular ends in -a.
All Latin

First Declension.

nouns whose nominative singular ends in -a belong to the It is also called the ^-Declension because of the

prominent part which the vowel a plays in the formation of the cases. We have also learned what relations are expressed by each case.

These
Cask

results are

summarized

in the following table

26

GENDER
Also give them
orally.

59. Write the declension of the following nouns, separating the

base from the termination by a hyphen.

pugna, terra, luna, ancilla, coro'na, in'sula, silva

60. Gender. In English, names of living beings are either masculine or feminine, and names of things without life are neuter. This is called natural gender. Yet in English there are some names of things to which we refer as if they were feminine as, " Have you seen my
;

yacht
to

She

is

a beauty."
if

And

there are
;

some names of
'^

living beings

baby here ? No, the nurse has taken it home." Some words, then, have a gender quite apart from sex or real gender, and this is called grammatical gender.
as,

which we refer as

they were neuter

Is the

Latin, like English, has three genders. Names of males are usually masculine and of females feminine, but names of things have grammatical gender and may be either masculine^ feminine^ or neuter. Thus

we have
saxum, a

in Latin the three words, lapis,

rock.
is

stone ; rupes,

cliff;

and

Lapis masculine^ rupes feminine^ and saxum neuter. The gender can usually be determined by the ending of the word, and must always be learned^ for without knowing the gender it is impossible to write correct Latin.

61. Gender of First-Declension Nouns.

sion are feminine unless they denote males.

Nouns of the Thus silva

first
is

declen-

feminine,

but nauta,

sailor^

and

agricola, farmer^ are masculine.

62.
.

EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 284.

I.

I.

Agricola
parat.
3.

cum
Cena
filia

filia

in casa habitat.

2.

Bona

filia

agricolae
filiam

cenam
laudat.

est grata agricolae^ et agricola

bonam

4. agricolae galllnas ad cenam vocat. 5. Galllnae 6. Malae filiae bonas cenas non parant. filiam agricolae amant. FilTa est grata dominae. 8. Domina in insula magna 7. agricolae

Deinde

habitat.
1

9.

Domina bonae

puellae parvae pecuniam dat.

Note

that the relation expressed

(Cf. 43.)

by the dative case covers

that to which a

feeling

is directed.

EXERCISES
II.
I
.

27

Where does
3.

the farmer live

lives
5.

2.

The farmer
?

lives in

the

small cottage.
lives

Who

with the farmer

with the farmer.

farmer.

(His) daughter
6.

is

daughter getting (parat) a good

4.

(His)
the

little

dinner for the

7.

The farmer
is

praises

good dinner.

The

daughter's good dinner

pleasing to the farmer.

What

Latin words are suggested by this picture

63.

CONVERSATION
in Latin.

Answer the questions

1
.

2.

Quis cum agricola in casa habitat Quid bona filia agricolae parat
.?

3.
4. 5.

Quem
Cuius

agricola laudat
filia

Vocatne

agricolae gallinas ad

cenam ?

filia

est grSta

dominae?

6.

Cui domina pecuniam dat ?

28

NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES

LESSON
64.

VIII
(Continued)

FIRST DECLENSION

have for some time now been using adjectives and nouns and you have noticed an agreement between them in case and in number ( 54). They agree also in gender. In the phrase silva magna, we have a feminine adjective in -a agreeing with a femtogether,
inine

We

noun

in -a.
of

65.

Rule. Agreement

Adjectives.

Adjectives agree with

their nouns in gender^ 7iumber,

and

case.

66. Feminine adjectives in -a are declined like feminine nouns in -a, and you should learn to decline them together as follows
:

Noun
domina (base domin-),
f.,

Adjective
lady

bona (base

\iOVi-)^

good

Singular

Nom.

ORDER OF WORDS
Singular

IN LATIN

29

dea bona (bases de- bon-)

Plural
deae bonae

Nom.
Gen.

dea bona
deae bonae deae bonae

dea'nim bona'rum
dea'bus bonis

Dat.
Ace.

deam bonam
dei bona

deas bonas
de&1i>ii8

Abl.
a.

bonis

In the same

way

decline together filia panra.

68. Latin

Word

Order.

The

order of words in English and in Latin

sentences

is

not the same.

In English we arrange words in a fairly fixed order. Thus, in the sentence My daughter is getting dinner for the farmers^ we cannot alter the order of the words without spoiling the sentence. We can,

however, throw emphasis on different words by speaking them with more force. Try the effect of reading the sentence by putting special

on my^ daughter., dinner., farmers. In Latin, where the office of the word in the sentence i3 shown by its ending (ci. 32. i), and not by its position, the order of words is
force

more

free,
is

and position

is

used to secure the same

effect that in

secured by emphasis of voice. To a limited extent we can alter the order of words in English, too, for the same purpose. Compare the sentences
English

Last November

/ sa7if a game offootball at Chicago last November (normal I saw a game offootball at Chicago
Chicago y last November,

order)

At
I.

I saw a game

offootbaU

In a Latin sentence the most emphatic place is the frsty next in imp>ortance is the lasty the weakest point is the middle. Generally the subject is the most important word, and is placed yfrj/y usually the verb is the next in importance, and is placed last. The other words of the sentence
stand between these two in the order of their imp)ortance. normal order of words that is, where no unusual emphasis

Hence the
is

e^^ressed

is

as follows

siOifect

modifiers of the subject

indirect object

direct object adverb verb

Changes from the normal order are frequent, and are due to the desire for throwing emphasis upon some word or phrase. Notice the order of the

30

ORDER OF WORDS

IN LATIN

Latin words when you are translating^ and imitate it when you are turning English into Latin. 2. Possessive pronouns and modifying genitives normally stand after their nouns. When placed before their nouns they are emphatic, as filia
mea, my daughter j mea filia, my daughter; casa Galbae, Galba's cottage ; Galbae casa, Galba^s cottage.
Notice the
vaiiety of

emphasis produced by writing the following

:

sentence in different ways

Filia

mea

agricolis

Mea

filia agricolis

Agricolis filia

cenam parat (normal order) parat cenam (mea and cenam emphatic) mea cenam parat (agricolis emphatic)
its

3.

An

adjective placed before

noun

is

follows.
its

noun

great emphasis by other words.

When

is

desired, the adjective

more emphatic than when it is separated from

Filia

Filia

mea casam parvam non amat (parvam not emphatic) mea parvam casam non amat (parvam more emphatic) Parvam filia mea casam non amat (parvam very emphatic)
first,

4.
5.

The

Interrogative words usually stand copula (as est, sunt) is of so

last,

the

same

as in English.

does not stand

but

may

importance that it frequently be placed wherever it sounds well.

little

69.

EXERCISE

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 284.

Note the order of the words in

are not normal in position
I.

these sentences

and pick

out those that

and hence
viae.

are unusually emphatic.

2.

Longae non sunt tuae

Suntne tubae novae

in

mea

casa?

Non

sunt.

3.

Quis

lata in silva habitat?

Diana, lunae clarae

amant aquas. pulchra dea, lata in silva habitat. 4. Nautae altas et latas mea tubam novam Ancilla ? tua ancilla portat. 6. Ubi portat 5. Quid
sunt Lesbia et lulia?
7.

In tua casa est Lesbia

et lulia est in
lata.

mea.

Estne

Italia lata terra?

Tonga
narrat?

est Italia,

non

8,

Cui Galba

agricola fabulam

novam

Filiabus
Sicilia.

novam

narrat.

9.

Clara est insula

10.

dominae clarae fabul^m Quem laudat Latona?

Latona laudat

filiam.

THE SECOND DECLENSION

First

Review

of

Vocabulary and Grammar, 502-505

LESSON IX
THE SECOND OR 0-DECLENSION
70. Latin nouns are divided into five declensions.

The

genitive singular. and the gender.

declension to which a noun belongs is shown by the ending of the This should always be learned along Math the nominative

71.

sion ends in -us, -er, -ir, or -um.

rhe nominative singidar of nouns of the Second or <9-DeclenThe genitive singular ends in -i.

72. Gender.
masculine.

Nouns

in

-um

are neuter.

The

others are regularly

73. Declension of nouns in -us and -um.

Masculines in -us and

neuters in

-um

are declined as follows

dominus (base domin-), m., master

pilum (base

pil-), n.,

spear

32
a.

THE PREDICATE NOUN

Observe that the masculines and the neuters have the same terminaand the nominative and accusa-

tions excepting in the nominative singular tive plural,

b.

vocative singular of words of the second declension in -us ends as domine, O master; serve, O slave. This is the most important exception to the rule in ^6. a.
in
-e,

The

74. Write

side

by

side the declension of domina, dominus,

and

pilum.
rules,

comparison following which are of great importance because they apply to all five
:

of

the

forms

will

lead

to

the

declensions
a.

The

vocative, with a single exception (see 73is,

<^),

is like

the nomi-

the vocative singular is like the nominative singular, and the vocative plural is like the nominative plural.
native.
b.

That

The The

nominative, accusative, and vocative of neuter nouns are alike,

and
c.

in the plural

end

in -a.

accusative singular of masculines and feminines ends in the accusative plural in -s.
d.
e.

-m and

The

dative
-i

Final

and ablative plural are always alike. and -o are always longj final -a is short, except in the

abla-

tive singular of the first declension.

75. Observe the sentences

Lesbia est bona, Lesbia is good Lesbia est ancilla, Lesbia is a maidservant

We

have learned

( 55) that bona,

is

when

used, as here, in the prediSimilarly a

is

cate to describe the subject,

called a predicate adjective.

noun, as ancilla, used in the predicate to define the subject

a predicate noun.

called

76.

Rule.

Predicate Noun.

predicate noun agrees in case

with the subject of the verb.

PILA

THE SECOND DECLENSION

77.

33

DIALOGUE

Galea and Marcus

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 285.

G. Quis,

Marce, est

Iggatus gerens (bearing)

pllum et tubam

M. Legatus,
est Sextus.

Galba,

G. Ubi Sextus habitat?^

M. In oppido Sextus

cum

filiabus habitat.

G. Amantne oppidani

Sextum
Sextum

M. Amant

oppidani

et laudant,

quod

magna cum
pugnat.

cOnstantia

G. Ubi,
ancilla

Marce,

est

tua?

Cur non

cenam parat? M. Ancilla mea, Galba,

equo legati aquam fnimentum dat.
(i.

et

LEGATUS GERENS PILUM ET TUBAM

Cur non servus Sexti equum domini curat ? M. Sextus et servus ad murum oppidi properant. Oppidani belhim

parant.^
1

habiUt

is

here translated does

live.

Note the
lives
is

three possible translations

of the I^tin present tense

Ae
habitat

living

I he does live

Always choose the translation which makes the best sense. Observe that the verb parft means not only to prepare but also /or^ and governs the accusative case.

to

prepare

34
78.

NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES

CONVERSATION

Translate the questions and answer them in Latin.

I
.

Ubi

filiae

Sexti habitant

4.
5.

2.

Quern oppidani amant

dant
?

et lau-

Cuius equum ancilla curat ? Quis ad murum cum Sexto

properat
?

3.

Quid

ancilla

equo

legati dat

6.

Quid oppidani parant ?

LESSON X
SECOND DECLENSION
.

(Continued)

79.

We

have been freely using feminine

adjectives, like bona, in

agreement with feminine nouns of the first declension and declined like them. Masculine adjectives of this class are declined like dominus, and neuters like pflum. The adjective and noun, masculine and neuter,
are therefore declined as follows
:

Masculine Noun and Adjective

dominus bonus, the good master
Bases domin- bon-

Neuter Noun and Adjective

pilum bonum, the good spear
Bases
pil-

bon-

APPOSITION
Decline together bellum longom, equus parvus, Miyus malus, altua, frumentxim noyum.

35

m&nu

80. Observe the sentences

Lesbia ancilla est bona, Lesbia, the maidservant^ is good Fflia Lesbiae ancillae est bona, the daughter of Lesbia^ the maidsenuint, is good

Seryus Lesbiam ancillam amat, the slave loves Lesbia, the maidservant
In these sentences ancilla, ancillae, and ancillam denote the class of

persons to which Lesbia belongs and explain who she is. Nouns so related that the second is only another name for the first and explains it are said
to

be in apf)osition, and are always in the same case.

81.

Rule.
it

Apposition.

An appositive
EXERCISES

agrees in case with the

noun which
82.

explains.

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 285.

I.

I.

Patria servi boni, vTcus servorum bonSrum, bone popule.

magno, in oppidis magnls. ad murSs latos. 4. Legate male, amid legati mali, cena grata domino bono. 5. Friimentum equorum parvorum, domine bone, ad legates claros. 6. Rhenus est in GerPopulus oppidi
3.

2.

magni, in oppido

Cum

pilis longis,

ad

pila longa,

mania, patria mea. 7. Sextus legatus pilum longum portat. 8. Oppidani boni Sexto ISgatO clar5 pecuniam dant. 9. Mall servi equum

bonum Marci domini necant

labdrant
11.

10. Galba agricola et lulia filia bona Marcus nauta in insula Sidlia habitat. II. I. Wicked slave, who is your friend? Why does he not praise Galba, your master ? 2. My friend is from (ex) a village of Germany,

my
4.

fatherland.

3.

My
*

friend does not love the people of Italy.

?

Who is caring
is

for

the good horse of Galba, the farmer

6.

5.

Mark,
little

where

Lesbia, the maidservant?

She

is

hastening* to the

cottage
1

of Julia, the farmer's daughter.

i,

See footnote

p. 33.

Remember

that cfirat
dative.

is

transitive

and governs a

direct object

Not the

(Cf. % 43.)

36

ADJECTIVES

LESSON XI
ADJECTIVES OF THE FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS
83. Adjectives of the first and second declensions are declined in the three genders as follows
:

EXERCISES
85.

37

nauta bonus (bases naut- bon-), m., the good sailor

Singular

Plural
nautae

Nom.
Gen.

nauta
nautae
nautae

bonus
boni

boni

nautarum
nautis

bonSrum
bonis

Dat.
Ace.

bon6

nautam
nauta

bonum
bono bone

nautas
nautis

bonds
bonis

A hi.
/

\u

nauta

nautae

boni

86.

EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 285.

I.

I.

Est*

in vico

nauta bonus.

2.

Sextus est amicus nautae boni.

Sextus nautae bono galeam dat. 4. Populus Romanus nautam bonum laudat. 5. Sextus cum nauta bono praedam portat. 6. Ubi, nauta bone, sunt arma et tela legati RomanI? 7. Nautae boni ad bel3.

lum properant.
L^ratae

8.

Fama nautarum bonorum

10.

est clara.

9.

Pugnae sunt

OppidanI nautas bonos curant. 11. Cur, nautae boni, mali agricolae ad Rhenum properant? 12. Mali agricolae cum bonis nautis pugnant.
nautis bonis.
II.
I.

booty.

2.

The wicked farmer is hastening to the village with (his) The reputation of the wicked farmer is not good. 3. Why

does Galba's daughter give arms and weapons to the wicked farmer ? 4. Lesbia invites the good sailor to dinner. 5. Why is Lesbia with
the

good

sailor
7.

helmet?
8.

The good
to the

hastening from the cottage? 6. Sextus, where is my sailors are hastening to the toilsome batde.
9.

The

horses of the wicked farmers are small.

sailors.

The Roman people

good
sailors.
?

give
1

1.

money good Whose friends are fighting

1

10. Friends care for the

with the wicked farmers

is.

Est, beginning a declarative sentence, there

GALEAE

38

NOUNS IN -lUS AND -lUM

LESSON
NOUNS IN
87.

XII

-lUS

AND -lUM
-i in
;

Nouns
from

of the second declension in -ius and -ium end in

-ii,

the genitive singular, not in

as, fill

and the accent

rests

on the penult

filius (son), praesi'di

from praesi'dium

(^garrison).
-i in

88. Proper

names

of persons in -ius, and filius, end in

-,

the
as,

vocative singular, not in

Vergi'li,
a.

and the accent

rests

on the penult;

Vergil ;

fili,

O son.
words the vocative and the genitive are
n.,

Observe that

in these

alike.

89. praesidium (base praesidi-),

garrison

filius (base

fili-),

m., son

NOUNS

IN

-ER AND -IR

39

Germania
II.

Germania, patria GermanSrum, est clSra

fluvii multi.

sunt

silvis latis

terra. In Germania Rhenus magnus et latus fluvius Germaniae est In Germaniae sunt ferae multae. Multi Germani in oppidis

magnis
proelia

et in vicis parvis habitant et multi sunt agricolae boni.

Bella
et 5 est

Germanorum
amat

sunt
et

magna saepe cum

et

clara.

Populus Germaniae helium

pugnat.
Fluvius

finitimis

Rhenus

finitimus oppidis^ multis et Claris.

LESSON

XIII
(Continued)
-ir.

SECOND DECLENSION
91. Declension of Nouns in -er and

masculine nouns of the second declension ended in -os.

In early Latin all the This -os later

entirely in
vir,

became -us

in

words

like servus,

and was dropped

words

with bases ending in -r, like puer, doy ; ager, These words are therefore declined as follows
:

^Id; and
man

man.

92.

puer, m., boy

ager,

vc\.,

field

vir, m.,

Base puer-

Base gr-

Base

vir-

Singular

TERMINATIONS
Vir

Nom.
Gen. Dat.
Ace.
Abl.

puer
pueri

ager
agri

puerO

agrt

puenun
puer5

ag^m
agr5

Plural

Nom.
Gen.

pueri

agri

puerdrum
pueiis
puerOfl

agrdrum
agris
agrfts

Dat.
Ace.

Abl.

pueris

agris

40

ADJECTIVES IN -ER

a. The vocative case of these words is like the nominative, following the general rule ( 74. a). b. The declension differs from that of servus only in the nominative and vocative singular.
c. Note that in puer the e remains all the way through, while in ager it is present only in the nominative. In puer the e belongs to the base, but in ager (base agr-) it does not, and was inserted in the nominative to make it

easier to pronounce. Most words in -er are declined shows whether you are to follow puer or ager.

like ager.

The genitive

clined like

93. Masculine adjectives in -er of the second declension are defew of them are declined like puer, but nouns in -er.

most of them

like ager.

The feminine and

neuter nominatives show

which form to follow, thus,

Masc.

ADJECTIVES IN -ER
96.

41

DIALOGUE

Marcus and Cornelius

C. Ubi
est, MSlrce, filius

tuus

Estne

M. Non
copiis

est, Cornell, in Italia,

Ad

in pulchra terra Italia ? fluvium Rhenum properat

cum

Romanis quia

est*

fama
Liber

novi

belli

cum Germanls.

Germaniae populus Romanos non amat.

C. Estne
filius

tuus c5piarum
?

Romanarum
apud
C.

legatus

M. Legatus non
legionarios.
*

est,

sed est

Quae arma portat ? M. Scutum magnum et ioncam duram et galeam pulchram

portat.

C.

Quae tela portat ? M. Gladium et pilum longum

portat C. Amatne
tuuni
?

legatus

filium

M. Amat,
praemia

et saepe et

filio

meo
LEGIONARIUS

pulchra
dat.

praedam

multam

C. Ubi est terra

Germanorum ? M. Terra Germanorum, Cornell,

est finitima

RhenQ,

fluviS

magno

et alto.
^ * ct, before its subject, there is ; so sunt, tAere are. Quae, what kind of, * What are the three an interrogative adjective pronoun. possible translations of the present tense ?

42

POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS

LESSON XIV
THE POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS
97. Observe the sentences

This

is ?}iy

shield
is

This shield
In the
first

mine
;

a possessive adjective in the second mine takes the place of a noun, this shield is mine being equivalent to this shield is my shield. Similarly, in Latin the possessives are sometimes adjectives and sometimes pronouns.
is

sentence

my

is

a possessive pronoun, for

it

98.

The

possessives my, mine, your, yours, etc. are declined like

first

adjectives of the

and second declensions.

Singular

jst Pers. meus, mea, meum 2d Pers. tuus, tua, tuum

my, mine
your, yours his {own), her {own),
its

jd Pers.

suus, sua,

suum
Plural

{own)

1st Pe?'s. noster, nostra, nostrum

our, ours

2d Pers.

vester, vestra,

vestrum

your, yours
their {own), theirs

jd Pers.
O my
a.

suus, sua,

suum

Note. Meus has the

son.

irregular vocative singular masculine mi, as

mi

fill,

The

number, and
r

possessives agree with the name of the thing possessed in gender, case. Compare the English and Latin in
is
'

Sextus

Juha

7-

zs

calling his boy . , , calling her boy

Sextus
,-,.

"1

lulia

^ J

suum puerum
is

vocat

Observe that suum agrees with puenim, and

of Sextus or Julia.
b. When your, yours, refers than one, vester as,
;

unaffected by the gender

to

one person, use tuus

when

to

more

Lesbia,
Girls,

your wreaths are pretty your wreaths are pretty

Coronae tuae, Lesbia, sunt pulchrae

Coronae vestrae, puellae, sunt pulchrae

EXERCISES

43

c. Sana is a reflexive possessive, that is, it usually stands in the predicate and regularly refers back to the subject. Thus, Vir 8u6s servOs vocat means The man calls his {own) slaves. Here his (suds) refers to mapi (vir), and could not refer to any one else.

d.

Possessives are used

much
is

less frequently

omitted whenever the meaning

clear without them.

than in English, being (Cf. 22. a.) This

is

is especially true of suus, -a, -um, which, emphatic, like our his oivn^ her own^ etc.

when

inserted,

more or

less

99.

EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 286.

I
I

frumcnti in agris nostris.

laudant.

Marcus amico Sexto consilium suum nuntiat. 2. Est cOpia 3. Amici mei bonam cenam ancillae vestrae Tua mi l5rica, fill, est dura. 4. 5. Scuta nostra et tela, mi

amice, in castris
Sunt.

RomSnis

sunt.

6.

Suntne

viri

patriae tuae

liberi.''

7. Ubi, Comeli, est tua galea pulchra? 8. Mea galea, Sexte, est in casa mea. 9. Pilum longum est tuum, sed gladius est meus. ID. lulia galllnas suas pulchras amat et galllnae dominam suam amant.

II, 13.

Nostra castra sunt vestra.

12. Est copia praedae in castris vestris.

Amici
I.

tui miseris et aegris

cibum

et

pecuniam saepe dant.

teacher praises Mark's industry. 2. My son Sextus is his carrying booty to the Roman camp.^ 3. Your good girls are giving aid to the sick and wretched.* 4. There are frequent battles in our
II.

Our

villages.

5.

My

son,

where

is

the lieutenant's food?

6.

The camp

is

mine, but the weapons are yours.

^

Not the
nouns.

dative.
*

Why

like

Where should

Here the adjectives sick and xoretched arc used Cf. I. 2 above. sunt stand
.'

ACRICOLA A RAT

44

THE ABLATIVE DENOTING WITH

LESSON XV
THE ABLATIVE DENOTING WITH
the various relations denoted by the ablative case ( 50) none more important than that expressed in English by the preposition with. This little word is not so simple as it looks. It does

100.

Of

there

is

not always convey the same meaning, nor is it always to be translated by cum. This will become clear from the following sentences
:

a.
b.
c.

Mark
Diana

is

feeble

kills

with {for or because of) want of food the beasts with (or by) her arrows

Julia is

d.

The men
<2,

with Sextus fight with great steadiness

with want {offqpd) gives the cause of Mark's feebleexpressed in Latin by the ablative without a preposition, and the construction is called the ablative of cause
a.

In sentence

ness.

This idea

is

Marcus est infirmus inopia

b.

cibi

In sentence
the beasts.

kills

^, with (or by) her arrows tells by means of what Diana This idea is expressed in Latin by the ablative without a
is

preposition,

and the construction

called the ablative of

means

Diana sagittis suis feras necat

c.

In sentence c

we

are told that Julia

is

not alone, but in company with

:

This idea is expressed in Latin by the ablative with the preposition cum, and the construction is called the ablative of accompaniment
Sextus.
liilia

est

cum Sexto

manner.
is

d we are told how the men fight. The idea is one of expressed in Latin by the ablative with cum, unless there a modifying adjective present, in which case cum may be omitted. This
</.

In sentence

This

is

construction

is

called the ablative of

manner

Viri

(cum) constantia magna pugnant

able to

101.

You

are
:

now

form four important rules for the ablative

denoting with

THE ABLATIVE DENOTING WITH

102.
tive

45

RuLK.
?

Ablative of Cause.

without a preposition.

Cause is denoted by the ablaThis answers the question Because

of 7vhat
103.

Rule.

Ablative of Means.

Means

is

denoted by the abla-

tive without

a preposition.

This answers the question

By means

of what? With what?

N.B.
means.
Ciiin

must never be used with the

ablative expressing cause or

104.

Rule.

Ablative

of

Accompaniment.

Accompaniment

is

denoted by the ablative with cum. With whom ?

105.
to

This answers the question

Rule.

Ablative of Manner.
action.

The ablative with cum

is
^

used

denote the

manner of an

Cum may

adjective is used with the ablative. Hoiv ? In what manner ?

106.

be omit ted if an This answers the question

uses of the ablative do you discover and what question does each answer passage,
"i

What

in the following

The soldiers marched to the fort with great speed and broke down the gate with blows of their muskets. The inhabitants, terrified by the din, attempted to cross the river with their wives and children, but the stream
was swollen with {or by) the rain. Because of this many were swept away by the waters and only a few, almost overcome with fatigue, with great
difficulty

succeeded in gaining the farther shore.

107.

EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 286.

I.

The Romans prepare for War. Roman!, clams

Italiae populus,

helium parant.

Ex

agris suis, vicis, oppidisque

magno

studio viri valid!

ad arma properant. lam legati cum legionariis ex Italia ad Rhenum, fluvium Germaniae altum et latum, properant, et servi equis et earns

cibum frumentumque ad castra Romana portant. Inopia bonorum telorum infirm! sunt GermSni, sed Roman! arm3ti galeis, loricis,
scQtis, gladiis, pllisque

sunt

valid!.

46
II.
I.

THE NINE IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES

The
2.

diligence.

sturdy farmers of Italy labor in the fields with great Sextus, the lieutenant, and (his) son Mark are fighting
3.
is

with the Germans.

4.

The Roman

legionaries are

armed with long

Lesbia, your maid, Sextus ? Lesbia is with my spears. friends in Galba's cottage. 5. Many are sick because of bad water

Where

and

for lack of food.

6.

The Germans, with

and wagons.

(their)

sons and daughters,

are hastening with horses

LESSON XVI
THE NINE IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES
108. There are nine irregular adjectives of the
first

and second

declensions which have a peculiar termination in the genitive and

dative singular of
all

genders
Masc.

Fem.
-ius
-i

Neut.
-ius
-i

Gen.

-ius
-i

Dat.

Otherwise they are declined and the meaning of each

:

like

bonus,

-a,

-um.

Learn the

list

alius, alia, aliud, other^

another

{pi

nuUus,

-a,

several)
alter, altera, alterum, the one^

solus, -a,

-um, none., no -um, alone -um,

all., whole, entire utrum, which?

the

lotus, -a,

other (of two)

iinus, -a,

uter, utra,
(in

-um, one^ alone j

only

the

{pi two)

plural)

neuter, neutra, neutrum, neither

{pi two)

uUus,

-a,

-um, any

109

THE NINE IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES

a.

47
The genitive

Note the
is rare.

alius

Instead of

peculiar neuter singular ending in -d of alins. it use alterius, the genitive of alter.

d. These peculiar case endings are found also in the declension of pronouns (see 114). For this reason these adjectives arc sometimes called

the pronominal adjectives.

110. Learn the following idioms

alter, -era,

-erum
.
.

alter, -era,

-erum,

M^
.
. .

t?^

the other {pi tvio)

alius, -a, -ud

alii, -ae,
-a.
.

alius, -a, -ud,

alii, -ae, -a,

one
.

another {pi any number)

some

others

EXAMPLES
Alterum oppidum est magnum, alterum parviun, the one town is small (of two towns). 2. Aliud oppidum est validum, aliud infirmum, one town is strong, another weak (of towns in general).
1.

large, the other

3.

Alii gladids, alii scuta portant,

some carry swords, others

shields.

111.
I.

EXERCISES
In utra casa est lulia?
lulia est in

I.

neutra casa.

2.

Null!

malo puero praemium dat magister.

agricola.
4. Alii viri

3. Alter puer est nauta, alter

5.

aquam,
laborat.

alii

terram amant.

Galba Gnus (or

in
8.

solus)
7.

cum
parat.

studio

6.

Estne uUus carrus

alterius.

Lesbia est ancilla alterius dominl, Tullia

9. Cena nullius cenam dat.

agro meo? Lesbia sola

10.

cenam

alterius ancillae est bona.

Lesbia

null! alii viro

Note. The pronominal adjectives, as you observe, regularly stand before and not after their nouns.
II.
I.

The men
4.

of

all

Germany

are preparing for war.

3.

2.

Some
fort.

towns are great and others are small.

another horses.
5.

One boy

likes chickens,
is

Already the booty of one town

in

our

Our whole village is suffering for (i.e. weak 6. The people are already hastening to the the Romans (there) is no lack of grain.

because of) lack of food. other town. 7. Among

43

THE DEMONSTRATIVE

IS,

A, ID

LESSON XVII
THE DEMONSTRATIVE
112.
/S,

EA, ID

A demonstrative
hear these ?

is

a word that points out an object definitely,

as this^ that, these, those.

Do you

Sometimes these words are pronouns, as, and sometimes adjectives, as. Do you hear these

men? In

the former case they are called demonstrative pronouns,

in the latter demonstrative adjectives.

113. Demonstratives are similarly used in Latin both

2^^

pronouns

and as

adjectives.

The one used most

masculine
r
;

is

is,

ea, feminine

id,

neuter
these

Singular

this

Plural

\that
114. Is
is

those

declined as follows.

Compare
e-

its

declension with that

of alius, 109.

Bask

50
his
8.

EXERCISES

arms (his own). 7. The Gaul praises his arms (not his own). This farmer often plows their fields. 9. Those wretched slaves long for their master {thdr own). 10. Those wretched slaves long
for their master {not their own).
land.
12.
1 1
.

Free

men

love their

own

father-

They

love

its

villages and towns.

118.

DIALOGUE 1

Cornelius and Marcus

M. Quis est vir, Cornell, cum puero parvo ? Estne R5manus et liber ? C. Romanus non est, Marce. Is vir est servus et eius domicilium
est in silvis Galliae.

M. Estne puer
C. Neutrius

filius

eius servl

an

alterius

filius est

puer.

Is est filius legatl Sexti.

M. Quo puer cum eo servo properat ? C. Is cum servo properat ad latos Sexti agros.^ Totum frumentum ^ est iam maturum et magnus servorum numerus in Italiae agris laborat. arant ? M. Agricolaene sunt Gall! et patriae suae agros
C.

Non
eos

agricolae sunt.
viri

Bellum.

amant

Galll,

non

agri culturam.

Apud

pugnant

et

feminae auxilio liberorum agros arant

gratas Gallorum fabulas saepe

parantque cibum.

M. Magister noster pueris puellisque

narrat et laudat eos saepe.

C. Mala est fortuna eorum et saepe miseri servi multis

cum

lacri-

mls patriam suam desiderant.

1 There are a number of departures from the normal order in this dialogue. 2 When a noun is modified Find them, and give the reason. by both a genitive and an adjective, a favorite order of words is adjective, genitive, noun 8 A modifying genitive often stands between a preposition and its object

Second Review, Lessons IX-XVII, 506-509

CONJUGATION

LESSON XVIII
CONJUGATION

THE PRESENT, IMPERFECT, AND FUTURE TENSES OF SUM

119. The inflection of a verb is called its conjugation (cf. 23). In English the verb has but few changes in form, the different meanings being expressed by the use of personal pronouns and auxiliaries, as,

/ am

carried^

we have

carried^ they shall

have

carried,

etc

In Latin,

on the other hand, instead of using personal pronouns and auxiliary verbs, the form changes with the meaning. In this way the Romans
expressed differences in
120. The Tenses.
ent times are called
present, past,
1
.

tense,

mood,

voice, person,

and number.
differ-

The
its
:

different

forms of a verb referring to

tenses.

The

chief distinctions of time arc

and future

The

present, that is, what is happening now, or what usually happens, is expressed by
past, that
to
r ,

1 I
J
'\

the Puksknt Tbnsk

2.

The
or

used

^ ff *, had happened,

is, what was happening, happen, happened, has happened,

.

\
I

"^"^ Imperfect, Perfect,

AND Pluperfect Tenses xk future and Future

Perfect Tenses
to indicate the

is

expressed by
is

3.

The

future, that
is

is,

what

going

to

hap-

pen,

expressed by

/
inflection of

121. The Moods.

Verbs have

manner
ai-e

in

which they express

action.

mood The moods of

the Latin verb

the indicative, subjunctive, imperative, and infinitive.

a.

verb

is in

the indicative

mood when

it

makes a statement or asks

a question about something assumed as a fact. thus far are in the present indicative.

All the verbs

we have used

There are three persons, as in English. The the person speaking (/ sing) ; the second person the person spoken to (^you sing) ; the third person the person spoken of
first

122. The Persons.

person

is

52

CONJUGATION

{he sings). Instead of using personal pronouns for the different persons in the two numbers, singular and plural, the Latin verb uses the pergonal endings (cf. 22 ^ 29). We have already learned that -t is
;

the ending of the third person singular in the active voice and -nt of the third person plural. The complete list of personal endings of the
active voice
is

as follows

Singular
1st Pers.

Plural

J
thou or you
he, she, it

-m
-s
-t

or -o

we
you
they

-mus
-tis

2d Pers.

jd Pers.
123.

-nt

Most verbs form

their

and are

called regular verbs.

moods and tenses after a regular plan Verbs that depart from this plan are
Latin as in English. indicative are

called irregular.

The verb

to be is irregular in

The

present,

imperfect,

and future tenses of the

inflected as follows:

Present Indicative singular

jst Pers.

plural
su-mus,
es-tis,

2d Pers.

/ am ^ are e-s, you

su-m,
es-t, he, she,

we
^

are

you

are

jd Pers.

or // is

su-nt, they are

Imperfect Indicative
1st Pers.
er-a-m,
er-a-s,

/ was
or it

er-a'-mus,
er-a'-tis,

we were
were

2d Pers.

you were

you were

jd Pers.

er-a-t, he, she,

was

er-a-nt, they

Future Indicative
1st Pers.
er-o,

/ shall

be be

er'-i-mus,
er'-i-tis,

we

shall be
lie

2d Pers.

er-i-s,
er-i-t,

you will

you will

jd Pers.
a.

he will be

er-u-nt, they

will be

Be

careful about vowel quantity

and accent

in these forms,

and con-

sult

12.2; 14; 15.

plural.

Observe that in English you are, you were, etc. may be either singular or In Latin the singular and plural forms are never the same.

0) en

S &

EXERCISES
124.

53

DIALOGUE

The Boys Skxtus and Marcus

1

irst

learn the special vocabulary, p. 287.

es,

S.

Ubi

Marce ? Ubi

est Quintus

Ubi

estis,

amici

M.

Cum

Quinto, Sexte, in silva sum.

Non

s6li

sumus; sunt

in

silva multi alii pueri.

S. Nunc laetus es, sed nOper non laetus eras. Cur miser eras ? M. Miser eram quia amicI mei erant in alio vico et eram solus. Nunc sum apud socios meos. Nunc laeti sumus et erimus. S.

Eratisne in ludo hodie

M. Hodie non eramus

S.

in ludo,
}

quod magister

erat aeger.

Eritisne

mox

in

ludo

M. Amici mei ibi erunt, sed ego (/) non ero. 5. Cur non ibi eris ? Magister, saepe iratus, inopiam tuam
diligentiaeque

studi

non

laudat.
et

M. Nuper aeger eram

125.
I
.

nunc infirmus sum.

EXERCISE
are,

You

you were, you

3.

will be, (j/^.

and plur^.
4.

2. I

am,

was,

I shall

be.
5.

He

is,

he was, he

will be.

We

are,

we

were,

we

shall be.

They

are, they

were, they

will be.

were you not in school to-day? I was sick. 7. Lately he was a sailor, now he is a farmer, soon he will be a teacher. 8. To-day I am happy, but lately I was wretched. 9. The teachers were happy
6.

Why

because of the boys' industry.

PUBRI KOMANI IN LUDO

54

PRESENT ACTIVE INDICATIVE

LESSON XIX
THE FOUR REGULAR CONJUGATIONS PRESENT ACTIVE INDICATIVE OF AMO AND MONEO

126. There are four conjugations of the regular verbs. These conjugations are distinguished from each other by the final vowel of the
present conjugation-stem.^ This vowel is called the distinguishing vowel, and is best seen in the present infinitive.

Below

is

given the present infinitive of a verb of each conjugation,

the present stem, and the distinguishing vowel.

Conjugation

PRESENT ACTIVE INDICATIVE

.

55

( The present tense is inflected by adding the personal endings to the present stem, and its first person uses -5 and not -m. The form m6 is for ama-d, the two vowels a-6 contracting to 6. In mone5 there is no contraction.

Nearly all regular verbs ending in -ed belong to the second conjugation. 2. Note that the long final vowel of the stem is shortened before another vowel (mone-C = mo'nW), and before final -t (amSt, monfit) and -nt
(^amint, monSnt).

Compare
*
:

2. 2.

129.

Like

amO and moneO

inflect the

present active indicative of the

following verbs

Indicative Present

Infinitive Present
ara're, to

1 plow cu'r6, / care for dae, / destroy desi'derO, / longfor

a'r6,

plow
care for

ciira're, to

dele're, to destroy

desidera're, to

longfor

1 give ha 1)6(5, 1 have

d6,'-

da 're,

to

give

habe're, to

have
dwell

ha 'bits, / live^ I dwell iu'beS, / order

habita're, to live, to lube 're, to order

labOra're, to labor lauda're, to praise matura're, to hasten

/ labor I praise matii'rS, I hasten

labS'rO,

Ian 'do,

"mo'ved,
nar'ro,
ne'c6,

/ fnove / tell

move're, to

move

narra're, to tell

/ kill

neca're, to kill
niintia're, to

niin'tiS,

/ announce

announce

pa'ro,
por'to,

I prepare

para 're, to prepare

porta 're, to carry
propera're, to hasten

/ carry / hasten pug'nS, Ifight vi'deO, I see

pro'per6,
vo'c5,

pugna're, to fight
vide're, to see voca're, to call

call

130. The Translation of the Present.

In English there are three

^

ways of expressing present

I am
all

livings or

I do

live.

say, for example, I live In Latin the one expression habitO covers
action.

We may

three of these expressions.

' The only new verbs in this list are the five of the second conjugation * Observe that in which are starred. Learn their meanings. d6, dire, the a is short, and that the present stem is di- and not dl-. The only forms of d5 that have long are dia (pres. indie), di (pres. imv.), and dins (pres. part).

56
131.

IMPERFECT ACTIVE INDICATIVE

EXERCISES
voice^

Give the
I.
I
.

mood,

tense,

person, and ttumber of each form.

2
.

Vocamus,
6.

properatis, iubent.
4.

Movetis, laudas, vides.

5.

3.

De-

letis,

habetis, dant.

Maturas, deslderat, videmus.

7.

lubet, mo-

vent, necat.

Narramus, moves, vident.

8. Delet, habetis,

Laboratis, properant,

portas, parant.

iubemus, das.
in trans-

lating a Latin verb form.

II.

N.B. Observe that the personal ending is of prime importance Give that your first attention.

I. plow, we are plowing, we do plow. 2. They care for, are caring for, they do care for. 3. You give, you are having, they do have destroy, I do long for, they are living. you (sing.y 4.

We

We
7.

5.
is

He

calls,

they see,

we

are telling.

6.

We

do

fight,
kill,

we

order, he

moving, he prepares.

They

are laboring,

we

you announce.

LESSON XX
IMPERFECT ACTIVE INDICATIVE OF AMO AND MONEO
132. Tense Signs.

differences in tense, like was, shall, will, etc.,

Instead of using auxiliary verbs to express Latin adds to the

verb stem certain elements that have the force of auxiliary verbs.

These are

called tense signs.

133. Formation and Inflection of the Imperfect.

of the imperfect
is

The

tense sign

-ba-,

which

is

added

to the present stem.

:

The

imperfect consists, therefore, of three parts

Present Stem

Tense Sign
ba-

personal ending

amaloving

m
I

was
:

The

inflection is as follows
I

Conjugation
1.

Conjugation SINGULAR

II

personal ENDINGS

ama1t)am,

I was

loving

2.

ama'bas,

3.

you were loving ama'bat, he was loving

mone'bam, I was advising mone'bas, you were advising

mone'bat, he

-m
-s
-t

was advising

IMPERFECT ACTIVE INDICATIVE

I'LURAL
1.

57
PERSONAL ENDINGS

amaba'mus, we were loving

amaba'tis, jtf were loving

2.

3.

ama'bant, they were loving

a.

moneba^mns, we were advising -mus monebi'tis, 7^?// were advising -tis mone'bant, they were advising -nt
is

before

Note that the i of the tense sign -bam and t when final. (Cf. 1 2. 2.)

shortened before -nt, and

In a similar

manner

inflect the

verbs given in 129.

134. Meaning of the Imperfect.

The

Latin imperfect describes

time, like the English past-

an act as going on ox progressing in past

progressive tense (as, I was walking). It is the regular tense used to describe a past situation or condition of affairs.

135.
I. I.

EXERCISES
Videbamus, dgsiderabat, maturabas.
3.
2.

Dabant, vocabatis,
lubSbant, properS-

delebamus.
batis,

Pugnant, laudabas, movebatis.

4.

6. Videbant, portabamus. 5. movebas, nuntiabamus. 7. Necabat, movebam, habebat, parabatis. II. I. You were having {sing, and plur.), we were killing, they

Dabas, narrabant, laborabatis.

were laboring. 2. He was moving, we were ordering, we were fighting. 3. We were telling, they were seeing, he was calling. 4. They were living, I was longing for, we were destroying. 5. You were
giving,
6.

you were moving, you were announcing, {sing, and They were caring for, he was plowing, we were praising.
Nl'OBE AND HER CHILDREN

plur.).

136.

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 287.

Nioba, regina Thebanorum, erat pulchra fgmina sed superba. Erat superba n6n sOlum fOrma* suS maritique potentia* sed edam magnO liberOrum numerS.* Nam habebat* septem filiOs et septem

Sed ea superbia erat reginae causa magnae causa durae poenae.

filias.

tristitiae et llberis

Note. The words Niobi, ThSbinfirum, and

vocabulary.
*

mariti will be found in the general Translate the selection without looking up any other words.
*

Ablative of cause.

Translate had;

it

denotes a past situation.

(See

f 134.)

Dative,

cf.

% 43.

58

FUTURE ACTIVE INDICATIVE

LESSON XXI
FUTURE ACTIVE INDICATIVE OF AMO AND MONEO
tense sign of the Future Indicative in the first and second conjugations is -bi-. This is joined to the present stem of the verb and followed by the personal ending, as follows

137.

The

Present Stem amaloz'e

Tense Sign
bi-

personal ending
s

will
Indicative
is

you
inflected as follows
.

138.

The Future Active

I

Conjugation
1
.

Conjugation
SINGULAR
mone'bo,
mone'bis,

II

ama'bo,
ama'bis,

/ shall love
you will love
PLURAL

/ shall advise
you will advise

2. 3.

ama'bit, he will love

mone'bit, he will advise

1.

2xak%vcaxi&y

we

shall love

vcionQ'\)\m.u&,

2.

SLmafbitis, you

will love

mone'hitiSy

we shall advise you will advise

3.

ama'bunt, Ihey will love

mone'bunt, Ihey will advise

first

personal endings are as in the present. The ending -bo in the person singular is contracted from -bi-o. The -bi- appears as -bu- in the third person plural. Note that the inflection is like that of ero, the future of sum. Pay especial attention to the accent.
a.

The

In a similar manner

inflect the

verbs given in

129.

139.
I.

EXERCISES
2. Delebitis,

3.

arabo. I. Movebitis, laudabis, Maturabis, deslderabit, videbimus.

vocabitis,

dabunt.

4. 6.

Habebit, movebunt, necabit.

5.
7.

Narrabimus, monebis, videbunt.

Laborabitis, curabunt, dabis.

8.

Habitabimus, properabitis, iubebunt, parabit.

II.
I.

Nuntiabo, porta2. I

bimus, iubebo.

We
will

shall

announce,

we

shall see, I shall hasten.

3.

shall
will

carry,

he

plow, they will care for.

You

will

announce, you

THE DATIVE WITH ADJECTIVES

move, you
destroy,
{J>lur.).
I

59
we
7.

will give, (sing,

and plur.).
5.

4.

We
they

shall fight,
will see,

shall

shall

long

for.

He

will call,

you

will tell

6.

will labor,

They will dwell, we shall order, he will praise. we shall kill, you will have {sing, and piur.), he will
Ni'oBE AND HER CHILDREN (Concluded)

They

destroy.

140.

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 288.

Apoll5 et Dina erant

parabant.*

liberi

LatOnae.

lis

ThebanI sacra

crfibra

Oppidan! amabant LatSnam et liberSs eius. Id superbae " " erat molestum. Latonae et liberis sacra Cur," inquit, reginae liberos Duos habet Latona; quattuordecim habeo ego. paratis?

Ubi sunt mea sacra ?

"

Latona

ils

verbis

Irata liberos suos vocat. 5

Ad

earn volant Apollo Dianaque et sagittis' suis miseros liberos

reginae superbae delent.

Niobe,

nuper

laeta,

nunc misera, sedet

apud

liberos interfectOs et

cum

perpetuis lacrimis* eos desiderat.

Note. Consult the general vocabulary for Apolld, inquit, duos, and quattnordedm. Try to remember the meaning of all the other words.

LESSON XXII
REVIEW OF VERBS
14L Review
142.

THE DATIVE WITH ADJECTIVES

sum and
the verbs in 129.

the present, imperfect, and future active indicative,

both orally and in writing, of

We

expect the dative, and in 44 that one of

Trrbs to express the indirect object.
adjectives to express the object
It

learned in 43 for what sort of expressions we may its commonest uses is with
is

also very

common

with

the adjective

is

directed.

We

toward which the quality denoted by have already had a number of cases

* Observe the force of the imperfect here, used to prepare, icere in the habit * Ablaofpreparing; so amibant denotes a past situation of affairs. (See 134.) * This tive of cause. Ablative of means. may be either manner or ac-

It is often impossible to draw a sharp line between means, manner, and accompaniment. The Romans themselves drew no sharp distinc-

companiment
tion.
It

waa enough

for

them

if

the general idea

demanded the

ablative case.

6o

THE DATIVE WITH ADJECTIVES

;

where gratus, agreeable to, was so followed by a dative and in the last lesson we had molestus, annoying to, followed by that case. The
usage

may be more
Rule.

explicitly stated

by the following

rule
is

143.

Dative with Adjectives.

The dative

used with
also

adjectives to
is directed.

denote the object toward which the given quality

Such

are, especially, those

meanitig

near,

fit,

friendly, pleasing, like,

and

their opposites.
:

144.

Among

such adjectives memorize the following

idoneus, -a, -um,yf/, suitable (for)

molestus, -a, -um, annoying

(to),

amicus, -a,

-was.,

friendly

(to)

troublesome

(to)

inimicus, -a, -um, hostile (to)

gratus, -a, -um, pleasing able (to)
.

finitimus, -a, -um, neighboring (to)

(to),

agree-

proximus,
(to)

-a,

-um, nearest, next

145.

EXERCISES

I. I. Roman! terram idoneam agri culturae habent. 2. Galli copiis Romanis inimici erant. 3. Cui dea Latona arnica non erat? 4. Dea Latona superbae reginae amica non erat. 5. Cibus noster, Marce, erit armatis viris gratus. 6. Quid erat molestum populis Italiae? 7. Bella

longa
fluvio

cum Gallis erant molesta populis Italiae. 8. Agri Germanorum Rheno finitimi erant. 9. Roman! ad silvam oppido proximam
11.
10. Non solum forma sed etiam superbia reginae Mox regina pulchra erit aegra tristitia. 12. COr

castra movebant.
erat

magna.

erat Niobe, reglna

et f!liabus.

Thebanorum,

laeta

Laeta erat Niobe multis

f!li!s

The sacrifices of the people will be annoying to the haughty The sacrifices were pleasing not only to Latona but also queen. to Diana. 3. Diana will destroy those hostile to Latona. 4. The
II.
I.

2.

punishment of the haughty queen was pleasing to the goddess Diana.

The Romans camp. 6. Some

5.

will

move

their forces to a large field

suitable for a
to

of the allies were friendly to the

1

Romans, others

the Gauls.

Why

not the dative

PRESENT ACTIVE INDICATIVE

146.

6l

Cornelia and her Jewels

First learn the special vcx:abulary, p. 288.

Apud
Filii

^ antiquas dominSs, Cornelia, African! filia, erat eius erant Tiberius Gracchus et GSius Gracchus.

maximC cUra.
li

pueri

cum

Cornelia in oppido curabat ComSlia et

erat Cornelia et

Roma,
ibi

claro Italiae oppido, habitabant.

Ibi eos

magno cum
disciplinam

studio eos docebat.

Bona fCmina

bonam

maxime amSbat.
above
?

Note. Can you

translate the paragraph

There are no new words.

LESSON XXIII
PRESENT ACTIVE INDICATIVE OF REGO AND AUDIO
147. As we learned in 126, the present stem of the third conjugation ends in -, and of the fourth in -i. The inflection of the Present Indicative is as follows
:

Conjugation

III

62

PRESENT ACTIVE INDICATIVE

3. In audi5 the personal endings are added regularly to the stem audi-. In the third person plural -u- is inserted between the stem and the personal ending, as audi-u-nt. Note that the long vowel of the stem is shortened

before final

-t just as in
-i- is

ani5 and mone5.

(Cf. 12. 2.)

always short in the third conjugation and long in the fourth, excepting where long vowels are regularly shortened. (Cf. 12. 1,2.)

Note

that

148. Like regO and audio inflect the present active indicative of
the following verbs
:

Indicative Present
ag5,
dico,

Infinitive Present
agere, to drive
dicere, to

/ dnve

/ say duco, / lead mitto, / send

say

ducere, to lead

mittere, to

send

Ifortify reperio, Ifind

munio,
venio,

munire, to fortify
reperire, to find

/ come
EXERCISES

venire, to

come

149.
I.

I.

Quis
?

agit.?

Curvenit? Quern
?

mittit?

Quern ducis?
.''

2.

Quid
}

mittunt

Ad quem veniunt

Cuius castra muniunt

3.

Quern agunt

Venimus.
citis?

Quid puer reperit ? 4. Quem mittimus ? Cuius equum duQuid dicunt? 5. Munimus, venitis, dicit. 6. Agimus, reperitis,
7.
I.

munis.
II.

Reperis, ducitis,

dicis.

8. Agitis,

audlmus, regimus.

What do they find.? Whom do they hear? Why does he come ? 2. Whose camp are we fortifying ? To whom does he say ? What are we saying ? 3. I am driving, you are leading, they are hearand plur.). 5. I am ing. 4. You send, he says, you fortify {sing, coming, we find, they send. 6. They lead, you drive, he does fortify. 7. You lead, you find, you rule, (all flur.).
150.

Cornelia and her Jewels (Concluded)

domicilio

Proximum

Campana
suis.

erat superba

Comeliae erat pulchrae Campanae domicilium. non solum forma sua sed maxime omamentis
ulla

Ea^ laudabat semper. " Habesne tu

omamenta, Cornelia

"
?

*Ea, accusative plural neuter.

IMPERFECT ACTIVE INDICATIVE

inquit.

63

"Ubi

sunt tua

Tiberium et Gaium vocat.

Nam bonl llberi

sunt

omamenta?" Deinde Cornelia filiQs su6s " " Puen mel," inquit, sunt mea omamenta. semper bonae feminae Omamenta maxime clra."
tfl.

Note. The only new words here arc Campinl^ semper, and

" PUERI MEI

SUNT MEA ORNAMENTA"

LESSON XXIV
IMPERFECT ACTIVE INDICATIVE OF REGO AND AUDIO DATIVE WITH SPECIAL INTRANSITIVE VERBS
151.

THE

PARADIGMS
Conjugation
III

Conjugation IV
singular
audie'bam, /
audie'bfts,

regettam, /
regelkis,

was ruling

was hearing

2.

3.

you were ruling regSlMty he was ruling

PLURAL
rcgcba'mu,
regibft'tis,

you were hearing audie'bat, he was hearing

wi were

ruling

audieba'mus,
audieba'tis,

we were

hearing

2.

you were ruling

tfuy were ruling

you were hearing

3. regS'bAiit,

audielMint, they were hearing

64
1
.

DATIVE WITH SPECIAL VERBS

The

tense sign is -ba-, as in the first two conjugations. Observe that the final -e- of the 'stem is lengthened before the tense sign -ba-. This makes the imperfect of the third conjugation just like the imperfect of the second (cf. monebam and regebam).
2.

3. In the fourth conjugation -e- is inserted between the stem and the tense sign -ba- (audi-e-ba-m). 4. In a similar manner inflect the verbs given in 148.

152.
I.

EXERCISES

i. Agebat, veniebat, mittebat, ducebant. 2. Agebant, mittebant, ducebas, muniebant. 3. Mittebamus, ducebatis, dicebant 4. Munie-

bamus,
6.

veniebatis,

dicebas.

5.

Mittebas,
7.

veniebamus,

reperiebat.

Agebamus, reperiebatis, muniebat. 8. Agebatis, dicebam, muniebam. II. I. They were leading, you were driving {sing, and plur.), he was fortifying. 2. They were sending, we were finding, I was coming. 3. You were sending, you were fortifying, (sing, and plur.), he was saying. 4. They were hearing, you were leading (sing, and plur.), I was driving. 5. We were saying, he was sending, I was fortifying,
Reperiebas, veniebas, audiebatis.
6.

They were coming, he was hearing, I was finding. 7, You were ruling (sing, and plur.), we were coming, they were ruUng.
153. The Dative with Special Intransitive Verbs.

We

learned

above
is

( 20.^) that a verb which does not admit of a direct object

called an intransitive verb. Many such verbs, however, are of such meaning that they can govern an indirect object, which will, of course, be in the dative case ( 45). Learn the following list of
intransitive

verbs with their

is

meanings.

In

each case the dative

indirect object

the person or thing to which a benefit, injury, or

(Cf. 43.)

feeling

is

directed.

credo, credere, believe (give belief to)

faveo, favere,

noceo, nocere, injure (do

favor (show favor to) harm to)

pared, parere, obey (give obedience to)

persuadeo, persuadere, persuade (offer persuasion to)

resisto, resistere, resist (offer resistance to)

studeo, studere, be eagerfor (give attention to)

FUTURE ACTIVE INDICATIVE

154.

65

Rule.

Dative with Intransitive Verba.

The dative of the

credo^ faveo^

indirect object is

used with the intransitive verbs

noceoj pared, persuaded, resisto, studeb,

and others of like meaning.

155.
I
.

EXERCISE
?

Credisne verbis sociorum

flnitimi c5nsili6 tuo

Multi verbis eorum n6n credunt.

non favebunt, quod bello student. 3. Tiberius et Gaius disciplinae durae non resistebant et Comeliae parebant. et per4. Dea erat inimica septem filiabus reginae. 5. Dura poena
2.

Mei

petua

tristitia

reginae non persuadebunt.

potentiae Latonae.
7.

6.

Nuper ea

resistebat et

nunc

resistit

Mox

sagittae volabunt et liberis

miseris noc^bunt.

LESSON XXV
FUTURE ACTIVE INDICATIVE OF REGO AND AUDid
meet with a new tense
second conjugations,
156. In the future tense of the third and fourth conjugations we sign. Instead of using -bi-, as in the first and

we

in the rest of the tense.

use -4-* in the first person singular and -In the third conjugation the final -6- of the
;

stem

is

final -i-

dropped before this tense sign of the stem is retained.*

in the fourth conjugation the

157.

PARADIGMS
Conjugation
1
.

III

Conjugation IV
SINGULAR
au'diam,
au'diJa,
diu'^^/tf

re'gam,
rc'ggs,
tq'gttf

2.
2,.

/ shall rule you will rule

he will rule

/ shall hear you will hear

he will hear

PLURAL
1
.

reg'miu,
regi'tiaf

we

shall rule
rule

audiS'mus,

we

shall hear

2.
3.
>

you will

audii^t^, you will hear

au'dient, they will
final,

re'gcnt, they will rule

hear
-nt.

The

-4- is

shortened before -m
*

and

-*-

before

-t final

and before

(Cf. 12. 2.)

The

is,

of course, shortened, being before another

voweL

(C.Ji2. I)

66
.

VERBS IN -10 OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION

1 Observe that the future of the third conjugation is like the present of the second, excepting in the first person singular. 2. In the same manner inflect the verbs given in 148.

158.
I.

EXERCISES
Dicet,
ducetis,

I.

mtiniemus.

2.

Dicent,

dicetis,

mittemus

3.
5.

Munient, venient, mittent, agent.

Muniet, reperietis, agemus.
sedebo, vocabimus.
6.

4. Dticet,

mittes, veniet, aget.

7.

Mittam, veniemus, regent.

Au-

dietis, venies, reperies.

bitis,

8. Reperiet,

agam, ducemus,
will

mittet.

9.

Vide-

II.

I.I

shall find,

he

will hear,

they

come.

2. I shall fortify,

he

will send,
4.

we

shall say.

3. I shall drive,

you

will lead,

they will
will say.

hear.

You
^

will send,

you

will fortify, {sing,

and plur.), he

5. I shall

come, we

shall find,

they

will send.

6.

Who
?

will believe
?

friends

do you favor
Sextus

^ the story ? I shall believe the story. 7. Whose favor our friends. 8. Who will resist our

We

your weapons. 9. Who will persuade him ? Why were you injuring my horse? I They was not injuring your horse. 11. Whom does a good slave obey? A good slave obeys his master. 12. Our men were eager for another

weapons

will resist

will

persuade him.

10.

battle.

LESSON XXVI
VERBS IN
'10

OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION TIVE MOOD

THE IMPERA-

159. There are a few common verbs ending in -16 which do not belong to the fourth conjugation, as you might infer, but to the third.

The

fact that they

belong to the third conjugation

(Cf. 126.)

is

shown by the

ending of the

infinitive.

Compare

audio, audi're {hear), fourth conjugation capio, ca'pere {take), third conjugation
1

Remember
it

that quis, who,

is

singular in number.

Express by

ego,

because

is

emphatic.

PRESENT ACTIVE IMPERAllVE

160.

67

The present, imperfect, and future

68
2.

THE PASSIVE VOICE

The verbs
die, due,

forms
3.

dico, say j duc5, lead; and and fae in the singular.

faci5,

make, have the

irregular

Give the present active imperative, singular and

plural, of venio,

dueo, Yoco, doeeo, laudo, dico, sedeo, ago, faeio, miinio, mitto, rapio.

162.
I. I.

EXERCISES
Fugient, faciunt, iaciebat.
facietis.
6. 4.
2.

Dele, ntintiate, fugiunt.

5.

3.

Ve-

nite,

die,

DOcite, iaciam, fugiebant.

.

Fac, iaciebamus,

fugimus, rapite.
10.
et

Sedete, reperi, doCete. 7 Fugiemus, iacient, rapies. 8. Reperient, rapiebatis, nocent. 9. Favete, resiste, parebitis.

Vola ad multas terras etda auxilium.

12.

11.

Ego

tela

mea capiam

multas feras delebo.

Quis fabulae tuae credet?

her arms and
will hurl

13. Este bonl,

pueri, et audite verba grata magistri.

II.
2.
I.

The goddess

will seize

her weapons.

With her weapons she aid to the weak.^ 4. She

flee.
5.

will

destroy

will fly to

many beasts. 3. She will give many lands and the beasts will

Romans, telP the famous

story to your children.

Third Review, Lessons XVIII-XXVI, 510-512

LESSON XXVII
THE PASSIVE VOICE
163. The Voices.
voice; that
is,

PRESENT, IMPERFECT, AND FUTURE

INDICATIVE OF
Thus

AMO AND MONEO

forms have been
in the active

far the verb

they have represented the subject as performing an

action

as,

^he

lion

^ killed *- the hunter

when
it

A verb

is

said to be in the passive voice

represents

its

sub-

ject as receiving an action

The
Note the
1

lion -

was

as,

killed

-*

by

the hunter

direction of the arrows.

Plural.

An

The

imperative generally stands

adjective used as a noun. (Cf. 99. II. first, as in English.

3.)

Imperative.

PASSIVE INDICA

1\

i:

()J

JJ/i>

AND MONEO
we
:

69
use a

164. Passiye Personal Endings.

different set of personal endings.
r I. -r,

In the passive voice

are as follows

They

/
you

Sing. \ 2. -ris, -re,

Plur. J

I.

-mur, lue
-mini,

2.

you

it [ 3. -tur, he, she,

[3. -ntur, they

in all

a.

endings.

Observe that the letter -r appears somewhere This is sometimes called the passive sign.

but one of the

165.

PARADIGMS
amS, amare PRBS.STBM ama'

Fres. Stem

mone5, monere monePERSONAL ENDINGS

-or^

Present Indicative
a'mor,
Sing.
-

/ am

loved
are

ama na or ama re, you

loved
^

/ am advised mone ris^rmoneTe,jf?

mo'neor,

-ns or

-re

are advised
is

ama'tur, he

loved

mone'tur, he is advised

-tur

ama'mor,

we

are loved

mone'mur,
vised

ive

are ad-

-mur

ama'mini, you are loved

aman'tur, they are loved

mone'mini, you are advised

monen'tur, they are advised

-mmi
-ntur

SiNG.

<(

Imperfect Indicative (Tense Sign -ba-) / was being loved moneTwur, / was being advised amSbi'ria <7r amaba're, ^^ moneba'ris or monewere being loved ba're, you were being advised
amaiMur,

-r

-ris

or -re

amibi'tur, loved
'

he was being

monebi'tur, he

was

be-

-tur

ing advised

am&bi'mor, loved
Plur.

we were

being
be-

am&ba'mini, ing loved

you were

am&ban'tnr, they were ing loved

be-

monebi'mor, we were being advised monSbft^miid, you were being adinsed moneban'tur, they were being advised
first

-mur
-mini

-ntur

In the present the personal ending of the

person singular

is -or.

70
r'

EXERCISES
/rr. o Future (Tense Sign '

-bi-)

PERSONAL endings
ad-r

ama'bor,

/ shall

be loved

mone'bor, vised

/ sJiall be

SiNG.

ama'beris or ama'bere, will be loved

you

mone'beris or mone'bere,

you will

be ad-

-ris

or -re

vised
ama'bitur, he will be loved

mone'bitur, he will be

-tur

advised
'

ama'bimur, we shall be
loved

mone'bimur, advised

ze/^

i*^// ^^

-mar
-mini

p^^^^

amabi'mini, you will be

loved
amabim'tur, they loved
will be

monebi'mini, you will be advised

monebun'tur, they will be advised

-ntur

1.

The

2.

tense sign and the personal endings are added as in the active. In the future the tense sign -bi- appears as -bo- in the first person,

-be- in the second, singular number, and as -bu- in the third person plural. 3. Inflect laudo, nec5, porto, moveo, dele5, iubeo, in the present, imperfect,

and future

indicative, active

and

passive.

166. Intransitive verbs, such as maturO, I hasten; habito, do not have a passive voice with a personal subject.

I dwell,

167.
I.
I.

EXERCISES
Laudaris ^r laudare, laudas, datur, dat.
3.
2.

Dabitur, dabit, videdelebiminl.

4.

mini,

videtis.

Vocabat, vocabatur,

delebitis,
5.

Para-

batur, parabat, curas, curaris or curare.

Portabantur, portabant,

videbimur, videbimus.
bare, laudabas.
8. Delentur,
II.
I.

6.

luberis or iubere, iubes, laudabaris or lauda-

7.

Moveberis or movebere, movebis, dabantur, dabant.

parabamur, parabamus.

delent,

We

prepare,

we

are prepared, I shall be called, I shall

call,

you were carrying, you were being carried. 2. I see, I am seen, it was being announced, he was announcing, they will order, they will
be ordered.
3.

You

will

be

killed,

you

will kill,

you move, you are

moved, we are

praising,

we

are being praised.

4. I

am

called, I call,

EXERCISES
you
will

71
seen, they see,
will

have, you are cared for.

5.

They are
will

we were

teaching,

we were

being taught, they

move, they

be moved.

PERSEUS

ANDROMEDAM SBRVAT

168.

Per'seus and Androm'eda

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 288.

Perseus

filius

erat lovis,*

maximi * deorum.
ei

De
et

e6 multas fabulas
Eis teUs
delft-

narrant po^tae.

El favent del,

magica arma

et alas dant,

armatus

et alls

fretus ad multas terras volabat

mOnstra saeva
^

bat et miseris infirmisque auxilium dabat.

1

IOTi,
1.

below,

4,

* Used the genitive of lappiter. substantively, tA^ greaUit. miMTto and Inflnnis are used substantively.

So

72

PASSIVE INDICATIVE OF

REGO AND AUDIO

Earn terram Cepheus^ regebat. Ei^ maximus erat Iratus et mittit^ monstrum deus, Neptunus, aquarum saevum ad Aethiopiam. Ibi monstrum non solum latis pulchrisque
Aethiopia est terra Africae.
5

Aethiopiae agris nocebat sed etiam domicilia agricolarum delebat, et multos viros, feminas, liberosque necabat. Populus ex agris fugiebat
et oppida muris validls muniebat. Tum Cepheus magna tristitia commotus ad lovis oraculum properat et ita dicit "Amid me! necantur agri mel vastantur. Audi verba mea, luppiter. Da miseris auxilium. Age monstrum saevum ex patria."
:
;

LESSON XXVIII
PRESENT, IMPERFECT, AND FUTURE INDICATIVE PASSIVE OF KEGO AND AUDIO
169. Review the present, imperfect, and future indicative active of rego and audio, and learn the passive of the same tenses ( 490, 491).
a. Observe that the tense signs of the imperfect and future are the same as in the active voice, and that the passive personal endings ( 164) are added instead of the active ones.
b. Note the slight irregularity in the second person singular present of the third conjugation. There the final -e- of the stem is not changed to -i-, as it is in the active. therefore have re'geris or re'gere, not re'giris, re'gire.

We

c.

Inflect ago, dico, duco,

munio, reperio, in the present, imperfect, and

future indicative, active and passive.

170.

EXERCISES

I. I. Agebat, agebatur, mittebat, mittebatur, ducebat. 2. Agunt, aguntur, mittuntur, mittunt, muniunt. 3. Mittor, mittar, mittam, ducere, ducere. 4. Dicemur, dicimus, dicemus, dicimur, muniebamini.

5.

Ducitur,

ducimini,
reperiris,
in
is

reperimur,

reperiar,
7.

agitur.

6.

Agebamus,

agebamur,
1

reperieminl.

Munimini, veniebam, ducebar,

Pronounce

The present order to make

8

2 two syllables, Ce'pheus. gj^ at him, dative with iratus. often used, as in EngUsh, in speaking of a past action, in

the story

more

vivid

and

exciting.

PASSIVE INDICATIVE OF CAPIO

dicetur.
dicit,

-Ji
9. Dicitur,

8. MittiminI, mittitis, mitteris, mittens,

ageb5mini.

muniuntur, reperient^ audientur. II. I.I was being driven, I was driving,

we were

leading,

we were
will

being led, he says, it is said. 2. I shall send, I shall be sent, you find, you will be found, they lead, they are led. 3. I am found,
are led, they are driven, you were being led {sing,
shall drive,

we

and plur.).
led,

4.

We

we

shall

be driven, he leads, he
5.

is

being

they will come,

ruled,
6.

they

will

be

fortified.

They were

ruling, they

were being

you will send, you will be sent, you are sent, {sing, and plur.). was being led, he will come, you are said {sing, and plur.).
171.
.

He

Perseus and Andromeda {Continued)

"

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 288.

Tum

Oraculum

ita

respondet

Mala
et

est fortuna tua.

Neptunus,

magnus aquarum
Sed para
irato

deus, terrae Aethiopiae inimlcus, eas poenas mittit.

deo sacrum idoneum

filia

monstrum saevum ex

patria

tua aggtur.

tua est monstro grata. Da eam monstro. Serva caram patriam et vltam populi tul." Andromeda autem erat 5

Andromeda

puella pulchra.

Eam amabat Cepheus

maxime.

LESSON XXIX
PRESENT, IMPERFECT, AND FUTURE INDICATIVE PASSIVE OF -16 VERBS PRESENT PASSIVE INFINITIVE AND IMPERATIVE

future,
a.

172. Review the active voice of capiO, present, imperfect, and and learn the passive of the same tenses ( 492),

The

present forms capior and capiuntur are like aadior, aadiuntur,

and the
b.

rest of the tense is like regor.

In like

manner

inflect the passive of

iadS and rapid.

gives the general mean-

173. The Infinitiye.

The

infinitive

mood
;

mg

of the verb without person or unlimited.

number

as,

amire,

to love.

Infinitive

means

of the other moods, being limited by person and number, arc called thc^nite, or limited, verb forms.

The forms

74

THE INFINITIVE AND IMPERATIVE

CONJ.

THE ABLATIVE DENOTING FROM

176.

75

EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 289.

I.
I.

Turn Perseus

alls

ad terras multas

volabit.

2.

MOnstrum
3. Si
4.

sae-

vum

per aquas

properat et

mox

agrOs nostros vastabit.

ita

autem
Quis

Cepheus ad 5raculum properabit, oraculum Multa monstra telis Persel superabitur?

5.

respondebit.
eius

telis

superabuntur.

Cum

curis
6.

aguntur.
7.

magnis et lacrimis multls agricolae ex domiciliis cans Multa loca vastabantur et multa oppida delebantur.
est validum,
?

Monstrum

tamen superabitur.
10. Si

8. 9.

verbis 6raculi

Ego

iis

non semper credam.

11.

Credesne sempei* Parebitne Cepheus

oraculo?

Verba

oraculi ei persuadebunt.

non fugiemus, oppi-

dum
II.

capietur et oppidan! necabuntur.

Vocate pueros et narrate

fabulam claram de monstro saevo.

I.

to to

be

led,

Fly thou, to be cared for, be ye sent, lead thou. 2. To lead, be ye seized, fortify thou. 3. To be hurled, to fly, send thou,
4.

be found.

To be
ye

sent,

thou, hear ye, be

ruled, to

be ye led, to be fortified.

hurl, to

be taken.

5.

Find

LESSON XXX
SYNOPSES IN THE FOUR CONJUGATIONS DENOTING FROM
177.

THE ABLATIVE

Vou should

learn to give rapidly synopses of the verbs

*
:

you

have had, as follows

76

SYNOPSES OF VERBS

THE ABLATIVE DENOTING FROM

179.

77

I'

Ablative of the Place

From

The place from which

de,

is expressed by the ablative with the prepositions a or ah, e or ex.

Agricolae ex agris yeniunt, the farmers

a.
;

come from the fields

it
;

from

a or ab ^exioX.c& from near a place or ex, out from it. This may be represented graphically as follows

and

dc,

down

<

a or ab
Place

e or ex
^>

de

V
180.

Rule.

Ablative of Separation.

Words expressing
to

sepa-

ration or deprivation

require

an ablative

complete their

meaning.
If the separation is actual and literal of one material thing from (1. another, the preposition i or ab, e or ex, or de is generally used. If no actual motion takes place of one thing from another, no preposition is

necessary.
(a)

Perseus terram I mSnstris liberal

Perseus frees the landfrom ?onsters (literal separation actual motion is expressed)

(J>)

Perseus terram tristitia llberat

Perseusfrees the landfrom sorrow (fig^xm^vt separation no actual motion is expressed)

181.

Rule.

Ablative of the Personal Agent.

The word
ah.

express^

ing the person from

is

whom an

action s tarts

when not the subject

put

in the ablative

with the preposition a or

It. In this construction the English translation of I, ab is by rather than from. This ablative. is regularly used with passive verbs to indicate the person by whom the act was performed.

Mdnstrum a Persed

necatnr, the

mpnster

is

being slain

by (^\.from) Perseus

yS

EXERCISES

d. Note that the active form of the above sentence would be Perseus monstrum necat, Perseus is.slayiiig the monster. In the passive the object of the active verb becomes the subject^ and the subject of the active verb

becomes the ablative of the personal agent with a or ab. c. Distinguish carefully between the ablative of means and the ablative of the personal agent. Both are often translated into English by the preposition by. (Cf. lOO. b) Means is a thing; the agent or actor is a person. The ablative of means has no preposition. The ablative of the personal
^

agent has a or ab.

Compare
is killed
is

Fera sagitta necatur, the wild beast

by an arrow

Fera a Diana necatur, the wild beast

killed by

Diana

Sagitta, in the first sentence, is the ablative of means; a Diana, in the second, is the ablative of the personal agent.

182.

EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 289.

Viri inopia cibi defessi ab eo loco discedent. 2. German! Romanis adpropinquabant, tamen legatus copias a proelio continebat. 3. Multa Gallorum oppida ab Romanis capientur. 4. Tuni Roman! totum populum eorum oppidorum gladiis pilisque interficient.
I.
I.

castris

5. 6. 7.

Oppidan! Romams resistant, sed defess! longo proelio fugient. Mult! ex Gallia fugiebant et in Germanorum v!c!s habitabant.
Miser! nautae vulnerantur ab inim!c!s
^

saevis et cibo egent.

v!n!.

8. Dis-

cedite et date viris

frumentum

et

copiam
10.

proelio continebantur ab Sexto legato.

Copiae nostrae a Id oppidum ab provincia

9.

Romana
II.
I.

longe aberat.

dess Diana.

The weary sailors were approaching a place dear to 2. They were without food and without wine.

the god3.

Then

are sent to the ancient island by Sextus. 4. Already they are not far away from the land, and they see armed men on a high place. 5. They are kept from the land by the men

Galba and seven other

men

with spears and arrows. 6. The men kept hurling their weapons down from the high place with great eagerness.
1

inimicls,

here used as a noun.

See vocabulary.

PERFECT TENSES OF
'

SUM

79

LESSON XXXI
There are certain parts of the verb that in tense formation that we call them the

PERFECT, PLUPERFECT, AND FUTURE PERFECT OF SUM

183. Principal Parts.
are of so

much consequence

principal parts. In English the principal parts are the present, the past, and the
past participle
;

as, go,

went, gone;

see,

saw,

seen, etc.

The

principal parts of the Latin verb are th^ Jirst person singular
indicative, Xh^ present infinitive, \kvt first person singular

0/ the present

of the perfect indicative,

and

\}c\'&

perfect passive participle.

184. Conjugation Stems.

From

the principal parts

we

get three

conjugation stems, from which are formed the entire conjugation. have already learned about the present stem, which is found from

We

the present infinitive

perfect

The other two stems are the (cf. 126. <7). stem and the participial stem.

185. The Perfect Stem.

in

The

perfect stem of the verb

-i

is

formed
the

various ways, but

may always be found by dropping

:

from

first person singular of the perfect, the third of the principal parts.

From

the perfect stem are formed the following tenses

The Perfect Active Indicative The Plupbrfbct Active Indicative (English Past Psrfbct) The Future Perfect Activb Indicative
All

these tenses express completed

action in present, past, or

future time respectively.

186. The Endings of the Perfect.

inflected

The

perfect active indicative

is

by adding the endings of the perfect to the perfect stem. These endings are different from those found in any other tense, and
are as follows
:

-i,

1.

-imiis,

wi
you

Sing.

2.

AtM^you
-It,

Plur.

2. -istis,

3.

he, she, it

3.

-inint or -fat, th^y

8o

PERFECT TENSES OF
sum

SUM
and future perfect
*

187. Inflection of
indicative
:

in the perfect, pluperfect,

Pres. Indic.
Prin. Parts

Pres. Infin,
esse

Perf. Indic.
fui

sum

Perfect Stem fu-

siNGULAR

Perfect
fu'imus,

plural

I was fuis'ti, you have been, you were fu'it, he has been, he was
ful,
been,

/ have

we have been, we were fuis'tis, you have been, you were

fue'runt or fue're, they they we7'e
-era-)

have

been,

Pluperfect (Tense Sign

fu'eram, / had been fu'eras, you had been fu'erat, he had been

fuera'mus,
fuera'tis,

we had been you had been

fu'erant, they

had been

Future Perfeci' (Tense Sign

fu'ero,
fu'eris,
f u'erit,
1.

-eri-)

/ shall have

been
been

fue'rimus,
fue'ritis,
f u'erint,

we

shall have been

been

you will have

you will have

he will have been

they will have been

Note carefully the changing accent in the perfect. Observe that the pluperfect may be formed by adding eram, the imperfect of sum, to the perfect stem. The tense sign is -era-. 3. Observe that the future perfect may be formed by adding ero, the future of sum, to the perfect stem. But the third person plural ends in
2.

-erint,
4.

not in -erunt. The tense sign is -eri-. All active perfects, pluperfects, and future perfects are formed the perfect stem and inflected in the same way.

on

188.

DIALOGUE

The Boys

Titus, Marcus,

and Quintus

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 289.

M. Ubi
T.

fuistis,

Tite at Quinte

Ego

f uimus.

ludo fui et Quintus in suo ludo Fuitne Sextus in vico hodie ?

in

meo

fuit.

Boni pueri
is

M. Fuit. Nuper per agros proximos fluvio properabat. Ibi Cornelius habent navigium.

et

THE PERFECT ACTIVE INDICATIVE

T.

81

Xavigium

dicis

Alii

narrS earn fabulam

et

M. Vero
lis

{Yes, truly),
*

pulchrum

novum navigium
id

Q. Cuius pecunia

Sextus et Cornelius

navigium parant

Quis

pecuniam dat ? M. Amici Comeli multum habent aurum

T.

et

puer pecunia n5n eget.

erit ido-

Qu6

pueri navigabunt
cSnsilia

M. Dubia sunt
neus, ad

NSvigabuntne longg a terra ? eorum. Sed hodie, credo, si ventus

?

navigabunt. lam antea ibi fuerunt. Tum autem ventus erat perfidus et pueri magno in periculo erant. Q. Aqua vent6 commQta est inimica nautis semper, et saepe perfidus ventus navigia rapit, agit, deletque. li pueri, si non fuerint maxime

maximam insulam

attenti, irata

aqua

et valido vento

superabuntur et

ita interficientur.

189.

EXERCISE

2.

I. Where had the boys been before? They had been in school. Where had Sextus been ? He had been in a field next to the river.

has been with Sextus to-day ? Cornelius has been with him. says so.> Marcus. 5. If the wind has been suitable, the boys * have been in the boat 6. Soon we shall sail with the boys. 7. There have careful* will be no danger, if we are (shall been)
3.
4.

Who Who

LESSON XXXII
THE PERFECT ACTIVE INDICATIVE OF THE FOUR REGULAR
CONJUGATIONS
190. Meanings of the Perfect.

The

meanings.
is

The

first

of these

is

perfect tense has two distinct equivalent to the English present

perfect, or perfect with have,

at the time of

and denotes that the action of the verb

;

As

complete speaking as, / have finished my work. this denotes completed action at a definite time, it is called the

perfect definite.
The Ablative of means. Dative case. (Cf. 109.) expletive there not expressed, but the verb will precede the subject, as in English. This predicate adjective must be nominative plural to agree with toe.

is

82

THE PERFECT ACTIVE INDICATIVE

The perfect is also used to denote an action that happened sometime in the past ; as, Ifinished my work. As no definite time is specified, this is called the perfect indefinite. It corresponds to the ordinary
use of the English past tense.
a.

Note

carefully the difference

^ {

between the following tenses

.
,.
c.

^ius.^

was finishing^ r '"y '""''^ ('">Perfe. S to finish I I finished my work (perfect indefinite) / have finished my work (perfect definite)

'34)

telling a story the Latin uses the perfect indefinite to mark the forward steps of the narrative, and the imperfect to describe If the following situations and circumstances that attend these steps.

When

different

sentences were Latin, what tenses would be used? " Last week I went to Boston. I was trying to find an old friend of mine, but he was out of the city. Yesterday I returned home."

191. Inflection of the Perfect.

fect
is

We

learned in

i86 that any per-

inflected

stem.

The
I

by adding the endings of the perfect to the perfect inflection in the four regular conjugations is then as follows
:

CONJ.

CONJ. II

amavi

/ have loved I have advised I have ruled I have taken I have heard / heard or / took or / ruled or / advised or I loved or did hear did take did rule did advise did love

THE PERFECl
1.

AuiUl:. IMJICATIVE
is

The

first

person of the perfect

principal parts. From this we get absolute necessity of learning the principal parts thoroughly. 2. Nearly all perfects of the first conjugation are formed by adding -vi to the present stem. Like amavi inflect paravi, vocavi, curavi, laudavi.
3.

always given as the third of the the perfect stem. This shows ths

Note

carefully the

changing accent in the perfect.

Drill

on
:

it.

192. Learn the principal parts and inflect the perfects

Pres. Indic.

Pres. Lnfin.

Perf. Indic.

d&

84

PLUPERFECT, FUTURE PERFECT, INDICATIVE

LESSON XXXIII
PLUPERFECT AND FUTURE PERFECT ACTIVE INDICATIVE PERFECT ACTIVE INFINITIVE
194.
CoNj.
I

CONJ. II

CONJ. Ill
rego
rex-

CONJ.

IV

amo
Perfect Stems amav-

mone5

capio
cep-

audio

monu-

audiv-

Pluperfect Indicative Active

^

Tense Sign

-era-

SINGULAR

ama veram
ama'veras ama'verat

I had loved I had advised I had ruled I had taken monu eram re xeram ce peram
monu'eras
monu'erat
re'xeras re'xerat

/ had heard
audrveram
audrveras
audi'verat

ce'peras
ce'perat

PLURAL
1.

2.

3.

amavera mus monuera mus amavera'tis monuera 'tis ama'verant monu'erant

rexera'mus
rexera'tis

cepera

mus

audivera'mus
audivera'tis

cepera'tis

re'xerant

ce'perant

audi'verant

Future Perfect Indicative Active

Tense Sign
-eri-

PERFECT ACTIVE INFINITIVE

195. The Perfect Active Infinitive.

85
is

The

perfect active infinitive

formed by adding
CONJ.

-isse to the perfect stem.

86

REVIEW OF THE ACTIVE VOICE

LESSON XXXIV
REVIEW OF THE ACTIVE VOICE
197.

review of the tenses of the indicative active shows the

:

following formation
'

Present

=
=

First of the principal parts

Imperfect

=
_,

Present stem

+
,

-ba-m
Coni.
1

TENSES OF THE
INDICATIVE

Future
Perfect

Present stem

-i^w, ^r-bo,

and

II

\-a-ir m, Conj. Ill and

IV

Third of the principal parts Pluperfect = Perfect stem + -era-m

L

Future Perfect

Perfect stem

-ero

198. The synopsis of the active voice of amo, as far as learned the conjugation, is as follows
:

we have

Principal Parts amo, amare, amavi

Pres. Stem
r

ama-

Perf. Stem
f

amavamavi

Pres.

amo

Perf.

Indic. \ Imperf.
[

amabam

Indic. < Pluperf.

|^

amaveram

Fut. amabo

Fut. perf. amavero

Perf. Infin. amavisse

Pres. Imv.

ama
amare

Pres. Infin.

I Learn to write in the same form and to give rapidly the principal and synopsis of parS, do, laud5, deleo, habeo, moveo, pareo, video,
.

parts
dico,

discedo, duc6, mitto, capio, munio, venio.^

199. Learn the following principal parts

Pres. Indic

^
:

REVIEW OF THE ACTIVE VOICE

87

8S

THE PASSIVE PERFECTS

LESSON XXXV
THE PASSIVE PERFECTS OF THE INDICATIVE THE PERFECT PASSIVE AND FUTURE ACTIVE INFINITIVE

fourth and last of the principal parts ( 183) is the perfect passive participle. J^rom it we get the participial stem on which are

201.

The

for?ned the future active infinitive

1
.

and all the passive perfects.

parts,

Learn the following principal

:

which are for the

first

time given

in full

CoNj.
I.

Pres. Indic.

Pres. Infin.

Perf. Indic.

Perf. Pass. Part.

amo
is

ama'-re
all

ama'v-i
first

ama't-us
conjugation.

This
II.

the model for

regular verbs of the

mo'neo
rego
ca'pio

mone'-re
re'ge-re

mo'nu-i
rex-i cep-i

mo'nit-us
rect-us

III.

ca'pe-re
audi'-re
is

capt-us
audi't-us

IV.
2.

au'dio

audiV-i

The

base of the participial stem

found by dropping -us from the

perfect passive participle.

of the indicative passive are

to be

202. In English the perfect, past perfect, and future perfect tenses made up of forms of the auxiliary verb

and the past

participle

as,

/ have

been loved,

I had been

loved,

I shall have
Very

been loved.

similarly, in Latin, the perfect, pluperfect,

and future perfect

passive tenses use respectively the present, imperfect, and future of sum as an auxiliary verb with the perfect passive participle, as
Perfect passive, ama'tus sum,

Pluperfect passive, ama'tus eram,

Future perfect passive,

/ have been or was loved / had been loved ama'tus ero, / shall have been loved

I. In the same way give the synopsis of the corresponding tenses of moneo, rego, capi5, and audi5, and give the English meanings.

203. Nature of the Participle.

adjective.

A participle is partly verb and

As an

partly
it

As a verb

it

possesses tense and voice.

adjective

THE FUTURE ACTIVE INFINITIVE

is

89

declined and agrees with the word

case.

it

modifies in gender, number,

and

204.

The

perfect passive participle

in the

is

declined like bonus, bona,

it

bonum, and

compound tenses ( 202) the with subject of the verb. adjective

(

agrees as a predicate

Examples

in

j
j

Vir laudatus est, //le man was praised, or has been praised Puella laudata est, the girl was praised^ or has been praised

Singular
^
'

Consilium laudatum

est, the

plan was praised, or has been

praised
Viri laudati sunt, the

men werepraisedy or have been praised

have been

Examples in Plural

Puellae laudatae sunt, the girls were praised, or

praised
CSnailia laudata sunt, the plans

were praised, or have been

praised
I.

Inflect the perfect, pluperfect,

and future perfect indicative passive of

im6, moned, regS, capio,

and audi5 ( 488-492).

is

205. The perfect passive infinitive

present
(-a,

formed by adding
;

esse, the

infinitive of

-um)

esse, to

sum, to the perfect passive participle have been loved; mo'nit-us (-a, -um)

as,

ama't-us

esse, to

have

been advised.
I
.

Form

the perfect passive infinitive of reg5, capi5, audid, and give the

English meanings.

206.

The

future active infinitive

is

formed by adding

esse,

the

of sum, to the future active participle. This partipresent made is by adding -firus, -a, -um to the base of the participial ciple stem. Thus the future active infinitive of amC is amt-fl'ru8 (-a, -um)
infinitive

esse, to be about to love.

a.
all

Note that

in

forming the three tenses of the active

infinitive

we

use

three conjugation stems:

amare (present stem), to love amavisse (perfect stem), to have loved Future, amStiinis esse (participial stem), to be about to Inte
Present,
Perfect,
I.

Give the three tenses of the active

infinitive of

Uud5, moneS,

regS,

capi5, audid with the English meanings.

90
207.
I.
I.

REVIEW OF PRINCIPAL PARTS

EXERCISES
Fabula Andromedae narrata
sunt.
3. est.
2.

Multae fabulae a magiserat.

4.

tro narratae

Ager ab agricola valido aratus

Agri

ab

agricolis validis arati erant.

cilium

suum portatum erit. 6. Quis vestra arma laudavit? 7. Ab ancilla tua ad cenam vocatae sumus. 8. Andromeda monstro non data est, quia monstrum a Perseo necatum erat.
II. I. The provinces were laid waste, the field had been laid waste, the towns will have been laid waste. 2. The oracles were heard, the oracle was heard, the oracles had been heard. 3. The oracle will have

a servo perfido ad domi5. Nostra arma a legato laudata sunt.

Aurum

been heard, the province had been captured, the boats have been captured. 4. The fields were laid waste, the man was advised, the
girls will

have been advised.

will

5.

The towns had been

ruled,

we

shall

have been captured, you

have been heard.

LESSON XXXVI
REVIEW OF PRINCIPAL PARTS

PREPOSITIONS

YES-OR-NO QUESTIONS
208. The following list shows the principal parts of all the verbs you have had excepting those used in the paradigms. The parts you have had before are given for review, and the perfect participle is the only new form for you to learn. Sometimes one or more of the principal parts are lacking, which means that the verb has no forms based on that stem. A few verbs lack the perfect passive participle but have the future active
participle in -urns,

which appears

in the principal parts instead.

Irregular Verbs

sum absum
do
1
^

esse

fui

abesse

dare

do is best classed with the irregular verbs because of the short a in the present and participial stems.

REVIEW OF PRINCIPAL PARTS

91

92

PREPOSITIONS
i.

VES-OR-JVO QUESTIONS
learned in 52, 53 that only the accuthat preposi-

209. Prepositions,
sative

We

and the ablative are used with prepositions, and

tions expressing ablative relations

we

govern the ablative case. Those have had are here summarized. The table following should be

learned.

a or ahyfrom, by cum, with de, down from, conceTjiing

2.

e or ex, out from, out of pro, before, in front of; for, in behalf of
sine,

without

accusative ( 52).

Prepositions not expressing ablative relations must govern the Of these we have had the following:
ad, to; apud,

among;

per, through

There are many others which you will meet as we proceed. 3. The preposition in when meaning in or on governs the ablative;

when meaning

to, into,

against (relations foreign to the ablative) in

governs the accusative.

210.
Fes-or-JVo Questions.

terrogative

word

yes or no,
1.

may

Questions not introduced by some inwho^ why^ when, etc., but expecting the answer take one of three forms
like
:

Is he coming? (Asking for information. the answer expected.)

Implying nothing as to

2.

3.

Is he not coming f (Expecting the answer jk<?^.) He isn^t coming, is he? (Expecting the answer

<?.)

These three forms are rendered

1
.

in Latin as follows

Venitne ?

2.

Nonne venit?

3.

Num

he coming ? is he not coming? venit? he isnU coming, is he?

is
is

a. -ne,

the question sign,

usually added to the verb,

which then

stands

first.

b. We learned in 56. <^ that yes-or-no questions are usually answered by repeating the verb, with or without a negative. Instead of this, ita, vero, certe, etc, {so, truly, certainly, etc.) may be used for yes, and n5n, minime, etc. for fio if the denial is emphatic, as, by no means, not at all.

CONJUGATION OF POSSUM
211.
First
I.

93

EXERaSES
Icam the
special vcx:abulary, p. 290.

1.

NOnne habbat

Cornelia

Omamenta

auri? Hab^bat.

2.

Num

Sextus legatus scQtum in dextro bracchio gergbat? NOn in dextro, sed sinistrO in bracchiQ Sextus scutum gerebat. 3. FrQstra bella multa

ab

Gallis gesta

erant

4.

Ubi oppidum a

perfido Sexto
5.

occupatum

est, oppidan! miseri gladiS interfectl sunt.

Id oppidum erat ple-

6. N5nne Sextus ab oppid^nls frumentum postulvit ? ii frumentum dare. 7. Cur oppidum ab Sexto sed recusaverunt VerO, d^letum est? Quia frumentum recQsatum est. 8. Ea victoria non

num

frOmentl.

dubia erat

9.

Oppidan! erant defess! et arm!s egebant.

10.

Num

fugam temptavgrunt ? Minimg. II. I. Where was Julia standing ? She was standing where you had ordered. 2. Was Julia wearing any ornaments ? She had many ornaments of gold. 3. Did she not attempt flight when she saw the danger ? She did. 4. Who captured her? Galba captured her without delay and held her by the left arm. 5. She did n't have the lady's gold, did she ? No, the gold had been taken by a faithless maid and has been
brought back.

Fourth Review, Lessons XXVII-XXXVI, 513-516

LESSON XXXVII
CONJUGATION OF POSSUM THE INFINITIVE USED AS IN ENGLISH

212. Learn the principal parts of possum,

inflection in the indicative
a.

/am

abh^

I can^ and

its

and

infinitive.

(Cf. 495.)

Possum, / catty

is

a compound of potis, abU^ and stun, / am.

i 173)

213. The Infinitive with Subject Accusative. The infinitive (cf. is a verbal noun. Used as a noun, it has the constructions of

a noun.

As a verb

it

can govern a case and be modified by an adverb.

The

uses of the infinitive arc

much

the

same

in

I^tin as in English.

94
I.

THE INFINITIVE USED AS

IN ENGLISH

and the

In English certain verbs of wishing^ commanding^ forbidding^ like are used with an object clause consisting of a substantive

in the objective case

flee.

and an

infinitive, as,

he commanded the men

to

Such object clauses are

is

called infinitive clauses,

and the sub-

stantive

said to be the subject of the infinitive.

Similarly in Latin,

and the

like are

some verbs of wishing^ commanding^ forbidding^ used with an object clause consisting of an infinitive
as. Is viros

with a subject in the accusative case,

fugere iussit, he

commanded the men

214.

to flee.

Rule.

Subject of the Infinitive.

The subject of the

infini-

tive is hi the accusative.

215. The Complementary Infinitive. In English a verb is often followed by an infinitive to complete its meaning, as, the Romans are able to conquer the Gauls. This is called the complementary infinitive,
as the predicate
Similarly in
is

not complete without the added

infinitive.

Latin, verbs of incomplete predication are completed

by the

infinitive.

propero, maturS,

Among such verbs are possum, / am I hasten ; tempto, I attempt; as

Romans
to

able,

I can ;

Romani

(or cait)

Gallos superare possunt, the conquer the Gauls

are able to

Bellum gerere maturant, they hasten

a.

wage war

in gender,

predicate adjective completing a complementary infinitive agrees number, and case with the subject of the main verb.

Mali pueri esse boni non possunt, bad boys are not able
to (or cannot) be

good

Observe

that boni agrees with pueri.

216. The Infinitive used as a Noun. In English the infinitive is often used as a pure noun, as the subject of a sentence, or as a predicate nominative.

conquering) is pleasing; To see (= seeing) is to believe (= believing). The same use of the infinitive is found in Latin, especially with est, as
(

For example. To conquer

Superare est gratum, to conquer

Videre est credere, to see

is

pleasing

is to believe

EXERCISES
a.

95

In the construction above, the infinitive often has a subject, which must then be in the accusative case, as

Galb&m superare inimlcSs

to
b.

est
is

gratum inultis,y^r Galba

conquer his enemies

pleasing to

many
Thus,
is

An

infinitive

used as a noun

is

neuter singular.

in the sen-

tence superare est gratum, the predicate adjective gratum nominative singular to agree with superare the subject.

in the neuter

217.

EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 291.

I.

I.

Magister ludi liberos

cum

dlligentia labQrare iussit.

2.

Egre

cibo et vino est viris molestum.

ibi

3. Viri

armati vetuerunt Gallos castra

ponere.

4.

Estne legatus
ibi

5.

Ubi

nostri^ fugere inceperunt,

6. Galli
7. Alii

castellum

Is est pro porta. ab vestris^ captus est. oppugnaverant ubi praesidium erat infirmum.
in castello in

an

muro ?

legatus

pugnare temptabant,

alii

portas petebant.

8.

Feminae pro
9.

domiciliis sedebant

neque

resistere validis Gallis poterant. lo.

1 1.

Bellum
postu-

saevum, nee infirmis nee miseris fa vet. labant et studebant Gallos de muris agere.
est

Bed

viri

arma

Id castellum ab Gallis

occupari ROmanis non gratum erit. 12. Galli ubi a Romanis victi sunt, esse liberi^ cessaverunt. 13. Diu sine aqua vivere non potestis.
II.
I.

gates.

2.

The girl began daily to carry water from the river to The Gauls had pitched their camp in a place suitable
3.

the
for

a
4.

battle.

For a long time they

tried in vain to seize the redoubt.

*

Neither did they cease to hurl weapons against they were not able to (could not) take the town.

the walls.

5.

But

218.
Sabini 6lim

The

Faithless Tarpe'ia

cum R5mnis bellum gerebant et multSs victorias relam agrOs proximos muris vastabant, iam pppido adpropinquSbant ROmSnl autem in Capit5lium fOgerant et longe periculd
portaverant.
*

Supply men.
children.

nostrl, vestri,

and

Not

The Romans used

or as a noun, meaning the free^ The word was never applied to children of slaves.

nouns in this way. an adjective, meaning//r^, thereby signilying their free-bom childrtn.
llbrl either as

sul are often used as

* in

with the accusative.

96
aberant.
iaciebant,

EXERCISES
Muris
validis et saxis altis credebant.

Frustra Sabini tela

frustra portas duras

petebant;

castellum occupare non

poterant.

D^inde novum consilium ceperunt.^

Tarpeia erat puella

5 copiis

Romana

pulchra et superba.

Cotidie

aquam

Romanis

in

Capitolium portabat.

El^ non nocebant Sabini,

TARPEIA PUELLA PERFIDA

neque Sabini bellum cum feminis liberisque autem maxime amabat omamenta auri. Cotidie gerebant. Tarpeia Sabinorum omamenta videbat et mox ea desiderare incipiebat. Ei

quod ea

sine armis erat

unus ex
lo et

Sabinis dixit,

"

Due

copias Sabinas intra portas, Tarpeia,

maxima erunt praemia

tua."

1 consilium capere, to make a plan. Why is the perfect tense used here and the imperfect in the preceding sentences ? Explain the use of tenses in the 2 Dative with * next paragraph. nocebant. (Cf. 154.) ex, out of, i.e. the number best translated from of; of

THE RELATIVE PRONOUN

97

LESSON XXXVIII
THE RELATIVE PRONOUN AND THE INTERROGATIVE PRONOUN
219. Sentences are simple^ compound, or complex.
a. A simple sentence is a sentence containing but one statement, that is, one subject and one predicate The Romans approached the town. b. A compound sentence is a sentence containing two or more independThe Romans approached the town and the enemy fled. ent statements
: :
\
|

independent statement depend upon another statement.

Note.

An

is

one that can stand alone

it

does not

c. A complex sentence is a sentence containing one independent statement and one or more dependent statements: When the Romans approcuhed the town the enemy fled.
\

Note.
the

or qualifies another statement

dependent or subordinate statement is one that depends on thus the enemy fled is independent, and when Romans approached the town is dependent or subordinate.
;

d.

The

called clauses.

separate statements in a compound or complex sentence are In a complex sentence the independent statement is called

the

main

clause and the dependent statement the subordinate clause.

220. Examine the complex sentence

The Romans killed the men who were taken

Here are two

a.
b.

clauses

The main clause, The Romans killed the nun The subordinate clause, who were taken
is a pronoun, for it takes the place of the noun connects the subordinate clause who were taken with the

The word who

men.
It also

noun men. Hence the clause

is

an

adjective clause.

pronoun that

connects an adjective clause with a substantive is called a relative pronoun, and the substantive for which the relative pronoun stands is
called
its

antecedent.

The
that.

relative

pronouns

in English are

who, whose,

whom, which, what,

93
221.

THE RELATIVE PRONOUN

The
relative
:

pronoun

in Latin is qui, quae, quod,

and

it

is

declined as follows

THE INTERROGATIVE PRONOUN

with
its

99

are the antecedents

antecedent in gender and number. In neither of the sentences and relatives in the same case. Virds and feminam are

accusatives, and qui and quae are nominatives, being the subjects of the subordinate clauses. Hence

224.

Rule. Agreement

of

the Relative.

relative

pronoun

ynust agree with its antecedent in

its

case is determined by the

225. Interrogative Pronouns.

gender and number ; but it way is used in its own clause, An interrogative pronoun is a pro-

noun
which

that asks a question.

i

whati

In English the interrogatives are who? In Latin they are quis? quid? (pronoun) and qui?

quae? quod?

(adjective).

226. Examine the sentences

a.
b.

Who
is

is the

man ?
is

IVhat

man

Quis est vir ? leading them ? Qui vir eos

diicit ?

In

a,

who

adjective.

an interrogative /r(t7^tt. In b, what is an interrogative Observe that in Latin quis, quid is the pronoun and qui,
is

quae, quod

the adjective.
interrogative adjective qui, quae, quod
is

2TI.

The

declined just

like the relative

2.

pronoun.

(See

221.)

The

interrogative

pronoun

quis, quid
it is

is

declined like qui, quae,

:

quod

in the plural

In the singular

declined as follows

Masc. and Fem.

Neut.
quid,
cuius,

Nom.
Gen.

quis,

who f
whose?
ox for

what ? which t
whose f

cuius,
cui, to

Dat.
Ace.

whom f

cui, to ox for

qaem,

whom f
etc.,

Abl.

f^ffrom,

whom?

what or which t what f which f <^^from^ etc., which or what?

quid,

Note. Observe that the masculine and feminine are alike and that all the forms are like the corresponding forms of the relative, excepting quis and quid.

228.
1. I.

EXERCISES
Quis
est

aeger? Servus quern

dabit
FiliO

amO

est aeger.

2.

Cuius scQ3.

tum habs? Scutum habeO quod

lgatus

l^rgatus

ad castellum
4.

misit.

Cui

suum scQtum

meO

scQtiun dabit

Ubi German!

lOO
antiqui vivebant

EXERCISES

In terra quae est proxima Rheno GermanI vive? GermanI bellum gerebant? Cum Romanis, qui Quibuscum^ 5. eos superare studebant, German! bellum gerebant. 6. Qui viri castra
bant.

ponunt ?

li

sunt

viri

quorum
sunt.

armis Germani
7.

victi

Quibus

telis
?

copiae nosGladiis et

trae eguerunt
pills

nostrae copiae eguerunt

8.

quibus porta sinistra

tenebatur.?

sociis
9.

porta

sinistra tenebatur.

Quae

provinciae a

Romanis occuMultae proviris viris

patae sunt?
vinciae

Romanis occu-

patae sunt. 10. Quibus dei favebunt.? Bonis

dei favebunt.
II.
I.

What

victory will

you announce? 2. I will announce to the people the victory which the sailors
GERMANI ANTIQUI
have won.
3.

The men who

were pitching camp were for soon conquered by the battle. Nevertheless were 4. eager they not resist our forces, had which sent could Sextus troops 5. They
but fled from that place without delay.
^

229.
Tarpeia,

The

Faithless Tarpeia (Concluded)

potuit et respondit
chiis

commota ornamentis Sablnorum pulchris, diu resistere non " Date mihi * omamenta quae in sinistris bracgeritis, et celeriter copias vestras in Capitolium ducam." Nee
:

1 cum is added to the ablative of relative, interrogative, and personal pro^ nouns instead of being placed before them. Explain the use of the tenses

in this selection.

to

me.

HK THIRD DECLENSION CONSONANT STEMS

loi

peraverunt qu5
stabant.

Sablnl recQsaverunt, sed per durSs magnasque castelli port^ pro* Tarpia duxit et mox intra validos et altOs mQrOs

Turn sine mora in* Tarpeiani 3cut^ grayiter igc^inrnt; nam scuta quoque in sinistris bracchiis gei*?baat It? perfida puella Tar pia interfecta est ita Sablni CapitOlhira occupaveruHt,
.

LESSON XXXIX
THE THIRD DECLENSION
230. Bases and Steins.
sions

CONSONANT STEMS
first

In learning the

and second declen-

were formed by adding the case terminations to the part of the word that did not change, which we called the base. If to the base we add -ft in the first declension,
that the different cases
-0 in the second, we get what the base port- and the stem porta-

w c saw

and

is
;

called the stem. Thus porta has servus has the base senr- and the

stem servo-.
'I'hese stem vowels, -ft- and -o-, play so important a part in the formation of the case terminations that these declensions are named

from them respectively the A- and (9-Declensions.

231. Nouns of the Third Declension.
the Consonant or /-Declension, and
to the
its

The

third declension
classified

is

called

nouns arc

according
the

way
is

the stem ends.

said to

If the last letter of the

; if

stem

is

a consonant,
-i-,

the

word

is

have a consonant stem

\-stem.

the stem ends* in

word

said to

have an
of the
is

In consonant stems
is

the stem is the

-i- to

same

as the base.

In i-stems the stem

i

formed by adding

the base.

The presence
the distinction

makes a

difference in certain of the cases, so

a very important one.

:

232. Consonant stems are divided into two classes

I.

Stems Stems

that that

add

-8 to the

II.

add no termination

base to form the nominative singular. in the nominative singular.

qn5 = whither, to the place where. Here qa5 is the relative adverb. have had it used before as the interrogative adverb, whither t to what

We

pUuef

upon.

I02

THE THIRD DECLENSION CONSONANT STEMS

CLASS
either masculine or feminine

233. Stems that add -s to the base in the nominative singular are

and are declined as follows

Basest P^'^ceps^^J'^f'^f^ OR '>'t).Tinc&). '. '; * Stems J

EXERCISES
a.
3.

103

Upia

is

an exception to

this rule.

Observe the consonant changes of the base or stem

in the nominative:

a.

A A
8

final -t

or -d

is

dropped before -s; thus miles for mllets, lapis

for lapids, virtus for virtiits.

d.

final -c

or -g unites with -e

and forms

-x; thus iudec

4- s

iiidez,

rtg

rex.

4.

Review 74 and apply the

rules to this declension.

In like

man

manner decline dux, ducis, m., leader ; eques, equitis, m., horsepedes, peditis, m.,foot soldier ; pes, pedis, m..,/oot.

234.

EXERCISES
29
1 .

First learn the special vocabulary, p.

I. I.

Neque

pedites neque equites occupare castellum

ROmanum

poterant. 2. Summavirtutemurosaltoscotidieoppugnabant. 3. Ped6s

mllitum
4.

lapidibus

Quod novum

qui de muro iaciebantur saepe vulnerabantur. consilium dux cepit? 5. Is perfidam puellam pulchris
6.

Qmamentls temptavit.
verat

Quid puella
8.

fecit

7.

Puella

commota auro

milites per portas duxit.

non reportavit
I.

9.

Tamen praemia quae summo studio petlApud Romanes antiques Tarpeia non est
That
(illud) ship
is

laudata.
II.

What
It
is

ship

is

that which I see?

the

now with a favorable wind and will soon approach Italy. 2. The judges commanded the savages to be seized and to be killed. 3. The chiefs of the savages suddenly began to flee, but were quickly captured by the horsemen. 4. The king led
Victory.
sailing

the foot soldiers to the wall

from which the townsmen were hurling

stones with the greatest zeal.

NAVIGIUM

104

THE THIRD DECLENSION CONSONANT STEMS

LESSON XL
THE THIRD DECLENSION

CONSONANT STEMS
II

(Continued)

CLASS

235. Consonant stems that add no termination

in the

nominative
-s.

are declined in the other cases exactly like those that add may be masculine, feminine, or neuter.

They

236.

PARADIGMS
Masculines and Feminines
consul, m.,

THE THIRD DECLENSION CONSONANT STEMS

105

237.

EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 291.

I.

1.

Audisne tubas, Marce?

NOn s6lum

tubas audio sed etiam

ordines militum et carros impedlmentorum plenos videre possum. 2. QuSs legiones videmus? Eae legiones nuper ex Gallia venerunt.
3.
4.

Quid ibi fecerunt? Studebantne pugnare an sine virtute erant? Multa proelia fecerunt * et magnas victorias et multos captivos re5.

portaverunt.

Quisest imperator earum legionum

.-*

Caesar,

summus

imperator. 6. Quis est eques qui pulchram coronam gevitf Is eques est fratcr meus. Ei corona a consule data est quia summa virtute pugnaverat et a barbaris patriam servaverat.
II.
I.

Romanorum

your dwelling with your mother and (n&per). sister. 3. WTien men are far from the fatherland and lack food, they cannot be restrained * from wrong.* 4. The safety of the soldiers is
to

Who has seen my He was hastening

father to-day.?

2. I

saw him

just

now

dear to Caesar, the general. 5. The chiefs were eager to storm a town full of grain which was held by the consul. 6. The king forbade the baggage of the captives to be destroyed.

LESSON XLI
THE THIRD DECLENSION
and arc declined as follows
flumen,
n.,

CONSONANT STEMS

(Concluded)

238. Neuter consonant stems add no termination in the nominative

:

io6

REVIEW OF CONSONANT STEMS

107

LESSON XLII
REVIEW LESSON
240. Review the paradigms in 233, 236, 238; and decline third declension in this selection.
all

nouns of the

Terror Cimbricus*

cum feminis liberisque Romanas maximS adpropinquSverant proeliO vicerant. Ubi fuga legiSnum nuntiataest, summus erat terror totius Romae,et RoOlim CimbrI
et TeutonCs, popull

Germaniae,

Italiae

et copias

mani, gi-aviter commoti, sacra crebra dels faciebant et salutem petebant. " Turn Manlius Qrtor animSs populi ita confirmavit Magnam
:

Oppida nostra a Cimbris Teutonibusque capiuntur, agricolae interficiuntur, agri vastantur, copiae barbarorum
calamitatem
accepimus.

Romae adpropinquant. Itaque, nisi novis animis proelium novum faciemus et Germanos ex patria nostra sine mora agemus, erit nulla
salus feminis nostris liberisque.

Servate liberos

Servate patriam

10

Antea superati sumus quia imperStores nostri fuerunt infirml. Nunc Marius, clarus imperator, qui iam multas alias victorias reportavit,
legiones ducet ct animos nostros terrore Cimbrico liberare maturabit."

Marius tum

in

Africa bellum gerebat.

Sine

mora ex
Italiae

Africa in

Italiam vocatus est.

Copias novas non solum

Disciplina

toti

sed etiam 15

prOvinciis sociOrum imperavit*

autem dura labOribusque

Diu
et

perpetuis milites exercuit.

proelio studebant,
Scriter

Tum cum

peditibus equitibusque, qui iam

celeriter properavit.

ad Germanorum castra
est.*

Denique barbari fuggrunt et multi in fugS ab sunt interfectl. Marius pater patriae vocatus est. equitibus

pugntum

20

of barbarians from the north

Romans were greatly alarmed by an invasion known as Cimbri and Teutons. They were traveling with wives and children, and had an army of 300,000 fighting men. Several Roman armies met defeat, and the city was in a panic. Then the Senate called
*

About the year 100

B.C.

the

upon Marius, their greatest general, to save the country. First he defeated the Teutons in Gaul. Next, returning to Italy, he met the Cimbri. A terrible battle ensued, in which the Cimbri were utterly destroyed but the terror Cimbricus
;

* He made a a year thereafter. * Cf. ievy (of troops) upon, imperftvit with the ace. and the dat % 200. n. 2.

continued to haunt the

Romans

for

many

io8

THE THIRD DECLENSION /-STEMS

LESSON
241.

XLIII

THE THIRD DECLENSION

To
decline a

/-STEMS

noun of the
it is

third declension correctly

we must

know
1
.

whether or not

an i-stem.
:

Nouns with

i-stems are

Masculines and f eminines

a.

Nouns

in -es

and

-is

as in the nominative.
is

Thus
-rs.

with the same number of syllables in the genitive caedes, caedis, is an i-stem, but miles, militis,

a consonant stem.
b.
c.

Nouns Nouns

in -ns

and

of one syllable in
-e, -al,

-s

or -x preceded by a consonant

2.

Neuters in

and

-ar.
is

242.

The

declension of i-stems

nearly the
:

same

as that of con-

sonant stems.
a.

Note the following

differences

Masculines and feminines have -ium in the genitive plural and

-is

or

-es in the accusative plural.

b.

Neuters have

-i

in the ablative singular,

and an

-1-

in every

form

of.

the plural.

243. Masculine and Feminine /-Stems.

Masculine and feminine

i-

stems are declined as follows

no
magna
7.

EXERCISES

6. Alia animalia terram, alia mare amant. superaverunt. Naves longae quae auxilium ad imperatorem portabant igni ab

hostibus deletae sunt.

8.

a terra volaverant.

9.

Nonne

In eo mar! avis multas vidimus quae longg vidistis navis longas hostium et ignis

quibus urbs nostra vastabatur? Certe, sed nee caedem civium nee

NAVES LONGAE

fugam

clientium vidimus.

10.

Aves

et alia animalia, ubi

ignem
et

vide-

runt, salutem

fuga petere
?

celeriter inceperunt.

11.

Num

iudex in

peditum ordinibus stabat

eius insigne
II.
I.

Minime, iudex erat apud equites

equus

pulchrum gerebat. Because of the lack of grain the animals of the

2.

village

were

not able to live.

When

the general
3.

sent a horseman to the village.

heard the rumor, he quickly The horseman had a beautiful

"

Send horse and wore spurs of gold. 4. He said to the citizens, and to our with horses and retainers camp, you will wagons your receive an abundance of grain." 5. With happy hearts they hastened
to

obey

his words.'^
1

Place

first.

2 jsjot

the accusative.

Why ?

IRREGULAR NOUNS GENDER

III

LESSON XLIV
IRREGULAR NOUNS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION THE THIRD DECLENSION
246.

GENDER IN

112

EXERCISES

it is

248. Give the gender of the following nouns and the rule by vvhich determined
:

animal

ADJECTIVES OF THE THIRD DECLENSION

113

LESSON XLV
ADJECTIVES OF THE THIRD DECLENSION

/-STEMS

250. Adjectives are either of the first and second declensions (like bonus, aeger, or liber), or they are of the third declension.
all adjectives of the third declension have i-stems^ and almost like nouns with i-stems. are declined they

251. Nearly

252. Adjectives learned thus far have had a different form nominative for each gender, as, bonus, m. bona, f. bonum, n.
;
;

in the

Such

an adjective

is

called

an

adjective

of three endings. Adjectives of the

:

third declension are of the following classes

I.

Adjectives of three endings a different form in the nominative for each gender. Adjectives of two endings masculine and feminine nominative alike, the neuter different.

II.

III. Adjectives of

one ending

all alike.
;

masculine, feminine, and neuter nominative

253. Adjectives of the third declension in -er have three endings those in -is have two endings the others have one ending.
;

CLASS

254. Adjectives of Three Endings are declined as follows

114

ADJECTIVES OF THE THIRD DECLENSION

CLASS
II

255. Adjectives of

Two

Endings are declined as follows

^

omnis, omne, every all^

Stem

oinni-

Base omn-

EXERCISES
258.

115

EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 293.

I.

The Romans invade

the

cum

equitibus velocibus in hostium

Enemy's Country. Olim pedites RQmani urbem iter faciebant. Ubi non

longe afurunt, rapuerunt agricolam, qui eis viam brevem et facilem demonstravit. lam RomanI moenia alta, turns validas aliaque opera
urbis videre poterant.

In moenibus stabant mult! principes.

civis lapides aliaque tela

Principes

ubi viderunt
iacere.

Romanes, iusserunt

de muris

Tum milites fortes contineri a proelio non poterant et Seer imperator signum tuba dari iussit. Summa vi omnes properaverunt. Imperator Sexto legato impedimenta omnia mandavit. Sextus impedimenta
hostes
in

summo

colle conlocavit.

Grave
PaucI

et acre erat proelium, sed 10

non pares Romanis

erant.

Alii interfecti, alii capti sunt.

Apud

captivos erant mater sororque regis.

vulnerati sunt.
fortibus
II.
I.

Romanorum ab
erat gratum.

hostibus

Secundum proelium Romanis

favet.

Fortuna
seize the

semper

Some months

top of the mountain was

are short, others are long. difficult. 3. Among the

4.

2.
hills

To

many

beautiful springs.

The

of Italy are soldiers were sitting where the bag-

gage had been placed because their feet were weary. 5. The dty which the soldiers were eager to storm had been fortified by strong
walls

and high towers.

all

6.

Did not the king

intrust a

heavy crown

of gold and

his

money

to a faithless slave? Yes, but the slave

had never before been

faithless.

AQUILA LEGIONS

Il6

THE FOURTH OR ^-DECLENSION LESSON XLVI

THE FOURTH OR J7-DECLENSI0N

259. Nouns of the fourth declension are either masculine or neuter.

260. Masculine nouns end in -us, neuters in -u.
in -us.
a.

The

genitive ends

Feminine by exception are domus, house; manus, hand ; and a

others.

few

PARADIGMS
adventus, m., arrival

comu,

n.,

horn

Bases

EXPRESSIONS OF PLACE
duci.
4.

II7
5.

Pro

castris

cum hostium

equitdtQ

pugn^tum est

Post

tempus breve equitatus trans flumen fugit ubi castra hostium posita erant. 6. Tum victor imperator agros vastavit et vicOs hostium cremSvit.
et locus
7.
difficilis.

Castra autem n5n oppugnSvit quia mllitgs erant defessl 8. Hostes non cessaverunt iacere tela, quae paucis

nocuerunt. 9. Post adversum proelium principes Gallonim legStos ad Caesarem mittere studebant, sed populo persuadere non poterant. II. 1. Did you see the man-of-war on the lake? 2. I did not see
it

{fern.)

on the

lake,

but

saw

it

in the harbor.

3.

Because of
4.

the strong wind the sailor forbade his brother to

didn't
5.

sail.

Caesar

make an attack on the No, he made an attack on

obey?
difficult.

cavalry on the

right wing, did he?

the

left

swift horse to

7. I trained

my

wing. 6. horse with

Who taught your my (own) hands,

nor was the task

strength.

8.

He

is

a beautiful animal and has great

LESSON XLVII
EXPRESSIONS OF PLACE
262.

THE DECLENSION OF DOMUS

We have become
:

thoroughly familiar with expressions like the

followmg

Q^y^ ^^ ^^^ .^-^ oppidum properat Galba ab (dc or ex) oppid5 properat Golba in oppid5 habitat

From
263.

these expressions

we may deduce

the following rules

Rule.

Accusative of the Place

in

to.

77/^ place to which is

expressed by ad or
question Whither?
264.

with the accusative.

This answers the

Rule.

Ablative of the Place from.

The

place

from which

is

expressed by a or ab, de, i or ex, with the separative ablative. This answers the question Whence ? (Cf Rule, 1 79.)
.

265.

Rule.

Ablative of the Place at or in.

in.

The

place at or in

which is expressed by the ablative with

This answers the

question

Where f

Il8
a.
(cf.

EXPRESSIONS OF PLACE
The
ablative denoting the place

where

is

called the locative ablative

locus, place).

266. Exceptions. Names of towns, small islands,^ domus, home, rus, country, and a few other words in common use omit the prepositions in expressions of place, as,

Galba Athenas properat, Galba hastens to Athens Galba Athenis properat, Galba hastens fro7n Athens Galba Athenis habitat, Galba lives at (or in) Athens Galba domum properat, Galba hastens home Galba riis properat, Galba hastens to the country
Galba dom5 properat, Galba hastetis from home Galba rure properat, Galba hastens from the country Galba ruri (less commonly riire) habitat, Galba lives in
the country
a.

Names

of countries, like Germania, Italia,

etc.,

do not come under

these exceptions.

With them prepositions must not

be omitted.

267. The Locative Case.

We

saw above

that the place-relation ex-

pressed by at or in is regularly covered by the locative ablative. However, Latin originally expressed this relation by a separate form known
as the locative case.
tive

excepting in the singular

This case has been everywhere merged in the ablanumber of the first and second declenis like

sions.

The form
and
its

of the locative in these declensions

the genitive
islands,

singular,

use

is

limited to

names of towns and small

domi, at home, and a few other words.

^68.
in

which

Rule. Locative and Locative Ablative. To express the place with names of towns and small islands, if they are sin;

gular and of the first or second declension, use the locative; otherwise

use the locative ablative without a prepositio7i

as,

Galba Romae habitat, Galba lives at Rome Galba Corinthi habitat, Galba lives at Corinth Galba domi habitat, Galba lives at home

' Small islands are classed with towns because they generally have but one town, and the name of the town is the same as the name of the island.

DOMUS
first

119

Here R5mae, Corinthi, and domi arc locatives, being singular and of the and second declensions respectively. But in
Galba Athenis habitat, Galba lives at Athens, Galba Pompeiis habitat, Galba lives at Pompeii

Athenis and Pompeiis are locative ablatives. These words can have no locative case, as the nominatives Athenae and Pompeii are//nz/and there
is

no

plural locative case form.

269. The word domus, home, house, has forms of both the second and the fourth declension. Learn its declension ( 468).

270.

EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary," p. 293.

I.

I.

Corinthi omnia insignia auri a ducibus victoribus rapta erant.

Caesar Genavam exercitum magnis itineribus duxit. 3. Quern pontem hostes cremaverant? Pontem in Rheno hostes cremaverant.
2. 4.

Pompeiis multas

Romanorum demos

videre poteritis.

5.

Roma

cOnsul equ5 veloci rus properavit. 6. Domi consulis homines multi sedebant. 7. Imperator iusserat legatum Athgnas cum multis nSvibus
longis navigare.
9.

8.

Ante moenia urbis sunt Ordines arborum altarum.

Propter arborcs altas ncc lacum nee portum reperire potuimus. 10. Proeliis crebris Caesar legiones suas quae erant in Gallia ex11. Cotidig
in

ercebat,
II.
1.

loco

idoneo castra ponebat et muniebat

Rome,

Caesar, the famous general, when he had departed from hastened to the Roman province on a swift horse.* 2. He had

heard a rumor concerning the allies at Geneva. 3. After his arrival Caesar called the soldiers together and commanded them to join battle.
4.

The enemy hastened

others because* of
the place where the

some because * they were afraid, wounds. 5. Recently I was at Athens and saw judges used to sit.* 6. Marcus and Sextus are my
to retreat,

brothers

the

one

lives at

Rome,

the other in the country.

" * Latin says by a swift horse." What construction ? Distinguish between the English conjunction because (quia or quod) and the preposition * mc-: Abecause ^(propter). sit, express by the imperfect

DAEDALUS ET ICARUS
^_^
J

20

THE FIFIH OR ^-DECLENSION

271.

12I

Daed'alus and Ic'arus

6lim Min5s erat rx.

fugiSbat.

Creta est Insula antiqua quae aqua alta magni maris pulsatur. Ibi Ad cum venit Daedalus qui ex Graecia patria

Eum
^

Minos rex benignis verbis accepit

in loco

et ei domicilium in

Creta dedit.
et clara

Quo

opera faciebat.

Daedalus sine cur5 vivebat et regl multa Post tempus longum autem Daedalus patriam
regi per-

caram desiderare incepit Domum properare studebat, sed suadere n6n potuit et mare saevum fugam vetabat.

LESSON XLVIII
THE FIFTH OR JF-DECLENSION
272. Gender.
digs, day^

THE ABLATIVE OF TIME

Nouns

of the fifth declension are feminine except

and meridiSs, midday^ which are usually masculine.

273.

122
1.

ABLATIVE OF TIME
The vowel
e

in every form is regularly long. It is a consonant, as in r-ei; and before -m in the accusative singular, as in di-em. (Cf 1 2. 2.) 2. Only dies and res are complete in the plural. Most other nouns of

which appears
-ei after

shortened in the ending

this declension lack the plural.

Acies, line

of battle, and

spes, hope,

have

the nominative and accusative plural.

274.

The

ablative relation ( 50) which

is

expressed by the prepablative

time.

ositions at, in, or 071

may
is

refer not only to place, but also to time,

as at noon, in summer, on the first day.

to express this relation

The
of

which

is

used

called the ablative

275.
which

Rule. The

Ablative of Time.
is

The

ti7ne

when or within

anytlmig happens

expressed by the ablative without a

preposition.
a.

Occasionally the preposition

in is

found.

Compare

the English

Next

day we started and On the next day we

started.

276.

EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 294.

I.

Galba the Farmer. Galba agricola run

vivit.

Cotidie prima luce

laborare incipit, nee ante noctem in studio suo cessat. Meridie lulia Nocte pedes defessos domum vertit. filia eum ad cenam vocat.

Aestate

filii

agricolae auxilium patri dant.

Hieme

agricola eos in

ludum

mittit.

lb; magister pueris multas fabulas de rebus gestis

Caesaris narrat.

Aestate

filii

agricolae perpetuis laboribus exercentur

nee grave agri opus est res adversas timet.

II.
I.

iis

molestum.

Galba sine

ulla

cura vivit nee

In that month there were

many battles

in Gaul.

2.

The

cav-

alry of the enemy made an attack upon Caesar's line of battle. 3. In the first hour of the night the ship was overcome by the billows. 4. On the second day the savages were eager to come under Caesar's protection.
6.

moved by the hope of 5. The king had joined battle, That year a fire destroyed many birds and other animals. saw blood on the wild beast's teeth.

victory.
7.

We

PRONOUNS CLASSIFIED
277.

23

Daed'alus am. h arus (Continued)

curis

Turn Daedalus gravibus

"
I

commOtus filiOsuS icar5

ita dixit:

nee ocull lacrimis egent. sed rex re)iscedere ex Creta, Athcnas properre, maxime studeo Cisat audire verba mea et omnem reditus spem eripit. Sed numquam
Icare, est plenus tristitiae
;

Animus meus,

rebus adversis vincar.

Terra
in

et

mare sunt
ighotas

inimica, sed aliam fugae

dimittit et

viam reperiam."
capit consilium.

Turn

artis

animum

mirum

Nam

pennas

in Qrdine ponit et vras alas fadt.

LESSON XLIX
PRONOUNS CLASSIFIED PERSONAL AND REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS

278.

We

have the same kinds of pronouns

in
:

Latin as in English.

They

are divided into the following eight classes

1. Personal pronouns, which show the person speaking, spoken to, or spoken of; as, ego, /; t% you ; is, he. (Cf. 279, etc.) 2. Possessive pronouns, which denote possession; as, meus, tuus,

8UU8, etc.
3.

(Cf. 98.) Reflexive pronouns, used in the predicate to refer back to the
as, he saw himself. (Cf. 281.) Intensive pronouns, used to emphasize a
;

subject
4.

noun or pronoun

as,

I myself saw
5.
is, this, that.

it.

(Cf. 285.)
;

Demonstrative pronouns, which point out persons or things

(Cf.

as,

i 112.)

6.

Relative pronouns, which connect a subordinate adjective clause

as, qui, who. (("f. 220.) Interrogative pronouns, which ask a question; as, quia,
;

with an antecedent
7.

who^

(Cf. 225.)
8.

Indefinite pronouns,

which point out

(Cf

indefinitely

as,

some one,

any
is
it,

one, some, certain ones, etc.

279.

The demonstrative pronoun

is, ea, id,

as

we

learned in 115,

regularly used as the personal

they, etc.).

pronoun of the

third person (he, she,

124

PERSONAL AND REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS

280. The personal pronouns of the first person are ego, I; nos, we; of the second person, tu, thou or you ; vos, ye or you. They are declined as follows
:

Singular
first person

second person

Nam.
Gen.

ego,

/
me
etc.,

Dat.
Ace.

mei, of me mihi, to or for

you ofyou tibi, to ox for you

tu,
tui,

me,

me
me
Plural

te,you
te,

AM.

me, with^from^

with, from,

etc.,

you

Nom.
Gen.

n5s,

we
nostri,

vos,

you
vestri,

nostrum or
nos, us

of us

vestrum or

ofyou

Dat.
Ace.

nobis, to ox for us

v5bis, to ox for you

vos,

you

AM.
1.

nobis, with, from, etc., us

vobis, with, from, etc.,

you

personal pronouns are not used in the nominative excepting for emphasis or contrast.

The

281. The Reflexive Pronouns,

tu

i.

The

personal pronouns ego and

;

may

be used

in the predicate as reflexives

as,

video me, / see myself vides te, you see yourself

2.

videmus nos, we
videtis vos,

see ourselves

you

see yourselves

The

reflexive

pronoun of the

third person {himself, herself, itself

themselves^ has a special form, used only in these senses,

alike in the singular

and declined

and

plural.

Singular and Plural

Gen.
sui
sibi

Ace.

se

Dat.

AM.

se

Puer se videt, the boy sees hiynself

Examples-

Puella se videt, the girl sees herself Animal se videt, the animal sees itself
li

se vident, they see themselves

sese, for

a.

The form

se

is

sometimes doubled,

emphasis.

CC/MV/ITH PRONOUNS
3.

25

Give the Latin for

/ feacA myself
You teach yourself

We teach

ourselves

You teach yourselves

They teach themselves

He
282.
ex 8ui,

teaches himself

The
is

preposition cum,

when used with

the ablative of ego,

tfl,

appended

to the form, as,

etc.

mecum, with me; tecum, with you ;

nSbiscum, with us;

283.

EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 294.

I.

I.

Mea

mater est cara mihi

et tua

mater est cara

tibi.

2.

Vestrae

litterae

erant gratae vobls. 3. Nuntius rggis qui nobiscum est nihil respondebit. 4. Nuntii pacem
sibi et suis sociis

erant gratae nobis et nostrae litterae

amicitiamque
nostrum.
petierant.
9.

postulaverunt.

5. Si tu

arma sumes,
.'*

ego regnum occupabo.

7.

6.

Uter vestrum

est civis

Romanus

Neuter

Eo tempore multi supplicium dederunt quia regnum 8. Sume supplicium, Caesar, de hostibus patriae acribus.
alii

Prima luce

metu commoti sese fugae mandaverunt;

alii

autem magna
regis, ubi
II.
I.

virtute

impetum

exercitus nostri sustinuerunt.

10.

Soror

de adverso proelio audivit, sese Pompeiis interfecit. Whom do you teach? I teach myself. 2. The soldier
his sword.
3.

wounded himself with

The master

praises us, but

you

he does not praise. 4. Therefore he will inflict punishment on you, but we shall not suffer punishment. 5. Who will march (i.e. make a march)
with
7.

me

to
will

Rome ?

6. I will

Who

show us ^

the

way

march with you to the gates of the city. ? The gods will show you * the way.

Daed'alus and Ic'arus {Concluded)

284. Puer Icarus una
*

stabat et

mirum
fili

quam manus
et dixit,

ultima*

alis

imposita
alas

est,

patris opus videbat. PostDaedalus eSs temptvit et similis

avi in auras volavit.

Tum
fili,

umeris

adligavit et docuit
s5li

eum

volare

"

Te

veto,

mi

adpropinquare aut

aut mari.

Si fluctibus
5

adpropinquaveris,* aqua
*

alis tuis nocSbit, et si s6li

adpropinquaveris,*
*

Not

accusative.

finishing touch.

What literally

manna nltima, the Adverb, see vocabulary. * ? Future perfect. Translate by the present.

126

THE PRONOUNS IPSE AND IDEM

Turn pater
et filius iter difficile incipiunt.

ignis eas cremabit."

Alas

movent
p5ret.
et
5

et aurae sese committunt.

Soli adpropinquat.
amittit.

Sed

stultus

puer verbis patris non

Alae cremantur

et Icarus in

mare

decidit

vltam

Daedalus autem sine uUo periculo trans fluctus ad

insulam Siciliam volavit.

LESSON L
THE INTENSIVE PRONOUN IPSE AND THE DEMONSTRATIVE IDEM
even or very.
-self {himself, herself, etc.) or is translated by used to emphasize a noun or pronoun, expressed or understood, with which it agrees like an adjective.
It is
a.

285. Ipse means

latter is

Ipse must be carefully distinguished from the reflexive sui. The always used as a pronoun, while ipse is regularly adjective. Compare

Homo se videt, the man sees himself (reflexive) Homo ipse periculum videt, the man himself (intensive) sees the danger Homo ipsum periculum videt, the man sees the danger itself (intensive)
286. Except for the one form ipse, the intensive pronoun is deexactly like the nine irregular adjectives (cf. io8, 109).
( 481).

clined

Learn the declension

287.
of
is.

The demonstrative
Singular
masc.

idem, meaning the same,

:

is

compound

It is declined as follows

fem.

neut.

Nom. idem
Gen. eius^dem

e'adem
eius'dem
ei'dem

idem
eius'dem
ei'dem

Dat.
Ace. Abl.
a.

ei'dem

eun'dem
eo'dem

ean'dem
ea'dem
like

idem
eo'dem
\ "7 ,, [.els

dem

eis

,,

dem

^tcM^^, dem eis

From forms

we

learn the rule that

b.

The forms

before d is changed to n. iidem, iisdem are often spelled and pronounced with one

eundem (eum + -dem), eorundem (eonim + -dem),

i.

EXERCISES
288.

127

EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 295.

I
.

Ego

et to

in

eSdem urbe

vivimus.

2. Iter

ipsum n6n timemus

scd leras saevas quae in silva densa esse dicuntur. 3. Olim nos ipsi idem iter fecimus. 4. Eo tempore multas feras vidimus. 5. Sed nobis

non nocuerunt.
in

6.

Caesar ipse scutum de manibus

militis eripuit et

ipsam aciem properavit. 7. Itaque milites summa virtute tela in hostium corpora iecerunt. 8. Roman! quoque gravia vulnera acceperunt.
10.

9.

Denique hostes terga vert^runt et omnis in partis* fugerunt. Eadem bora litterae Romam ab imperatore ipso missae sunt.

11.

Eodem mense

captivi

quoque
difficile

iii

Italiam miss! sunt.

12.

Sed

multi propter vulnera iter

trans monfis facere recusabant et

Genavae esse dicebantur.

II.
I.

in that place, I
cities
4.

At Pompeii there myself saw

is

a wonderful mountain.
3.

2.

When

was

that mountain.

On

the

same day many

were destroyed by fire and stones from that very mountain. You have not heard the true story of that calamity, have you?*
that

5.

On

day the very sun could not give

tell

light to

men.

6.

You

yourself ought to

(to)

us that story.

289.

How

HORATIUS HELD THE BrIDGE*

cxsilium ab irStis

Tarquinius Superbus, Septimus et ultimus rx ROmanorum, ubi in Romanis eiectus est, a Porsena, rege Etruscorum,
petiit.

auxilium
ipsa urbs

Omnibus in partibus exercitus periculo Romanus victus erat. lam rex montem laniculum' occupaverat. Numquam antea Roman! tanto metu tenebantur. Ex agris in urbem properabant et summQ studio urbem ipsam muniebant.
erat.

Mox summo in

Porsena magnis

cum

copiis

Romam

vnit, et

but directions.

we say I and you, no\. you and I. "Not parts, * The 210. story of Horatius has been made " " familiar by Macaulay's well-known poem Horatius in his Lays of Ancient The Rome. Read the poem in connection with this selection. Janiculum is a high hill across the Tiber from Rome.
1

Observe that

in Latin
Cf.

128

THE DEMONSTRATIVES

HIC, ISTE, ILLE

LESSON
We
is

LI
HIC, ISTE,

THE DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS

290.

ILLE

have already learned the declension of the demonstrative its use. (Cf. Lesson XVII.) That pronoun refers to persons or things either far or near, and makes no definite reference to place or time. If we wish to point out an object definitely in place

pronoun

and

or time,
is,

we must

use

hie, iste, or ille.

These demonstratives,

like

are used both as pronouns and as adjectives, and their relation to the speaker may be represented graphically thus
:

hie

iste

ille

Speaker
this^

he (near)

that^ he (remote)

that^ he (more remote)

a. In dialogue hie refers to a person or thing near the speaker iste, to a person or thing near the person addressed ille, to a person or thing remote from both. These distinctions are illustrated in the model sentences,
;

293,

which should be
is

carefully studied

and

imitated.

291. Hie

declined as follows

THE DEMONSTRATIVES
293.

HIC, ISTE, ILLE

129

MODEL SENTENCES
Estne hie equus validus ?
Iste

Is this horse (of mine) strong?

That horse

one (yonder)

(of yours) is is weak

strongs but that\

J

equus est validus, sed

est infirmus
tui ?

ille

Are

these

(men by mt) yourfriends f

Suntne hi amici
Isti

Those

{jfxtn by you) are my friends^ but^ those (men yonder) are enemies /

sunt amici mei, sed illi sunt inimici

294.

EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 295.

I. A German Chieftain addresses his Followers. Ille fortis Germn6rum dux su5s convoc5vit et h6c modo animOs eonim cOnfir-

mavit

"

mecum
liberare.

Vos, qui in his finibus vivitis, in hunc locum convocavi^ quia debetis istos agros et istas domos ab iniuriis Romanorum

Hoc

nobis nOn

difficile

erit,

densas, fers saevas

qurum

vestigia vident,

quod illi hostgs has silvas montes altos timent. Si

isti

fortes erimus, dei ipsi nobis viam salutis demonstrabunt. Ille sol, oculi calamitates nostras viderunt.* nomen illius rei

Itaque

pu-

blicae

Romanae non solum

nobis, sed etiam

omnibus hominibus qui

Exercete istam
10

libertatem amant, est invisum.

Ad arma

vos voco.

pristinam virtu tem et vincetis."

II.
I.

Does
in

that bird (of yours)* sing?

2.

This bird (of mine)*

voice.
in

sings both*
3.
4.

summer and
in

in winter

and has a beautiful

don't

(yonder)* country sing Snatch a spear from the hands of that soldier (near you)* and come home with me. 5. With those very eyes (of yours)* you will see the tracks of the hateful enemy who burned my dwelling and made an
attack on
inflict
lic

Those

birds

the

winter.

my brother.

6.

For (propter) these deeds

7.

(rCs)

we ought

to

punishment on him without delay.

suffer punishment.

The enemies

of the repub-

do not always
'

The perfect definite. (Cf. 190.) English words in parentheses are not to be translated. They arc inserted to show what demonstratives should both be ued. (Cf. { 290.) . and, et . . . et.
. .

I^O

INDEFINITE PRONOUNS

HORATIUS PONTEM DEFENDIT

295.

How

HoRATius held the Bridge {Continued)

Altera urbis pars muris, altera flumine satis munlrl videbatur. Sed erat pons in flumine qui hostibus iter paene dedit. Turn Horatius " Rescindite pontem, Roman! Codes, fortis vir, magna voce dixit,
!

Brevi tempore Porsena in urbem copias suas traducet." lam hostes in ponte erant, sed Horatius cum duobus (cf. 479) comitibus ad

extremam
runt.

Tum

pontis partem properavit, et hi soli aciem hostium sustinuevero cives Romani pontem a tergo rescindere incipiunt,

et hostes frustra

Horatium superare temptant.

LESSON

LII

THE INDEFINITE PRONOUNS

296. The indefinite pronouns are used to refer to some person or some things without indicating which particular one is meant. The pronouns quis and qui, which we have learned in their interrogative and relative uses, may also be indefinite and nearly all the other in;

definite
like

pronouns are compounds of quis or qui and declined almost them. Review the declension of these words, 221, 227-

INDEFINITE PRONOUNS

131
:

297. Learn the declension and meaning of the following indefinites

Masc.
quid,

Neut.

some

one,

any one

(substantive)

quod, some,
aliquid,

any (adjective), 483 some one, any one (substan487

tive),

any (adjective), 487 quoddam, quiddam, a certain, a certain one, 485 quicquam or quidquam (no plural), any one (at all) (substantive), 486
aliquod, some,

qnidque, each one, every one (substantive),

484

quodque, each^ every (adjectiveX 484

132
298.

EXERCISES
EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 295.

I.

I.

Aliquis de ponte in flumen decidit sed sine uUo periculo ser-

2. Est vero in vita cuiusque hominis aliqua bona fortuna. militum quidem^ quisquam in castris mansit. 4. Si quern meae domi vides, iube eum discedere. 5. Si quis pontem tenet, ne tantus

vatus
3.

est.

Ne

quidem exercitus capere urbem

et meridie rex
7.

potest.

6.

Urbs non

satis

munlta erat

quidam paene copias suas trans pontem traduxerat. Denique miles quidam armatus in fluctiis desiluit et incolumis ad

alteram ripam oculos vertit. 8. Quisque illi forti militi aliquid dare debet 9. Tanta vero virtus Romanis semper placuit. 10. Olim Coerat urbs satis magna et paene par Romae ipsi; nunc vero moenia deciderunt et pauca vestigia urbis illius reperiri possunt. 1 1. Quisque libertatem amat, et aliquibus vero nomen regis est invisum.

rinthus

II.
2.

I.

If

you see a

certain Cornelius at Corinth, send

him

to me.

Almost

all

the soldiers
at

who

fell

down
I

into the

waves were unfire.

harmed.

3.

Not even

Pompeii did

see so great a

4. I

myself was eager to tell something to some one. 5. Each one was praising his own work. 6. Did you see some one in the country ? I did not see any one. 7. Unless some one will remain on the bridge
with Horatius, the commonwealth
will

be

in the greatest danger.

299.

How

Horatius held the Bridge (Concluded)

Mox, ubi parva pars pontis mansit, Horatius iussit comites discedere et solus mira constantia impetum illius totius exercitus sustingbat.
Denique magno fragore pons in flumen decidit. Tum vero Horatius tergum vertit et armatus in aquas desiluit. In eum hostes multa tela
5

iecerunt

incolumis autem per fluctus ad alteram ripam tranavit.

Ei

propter tantas res gestas populus

Romanus non solum

alia

magna

praemia dedit sed etiam statuam Horati

in loco publico posuit.

Sixth Review, Lessons XLV-LII, 521-523

1

Observe that qaldam and quidem are different words.

COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES

33

LESSON

LIII

REGULAR COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES

300. The quality denoted by an adjective may exist in either a higher or a lower degree, and this is expressed by a form of inflection called comparison. The mere presence of the quality is expressed by the positive degree,
presence in a higher or lower degree by the comparative, and in the highest or lowest of all by the superlative. In English the usual way of comparing an adjective is by using the suffix -er for the comparative and
its

est for the superlative

as, positive

highest.

Less frequently

we

high, comparative higher, superlative use the adverbs more and most; as, positive

beautiful, comparative

more

beautiful, superlative

most beautiful.

In Latin, as in English, adjectives are compared by adding suffixes or by using adverbs. 301. Adjectives are compared by using suffixes as follows Superlative Comparative Positive
:

clams, -a, -um {bright) (Base clar-) brevis, breve {short)

(Base brer-)
velfix {swift)

clarior, clarius

clarissimus, -a,
{brightest)

-um -um
-um

{brighter)
brevior, brevius

brevlssimus, -a,
{shortest)

{shorter) yelScior, yel5cius

vel5cissimus, -a,
{swiftest)

(Base veldc-)
a.
-ior

{swifter)

The comparative is formed from the base of the positive by adding masc. and fem., and -ius neut.; the superlative by adding -issimus,

-issima, -issimum.

302. Less frequently adjectives are compared by using the adverbs magis, more; maximS, most; as, idOneus, suitable; magis idOneus, more suitable ; maximS idOneus, most suitable.

303. Declension of the Comparative. Adjectives of the comparative degree are declined as follows
:

Singular
ICASC

Plural

AND

FEM.

134
a.

COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES
Obsen^e that the endings are those of the consonant stems of the

third declension.
b.

Compare

longus, lo?igj fortis, brave ; recens (base, recent-), recent ;

and decline the comparative of each.

304. Adjectives in -er form the comparative regularly, but the superformed by adding -rimus, -a, -um to the nominative masculine
;

lative is

of the positive

as,

Positive
acer, acris, acre

Comparative
acrior, acrius

Superlative
acerrimus, -a,

-um
-a,

(Base acr-)
pulcher, pulchra, pulchrum
pulchrior, pulchrius
liberior, liberius

pulcherrimus,
liberrimus, -a,

-um

(Base pulchr-) liber, libera, liberum

-um

(Base
^.

liber-)

In a similar manner compare miser, aeger, creber.

305.

The comparative

is

often translated by quite,

as, altior, quite (too,

too,

or somemhat,
altis-

and the superlative by very;

simus, very high.
306.

somewhat) high;

EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 296.

I.

I.

tunissimum

Quid exploratores quaerebant? Exploratores tempus opporitineri quaerebant. 2. Media in silva ignis quam creber-

rimos fecimus, quod feras tam audacis

3.

numquam

antea videramus.

Antiquls temporibus German! erant fortiores quam Galli. 4. Caesar erat clarior quam inimici^ qui eum necaverunt. 5. Quisque scutum

ingens et pilum longius gerebat. audacissimi et fortissimi, 7. Mens

.

Apud hominum
6.

barbaros German! erant

est celerior

quam

corpus.

aliquarum terrarum sunt miserrimi. 9. Corpora Germanorum erant ingentiora quam Romanorum. 10. AcerrimI Gallorum principes
8. Viri

sine

iilla

mora

trans fltimen

II. Aestate dies sunt longiores

quoddam equos velocissimos traduxerunt. quam hieme. 12. Imperator quidam

ab exploratoribus de recent! adventu navium longarum quaesivit.

II. I. Of all birds the eagle is the sv^iftest. 2. Certain animals are swifter than the swiftest horse. 3. The Roman name was most
^

Why

is

this

word used instead of hostSs ?

IRREGULAR COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES

hateful to the enemies of the
inflicted the severest*
ill,

135

commonwealth.

4.

The Romans always

5. I

and so

punishment on faithless allies. hastened from the city to the country.

7.

was quite

some

friends dearer than Caesar.*

Marcus had Did you not seek a more recent

6.

report concerning the battle ? 8. Not even after a victory so opportune did he seek the general's friendship.

N.B. Beginning at this point, the selections for reading near the end of the volume. (See p. 197.)

will

be found

LESSON LIV
IRREGULAR COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES THE ABLATIVE WITH COMPARATIVES WITHOUT QUAM

following six adjectives in -lis form the comparative but the superlative is formed by adding -limus to the base of the positive. Leam the meanings and comparison.

307.

The
;

regularly

Positive
facilis, -,

Comparative
facilior, -ius
difficilior, -ius

Superlative

easy

difficilis, -e,

hard

similis, -e, like

similior, -ius

dissimilis, -, unlike
gracilis, -e,

dissimilior, -ius
gracilior, -ius

slender

humilis,

-e,

low

humilior, -iua

-um -um simillimus, -a, -um dissimillimus, -a, -um gracillimus, -a, -um humillimus, -a, -um
facillimus, -a,
difficillimus, -a,

308. From the knowledge gained in the preceding lesson should translate the sentence Nothing is brighter than the sun
Nihil est clirius

we

quam

861

But the Romans, especially in negative sentences, often expressed the comparison in this way,
Nihil est cUrius sSIe

which,
that
is,

literally translated, is

starting

from

the

Nothing is brighter away from the sun; sun as a standard, nothing is brighter. This
aCle.

relation is expressed
*

by the separative ablative

Hence

the rule

Accusative. In a Use the superlative of graria. comparison the noun after quam is in the same case as the one before it.

136
309.

ABLATIVE WITH COMPARATIVES

Rule.
Ablative with Comparatives.

The comparative

de-

gree^ if quam is omitted^ is followed by the separative ablative.

310.

EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 296.

I.

I.

Nemo

milites alacriores

Romanis

vidit.

2.

Statim imperator
3.

iussit

nuntios

quam

celerrimos litteras
4.

Romam
vidi.

portare.

Multa
clarior

flumina

sunt leniora Rheno.

5. Nihil

Apud Romanes

quis erat

Caesare?

pulchrius

urbe

Roma

6.

Subito multitudo
7.

audacissima

magno clamore proelium

?

acrius commisit.

Num

est

equus tuus tardus

Non

Romae
cibum

fui,

nemo
11. Ille
vias,

e'rat

vero tardus, sed celerior aquila. 8. Ubi mihi amicior Sexto. 9. Quaedam mulieres
10.

militibus dare cupiverunt.

Rex

vetuit civis ex urbe noctu

discedere.

duas {two)
II.
I.

12. Explorator alteram facilem, alteram difficiliorem, demonstravit.

puer est

gracilior

hac muliere.

What

city

have you seen more beautiful than

Rome ?

2.

The

Gauls were not more eager than the Germans. 3. The eagle is not slower than the horse. 4. The spirited woman did not fear to make
the journey by night.
5.

The mind

of the multitude

was

quite gentle
7.

and

friendly.

6.

But the king's mind was very

noble father.
territory.
8.

different.

The king
are lower

was not

like (similar to) his

These

hills

than the huge mountains of our

ARMA ROMANA

IRREGULAR COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES

137

LESSON LV
IRREGULAR COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES
311.
(Continued)

Some

adjectives in

English have irregular comparison, as

g^oo/if

better, best ;

many, more, most.

So Latin comparison presents some

compared
irregularly are

irregularities.

Among

the adjectives that are

Positive
bonus,
-a,

Comparative
melior, melius

Superlative
-a, -um maximus, ^, -um pessimus, -a, -um

-um, good

optimus,

magnus,
malus,
multus,

-a,

-a,

-um, great -um, bad

-um,

maior, maius
peior, peius
,

-a,

much

plus

plurimus,

-a,

-um

multi, -ae, -a,

many

plures, plura

plurimi, -ae, -a

parvus,

-a,

-um, small

minor, minus

minimus,

-a,

-am

312.

The

following four adjectives have two superlatives.

in parentheses.
(exterior, -ius,
-a,

Unusual

forms are placed

exterus, -a, -am,

-um ^ outermost,
J
*|

outward
inferus, -a,

outer)

{extremus, (extimus, -a, -um)

f

last

-um,

inferior, -ius,

low
posterus, -a, -um,

lower
(posterior, -ius,

next
superus, -a, -um,

later)
superior, -ius,

-um \ imus, -a, -um J r postremus, -a, -um 1 \(postumus, -a, -imi) /
infimus, -a,

lowest

last

above

higher

r.prtmus,-a,-um| summus, -a, -um J

l^

'*

313. Plfis, more (plural more, many, several),

is

declined as follows

Singular
m asc. and pem.
A'OM.
Ct-n.

Da/.

Au:
Abl.

138
314.

IRREGULAR COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES

EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 296,

Reliqui hostes, qui a dextro cornu proelium commiserant, de superiore loco fugerunt et sese in silvam maximam receperunt. 2. In
I.

I.

extrema parte silvae castra hostium posita erant. 3. Plurimi captivi ab equitibus ad Caesarem ducti sunt. 4. Caesar vero iussit eos in servi-

tutem

tradi.

5.

Postero die
est. 6.

magna

multitudo mulierum ab Romanis

in valle

ima reperta

Hae

mulieres
7.

maxime

perterritae adventu

Caesaris sese occidere studebant.

citus

Eae quoque
8.

pluris fabulas

de exer-

Roman!
erat.
9.

sceleribus audiverant.

Fama

illorum mllitum optima

non
est.

In barbarorum

aedificiis

maior copia frumenti reperta

dwellings and hid

10.
I.

Nemo

crebris proeliis contendere sine aliquo periculo potest.

their

II.

not wish to be captured and given over into slavery. 3. Nothing can be worse than slavery. 4. Slavery is worse than death. 5. In the Roman empire a great many were killed because they refused to be slaves. 6. To surrender the
themselves.
fatherland
is

The remaining women fled from 2. They were terrified and did

the worst crime.

LESSON LVI
IRREGULAR COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES (Concluded) OF THE MEASURE OF DIFFERENCE
315.

ABLATIVE

The

superlative and have no

theses.

following adjectives are irregular in the formation of the positive. Forms rarely used are in paren-

Comparative
citerior,

Superlative
(citimus, hithermosf)

hither

interior,

inner

(intimus, inmost)

^xiox J former

propior, nearer
ulterior,

primus, yfrj-/ proximus, next^ nearest

ultimus, furthest
is

further

316. In the sentence Galba

a head taller than Sextus, the phrase

a head taller expresses the measure of difference in height between

ABLATIVE OF THE MEASURE OF DIFFERENCE

taller

139

Galba and Sextus. The Latin form of expression would be Galba is than Sextus by a head. This is clearly an ablative relation, and
the construction
'

is

called the ablative of the

altior capite

measure

of difference.

Galba est
Examples..

quam Sextus

Galba is a head taller (taller by a head) than Sextus. niud iter ad Italiam est mult5 brevius That route to Italy is much shorter (shorter by much)
Ablative of the Measure of Difference.

317.

Rule.

With comis

to

paratives and words implying comparison the ablative denote the measure of difference.
a.

used

Especially
e6,

common

in this construction are the neuter ablatives

nihild,^

by this^ by that h6c, by this mult5| by much

by nothing

pauld, by

little

318.

EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 297.

1
.

man!

infirmi esse videbantur.

Barbari proelium committere statugnint eO magis quod Ro2. Meum consilium est multo melius

quam tuum
ilia.

4.

quia multo facilius est. 3. Haec via est multo latior quam Barbari erant nihilo tardiores quam Romanl. 5. Tuus equus

quam meus. 6. li qui paulo fortiores erant prohibuerunt reliquos aditum relinquere. 7. Inter illas civitates Germania milites habet optimos. 8. Propior via quae per banc vallem ducit est inter portum et lacum. 9. Servi, qui agros citeriores incolebant, priores
est paulo celerior

dominos relinquere non cuplverunt, quod eos amabant. 10. Ultimae Germaniae partes numquam in fidem Romanorum venerunt. 1 1 Nam
.

trans

RhSnum
I.

aditus erat multo

difficilior exercitui

Romano.
difficult

n.

Another way much more

difficult

(more

by much)

was

through hither Gaul. 2. In ancient times no state was stronger than the Roman empire. 3. The states of further Gaul did not wish to give hostages to Caesar. 4. Slavery is no better (better by
left

nothing) than death.

6.

5.

The
'

active

enemy
terrified

best citizens are not loved by the worst. immediately withdrew into the nearest forest,

The

for they
nihil

were
was

by Caesar's recent

victories.

originally nihilum and declined like pQum.

There

is

no

plural.

I40

FORMATION AND COMPARISON OF ADVERBS

LESSON

LVII

FORMATION AND COMPARISON OF ADVERBS

319. Adverbs are generally derived from adjectives, as in English Like adjectives, they can be compared (e.g. adj. sweety adv. sweetly). but they have no declension.
;

320. Adverbs derived from adjectives of the

clensions are

first

and second de-

formed and compared as follows

Positive

Comparative
carior

Superlative
canssimus
carissime

Adj.

cams, dear
care,

Adv.
Adj.

dearly

carius

pulcher, beautiful
pulchre, beautifully
liber,

pulchrior

pulcherrimus
pulcherrime
liberrimus
liberrime

Adv.
Adj.

pulchrius
liberior

free
freely

Adv.

libere,

liberius

a. The positive of the adverb is formed by adding -e to the base of the positive of the adjective. The superlative of the adverb is formed from the superlative of the adjective in the same way.
b.

The

comparative of any adverb

is

the neuter accusative singular of

the comparative of the adjective.

321. Adverbs derived from adjectives of the third declension are

formed hke those described above in the comparative and superlative. The positive is usually formed by adding -iter to the base of adjectives
of three endings or of

two endings, and

-ter to the

base of those of

one ending

^
;

as,

FORMATION AND COMPARISON OF ADVERBS

322. Case Forms as Adverbs.
accusative of comparatives
superlative
is

141

As we

learned above, the neuter

used adverbially.

So

in the positive or

some

adjectives, instead of following the usual formation,

;

use the accusative or the ablative singular neuter adverbially

Adj.
facilia,

as.

easy

primus, yfrj/

Adv.
Adj.

facile (ace), easily

'

primum
primd

{2.qx:),

first

(abl.),

at first

multus,

many
(ace.),

plurimua, most

Adv.

multum
multd

(abl.),

much by much

plurimum

(ace.),

most

323. Learn the following irregular comparisons

bene, well
diu,

melius, better
diutius, longer

optime, best
diutissime, longest

long (time)
little

magno-peTtf greatly

magis, more

parum,
>,

prope, nearly, near

minus, less propius, nearer

saepius, oftener

maxime, most minime, least

proxime, nearest
saepissime, oftenest

often

324.
rules,

Form adverbs from

:

the following adjectives, using the regular

laetus, superbus, molestus, amicus, acer,

and compare them

brevis, gravis, recgns.

325.

Rule.

Adverbs.

Adverbs modify
EXERCISES

verbs, adjectivesy

and

otiicr adverbs.

326.

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 297.

I. Nulla res melius gesta est quam proelium illud^ ubi Marius mult5 minSre exercitu multo maiores c6pias Germanorum in fugam dedit 2. Audacter in RomanOrum cohortis hostes impetus fgcerunt I.

3.

Marius autem omns hOs fortissime

erant

sustinuit.

4.

Barbail

nihilQ.

fortiOres

videbantur,

quam ROmSnl. tum ROmSni Scrius

Primo barbari esse superiOres contendrunt. 6. Denique, ubi iam

5.

diOtissime paene aequO proeliO

7.

pugnatum

est,

barbari

Quaedam GermSnOrum
I

gentes, simul atque

fugam petierunt. rOmorem illius calamisu5rum abdiderunt.

tatis

audlvCrunt, sCse in ultimls regi6nibus finium

ille

standing after

its

noun means that vHll-kn^wn, that fcuncus.

142
8.

NUMERALS
saepius

Romani

9. Inter omnis gentis

quam hostes vicerunt, quod meliora arma habebant. Romani plurimum valebant. 10. Hae cohortes
ulla

simul atque in aequiorem regionem se receperunt, castra sine

difficultate
II.
I. is

many

posuerunt. Some nations are easily overcome by their enemies. 2. Germuch larger than Gaul. 3. Were not the Romans the most

powerful

among

the tribes of Italy

4.

On

account of (his) wounds

the soldier dragged his body from the ditch with the greatest difficulty. 6. Who saved him? 5. He was able neither to run nor to fight.

horseman boldly undertook the matter. cerning the soldier's death were not true.
certain

7.

The rumors

con-

LESSON
NUMERALS
327.
1.

LVIII

THE PARTITIVE GENITIVE

:

The Latin numeral adjectives may be classified as follows Cardinal Numerals, answering the question how many ? as, unus,
;

one ; duo, two

2.

etc.

Ordinal Numerals, derived in most cases from the cardinals and

as,

answering the question in what order 1

second ;
3.

primus, first ; secundus,

etc.

Distributive Numerals, answering the question

1 as,

how many

at a

time

singuli, one at a time.

328. The Cardinal Numerals.

as follows
I,
:

The

first

twenty of the cardinals are

sedecim

iinus

12, 13,

ii,undecim duodecim
tredecim

16,

17,

septendecim

18, duodeviginti 19, undeviginti

14,

quattuordecim

15,

quindecim

20, viginti

100, ducenti

200, mille

1000.

Of the cardinals only unus, duo, above one hundreds the hundred, and mille used as a noun, are trgs,
329. Declension of the Cardinals.
declinable.

THE PARTITIVE GENiriVE

a. &niiB is

143

one of the nine irregular adjectives, The plural of Onus is used to agree with a plural noun of a singular meaning, as, una castra, one camp; and with other nouns in the
is
(cf.

and

declined like n&Uaa

109, 470).

sense of only, as, Galli uni, only the Gauls. b. Learn the declension of duo, two ; tres, three; and mille, a thousand.
(

479)
c.

The hundreds above one hundred

;

are declined

like

the

plural

of

bonus

as,

ducenti, -ae, -a

ducentSnun, -arum, -drum

etc.
etc. etc.

330.

We
:

have already become familiar with sentences

like

the

following

Omnium avium aquila est velScissima Of all birds the eagle is the swiftest Hoc Sraculum erat omnium clarissimum This oracle was the most famous of all

In such sentences the genitive denotes the whole, and the word it modifies denotes a part of that whole. Such a genitive, denoting the whole of which a part is taken, is called a partitive genitive.

331.
often

Rl LE. Partitive Genitive. Words denoting a part are used with the genitive of the whole known as the partitive
^

genitive.
a.

Words denoting

adjectives.
tive with
b.

a part are especially pronouns, numerals, and other But cardinal numbers excepting mflle regularly take the abla-

(as,

ex or de instead of the partitive genitive. a thousand, in the singular is usually an indeclinable adjective mUle milites, a thousand soldiers), but in the plural it is a declinable
Mille,
partitive genitive (as, decern milia

noun and takes the

soldiers)^

militum, ten thousand

Examples

Fortisaimi

h5rum sunt Germ&m The bravest of these are the Germans Decem milia hostium interfecta sunt Ten thousand (Vit. thousands) of the enemy were slain

Una ex captivis erat soror rSgis One of the captives was the kin^s

sister

144
332.

THE ACCUSATIVE OF EXTENT

EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 297.

I.

I.

Caesarmaximam partem aedificionim incendit.

est.

munitionis aqua fluminis deleta

milia

3. Galli

2. Magna pars huius regionis quinque

hominum
5.

coegerant.

audiverunt.

Quis

4. Duo Romanorum

ex meis fratribus eundem rumorem

erat clarior Caesare?
6.

cohortes ex

ilia

legione castra
^

quam

fortissime defendebant.

Quinque 7. Hie

locus aberat aequo spatio

8.
9.

ab

castris Caesaris et castris

Germanorum.

Caesar simul atque pervenit, plus commeatus ab sociis postulavit. Nonne mercatores magnitudinem insulae cognoverant ? Longitudi-

nem

sed non latitudinem cognoverant. 10. Pauci hostium obtinebant coUem quern exploratores nostri viderunt. II. I.I have two brothers, and one of them lives at Rome. 2. Cassar

stormed that very town with three legions. stroyed a great part of the fortification. 4.

3.

In one hour he dethe

When

enemy could

defend the gates, they retreated to a hill which was not far distant. 5. There three thousand of them bravely resisted the

no longer
Romans.*

LESSON LIX
NUMERALS
333. Learn the
(Continued)
first
all

THE ACCUSATIVE OF EXTENT

twenty of the ordinal numerals ( 478).

declined like bonus.

The
334.

ordinals are

The

distributive

numerals are declined

like the plural of bonus.

The

first

three are
singuli, -ae, -a,
bini, -ae, -a,

one each^ one by one

each,

two

two by two
by three

terni, -ae, -a, three each, three

335.
is

We

We used to express a have had such expressions as per plurimOs annOs, for great many
Not Ablative of the measure of difference. longius. * Not the accusative. was distant by a small space.
1

have learned that, besides its use as object, the accusative space relations not covered by the ablative.

Why ?

Latin,

THE ACCUSATIVE OF EXTENT

145

years; per tOtum diem, for a whoU day. Here the space relation is one of extent of time. We could also say per decern pedes, y^r ten feet, where the space relation is one of extent of space. While this is correct
Latin, the usual

form

is

to use the accusative with

no

preposition, as,

Vir tStum diem cucurrit, the man ran for a whole day Caesar miinim decern pedSs mSvit, Casar moved the wall ten feet

336.
tent
a.
b.

Rule.

Accusative of Extent.

Duration of time and ex-

of space are expressed by the accusative.

This accusative answers the questions how long? how far f Distinguish carefully between the accusative of time how long and the ablative of time when, or within which.
Select the accusatives of time
in the following
:

and space and the

ablatives of time

When

he been marching?

did the general arrive ? He arrived at two o'clock. How long had For four days. How far did he march? He marched

sixty-five miles. Where has he pitched his river, and he will remain there several days.

camp? Three miles from the The wall around the camp is
first

ten feet high. death.

When

did the war begin?

In the

year after the king's

337.

EXERCISES

First learri the special vocabulary, p. 298.

I.

Casar

in Gaul.

Caesar bellum
vidt, et

in Gallia

septem annOs gessit

rrimO ann5 Helvti5s

gentes ei sse d^diderunt. bant * et duces German! c6pias suas trans

eOdem annO multae GermSnOrum MultOs iam ann5s German! Gallos vexa-

Rhenum

N5n
bant.

singull veniebant, sed

multa milia hominum

in

saepe traducebant.* Galliam contends-

causa princips Galliae concilium convocavfirunt atque staturunt ISgatOs ad Caesarem mittere. Caesar, simul atque hunc

Qua de

rumQrem

audivit, c6pias suas sine

mora

coSgit.

Prima iQce

fortiter

cum Germanis

proelium commisit TOtum diem acriter pugnatum est Caesar ipse a dextrO comQ aciem dQxit. Magna pars cxerdtiis

10

German! ceddit Post magnam caedem paucf multa

ad flflmen fOp^runt.
*

milia

passuum

Translate as

if

pluperfect.

146
II.
I.

DEPONENT VERBS
Caesar pitched camp two miles from the river. 2. He forticamp with a ditch fifteen feet wide and a rampart nine feet

fied the

high.

3.

The camp
4.

of the

enemy was a great way

off

(was distant by a

great space).
5.

On the next day he hastened ten

miles in three hours.

with

Suddenly the enemy with all their forces made an attack upon (in were hard pressed ace.) the rear. 6. For two hours the Romans
7.

by the barbarians.

In three hours the barbarians were

fleeing.

LESSON LX
DEPONENT VERBS
338.

A number of verbs
/ encourage
;

as, hortor,

vereor,

are passive in form but active in meaning; Ifear. Such verbs are called deponent

because they have

laid aside (de-p6nere, to lay aside) the active

forms.

a. Besides having all the forms of the passive, deponent verbs have also the future active infinitive and a few other active forms which will be noted
later.

(See 375, 403.

<5-)

339.
form,

The

principal parts of deponents are of course passive in

as,
Cofij.

I
II Ill {a)

Conj.
Conj.

hortor, hortari, hortatus sum, encourage vereor, vereri, veritus sum,/mr

sequor, sequi, secutus sum, follow

partior, partiri, partitus

{b) patior, pati,

Conj.

IV

passus sum, suffer^ allow sum, share^ divide

is

Learn the synopses of these verbs. (See 493.) Patior

the passive of capio ( 492).

conjugated like

340.

PREPOSITIONS WITH THE ACCUSATIVE

prepositions with the accusative that occur most frequently are
ante, before
intra,

The

ad, to

apud, among circum, around

contra, against^ contrary to
extra, outside
in, into., in,

ob,

within on account of (quam ob rem,

wherefore^ therefore)
per, through^ by

of

against,

upon

inter,
a.

between,

among

means of behind propter, on account of because of trans, across, over

post, after,

the

new

Most of these you have had before. Review the old ones and learn ones. Review the list of prepositions governing the ablative, 209.

EXERCISES
341.
First
I.
I.

147

EXERCISES
Icam the
special vocabulary, p. 298.
legatis,

Trcs ex
finis

hostium

verebantur.

contra Caesaris opiniCnem, iter facere per 2. Quis eos hortatus est? Imperator eos

iis persuadere conatus est, sed non potuit. 3. Quid pertemiit? Aut timor hostium, qui undique premebant, aut longitud5 viae eOs pertemiit. 4. Tamen omnes fere Caesarem multo

hortatus-est et
li<;at6s

magis quam hostis manis oriebantur.

veriti sunt.
6.

5.

Quam

ob rem tam

Fortissimae gentes Galliae ex Gerfortes erant? Quia nee

\inum nee
7.

alia quae virtu tern delent ad se portari patiebantur. Caesar ex mercatoribus de insula Britannia quaesivit, sed nihil 8.

cogn6scere potuit.
fere

aestate

cum

multis

Itaque ipse statuit hanc terram petere, et media navibus longis profectus est. 9. Magna

celeritate iter confecit et in

opportunissimo loco egressus

est.

10. Bar-

ban summis viribus eum ab insula prohibere conati sunt. 11. Ille autem barbaros multa milia passuum insecutus est; tamen sine equitatu eos consequi non potuit.
II. I. Contrary to our expectation, the enemy fled and the cavalry followed close after them. 2. From all parts of the multitude the shouts arose of those who were being wounded. 3. Caesar did not

allow the cavalry to pursue too

first

far.*

4.

The

cavalry set out at the

hour and was returning * to camp at the fourth hour. 5. Around the Roman camp was a rampart twelve feet high. 6. Caesar will
delay three days because of the grain supply. 7. Nearly all the lieutenants feared the enemy and attempted to delay the march.
*

Comparative of

longi.

2 yvill this

be a deponent or an active form ?

Seventh Review, Lessons LIII-LX, 524-526

PART

III

CONSTRUCTIONS
INTRODUCTORY NOTE
The preceding part of this book has been concerned chiefly with forms and vocabulary. There remain still to be learned the forms of the Subjunctive Mood, the Participles, and the Gerund of the regular verb, and the conjugation of the commoner irregular verbs. These will be taken up in connection with
the study of constructions, which will be the chief subject of our future work. The special vocabularies of the preceding lessons contain, exclusive of proper

names, about

six

hundred words. As these are among the commonest words

in the language, they must be mastered. They properly form the basis of the study of words, and will be reviewed and used with but few additions in the

remaining lessons. For practice in reading and to illustrate the constructions presented, a continued story has been prepared and may be begun at this point (see p. 204). It has been divided into chapters of convenient length to accompany progress through the lessons, but may be read with equal profit after the lessons are finished. The story gives an account of the life and adventu.es of Publius
Cornelius Lentulus, a Roman boy, who fought in Caesar's campaigns and shared in his triumph. The colored plates illustrating the story are faithful representations of ancient life and are deserving of careful study.
148

Plate

III

CAPTIVI INTERROGANTUR
(See page aai)

THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD

49

LESSON LXI
THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD
which you have learned, Latin has a fourth
tive.

342. In addition to the indicative, imperative, and infinitive moods, mood called the subjunc-

The

tenses of the subjunctive are

Present Imperfect Perfect Pluperfect

AcTivK AND Passive

343. The tenses of the subjunctive have the same time values as the corresponding tenses of the indicative, and, in addition, each of

them

may refer to future

in the

time. No meanings of the tenses will be given as the translation varies with the construction used. paradigms,

344.

The
I

present subjunctive

is

inflected as follows

CONJ.

CONJ.

II

CONJ. Ill

CONJ. IV

Active Voick
singular
1.

mem

moneam
mo'neas
mo'ne*t

regain
re'gas re'gat

ca'piam
ca'piis
ca'piat

au
au'diis au'diat

2.

a'mes a'met

3.

PLURAL
1
.

2.

ame mus ame 'tis

a'ment

monei'mas
monea'^tis

reg&'mns
rega'tis

capi&'mas
capii^tifl

audia'mus
audia'tis

3.

mo'neant

re'gant

ca'piant

au'diant

Passive Voice

SINGULAR
1.

a'mer
ami'ris
ixc\l'\xx
(-re)

mo'ncar
monei'ria
moneft'tur
(-re)

re'gar
regi'ri (-re)

ca'piar
capii'ris (4re)

au'diar
audii'ria(-re)

2.

r^i'tur

capil'tor

audii'tor

150

THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD

monea''mur

1.

ame'mur
ame'mini
amen'tur
a.
b.

rega'mur
rega'mini
regan'tur

capia^mur
capia'mini
capian'tur

audia'^mur

2.

3.

monea^mini monean'tur

audia'mini
audian'tur

The present subjunctive is formed from the present stem, The mood sign of the present subjunctive is -e- in the first
and
-a- in the others.
It is
.

tion

takes the place of the final tions, but not in the second and fourth.
c.

conjugashortened in the usual places (cf 1 2), and vowel of the stem in the first and third conjuga-

The

d.
iacio,

personal endings are the same as in the indicative. In a similar way inflect the present subjunctive of euro, iubeo, sumo, munio.

345.

The

present

subjunctive

of

the

irregular

verb

sum

is

inflected as follows:

Sing.

-^

2.

sis

Plur.

346. The Indicative and Subjunctive Compared,

i.

The two most

important of the finite moods are the indicative and the subjunctive. The indicative deals with facts either real or assumed. If, then, we

wish to assert something as a fact or to inquire after a

the indicative.

fact,

we

use

2. On the other hand, if we wish to express a desire or wish^ a purpose^ a possibility^ an expectation^ or some such notion, we must use the subjunctive. The following sentences illustrate the difference between the indicative and the subjunctive ideas.

Indicative Ideas
1.

Subjunctive Ideas
i.

He

is

brave
out at mice

May

he be brave

Fortis est
2.

Fortis sit (idea of wishing)

2.

We set

Statim proficiscimur

Let us set out at once Statim proficiscamur (idea of

ing)

will-

3.

You hear him every day

Ck)tidie

3.

You can hear him every day

Cotidie

eum

aadis

eum

audias (idea of possi-

bility)

INDICATIVE AND SUBJUNCTIVE COMPARED

Indicative Ideas
4.

151

Subjunctive Ideas
ship
4.

He

remained

until

the

He

waited until the ship should

arrived

arrive
navis pervenit

Mansit

dam

Ezspectavit
ret
^

dum

navis perveni-

(idea of expectation)
to

5.

Casar sends men who find the

bridge Caesar mittit homines qui pontem
reperiunt

5.

Casar sends men who are

find
(or to find) the bridge

Caesar homines mittit qui pontem

reperiant (idea of purpose)

used

Note. From the sentences above we observe that the subjunctive may be in either independent or dependent clauses; but it is far more common
than in the former.

in the latter

347.

EXERCISE
be in the indicative and

Which verbs
which

in the following paragraph would in the subjunctive in a Latin translation ?

There have been times in the history of our country when you might be proud of being an American citizen. Do you remember the day when Dewey sailed into Manila Bay to capture or destroy the enemy's
fleet ? You might have seen the admiral standing on the bridge calmly giving his orders. He did not even wait until the mines should be removed from the harbor's mouth, but sailed in at once. Let us not

despair of our country while such valor exists, and new glories to the past.

may

the future add

LESSON LXII
THE SUBJUNCTIVE OF PURPOSE
348. Observe the sentence
Caesar homings mittit qui pontem reperiant, Ccesar sends
to find the bridge

men

The verb
because
it

reperiant in the dependent clause

is

in the

subjunctive

it tells

us what Caesar wants the

will

men

to

do

in other

words,

expresses his
is

and the purpose

in his

mind.

Such a use of the

subjunctive

called the subjunctive of purpose.

1

perveniret, imperfect subjunctive.

152
349.

THE SUBJUNCTIVE OF PURPOSE

Rule.
Subjunctive of Purpose.

The subjunctive

is

used

in a dependent clause to express the purpose of the action in the

principal clause,
350.
1.

clause of purpose
is

is

introduced as .follows

If

something

wanted, by

qui, the relative

ut, conj., in

pronoun

(as

above)

order that^ that

quo

of qui, by which), in order that, that, used when (abl. the purpose clause contains a comparative. The ablative quo expresses the measure of difference. (Cf 317.)
.

II.

If

something

is

not wanted, by
lest

ne, conj., in

order that not, that not,

351.
1.

EXAMPLES
Caesar copias cogit quibus hostis insequatur Ccesar collects troops with which to pursue the foe

2.

3.

Pacem petunt ut domum revertantur They ask for peace in order that they may return home Pontem faciunt quo facilius oppidum capiant They build a bridge that they may take the town more easily (lit. by which the more easily)
Fugiunt ne vulnerentur They flee that they ?nay not
(or lest they) be

4.

wounded

352. Expression of Purpose in English. In English, purpose clauses are sometimes introduced by that or in order that, but much more
frequently purpose
is

eat to live, She stoops to conquer.

expressed in English by the infinitive, as We In Latin prose, on the other hand,

purpose is never expressed by the infinitive. Be on your guard and do not let the English idiom betray you into this error.
353.

EXERCISES
rducant, mittant, videant, audiant,

Iducantur, mittantur, videantur, audiantur.

^
2.

ne Fugimus

rcapiamur, tradamur, videamus,

-^

._

Lnecemur, rapiamur, resistamus.

^_

THE IMPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE

3.

153

Mittit nQntiOs

qui
4.

jdicant, audiant, veniant, Inarrent, audiantur, in concilio sedeant.

f

Castra mQniunt

sse defendant,

impetum

sustineant,

quo
II.
I.

fadlius

Ihostis vincant, salutem petant.

2.

The

Helvetii send ambassadors to seek^ peace.

They

are

march setting out at daybreak in order that they may make a longer before night. 3. They will hide the women in the forest (ace. with in)
that they

may

not be captured.

4.

free^ their fatherland

from

slavery.

5.

The Gauls wage many wars to They will resist the Romans*

bravely lest they be destroyed.

LESSON

LXIII

INFLECTION OF THE IMPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE THE SEQUENCE OF TENSES

imperfect subjunctive may be formed by adding the personal endings to the present active infinitive.

354.

The

154
355.

SEQUENCE OF TENSES
The
imperfect subjunctive of the irregular verb
:

sum

is

in-

flected as follows

I.

SEQUENCE OF TENSES
358.

55

Rri

Sequence of Tenses.

Primary

tenses are followed

by primary
359.
I
.

tenses

and secondary by
EXAMPLES
in principal

secondary.

Primary tenses

and dependent clauses

Mittit

Mittet

homines ut agr5s vastent

that they may^ \ lay waste the fields in order to
J

MiseritJ
'X

will send

men \

will have sent] {sends

II.

^to

Secondary tenses in principal and dependent clauses

MittSbatI
Misit
I

homines ut agr5s vastarent

'that they might'\
to

MIserat

sending
sent ox has sent

"|

Kmen^ in order
J

\lay

waste the fields

had sent {was

360.

to

EXERCISES
rdQcerent, mitterent, vidrent audirent,
,
.

I.

\ enerant ut-^

Lducerentur, mitterentur, viderentur, audlrentur.

capergtur, traderetur, videretur,

I.

Kugiebat ne-j necaretur, raperetur, resisteret.

rdlcerent, audirent, venlrent,
\
,

._ . -,. . 3. Misit nuntios qui

tnarrarent, audlrentur,
4.

m concilio sedrenL
.

.,.

Castramunlveruntrses defenderent, impetum sustinerent,

qu6
II.
I.

facilius

Ihostis vincerent, salutem peterent.

more

bravely.

Caesar encouraged the soldiers in order that they might fight 2. The Helvetii left their homes to wage war. 3. The

scouts set out at once lest they should be captured by the Germans. 4. Caesar inflicted punishment on them in order that the others might

be more
victory.

terrified.

5.

He

sent messengers to

Rome

to

announce the

156

PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE

LESSON LXIV
THE PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE SUBSTANTIVE CLAUSES OF PURPOSE.
361.

The
:

perfect

and the pluperfect subjunctive

active are inflected

as follows

CONJ.

CONJ.

II

CONJ. Ill

CONJ. IV

Perfect Subjunctive Active

singular
I.

2.

3.

PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE

157

362. The passive of the perfect subjunctive is formed by combining the perfect passive participle with slm, the present subjunctive of sum.

CONJ.

CONJ.

II

CONJ.

Ill

CONJ. IV

Perrbct Subjunctive Passive

singular

ama

tus

sun
sis

mo'nitus sim mo'nitus sis

mo'nitus sit

rec'tus

slm

cap'tus

aim

audi'tus

sim

ama'lus ama'tus

rec'tus sis

cap'tus sis

audl'tus sis

sit

rec'tus sit

cap'tus sit

audi'tus sit

PLURAL
1
.

ama

ti

sunus

mo'niti simus
mo'niti sitis

rec'ti

simus
cap'ti sitis
cap'ti sint

audi'ti

simus

2.

ama'ti sitis ama'ti sint

rec'ti sitis rec'ti sint

audl'ti sitis

3.

mo'niti sint

audi'ti sint

The passive of the pluperfect subjunctive is formed by comthe bining perfect passive participle with essem, the imperfect subof sum. junctive
363. CONJ.
I

CONJ.

II

CONJ. Ill

CONJ. IV

Pluperfect Subjunctive Passive

singular
1.

2.

3.

amatusessem monitusessem rectus essem captusessem audltusessem amatus esses monitus esses rectus esses captus esses auditus esses amatus esset monitus esset rectus esset captus esset auditus esset

PLURAL
1.

amatiessemns moniti essSmus recdessemus captiessemus auditi essemus

amatiessetis

2.

moniti essetis moniti essent

recti essetis

captiessetis

auditi essetis
auditi essent

3.

amatiessent
a.

recti essent

captiessent

In a similar

way

inflect the perfect

and pluperfect subjunctive passive

of

ciir5,

iubeS, 8ilm5, iaciO, miini5.

364.

The

perfect

and pluperfect subjunctive of the irregular verb

:

sum

are inflected as follows

Perfect
fu'erim
fu'eris
fu'erit

Pluperfect
fuis'sem
fuis'sSs

fue'rimus
fue'ritis

fuiss^'mus
fuisse'tis

fu'erint

fuis'set

fuis'sent

158
365.

SUBSTANTIVE CLAUSES OF PURPOSE

A
He

substantive clause

is

a clause used

like

a noun,

as,

That the fnen are afraid is clear enough (clause as ordered them to call on him (clause as object)

subject)

We
way

(cf.

have already had many instances of infinitive clauses used in this 213), and have noted the similarity between Latin and English

usage in this respect.

stantive clauses,

and

this

But the Latin often uses the subjunctive in submarks an important difference between the two

languages.

366.

Rule.

Substantive

Clauses

of

Purpose.

substantive

clause of purpose with the subjunctive is used as the object of verbs of commanding, urging, asking, persuading, or advising, where
in English

we should

usually have the infinitive.

EXAMPLES
1
.

2.

3.

The general ordered the soldiers to run He urged them to resist bravely He asked them to give the childrefi food

Imperator
currerent

militibus

imperavit ut

Hortatus est ut fortiter resisterent

Petivit ut liberis

cibum darent

4.

He He
a.

will persuade us

7iot to set

Nobis persuadebit ne proficiscamur

out
5.

advises us to remaiji at home

Monet ut domi maneamus

all

The

object clauses following these verbs

express the purpose or

(Cf. 348.)

will of the principal subject that

something be done or not done.

367.

The

Learn the

list

following verbs are used with object clauses of purpose. and the principal parts of the new ones.
peto, quaero, rogo, ask, seek

hortor, urge

impero, order (with the dative of the person ordered and a subjunctive clause of the thifig ordered done)

persuadeo, perstiade (with the same construction as impero)

postulo, demaftd, require suadeo, advise (cf. persuadeo)

moneo, advise
N.B.
(Cf.

Remember
1.)

that iubeo,

order,

takes the infinitive as

in

English

213.

Compare the sentences Iubeo eum venire, / order him

Impero
ei

to

come

ut veniat,

I give

orders to

him

that he

is to

come

SUBSTANTIVE CLAUSES OF PURPOSE

We
riice in
ill

159

ordinarily translate both of these sentences like the first, but the diflfermeaning between iubeo and imperd in the Latin requires the infinitive

the one case and the subjunctive in the other.

368.
I.

EXERCISES
Petit atque hortStur ut ipse dicat.
iter facerent.
4. Ille

1.

2.

Caesar Helvetiis impeiussit

lavit

ne per provinciam

3.

Caesar non

Helveti6s

per provinciam
discederent.
6.
7. 5.

iter facere.

civibus persuasit ut de finibus suis

Postulavit ne

Caesar principes monebit ne proelium committant. cum Helvetiis aut cum eorum sociis bellum gererent.
8. lis

Ab
II.

iis

quaesivi ne proficiscerentur.

persuadere non potui ut

Write this sentena

dom! manerent.
I
.

Who ordered Caesar to make the march ?

and with
iubed.)
3.
2.

both with imperO

The

faithless scouts

persuaded

him

to set out at daybreak.

4.

ment.

He demanded

that

They will ask him not to inflict punishthey come to the camp. 5. He advised

them

to

tell

everything (omnia).

Note. Do not forget that the English infinitive expressing purpose must be rendered by a Latin subjunctive. Review 352.

LEGIO ITER FACIT

l6o

SUBJUNCTIVE AFTER VERBS OF FEARING

LESSON LXV
THE SUBJUNCTIVE OF POSSUM VERBS OF FEARING

369. Learn the subjunctive of the position of the accent.

possum

( 495),

and note

especially

370. Subjunctive after Verbs of Fearing.

We

have learned that

what we want done or not done

is

expressed in Latin by a sub-

junctive clause of purpose. In this class belong also clauses after verbs offearing, for we fear either that something will happen or that
it

will not,

and we

either

want

it

to

happen or we do

not.

If

we want

a thing to happen and fear that it will not, the purpose clause is introduced by ut. If we do not want it to happen and fear that it
will,

ne

is

used.

Owing

to a difference

idiom

we

translate ut after a verb of fearing

between the English and Latin by that not, and ne by

that or

lest.

371.
timeo

EXAMPLES
^

fveniat

timebo
timuero

j^utJ
J

[venerit

I fear,

shallfear, shall have feared, that he will not come, has not come

timebam
'j

fveniret

timui

lut^
[

timueram J

venisset

/ was fearing, feared, hadfeared,

The same examples with ne

that he

would not come,

had not come

instead of ut would be translated
etc.

I fear

that or lest he will come, has come,

Rule. Subjunctive after Verbs of Fearing. Verbs of fearare followed ing by a substantive clause of purpose introduced
372.

by ut

{that not)

or ne

(that

or

lest).

THE PARTICIPLES
373.
I.

l6l

EXERCISES

2.

Caesar verCbatur ut supplicium captivOrum Gallls placret ROmani ipsi magnopere verebantur ne Helvetii iter per pr5vin1.

3. Timebant ut satis rei frumentariae mitti posset Vereor ut hostium impetum sustinere possim. 5. Timuit ne imf)edimenta ab hostibus capta essent. 6. Caesar numquam timuit ne

ciam facerent.
4.

legi6ns vincerentur.
II.
I.

7.

Legiones pugnare non timuerunt.*

2.

coming. had not come.

defended.
6.

We fear that they are not coming. 3. We feared that they had come.
5.

4.

We fear lest they are We feared that they

They
all

Almost

feared

feared greatiy that the camp could not be * to leave the camp.

LESSON LXVI
THE PARTICIPLES
374.

The

Latin verb has the following Participles

I

*
:

CONJ.

CONJ. II

CONJ. Ill

CONJ. IV

l62

THE PARTICIPLES

a. The present active and future passive participles are formed from the present stem, and the future active and perfect passive participles are formed from the participial stem.
b.

The
In

stem.

-io
is

present active participle is formed by adding -ns to the present verbs of the third conjugation, and in the fourth conjugation,

the stem

modified by the addition of

-e-,

as capi-e-ns, audi-e-ns.

It is

declined like an adjective of one ending of the third declension. (Cf. 256.)

amans,
Base amant-

lovifig

Stem amanti-

SiNGULAR
MASC.

Plural

AND FEM.

THE PARTICIPLES

63

a. Observe that the perfect participle of deponent verbs is passive in form but active in meaning. No other verbs have a perfect active parthe future passive participle of deponent verbs ticiple. On the other hand,
is

passive in meaning as in other verbs.

b.

Give the

participles of c5nor, vereor, sequor, patior, partior.

376. Tenses of the Participle.

1
.

The

tenses express time as follows:

present active participle corresponds to the English present active participle in -ing, but can be used only of an action occurring at the same time as the action of the main verb ; as, militgs insequentgs
c6p6runt multOs, the soldiers, while pursuing, captured many. the pursuing and the capturing are going on together.
2.

The

Here

The

perfect participle (excepting of deponents)

is

regularly pas-

and corresponds to the English past participle with or without the auxiliary having been ; as, auditus, heard or having been heard.
sive
3.

The

future active participle, translated about

to,

etc, denotes

time after the action of the main verb.

377. Review 203, 204, and note the following model sentences:
1
.

Milites currentes erant defessi, the soldiers

who were running

(lit.

running) were weary.

2.

out

(lit.

Caesar profectiirus R5inam n5n exspectavit, Ccesar, about to set out) for Rome, did not wait.

when about to set

3. Oppidom captum vidimus, tured (lit. captured town).

we saw

the

town which had been cap[when, or

set out.

4.

Imperitor triduttm moratus profectus

est, the general, since

after) he
5.

had delayed (lit.

victi terga

the general,

having delayed) three days,

MnitSs

conquered (lit

n6n vertenmt, the soldiers, though they were the soldiers conquered), did not retreat.
literal translation
its

In each of these sentences the

in parentheses.

of the participle

is

given

proper translation usually requires a clause banning with some conjunction (when, since, after, though, Consider, in each case, what translation will etc.), or a relative clause. best bring out the thought and do not, as a rule, translate the participle
note, however, that
literally.

We

I64
378.
I.
I.

THE IRREGULAR VERBS

EXERCISES
Puer timens ne capiatur
fugit.

VOLO, NOLO,

MALO

reliquas interficere conata erat.

3. Milites

2. Aquila Ira commota avis ab hostibus press! tela iacere

non potuerunt.

4.

Caesar decimam legionem laudaturus ad primum

est.

agmen progressus 5. Imperator hortatus equites ut fortiter pugnarent signum proelio dedit. 6. Milites hostis octo milia passuum insecuti multis

cum

captivis
8.
9.

ad castra reverterunt.
consilium,

7.

Sol oriens multos

interfectos vidit

RomanI

audax suspicati barbaris sese

non commiserunt.
11.^
I.

Navis e porta egressa nullo in periculo erat

in very great

The army was

2.

danger while marching through

the enemy's country. longed for home. 3.

When

Frightened by the length of the way, they the scouts were about to set out, they
4.

heard the shouts of victory.

set fire to the buildings

When we had
5. 6.

delayed

many
who

days,

we
I

and departed.

While

living at

Rome
are

heard orators

much

better than these.

The

soldiers

fight-

ing across the river are no braver than we.

LESSON LXVII
THE IRREGULAR VERBS VOLO, NOLO, MALO THE ABLATIVE WITH A PARTICIPLE, OR ABLATIVE ABSOLUTE

379. Learn the principal parts and conjugation of volo, wish

(ne

nol5

volo), be unwilling ;

malo (magis

volo), be more willing, prefer

(497).

Note the
and

irregularities in the present indicative, subjunctive,

and

infinitive,

in the imperfect subjunctive.

(Cf. 354.)

a. These verbs are usually followed by the infinitive with or without a subject accusative as, volunt venire, they wish to come; volunt amicos venire, they wish their friends to come. The English usage is the same.^
;

380. Observe the following sentences

I. Magistro laudante omnes pueri diligenter lab5rant, with the teacher praising, or since the teacher praises, or the teacher praising, all the boys

labor diligently.
1 In this exercise use participles for the subordinate clauses. the subjunctive of purpose is used after these verbs. (See 366.)

Sometimes

THE ABLATIVE ABSOLUTE

2.

165

nm6 prtgredi timet, with Casar leadings or when Casar leads, or Casar leadings no one fears to advance. 3. Hla rebus cognitis milites fugerunt, when this was known, or since this was known, or these things having been learned, the soldiers fled.
Caesare ducente
leads, or if

Casar

4.

ProeliS

when
a.

the battle

commissd multi vulnerati sunt, after the battle had begun, or had begun, or the battle having been joined, many were
is expressed in English by In each of the sentences above we have a

wounded.

One

of the fundamental ablative relations

(cf.

the preposition with

50).

noun and a

participle in agreement in the ablative, and the translation shows that in each instance the ablative expresses attendant circumstance. For
first sentence the circumstance attending or accompanying the diligent labor of the boys is the praise of the teacher. This is clearly a with relation, and the ablative is the case to use.

example, in the

b.

We

observe, further, that the ablative and

its

participle are absolutely

independent grammatically of the rest of the sentence. If we were to express the thought in English in a similar way, we should use the nominative independent or absolute. In Latin the construction is called the Ablative Absolute, or the Ablative wjth a Participle. This form of expression is exceedingly common in Latin, but rather rare in English, so we must not, as a

employ the English absolute construction to translate the ablative absoThe attendant circumstance may be one of time (when or after), or one of cause (since), or one of concession (though), or one of condition (if). In each case try to discover the precise relation, and translate the ablative and its participle by a clause which will best express the thought
rale,
lute.

381. Rule. Ablative Absolute. The ablative of a noun or pronoun with a present or perfect participle in agreement is used
to express

attendant circumstance.

find

present participle. In consequence we often two nouns or a noun and an adjective in the ablative absolute with no participle expressed as, t8 duce, you (being) leader, with you as leader; patre
i.
;

Note

The verb sum has no

infinnS,

my father (being) weak. Note 2. Be very careful not

a.
b.

to put in the ablative absolute a

noun and

participle that

form the subject or object of a sentence. Compare

7^e Gauls, having been conquered by Casar, returned home The Gauls having been conquered by Ctesar, the army returned M0me

In a the subject is TTke Gauls having been conquered by Casar^ and we translate

OalU I Caesare let! domam rvMtiraiit

66

EXERCISES

is

In ^ the subject is the army. The Gauls having been conquered by Ccesar nominative absolute in English, which requires the ablative absolute in

Latin,

and we

translate,

Gallis a Caesare victis exercitus

domum

revertit

3. The fact that only deponent verbs have a perfect active participle 375- a) often compels a change of voice when translating from one language to the other. For example, we can translate Ccesar having encouraged
(cf-

Note

the legions just as it stands, because hortor is a deponent verb. But if we wish to say Ccesar having conquered the Gauls, we have to change the voice of the
participle to the passive because vinco is not deponent, and having been conquered by Ccesar (see translation above).
say, the

Gauls

382.
I.

EXERCISES
Mavis, non
vis, vultis,

I.

nolumus.
malle.
4.

2.

Ut

nolit,

ut vellemus, ut
nollet,

malit.
nolite.
tis,

3. Noli, velle,

noluisse,

Vult,

mavultis, ut

5. Sole oriente, aves cantare inceperunt. 6. Clamoribus audibarbari progredi reciisabant. 7. Caesare legiones hortato, milites

paulo fortius pugnaverunt.

8.

His rebus
9.

cognitis, Helvetii finitimis

persuaserunt ut
ita

secum

iter facerent.
sibi
1 1

Laboribus confectis, milites

10. Concilio convocato,

a Caesare quaerebant ut
principes

praemia daret.
.

responderunt.

Dux
12.
13.

pluris dies in

Helvetiorum finibus

morans multos

vicos incendit.

quidam ex Romanis timebant.

plus reperire potuit.
II.
I.

Magnitudine Germanorum cognita, Mercatoribus rogatis, Caesar nihilo

they have wished.
2.

He was unwilling, lest they prefer,

You

might be unwilling, they wish. 3. We wish, they had preferred, that he may prefer. 4. Caesar, when he heard the rumor
prefer, that they

rumor having been heard), commanded (imperare) the legions to advance more quickly. 5. Since Caesar was leader, the men were
{the

by the reports which they had heard, preferred to remain at home. 7. After these had been left behind, the rest hastened as quickly as possible. 8. After Caesar
willing to

make

the journey.

6.

few, terrified

had undertaken the business

taken),
1

Ccesar^ the business

having been under-

he was unwilling to delay longer.^

the ablative absolute be correct here
?

Would

Not

longius.

Why

"i

THE IRREGULAR VERB FIO

167

LESSON LXVIII
THE IRREGULAR VERB
383.

FIO

THE SUBJUNCTIVE OF RESULT

The verb
faciO.

fiO,

be madCy happen^ serves as the passive of faciO,

make,
larly

in the

from

present system. The rest of the verb is formed reguLearn the principal parts and conjugation ( 500).
i is

Observe that the

a.

long except before -r and in

fit.

The compounds
Active Passive

of faciS with prepositions usually form the passive

c5nfici5, c5nficere, cSnfeci, cOnfectus

regularly, as,
conficior, confici, confectus
:

sum

384. Observe the following sentences

1
.

Terror crat tantus ut omnes fugerent, the terror

was

so great that

all fled.

Terror erat tantus ut n6n facile milites sese reciperent, the terror so great that the soldiers did not easily recover themselves. 3. Terror fecit ut omnes fugerent, terror caused all to flee (lit mcuie that allfled).
2.

was

a.

Each of these sentences

is

complex, containing a principal clause and

clause states

a subordinate clause.
b.

The

principal clause

names a cause and the subordinate

the consequence or result of this cause. c. The subordinate clause has its verb in the subjunctive, though it is translated like an indicative. The construction is called the subjunctive of

consequence or result, and the clause is called a consecutive or result clause. //.In the last example the clause of result is the object of the verb fJcit
e.

The

so that; negative, ut

conjunction introducing the consecutive or result clause n6n = so that not.

is

ut

385.
<".lt

Rule.

Subjunctive of Result.

are introduced by ut or ut non

and have

Consecutive clauses of rethe verb in the

bJune live.

386.

found
larity

Rule. Object clauses of result with ut or ut ndn are after verbs of effecting or bringing about.
the

387. Purpose and Result Clauses Compared.

in

expression

of purpose and

There is great simiof result in Latin. If

68

THE SUBJUNCTIVE OF RESULT

is

the sentence

affirmative, both

purpose and result clauses

may be

introduced by ut ; but if the sentence is negative, the purpose clause has ne and the result clause ut nOn. Result clauses are often preceded
in the

serve to point
a.

main clause by such words as them out. Compare

/le

tarn, ita, sic (so)^

and these

Tarn graviter vulneratus est

ut caperetur Graviter vulneratus
caperetur
est

b.

ut

was so severely wounded that he was captured He was severely wounded in order
that he might be captured

Which sentence contains a

388.
I.

result clause,

and how

is it

pointed out

EXERCISES
ut
flat,
fis,

I. Fit, fiet,

fiebamus.
fiemus.

2. Fio, fies,

ut fierent,

fieri,

fiunt.

3. Fietis,

ut fiamus,

4. Milites

erant

tam

tardi ut ante

noctem
6.

in castra

non pervenirent.

5.

Sol facitut omnia sint pulchra.

Eius modi pericula erant ut nemo proficisci vellet. 7. Equites hos^ tium cum equitatu nostro in itinere contenderunt, ita tamen ut nostri

omnibus
fecit ut

in partibus superiores essent. 8. Virtus militum nostrorum ^ hostes ne unum quidem impetum sustinerent. 9. Homines

erant

tam audaces ut
barbari
ita

nullo

modo

contineri possent.

10.

Spatium erat

tam parvum
facto

ut milites tela iacere

perterriti

non

facile possent.

11.

Hoc

proelio

sunt ut ab ultimis gentibus legati ad

Caesarem mitterentur.

12.

Hoc

proelium factum est ne legati ad

Caesarem
II.
2. It

mitterentur.

happen, they were being made, that it may happen. he will be made, to happen. 3. They are made, we were happens,
I. It will

being made,
conquer.
6. 5.

lest

it

happen.

4.

The

soldiers are so brave that they

The

soldiers are brave in order that they

may

conquer.

was made so strong that it could not be taken. was made strong in order that it might not be fortification 7. taken. 8. After the town was taken,* the townsmen feared that they would be made slaves. 9. What state is so weak that it is unwilling

The The

fortification

to defend itself
1 ita

?
"^

vtA quidem, not even. tamen, with such a result however. ^ Ablative absolute. emphatic word is placed between.
. . .

The

THE SUBJUNCTIVE OF CHARACTERISTIC

LLbbUN LXIX

.169

THE SUBJUNCTIVE OF CHARACTERISTIC OR DESCRIPTION THE PREDICATE ACCUSATIVE

389. Akin to the subjunctive of consequence or result is the use of the subjunctive in clauses of characteristic or description.

This construction
1
.

is illustrated

in the following sentences

is there

Quis est qui

suam domum n5n amet ? who

who does not

love

his

own home ?
Erant qui hoc facere ndllent, there were {some)
this.

2.

who were unwilling

to,

to

do
3.

Tu non

is

es qui amicos tradas,

to,

are not the

4.

man

betray

j^ are not such a one as yourfriends.

ox you

Nihil yided quod timeam,

it).

see nothing to

fear (nothing of such a

character as to fear
a.
tells

Each of these examples contains a descriptive relative clause which what kind of a person or thing the antecedent is. To express this
is

thought the subjunctive

sentences

used.

relative clause that

merely states a fact

and does not describe the antecedent uses the

indicative.

Compare the

Casar is the man who

(mere statement of

is

fact,

leading us, Caesar est is qui n5s ducit no description, with the indicative)
is

Casar is

the

man

to

lead us, Caesar est

qui n5s ducat (descrip-

tive relative clause with the subjunctive)

relative, as is qui, are translated

in

a demonstrative pronoun and a such a one as to, the man to. r. In which of the following sentences would you use the indicative and which the subjunctive?
b.

Observe that in

this construction

These are not the These are not the

men who did this men to do this

390.

Rule.

Subjunctive of Characteristic.

relative clause

stvith the subjunctive is often

used

to describe

an antecedent.

This

is

called the subjunctive of characteristic or description.

70

THE PREDICATE ACCUSATIVE

the

391. Observe the sentences

Romani Caesarem consulem f ecerunt, Caesar consul a Romanis factus est, Romans.
1
.

2.

CcBsar

Romans made CkEsar consul was made consul by the

a.
(I)

Observe

in

that the transitive verb fecerunt,

made^ has two objects

the direct object, Caesarem; (2) a second object, consulem, referring to the same person as the direct object and completing the predicate. The second accusative is called a Predicate Accusative.
b.

the accusatives

and

changed to the passive both of direct object becoming the subject the predicate accusative the predicate no7ninative.
is

Observe in 2 that when the verb

become nominatives, the

Verbs of making, choosing, calling, showing, and the like, may take a predicate accusative along with the direct object. With the passive voice the two accusa392.
Accusatives.

Rule. Two

tives

become nomiiiatives.

393.

The verbs commonly found with two

creo, creare, creavi, creatus, choose

accusatives are

appello, appellare, appellavi, appellatus"]

nomino, nominare, nominavi, nominatus \call

voc5, vocare, vocavi, vocatus
facio, facere, feci, factus,
J

make

394.
I.

EXERCISES
In Germaniae
silvis
2.

I.

sunt^ multa genera ferarum quae reliquis

itinera duo quibus Helvetii domo discedere possent. 3. Erat^ manus nulla, nullum oppidum, nullum praesidium quod se armis defenderet. 4. Toto frumento rapto, domi nihil

in locis

non

visa sint.

Erant^

erat

quo mortem prohibere possent.

5.

Romani Galbam ducem

6.

cre-

averunt et
multitudinis

summa

celeritate profecti sunt.

Neque

erat^ tantae

quisquam qui morari vellet. 7. Germani non ii sunt qui ^ adventum Caesaris vereantur. 8. Consulibus occisis erant qui vellent
1

Remember
is,

that

when

the verb

sum precedes
^

there are, there were, etc. wholly indefinite antecedent of qui

there

its subject it is translated erant qui, there were (some) who. A'

does not need to be expressed.

CONSTRUCTIONS WITH THE CONJUNCTION

eum regem
10. Inter
II.
I.

CUM

171

creare. 9. Pace facta erat nemO qui arma tradere nOllet Helvetios quis erat qui nobilior illo esset ? The Romans called the city Rome. 2. The city was called

the Romans. 3. The better citizens wished to choose him The brave soldier was not the man to run. 5. There was king. 4. no one 4o call me friend. 6. These are not the men to^ betray their friends. 7. There were (some) who called him the bravest of alL

Rome by

Eighth Review, Lessons LXI-LXIX, 527-528

LESSON LXX
THE CONSTRUCTIONS WITH THE CONJUNCTION CUM THE ABLATIVE OF SPECIFICATION
395.

The
:

conjunction

cum has

the following meanings and con-

structions

cum TEMPORAL = when,

subjunctive

followed by the indicative or the

cum CAUSAL = since, followed by the subjunctive cum CONCESSIVE = although, followed by the subjunctive

As you observe, the mood after cum sometimes subjunctive. The reason for
study of the following sentences
1.
:

is

sometimes indicative and

be made clear by a

this will

Caesarem vidi tum cum in Gallii eram, / saw Casar at the time

ivhen
2.

I was

in Gaul.

Caesar in eds impetxun fecit cum p&cem peterent, Casar made an lit tack upon them when they were seeking peace. 3. Hoc erat difficile cum pauci sine vulneribus essent, this was difficult,
since only
4.

a few were without wounds.

Cimi primi SrdlnSs fugissent, tamen reliqui fortiter cOnsistebant, though the front ranks hadfled, yet the rest bravely stood their ground.
a.

The
the

When
cum

underlying principle is one already familiar to you (cf. 389. a\ cum clause states a fact and simply ^.r^.f the time at which the
place, the indicative
fixes the time

main action took

in Gallii
*

eram

mood is used. So, when I saw Caesar.

in the first example,

relative clause of characteristic or descri]>tion.

See 389.

b.

172
b.

THE ABLATIVE OF SPECIFICATION

On
the other hand,

when

the

cum

clause describes the circumstances

under which the main act took place, the subjunctive mood is used. So, in the second example, the principal clause states that Caesar made an attack, and the cum clause describes the circumstances under which this act occurred.

The
tion.

idea of time

is

also present, but

it is

subordinate to the idea of descrip-

Sometimes the descriptive clause is one of cause and we translate cum by since J sometimes it denotes concession and cum is translated although.
396.

Rule.

Constructions with Cwm.

The conjunction cum means

when,
it

since,

or although.
its

It is followed by the subjunctive unless

means when and

Note. Cum

clause jixes the time at which the m^ain

action took place.

common

than

its

in clauses of description with the subjunctive is use with the indicative.

much more

397. Note the following sentences

1. Oppidum erat parvum magnitudine sed magnum multitudine hominum, the town was small in size but great in population.

2. Homo erat corpora infirmus sed validus animo, the in body but strong in courage.

man was weak

Observe that magnitiidine, multitudine, corpora, and animo tell in The relation is one covered by the respect something is true. ablative case, and the construction is called the ablative of specification.
a.

what

398.

Rule.
in

Ablative of Specification.
is true.

The ablative

is

used

to

denote
399.

what respect something

IDIOMS
aliquam certioram facare, to inform

some one

(lit.

to

make

some

07ie

more

certain)

informed (lit. to be made more certain) a right of way allow to pass obsides inter se dara, to give hostages to each other
certior fieri, to be
iter dara, to give
^

400.
I.

EXERCISES
Helvetil
consulis
venit,

I.

cum patrum nostrorum tempore domo

exercitum in fugam dederant.
Helvetil
esset,
alios
2.

profecti
in

assent,

Cum

Caesar

Gralliam
citeriore

agros

petebant.

3.

Caesar cum

in

GalUa

tamen de Helvetiorum

consiliis certior flebat.

THE GERUND AND GERUNDIVE

4.

173

Cum

Helvetii bell6 clarissimi essent, Caesar iter per provinciam

5.

dare recusavit.

Legatus

cum haec
id

audivisset,

Caesarem

certio-

rem

fecit.

6.

Cum

principes inter se obsides darent,

Roman! bellum

paraverunt.
ficisci.

7.

Caesar,

cum

nuntiatum

esset,

maturat ab urbe pro-

quidem Galli erant pares Germanis. 9. Caesar neque corpore neque animo infirmus erat. 10. I Hud bellum tum
8.

Ne

virtute

incepit

cum Caesar
in

fuit c6nsul.

Observe
for
its

each case what mood follows cum, and try to give the reasons use. In the third sentence the cum clause is concessive, in the fourth

and

sixth causal.
I.

at

was fought at the time when (tum cum) I was Though the horsemen were few in number, nevertheless retreat. 3. When the camp had been sufficiently fortidid not they the fied, enemy returned home. 4. Since the tribes are giving hostages to each other, we shall inform Caesar. 5. The Gauls and the Germans
II.

That
2.

battle

Rome.

are very unlike in language and laws.

LESSON LXXI
VOCABULARY REVIEW THE GERUND AND GERUNDIVE THE PREDICATE GENITIVE

401. Review the word

402. The Gerund.

lists in

510, 511.
to translate the sentence

Suppose we had

By overcoming the Gauls Casar won great glory

We

can see that overcoming here

is

a verbal noun corresponding to

the English infinitive in -ing^ and that the thought calls for the ablative of means. To translate this by the Latin infinitive would be
impossible, because the infinitive
is

indeclinable

and therefore has no

ablative case form. Latin, however, has another verbal noun of corresponding meaning, called the gerund, declined as a neuter of the

second declension

in

^& genitive, dative, accusative^ and ablative singular^

that the infinitive lacks.*
infinitive is

and thus supplying the cases

*

Hence, to

Sometimes, however, the

used as an accusative.

174

THE GERUND AND GERUNDIVE

noun overcoming^ we should use the
infinitive

decline in Latin the verbal for the nominative

and the gerund for the other

f
\

cases, as follows:

JVom.
Gen.

superare-^

overcomin[ ^ mnfinitive ^

X^to

overcome]
^ Y
J

superandi, of overcoming
sw^Qxa.n6.0j for overco7nijig
,
.

Dat.
Ace.

Gerund

Abl.

superandum, overcoming superando, by overcoming

the gerund governs the

Like the

infinitive,

same case

as the verb from

in Latin

which

it is

derived.

So the sentence given above becomes

Superando Gallos Caesar

magnam

gloriam reportavit
-ndi, -ndo,

403.

The gerund

is

formed by adding
is

-ndum, -nd5,

to

the present stem, which

shortened or otherwise changed, as shown

below

Paradigm of the Gerund

CONJ.
I

CONJ.

II

CONJ.

Ill

CONJ. IV

Gen.

Dat.
Ace.

amandi amando

monendi monendo

regendi

capiendi

audiendi

regendo

capiend5

audiend5

amandum
amandd

monendum
monendo

regendum
regendo

capiendum
capiendo

audiendum
audiendo

Abl.
a.
b.

Give the gerund of euro, deleo, sumo, iacio, venio. Deponent verbs have the gerund of the active voice the gerund of conor, vereor, sequor, patior, partior.

(see 493).

Give

404. The Gerundive.

The

gerundive

is

the

name

given to the future

passive participle ( 374.^) when the participle approaches the meaning of a verbal noun and is translated like a gerund. It is the adjective

corresponding to the gerund. For example, to translate the plan of waging war, we may use the gerund with its direct object and say consilium gerendi bellum ; or we may use the gerundive and say conthe war to be literally, the plan of as the force the same but which came to have gerund with waged, its object, and was even preferred to it.

silium belli gerendi, which means,

The gerund

is

the neuter singular of the future passive participle used

(Cf. 374.0'.)

as a noun,

and has the same formation.

THE GERUND AND GERUNDIVE

405.
I

175

Compare
:

the following parallel uses of the gerund and ge-

uiulive

Gerund
I

Gerundive
Spes faciendae pacis The hope of making peace
Locus iddneus castris pSnendia

,fn.

l\it.

\cc.

Spes faciendi pacem The hope of making peace Locua iddneus pugnandd A place suitable for fighting Misii equites ad insequendum lie sent horsemen to pursue
Narrand5 fabulas magister
pueris placuit
^

A place suitable for pitching camp

Misit equites ad insequendds hostis He sent horsemen to pursue the

enemy
//'/.

Narrandis fabulis magister pueris

placuit

The teacher pleased the boys

by telling stories
a.
(i)
(2)
(3)

The teacher pleased the boys by

telling stories

We

observe

That the gerund is a noun and the gerundive an adjective. That the gerund, being a noun, may stand alone or with an object. That the gerundive, being an adjective, is used only in agreement

with a noun^

406.

Rule. Gerund and

is

Gerundive.

I.

The Gerund
^

is

a verbal
^

used only in the genitive^ dative accusative and ablative singular. The constructions of these cases are in general
those of other nouns. The Gerundive is a verbal adjective and must be used instead of gerund \- object excepting in the genitive and in the ablative without a preposition. Even in these instances the
2.

noun and
the

same as

gerundive construction
407.

is

more usual.
The accusative
^

Rule. Gerund

or Gerundive of Purpose.

of the

gerund or gerundive ivith ad, or the genitive with causa (=for the sake of), is used to express purpose.
Gerund
Ad audiendum venenmt
Audiendi cauaa venenmt
or

Gerundive

Ad urbem videndam
They came

venerunt or

Urbia videndae causa venenmt

to see the city

Tkey came

to

hear
'

caosi iX'mzy* follows the genitive.

176
of purpose,
sions,

THE PREDICATE GENITIVE

Note. These sentences might,

venerunt ut audirent

of course, be written with the subjunctive venerunt ut urbem viderent. In short expres-

however, the gerund and gerundive of purpose are rather more common.

408.

We

have learned that the word denoting the owner or posis

sessor of something
If,

in the genitive, as,

now, we wish

to express the idea the horse

equus Galbae, Galba^s horse. is Galba's, Galba

remains the possessor, and hence in the genitive as before, but

stands in the predicate, as, equus est Galbae.
predicate genitive.

now

Hence

this is called the

409.

Rule.

Predicate Genitive.

The possessive genitive

often

stands hi the predicate, especially a^ter the forms of sum, is then called the predicate genitive,
410.
alicui

and

IDIOMS
negotium dare,
to

employ some one

(lit.

to

give
to be

business to some

07te)

novis rebus studere, to be eagerfor

a revolution

(lit.

eager for

new

things^

rei militaris peritissimus,

very skillful in the art of war

se suaque omnia, themselves

and all their possessions

411.
I.

EXERCISES
Caesar cum
in

I.

Gallia

bellum

gereret,

militibus

decimae
2. Sociis

legionis

maxime

favit quia re! militaris

rei

peritissimi erant.
3.

negotium dedit

frumentariae

curandae.

Legati non solum

4.

audiendl causa sed etiam dicendi causa venerunt.

exploratores locum idoneum muniendo
reperire.
5.

Imperator iussit Nuper hae gentes

novis rebus studebant

mox iis

persuadebo ut Caesari se suaque omnia

dedant.

6.

proelio facto
8.

lubere est reginae^ et parere est multitudinis.^ 7. Hoc quidam ex hostibus ad pacem petendam venerunt.

Erant qui arma tradere nollent. 9. Hostes tarn celeriter progress! sunt ut spatium pila in hostis iaciendi non daretur. 10. Spatium neque
auxili
^

arma capiendi^ neque

1

petendi^ datum

est.
is

Predicate genitive.

Which

of these expressions

gerund and which

gerundive ?

THE IRREGULAR VERB EO

II.
I.

177

in the art of

These ornaments ^belong to Cornelia. 2. Men very skillful war were sent *to capture the town. 3. The scouts
suitable for fortifying very near to the river.
4.

found a

hill

Soon the

cavalry 5. The mind of the Gauls is eager for revolution and for undertaking wars. 6. To lead the line of battle * belongs to the general. 7. "Whom shall we employ to look after the
will

come

'to seek supplies.

grain supply?

LESSON LXXII
THE IRREGULAR VERB EO

INDIRECT STATEMENTS

412. Learn the principal parts and the conjugation of

a.

^^go

( 499).

the root of e6, is changed to e- before a vowel, excepting in iSns, the nominative of the present participle. In the perfect system

Notice that

I-,

-v- is regularly dropped.

compounds of

413. Learn the meaning and principal parts of the following e5 with prepositions:
ad'eo, adi're, ad'ii, ad'itos,
ez'ed, exi're, ex'ii, tu'W^s^
tive of the place

go to^ visits with the accusative go forth^ with ex or de and the

abla-

from which
enter upon^ Math the accusative

in'ed, irn're, in'ii, in'itus, begin^

red'e5, redi're, red'ii, redltas, return^ with

ad or in and the accu-

sative of the place to

which

trans'ed, transi're, trans'ii, transltos, cross^ with the accusative

414. Indirect Statements in English.

his

Direct statements are those

in

which the speaker or writer makes himself or which are quoted

Indirect statements are those reported in a exact language. different form of words from that used by the speaker or writer. Compare the following direct and indirect statements
:

The Gauls are brave The Gauls were brave 3. The Gauls will be brave {I
.

2.

* Use the Use the gerundive with ad. belong to areof. genitive ^ with canaJL Where should canai stand? Compare the first sentence. ^ Compare the second sentence in the Latin above.

178
after

INDIRECT STATEMENTS
Indirect statements
( i
.

a verb in
-^

2.

the present tense [3.

Indirect statements
after
f
i
.

a verb in
-|

2.

a past tense

[3.

He says that the He says that the He says that the He said that the He said that the He said that the

Gauls are brave Gauls were brave Gauls will be brave Gauls were brave Gauls

had

been brave

Gauls would be brave

We
a.

see that in English

indirect statement

The

forms a clause introduced by the conjunc-

tion that.
b.
c.

The verb is The tenses

finite (cf . 1 73) and its subject is in the nominative. of the verbs originally used are changed after the past

tense,

He

said.

415. Indirect Statements in Latin.

statements above would be as follows
r I
.

In Latin the direct and indirect

:

Gain sunt

fortes

[^3.
1
.

Galli erunt fortes

Dicit or Dixit Gallos esse fortis

{He says or {He says

He
or

said the

Gauls
Indirect
2.
j

to be brave)

Dicit or Dixit Gallos fuisse fortis

He

said

Statements
3.
I

the Gauls to have been brave)'^ Dicit or Dixit Gallos futiiros esse fortis

{He says or
^

He

(^

said the Gauls

to be

about

to be brave)

Comparing these Latin

preceding section,
a.
b.
c.

indirect statements with the English in the

:

we

observe three marked differences

to that.

There

is

no conjunction corresponding

The verb is in the infinitive and its subject is in the The tenses of the infinitive are not changed after a

accusative.

past tense of the

principal verb.

416.

Rule.

Indirect Statements.

When a
is

direct statement beto the infinitive

comes

indirect^ the principal verb

changed

and

its

the subject nominative becomes subject accusative of

infinitive.
1 These parenthetical renderings are not inserted show the literal meaning of the Latin

as translations, but merely

to

INDlRhci
417. Tenses of the lafinitive.

oiAiEMKMS
When

79

changed from

the sentences in 415 were the direct to the indirect form of statement, sunt

became
418.

esse, erant

became

fuisse,

and erunt became

futiirOs esse.

Rule.

Infinitive

Tenses in Indirect Statements.

present

indicative of a direct statement becomes present infinitive of the

indirect, a past indicative becomes perfect future indicative becomes future infinitive.
infinitive,

and a

Note. When translating into Latin an English indirect statement, first decide what tense of the indicative would have been used in the direct form. That
will

show you what tense

of the infinitive to use in the indirect.

419.

Rule. Verbs

followed

by

Indirect Statements.

The accusa-

tive-with-infinitive construction in indirect statemefits is

after verbs of saying,

telling,

knowing, thinking,

found and perceiving.

:

420. Verbs regularly followed by indirect statements are

a.

Verbs of saying and

telling

dic5, dicere, dixi, dictiis,

say

negS, negare, negavi, negatus, deny, say not

nuntio, niintiare, nuntiavi, nuntiatus,

announce

responded, respondere, respond!, responsus, reply

b.

Verbs of knowing

cogn5scd, cognoscere, cogndyi, cognitus, learn ^ (in the perf.)

sold, scire, scivi, scitus,
c.

know

ktww

Verbs of thinking

arbitror, arbitrari, arbitratus

sum, think, consider

existim5, existimare, existimavi, existimatus, think^ believe iudico, iudicare, iudicavi, '\\x^\qa\m&, judge, decide
puts, putare, putavT, putatus, reckon, think
8per5, sperare, speravi, speratus,
d.

hope

Verbs of perceiving

audid, audire, audivi, audltus, hear

aenti5, sentire, sensi, sins}Xi, feel, perceive

Tided, yidere, vidi, yisus, see

bitelleg5, intellegere, intellSzi, intellSctus, understand, perceive

Learn such of these verbs as arc new

to you.

l8o
421.

EXERCISES
IDIOMS
day (lit. on the next day of that day) of summer remember (lit. to hold by memory)

postridie eius diei, on the next inita aestate, at the beginning

memoria

tenere, to

per exploratores cognoscere, to learn through scouts

^i2.
I.

EXERCISES
Imns,
Ite, ire.

I. It,

2. Eunti, iisse

or

isse, ibunt,
5.

eunt. 3. Eundi,

ut eant,

ibitis, is.

4.

Ne

irent,

i,

ibant, ierat.
6.

tores cognovit Gallos fliimen transisse.

tios inita aestate

Caesar per exploraRomani audiverunt Helve7.

de finibus suis exituros

esse.

Legati responderunt

Principes Gallorum dicunt se nullum consilium contra Caesaris imperium inituros esse. 9. Arbitramur potentiam reginae esse maiorem quam civium. 10. Roillam insulam adisse.
8.

neminem ante Caesarem

mani negant
nitis

se libertatem Gallis erepturos. esse.

11.

His rebus cog12. Helvetii

sensimus legates non venisse ad pacem petendam.

sciunt

Romanes

priores victorias

memoria

tenere.

13. Socii

cum

in-

tellegerent multos vulnerari, statuerunt in suos nuntiavit Marcum consulem creatum esse.
II.
I
.

finis redire.

14. Aliquis

slow.

2.

The boy is slow. He says that the boy is, was, (and) will be The horse is, has been, (and) will be strong. He judged that

think that the the horse was, had been, (and) would be strong. 3. of summer. at the from the will forth 4. The beginning camp go army

We

next day
miles

we

off.^

learned through scouts that the enemy's town was ten that the ornaments belonged to^ 5. The king replied

the queen.
"^

to be off, to be distant , abesse.

Latin, were of ( 409).

THE IRREGULAR VERB FEKO

LESSON LXXIII
VOCABULARY REVIEW THE IRREGULAR VERB THE DATIVE WITH COMPOUNDS

l8l

FER(>

423. Review the word

lists in

513, 514.

424. Learn the principal parts and conjugation of the verb fert, bear ( 498).
I.

Learn the principal parts and meanings of the following comfer5,

pounds of

bear:

ad'fer5, adfer're, at'tuli, adla^tus, bring to; report

cSn'fero, confer're, con'tuli, conla'tus,
de'fero, defer're, de'tuli, dela'tus,
in'ferS, infer're, in'tuli, inla'tus, re'fero, refer're, ret'tuli, rela'tus,

bring together^ collect bring to j report; grants confer

bring in, bring against bear back; report

425.

The
(cf.
;

dative

is

the case of the indirect object.

Many

intransi-

tive verbs take

an

indirect object

and are therefore used with the

dative

153).

Transitive verbs take a direct object in the ac-

cusative

but sometimes they have an indirect object or dative as well. The whole question, then, as to whether or not a verb takes the dative,

number depends upon its capacity for governing an indirect object. of verbs, some transitive and some intransitive, which in their simple
prepositions, have a

form would not take an indirect object, when compounded with certain meaning which calls for an indirect object. Ob:

serve the following sentences

1.

Haec

rSs ezercitui

maguam

calamitatem

attulit, this

circumstance
the

brought great disaster to the army. 2. Germani Gallia bellum infenmt, the Germans
Gauls.
3.

make war upon

Hae cdpiae

proeli5

n6n mtererant, these troops did not take part in

the battle.
4. Equites fugientibua hostibus occummt, the horsemen meet the feeing enemy. 5. Galba cdpiia fHium praefecit, Galba put his son in command of the

troops.

82

THE DATIVE WITH COMPOUNDS

is

In each sentence there

preposition.

a dative, and in each a verb combined with a

In no case would the simple verb take the dative.

426.

Rule.

Dative with Compounds.

Some

verbs compoimded

with

ad, ante, con, de, in, inter, ob, post, prae, pro, sub, super,

admit

the dative of the indirect object. Transitive compounds take both an accusative and a dative.

may

Note

i.

Among

such verbs are^

bring to ; report ad 'sum, ades'se, ad'fui, adfutu''rus, assist; be present

ad'fero, adfer're, at'tuli, adla'tus,
de'fero, defer're, de'tuli, dela'tus, report; grant, confer

de'sum, dees'se,

de''fui,

be wanting, be lacking

in^fero, infer're, in'tuli, inla'tus,

bring

agaijist,

bring upon

inter'sum, interes'se, inter'fui, interfutu'rus, take part in

occur'to, occur''rere, occur'ri, occur'sus, 7'un against, meet
praefi''ci6, praefi'cere, praefe''ci,

praefec'tus, appoint over, plcue

in

command of
,

prae'sum, praees''se, prae'fui,

be over, be in

command

1^*1.

IDIOMS
graviter or moleste ferre, to be annoyed at, to be indignant at, followed by the accusative and infinitive
se conferre
alicui

ad or

in,

bellum inferre, to

with the accusative, to betake one's self to make war upon some one
(lit.

pedem
428.
I.

referre, to retreat

to

bear back the foot)

EXERCISES
Fer, ferent, ut ferant, ferunt.
2.

I.

Ferte, ut ferrent, tulisse, tule-

Cum navigia insulae adpropinquarent, barbari terrore commoti pedem referre conati sunt. 5. Galli moleste ferebant Romanes agros vastare. 6. Caesar sociis imperavit
rant. 3.

Tulimus, ferens, latus esse,

ferre. 4.

ne

bellum inferrent. 7. Exploratores, qui Caesari occurdixerunt exercitum hostium vulneribus defessum sese in alium rerunt,
finitimis suis

locum contuHsse.
banc rem Caesari
mentis in
1

8.

summum

Hostes sciebant Romanes frumento egere et periculum adlaturam esse. 9. Impedlconlatis, aliqui
in is

unum locum
to

militum flumen quod non longe

But the accusative with ad or

or against
is

used with some of these, when the

idea of motion

strong.

THE SUBJUNCTIVE
aberat transierunt.
10.

IN INDIRECT QUESTIONS

183

H6s

rtx hortatus est ut Oraculum adirent et

1 1.

res auditas ad s referrent.

Quern imperator

ill!

legiOnT praefecit

Publius
crebri

ill!

legiOni praeerat.

12.

Cum

esset Caesar in citeriSre Gallia,

litterisque

ad eum^ rumores adferebantur

quoque
allies.

certior figbat

GallOs obsides inter se dare.

II.
I.

The Gauls

will

make war upon

Caesar's

2.

We

heard

Gauls would make war upon Caesar's allies. 3. Publius did not take part in that battle. 4. We have been informed that Publius
that the

did not take part in that battle. the cavalry

5.

The man who was

to" retreat.
*

in

command

of

was wounded and began

6.

Caesar did not

place

you

in

command

of the cohort to bring

disaster

upon the army.

LESSON LXXIV
VOCABULARY REVIEW
429. Review the word 430.

THE SUBJUNCTIVE IN INDIRECT QUESTIONS

lists in

517, 518.
it

When we

report a statement instead of giving

(Cf. 414.)

directly,

we

have an indirect statement.

instead of asking
it

So,

if

we

report a question

directly,

we have an

indirect question.

Direct Question H^Ao conquered the Gauls f

He

Indirect Question asked who conquered the Gauls

a. An indirect question def>ends, usually as object, upon a verb of asking (as pets, postulo, quaerd, rog6) or upon some verb or expression of saying or mental action. (Cf. 420.)

431. Compare the following direct and indirect questions:

Direct
'

Indirect
a.

Rogat quis Gallds yincat

He
Quis Gallds yincit?

asks

who

is

conquering the

Gauls
b.

Who

is

conquering the Gauls f

Rogavit quia GallSa yinceret He asked who was conquering

the Gauls

Observe that
cf.

when

adferO denotes motion

to,

it

is

not followed by the

dative;

footnote, p. 182.

Not the

infinitive.

(Cf. S 352.)

84

THE SUBJUNCTIVE

IN INDIRECT QUESTIONS
a.

Ubi est Roma?

He
b.

Rogat ubi sit Roma asks where Rome

is

Where

is

Rome?

Rogavit ubi esset

Roma He asked where Rome was

Rogat

f a.

num

Caesar Gallds vicerit

He
Caesarne Gallos vicit?

asks whether Ccesar conquered

the Gauls
i

Did Ccesar conquer the Gauls

Rogavit num Caesar Gall5s vicisset He asked whether Ccesar had con-

quered the Gauls

a.

The verb
is

in a direct question is in the indicative

mood, but the

mood
b.
c.

subjunctive in an indirect question. The tense of the subjunctive follows the rules for tense sequence. Indirect questions are introduced by the same interrogative words as
(cf.

introduce direct questions, excepting thatjyes-or-no direct questions on becoming indirect are usually introduced by num, whether.

210)

432. Rule. Indirect Questions.

verb

is hi

the subjunctive

and

In an indirect question the its tense is determined by the

law for
433.

tense sequence,

IDIOMS
de tertia vigilia, about the third watch
iniurias alicui inferre, to inflict injuries

upon some one

facere verba pro, with the ablative, to speak in behalf of in reliquum tempus,^^^ the future

434.
I.

EXERCISES

I. Rex rogavit quid legati postularent et cur ad se venissent. Quaesivit quoque num nee recentis iniurias nee dubiam Romanorum amicitiam memoria tenerent. 3. Videtisne quae oppida hostes

2.

oppugnaverint
lerint?
5.

4.

Nonne

scltis

cur Galli sub

montem

sese contu6.

Audlvimus quas

iniurias tibi

German!

intulissent.

De

tertia vigilia

imperator misit homines qui cognoscerent quae esset natura montis. 7. Pro his orator verba fecit et rogavit cur consules
navis ad

plenum summi

periculi

locum mittere

vellent.

8.

Legatis

convocatis dcmonstravit quid

fieri vellet.

referebat quid 9. Nuntius

DATIVE OF PURPOSE, OR END FOR WHICH

in

185

Gallorum concilio de armis tradendis dictum

esset.

o.

Mone6 n6
2.

in

reliquum tempus peditgs et equites trans flumen ducas.

II.
I.

What

hill

did they seize

see what

hill

they seized.

Who

upon our dependents ? 3. They asked who had inflicted those injuries upon their dependents. 4. Whither did you go about the third watch? You know whither I went. 5. At what
has
inflicted these injuries

time did the boys return

returned home.

home?

I will

ask at what time the boys

LESSON LXXV
VOCABULARY REVIEW
435. Review the word

THE DATIVE OF PURPOSE, OR END FOR WHICH

521, 522.

lists in

436. Observe the following sentences:

1.

Expl5rat5res locum castris delegerunt, the scouts chose a place for

a camp.
2.

Hoc erat magno impedimento

Gallis, this wets (for)

a great hindrance
legions as (^\\.. for)

to the Gauls.
3. Duas legiones praesidid a guard to the camp.

castris reliquit,

he

left

two

In each of these sentences

for which something

castris,

is

we find a dative expressing the purpose or end intended or for which it serves. These datives are

find a

impedimentd, and praesidid. In the second and third sentences we second dative expressing the person or thing affected (Gallis and
datives, covering the relations of

castris). As you notice, these are true for which and to which. (Cf. 43.)

437. Rule. Dative of Purpose or End. The dative is used to denote the purpose or end for which, often with another dative

denoting the person or thing

438.

affected.

miOMS
c5nsilium omittere, to give up a plan locum castris deligere, to choose a place for a
alicui

camp magnd usui esse, to be of great advantai^r one i^'L for great advantage to some one)
'

-^

'rr

86
439.
I.

GENITIVE AND ABLATIVE OF QUALITY

EXERCISES
Rogavit cur
castris.
illae

I.

copiae relictae essent.

2.

copias esse praesidio castris.

Responderunt illas Caesar misit exploratores ad locum

deligendum

3.

magno

terrori barbaris

Quisque existimavit ipsum nomen Caesaris futurum esse. 4. Prima luce idem exercitus

proelium acre commisit, sed gravia suorum vulnera magnae curae imperatori erant. 5. Rex respondit amicitiam populi Romani sibi orna-

mento

Quis praeerat equitatui quem auxilio Aliquibus res secundae sunt summae calamitati et res adversae sunt miro usui. 8. Gallis magno ad pugnam
6.

et praesidio

debere esse.
?

Caesari socii miserant

7.

erat impedimento quod equitatus a dextro comu premebat. 9. Memoria pristinae virttitis non minus quam metus hostium erat nostris

magno
II.

usui.

10.

Tam

densa erat

silva ut

progredi non possent.

I.I advise you Ho give up the plan ^of making war upon the brave Gauls. 2. Do you know ^ where the cavalry has chosen a place
fear of the enemy will be of great advantage to three cohorts as (for) a guard to the baggage. you. 4. the of lake are so great *that they are (for) a In winter waves the 5. hindrance to 6. inflicted severe^ punishment on Caesar ships. great for a

camp

3.

The

Caesar

left

those

who burned

the public buildings.

LESSON LXXVI
VOCABULARY REVIEW
440. Review the word

THE GENITIVE AND ABLATIVE OF QUALITY OR DESCRIPTION

lists in

524, 525.

441. Observe the English sentences

A man of great courage^ or (2) A man with great courage A forest of tall trees or (4) A forest with tall trees (3)
(i)
^

Each
the
first

two a man

of these sentences contains a phrase of quality or description. In in the last two a forest. The descriptive is described
;

phrases are introduced by the prepositions of and with.

1

Subjunctive of purpose.
*

(Cf. 366.)
*

Express by the genitive of the

^

gerundive.

Indirect question.

clause of result.

gravis, -e.

GENITIVE AND ABLATIVE OF QUALITY

The

187

In Latin the expression of quality or description is very similar. prepositions of and with suggest the genitive and the ablative respectively, and we translate the sentences above
(
I

Vir

magnae

virtutis, or (2) Vir

magna

virtute

(3)

Silva altarum arbonim, or (4) Silva altis arboribua

however, one important difference between the Latin and In English we may say, for example, a man of courage^ using the descriptive phrase without an adjective modifier. In Latin,

There

is,

the English.

however, an adjective modifier must ahvays be used, as above.

a. Latin makes a distinction between the use of the two cases in that numerical descriptions of measure are in the genitive and descriptions of physical characteristics are in the ablative. Other descriptive phrases may

be in either case.

442.
1.

EXAMPLES
and a

2.

Fossa duodecim pedum, a ditch of twelve feet. Hom5 magnis pedibus et parv5 capite, a man with big feet
rex erat yir

small head.
3. RSx erat vir summa audacia or was a man of the greatest boldness.

summae audaciae,

the king

443.

Rule.

Genitive

of

Description.

Numerical descriptions

of measure are expressed by the genitive with a modifying

adjective.

444.

Rule.

Ablative of Description.

Descriptions of physical

characteristics are expressed by the ablative with

adjective.

a modifying

Genitive or Ablative of Description. Descriptions neither numerical statements nor physical characterinvolving istics may be expressed by either the genitive or the ablative

445.

Rule.

with a modifying adjective.

446.
Helvetiis in

IDIOMS

animd Mt, the Helvetii intend (lit. // is in mind to the Hehetians) in matrimSnium dare, to give in marriage nihil posse, to have no power fossam perduoere, to construct a ditch (lit to lead a ditch through)

88
447.
I.
I.

EXERCISES
EXERCISES
Milites

fossam decern pedum per eorum

finis

perduxerunt.

Princeps Helvetiorum, vir summae audaciae, principibus gentium finitimarum sorores in matrimonium dedit. 3. Eorum amicitiam con2.

firmare voluit quo facilius Galli non erant eiusdem

Romanis bellum
gentis.
6. Galli

inferret.

5.

Omnes
oppidum

fere

4. Germani et Germani erant

magnis corporum

viribus.^

qui

fortiter
7.

defendebant

saxa ingentis magnitudinis de muro iaciebant.

Cum

Caesar ab

exploratoribus quaereret qui illud oppidum incolerent, exploratores responderunt eos esse homines summa virtu te et magno consilio.
8.

Moenia

viginti

pedum

a sinistra parte, et a dextra parte flumen

magnae

altitudinis

pervenisset, erat

oppidum defendebant. 9. Cum Caesar in Galliam rumor Helvetiis in animo esse iter per provinciam

Romanam facere. 10. Caesar, ut eos ab finibus Romanis prohiberet, miinitionem ^multa milia passuum longam fecit.
II.
I.

Caesar was a general of

much wisdom and

great boldness,

and very skillful in the art of war. 2. The Germans were of great size, and thought that the Romans had no power. 3. Men of the highest courage were left in the camp as (for) a guard to the baggage. 4. The king's daughter, who was given in marriage to the chief of a neighboring state, was a woman of very beautiful appearance. 5. The soldiers will construct a ditch of nine feet around the camp.
6.

A
1

river of great width

vis.

was between us and the enemy.

^

From

(Cf. 468.)

Genitives and ablatives of description are

adjective phrases. When high ox how deep anything

we use an adverbial phrase to tell how long or how is, we must use the accusative of extent. (Cf. 336.)
is

For example,

in the

sentence above multa milia passuum

an adverbial phrase

(accusative of extent) modifying longam. If we should omit longam and say a fortification of many miles, the genitive of description (an adjective phrase) modifying miinitionem would be used, as miinitionem multorum milium passuum.

GLADII

REVIEW OF AGREEMENT

189

LESSON LXXVII
REVIEW OF AGREEMENT, AND OF THE GENITIVE, DATIVE, AND ACCUSATIVE
448. ITiere are four agreements:
1
.

That of the predicate noun or of the appositive with the noun to

it

which
2.

belongs ( 76, 81).

adjective, adjective

That of the
( 65).

pronoun, or participle with

its

noun
3.

That of a verb with

its

subject ( 28).
its

4.

That of a

relative

pronoun with

antecedent ( 224).

449.
in

The relation expressed by the genitive is, in general, denoted English by the preposition of. It is used to express
r a.

As
.

1.

Possessions

attributive ( 38).
,.

\,b.

In the predicate ( 409).

is

j-

^^

2. 3.

The whole

of which a part

taken (partitive genitive) (331).

Quality or description ( 443, 445).

450.
in

The relation expressed by the dative is, in general, denoted English by the prepositions to or for when they do not imply
It is

motion through space.

used to express

a.

With

intransitive verbs

and with

transitive

verbs in connection with a direct object in the accusative ( 45).

I.

The

indirect object

b.
c.

With

special intransitive verbs (

54).

With verbs compounded with

sub, super (426).

ad, ante,

con, de, in, inter, ob, post, prae, pr5,

2.

The object

to

which the quality of an adjective

is

directed (

43).

3. purpose, or end for which, often with a second dative the denoting person or thing affected ( 437).

The

I90
451.

GENITIVE, DATIVE, ACCUSATIVE

The
accusative case corresponds, in general, to the English

objective.
1.

It is

used to express

predicate accusative together with the direct object after verbs of makings choosing^ callings showing, and the like (392).
2.

The The

direct object of a transitive verb ( 37).

3.
4.

The The The The

subject of the infinitive ( 214). object of prepositions that do not govern the ablative

( 340)5. 6.

duration of time and the extent of space (336).

place to which ( 263, 266).

452.
I.

EXERCISES
Milites
2.

I.

quos vidimus dixerunt imperium

Helvetii statuerunt

belli

esse Caesaris

imperatoris.

quam^ maximum numerum equo-

rum
runt.

et

carrorum cogere. 3. Totius Galliae Helvetii plurimum value4. Multas horas acriter pugnatum est neque quisquam poterat
5. Viri 6.

videre hostem fugientem.

summae

virtutis hostis

decem

milia

passuum
consulem
tissima.

insecuti sunt.
crearet.
8.
7.

Caesar populo

Romano
in

persuasit ut se

Victoria exercitus erat semper imperatori gra-

Triduum

iter

fecerunt et

Genavam,

oppidum^ hostium,

intulisse. pervenerunt. 9. 10. Magno Usui militibus Caesaris erat quod prioribus proeliis sese exercuerant.

Caesar audivit Germanos bellum Gallis

tured.
3.

One^ of the king's sons and many of his men were capThere was no one who wished* to appoint her queen. The grain supply was always a care (for a care) to Caesar, the
II.
I.

2.

general.

4. I

think

that

the

camp

is

ten

miles

distant.
6.

5.

We
plan

marched for three hours through a very dense ^of making war upon the allies was not pleasing
he came to the
1

forest.

The
7.

to the king.
wall.

When

hill

he

fortified

it

by a twelve-foot
2

m-^jg r oppidum, apposquam with superlatives ? ' What construction is of a town, takes a preposition. * What mood ? used with numerals in preference to the partitive genitive ? * ^ Use the Latin, by a wall of twelve feet. (Cf. 390.) gerund or gerundive.
is

What

the force of

itive to a

name

REVIEW OF THE ABLATIVE

191

LESSON LXXVIII
REVIEW OF THE ABLATIVE
453.
lish

The

relations of the ablative are, in general, expressed in

Eng-

by the prepositions with (or by), from (or by), constructions growing out of these meanings are
I.

and

in (or at).

The

Ablative rendered with (or by):

1.

Cause

( 102)

2.

Means

( 103) ( 104)

3. 4.
5.

Accompaniment

Manner ( 105)
Measure of
With a
difference

(317)
(381)

6.
7.

participle (ablative absolute)

Description or quality ( 444, 445)

Specification (

8.
II.

398)

Ablative rendered from (or by):

Place from which ( 179, 264) Ablative of separation (180) 3. Personal agent with a passive verb (181) 4. Comparison without quam ( 309)
1.

2.

III. Ablative rendered in (or at):

1.

2.

Time when or

Place at or in which ( 265, 266) within which (275)

454.
I.

EXERCISES
Galli locis superioribus occupatis itinere exercitum prohibre
2.

I.

conantur.
inc^prunt.

Omnes
3.

oppidani ex oppido ggressi salutem fug petere Caesar docet s militum vitam sua salute habere multO
celerius
5.

cariOrem.

4.

Cum

omnium

opinione pervenisset, hostes ad

eum

obsides misrunt.
6.

Vicus

in valle positus

montibus

altissimis

undique contin6tur.

PlQrimum
7.

inter Gall6s haec

g^ns

et virtute et

hominum numerO

valbat.

Secunda
8.

vigilia nQllO cert6

Ordine neque
relictiSi

impend S castris SgressI sunt

Duabus

legiOnibus Genavae

192

GERUND, INFINITIVE, SUBJUNCTIVE

reliquls

proximo die cum

audacia et

domum
domo

profectus

est.

9.

Erant itinera duo

quibus itineribus Helvetii

exire possent.

10.

Rex

erat

summa

magna apud populum potentia. commoti bellum parabant. 12. Caesar monet legates ut contineant milites, ne studio pugnandi aut spe praedae longius^ progrediantur. 13. Bellum acerrimum a Caesare in Gallos gestum est.
II.
I.

11. Galli timore servitutis

The

lieutenant after having seized the mountain restrained

battle.
2.

his
3.

(men) from
This tribe
is

All the Gauls differ

from each other

in laws.

shorter than

much braver than the rest. 4. This road is ^ten miles that. 5. In summer Caesar carried on war in Gaul, in
6.

winter he returned to Italy. the camp with three legions.

self

At midnight the general

set out
*

from

from these enemies.

the Gauls.

8.

yourAfter this battle was finished peace was

7. I fear that

you cannot protect

made by all

LESSON LXXIX
REVIEW OF THE GERUND AND GERUNDIVE, THE TIVE, AND THE SUBJUNCTIVE
455.

INFINI-

The gerund

is

a verbal noun and

singular.

is

used only

in the genitive,

dative, accusative,

and ablative

The

constructions of these
i).

cases are in general the

same as those of other nouns ( 402, 406.

is

456.

The gerundive

a verbal adjective and must be used instead

of gerund -f object, excepting in the genitive and in the ablative without a preposition. Even in these instances the gerundive construction
is

more usual

( 406. 2).

457.
I.

The

infinitive is

used

As
As

in English.

a.
b.

To
As
1

subject or predicate nominative ( 216). complete the predicate with verbs of

infinitive) ( 215).

incomplete

predication

(complementary
c.

object with subject accusative after verbs of wishing^

( 2
1

commanding^

forbidding^ and the like

longius, too far.

3).

(Cf. 305.) defendere.

Latin, by ten thousands ofpaces. Ablative absolute.

GERUND, INFINITIVE, SUBJUNCTIVE

II.

193

In the principal sentence of an indirect statement after verbs of saying and mental action. The subject is in the accusative (416,
418, 419).

458.
1.

The

subjunctive

is

used

2.

To To

3.
4.

denote purpose ( 349, 366, 372). denote consequence or result ( 385, 386). In relative clauses of characteristic or description ( 390). In cum clauses of time, cause, and concession ( 396).
In indirect questions ( 432).

5.

459.
I
.

EXERCISES
.

Caesar,

cum

pervfinisset, mllites hortabatur

2.

ne cSnsilium oppidi
positis, misit ex-

capiendi omitterent.

Rex,

castris

prope oppidum

plore tores qui cognOscerent ubi exercitus

Romanus

esset.

3.

Nemo

relinquSbatur qui

arma

ferre posset.

armOrum multitudinem de muro

transire flumen iussit.
6.

Nuntii viderunt ingentem in fossam iactam esse. 5. Dux su6s

4.

Transire autem hoc flumen erat difficillimum.

ferrent,

R6mani cum banc calamitatem moleste

7.

recusaverunt.

Hoc rumore

audito, tantus terror

tamen terga vertere omnium animos

occupavit
8. 9.

proelium committere vellent Erant qui putarent tempus anni idoneum non esse itineri faciendO. Tam acriter ab utrSque parte pugnabatur ut multa milia hominum
ut
10.

ne fortissimi quidem

occiderentur.

Quid times

Timeo nS Romanis

in

animo

sit

totam

Galliam superare et nObis'iniurias inferre. II. I. Do you not see who is standing on the wall? that the plan of taking the town has been given up.

2.

We

hear

3.

Since the

Germans thought that the Romans could not cross the Rhine, Caesar ordered a bridge to be made. 4. When the bridge was finished, the savages were so terrified that they hid themselves. 5. They feared
that Caesar

would pursue them.

7.

6.

Caesar

asked the traders what the

size of the island was.

The

traders advised

him not *to cross the

sea.

8.
>

He

sent scouts 'to choose a place for a camp.

*

qoaerere b.

Not

infinitive.

Use the gerundive with

ad.

READING MATTER
INTRODUCTORY SUGGESTIONS
How
ing
to Translate.

You have

translating simple Latin,

and have learned that the guide

already had considerable practice in to the mean-

If these are neglected, no skill lies in the endings of the words. can make sense of the Latin. If they are carefully noted and accu-

rately translated, not

many

difficulties

remain.

Observe the following

suggestions: 1. Read the Latin sentence through to the end, noting endings of

nouns, adjectives, verbs,

2.

etc.

again and see if any of the words you know are nominatives or accusatives. This will often give you what may be

Read
the

it

called

backbone of the sentence; that

is,

subject,

verb,

and

object.
3.

Look up
If

the words you do not know, and determine their use

in the sentence
4.

from

their endings.

you cannot yet translate the sentence, put

all

down

the Eng-

lish

meanings of
will

the words in the same order as the Latin words.

You
5.

then generally see through the meaning of the sentence.

careful to

Be

a. Translate adjectives
b.

with the nouns to which they belong. Translate together prepositions and the nouns which they govern. c. Translate adverbs with the words that they modify. d. Make sense. If you do not make sense, you have made a mistake.
mistake
will spoil

One
6.

a whole sentence.
is

When

the sentence
try to

again, and

understand

correctly translated, read the Latin over it as Latin, without thinking of the

English translation.
194

THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE

The Parts
of a Sentence.

195

longer sentences than you have had before. To assist in translating them, remember, first of all, that every sentence conveys a meaning and
either tells us something, asks a question, or gives a

You

will

now meet somewhat

command. Every

sentence must have a subject and a verb, and the verb may always have an adverb, and, if transitive, will have a direct object However long a sentence is, you will usually be able to recognize
its

subject, verb,

difficulty.

These

will

and object or predicate complement without any give you the leading thought, and they must

never be

lost sight of while

chief difficulty in translating arises

single adjective, adverb, or noun,

making out the rest of the sentence. The from the fact that instead of a

we

often have a phrase or a clause

taking the place of one of these; for Latin, like English, has adjective, adverbial, and substantive clauses and phrases. For example, in the

sentence The idle boy does not study, the word idle is an adjective. In The boy wasting his time does not study, the words wasting his time form an adjective phrase modifying boy. In the sentence The boy who
wastes his time does not study, the words who wastes his time form an adjective clause modifying boy, and the sentence is complex. These sentences would show the same structure in Latin.

In translating, it is important to keep the parts of a phrase and the parts of a clause together and not let them become confused with the principal sentence. To distinguish between the subordinate clauses

and the principal sentence

cult
if

is

of the

first

importance, and

is

not

diffi-

you remember that a clause regularly contains a word that marks it as a clause and that this word usually stands first. These
join clauses to the

words

dinate conjunctions.

They

words they depend on, and are called suborare not very numerous, and you will soon
In Latin they are the equivalents for such

learn to recognize them.

words as when, while,

that, that, etc.

Form

since, because, if, before, after, though, in order the habit of memorizing the Latin subordinate

conjunctions as you meet them, and of noting carefully the the verb in the clauses which they introduce.

mood

of

HERCULES

HERCULES AND THE SERPENTS

197

THE LABORS OF HERCULES

Hercules, a Greek hero celebrated for his great strength, was pursued throughout his life by the hatred of Juno. While yet an infant he strangled some serpents sent by the goddess to destroy him. During his boyhood and youth he performed various marvelous

and on reaching manhood he succeeded in delivering the Thebans from the oppression of the Minyac. In a fit of madness, sent upon him by Juno, he slew his own children; and, on consulting the Delphic oracle
feats of strength,

as to

how he should
this crime,

cleanse himself

from

he was ordered to sub-

mit himself for twelve years to Eurystheus, king of Tiryns, and to perform whatever tasks were appointed him. Hercules obeyed the oracle, and during the twelve years of his servitude ac-

complished twelve extraordinary feats known as the Labors of Hercules. His

death was caused, unintentionally, by his wife Deiani'ra. Hercules had shot with his poisoned arrows a centaur named Nessus, who had insulted Deianira. Nessus, before he died, gave some of his blood to Deianira, and told her it would act as a charm to secure her

HERCULES ET SERPENTES

husband's love. Some time after, Deianira, wishing to try the charm, soaked one of her husband's garments in the blood, not knowing that it was poisoned. Hercules put on the robe, and, after suffering terrible torments, died, or was
carried off by his father Jupiter.

UII.i

THE INFANT HERCULES AND THE SERPENTS

Di* grave supplicium sumunt dg malls, sed ii qui legibus* deorum parent, etiam post mortem curantur. Ilia vita dis* erat gratissima quae

hominibus miseris utilissima fuerat.

summum

erat immortalitas.

I Hud

Omnium autem praemiorum praemium Herculi datum est.

5

Herculis pater fuit luppiter, mater Alcmena, et omnium hominum validissimus fuisse didtur. Sed lQn(^, rgina dednim, eum, adhQc
*

This number refers to the lesson after which the selection

Cf. 468.
'

may be

read.

Di and dis arc from deu*.

ligibus, 501. 14.

198

HERCULES CONQUERS THE MINY^

nam
ei^ et^

infantem, interficere studebat;

invisi.

Hercules et Alcmena erant

Itaque misit duas serpentis,

utramque saevissimam, quae media

Ibi

nocte

domum^ Alcmenae

venerunt.

Hercules,

non
5

in lectulo sed in scuto ingenti

dormiebat

cum fratre suo, lam audaces serpentes

adpropinquaverant, iam scutum movebant. Tum frater, terrore commotus, magna voce matrem vocavit, sed Hercules ipse, fortior quam
frater, statim ingentis serpentis

manibus

suis rapuit et interfecit.

LIV.

HERCULES CONQUERS THE MINY.E

bus exercebat
10

Hercules a puero* corpus suum gravissimis et difficillimis labori^ et hoc modo vires suas confirmavit. Iam adulescens
Ibi

Thebis^ habitabat.
dissima,

Creon quidam
et,

erat rex.

Minyae, gens

vali-

quia olim Thebanos vicerant, quotannis legates mittebant et vectigal postulabant. Hercules autem constituit civis suos hoc vectigali liberare et dixit regi, "Da mihi
erant finitimi Thebanis,

exercitum tuum et ego hos superbos hostis superabo." Hanc con15 dicionem rex non recusavit, et Hercules nuntios in omnis partis dimisit
et copias coegit.'^

Tum tempore opportunissimo proelium cum Minyis Diu pugnatum est, sed denique illi impetum Thebanorum sustinere non potuerunt et terga verterunt fugamque ceperunt.
commisit

HE COMMITS A CRIME AND GOES TO THE DELPHIAN

ORACLE TO SEEK EXPIATION
20 Herculi in

Post hoc proelium Creon rex, tanta victoria laetus, filiam suam matrimonium dedit. Thebis Hercules cum uxore sua diu

vivebat et ab omnibus magnopere amabatur; sed post multos annos subito in furorem incidit et ipse sua manu liberos suos interfecit.

Post breve tempus *ad sanitatem reductus tantum scelus expiare

cupiebat et constituit ad oraculum Delphicum iter facere. Hoc autem 25 oraculum erat omnium clarissimum. Ibi sedebat femina quaedam quae veniebant. Pythia appellabatur. Ea consilium dabat iis qui ad oraculum
^
ei,

to

her,
*

501. 20. 501. 36.

I.

referring to Juno. a puer6,/n7w boyhood.

7

^ et
^
^

et^

both

and.

^ ^

domum,
Thebis,

vires,

from vis.
in

Cf. 468.

coegit,
lit.

from cogo.

in

furorem

incidit,

went mad.

ad

sanitatem reductus,

led back to sanity.

What

good English?

HERCULES STRANGLES THE NEMEAN LION

LV.

199

HERCULES BECOMES SUBJECT TO EURYSTHEUS^ HE STRANGLES THE NEME'AN LION

abdidit

Itaque Hercules Pythiae tOtam rem demSnstravit nee scelus suum Ubi iam Hercules finem fecit, Pythia iussit eum ad urbem ubi 'Hryntha'* discedere et ibi regi Eurystheo sese committere. Quae*

audivit,

Hercules ad illam urbem statim contendit et EurystheO sg

dixit,

in
5

servitutem tradidit et

"Quid primum,

rex,

me

facere iubes ?"

HERCULES LEONEM SUPERAT

Eurystheus, qui perterrebatur vi et corpore ingenti Herculis et eum "Audi, Hercules Multa mira* narrantur
1

occldl* studebat, ita respondit:

de le5ne saevissimo qui hoc tempore in valle Nemaea omnia vastat lubeO te, virOrum omnium fortissimum, illo monstrO homines liberSre."
*

Haec verba Herculi maxime

placuerunt.

"Properabo,"

inquit, 10

whose foundation goes back of Tiryns, a Greek noun.

Ea-rys^theus (pronounced U-ris'thus) was king of Ti'ryns^ a Grecian city, ^ to prehistoric times. Tiryntha, the ace. case * Quae, obj. of audivit. It is placed first to make

a close connection with the preceding sentence. This is called a connecting ^ * relative. occldl, pres. pass, infin. mlra, marvelous tAingSt the adj. being used as a noun. Cf. omnia, in the next line.

200

SLAYING THE LERNEAN HYDRA

Turn
in silvas
in

"et parebo imperio^ tuo."

statim iter
fecit.

quibus leo habitabat

fecit;

Mox

feram

vidit et pluris

impetus

frustra

tamen, quod neque sagittis neque uUo alio telo monstrum vulnerare potuit. Denique Herculgs saevum leonem suis ingentibus bracchiis
5

rapuit et faucis eius

omnibus

viribus compressit.

Hoc modo

brevi

tempore eum

ad oppidum in umeris et veste pellem postea pro^ gerebat. Omnes autem qui earn reportavit ubi famam de morte leonis ingentis acceperunt, regionem incolebant,
interfecit.

Tum

corpus leonis

erant laetissimi et

Herculem laudabant

verbis amplissimis.

LVI.
10

SLAYING THE LERNE'AN HYDRA

Deinde Hercules ab Euiystheo iussus est Hydram occidere. Itaque cum amico lolao^ contendit ad paludem Lernaeam ubi Hydra incoleHoc autem monstrum erat serpens ingens quae novem capita bat. habebat. Mox is monstrum repperit et summo* cum periculo collum eius sinistra manu rapuit et tenuit. Tum dextra manu capita novem
sed frustra laborabat, quod quotiens hoc fecerat
totiens alia

15 abscidere incepit,

Quod^ ubi vidit, statuit capita ignl octo cap'ita delevit, sed extremum caput vulnerari non potuit, quod erat immortale. Itaque illud sub ingenti saxo Hercules posuit et ita victoriam reportavit.
cremare.

nova capita videbat.

Hoc modo

LVII.
20

THE ARCADIAN STAG AND THE ERYMANTHIAN BOAR

mum eius occupavit.

;

Postquam Eurystheo mors Hydrae nuntiata est, summus terror aniItaque iussit Herculem capere et ad se reportare

cervum quendam nam minime cupivit tantum virum in regno suo tenere. Hie autem cervus dicebatur aurea cornua et pedes multo^
celeriores vento^ habere.

Primum Hercules

vestigia animalis petivit,

Per 25 deinde, ubi cervum. ipsum vidit, omnibus viribus currere incepit. noctu cessavit. dies contendit nee per postquam Denique plurimos
imperio, 501. 14. hero's best friend.
ubi,
*
1

^ *

pro, for, instead of.

lolao, abl. of I-o-ld'us,

the

when he saw

^ of this adjective. Quod this, another instance of the connecting relative. Cf. p. 199, 1. 3.

Note the emphatic position

multo, 501,

''

z"],

vento, 501. 34.

CLEANING THE AUGEAN STABLES

t6tum annum cucurrerat
et

20 1

ita dicitur

cervum

iam defessum cCpit

ad Eurystheum portavit. Turn vero iussus est Hercules aprum quendam capere qui illo tempore agrOs ErymanthiSs vastabat et homines illius loci magnopere perterrgbat.

Hercules laete negotium suscepit et in Arcadiam celeriter se

Ibi

recepit
vidit,

mox aprum
quam^

statim

lUe autem, simul atque Herculem celerrime fugit et metu perterritus in fossam altam
repperit.

sese abdidit

Hercules tamen

summa cum

difficultate

eum

extraxit,

nee aper ullo portatus est

modo

sesS liberare potuit, et vivus ad

Eurystheum
10

LVIII.

HERCULES CLEANS THE AUGE'AN STABLES AND KILLS THE STYMPHALIAN BIRDS
Elidis* obtinebat, tria milia

Deinde Eurystheus Herculi hunc laborem multo graviorem imperavit.

Augeas^ quidam, qui

illo

tempore regnum

boum*

habebat.
triginta

Hi

*ingenti stabulo continebantur.

erat,

Hoc

stabulum,

quod per

annos non purgatum

Hercules intra spatium

unius diel purgare iussus est

lUe negotium alacriter suscepit, et pri- 15

maximam fossam fodit per quam fluminis de ad murum stabuli duxit. Tum partem parvam montibus aquam muri delevit et kquam in stabulum immisit. Hoc modo finem operis
labore gravissimo
fecit

mum

uno

die facillime.
iter fecit
;

Post paucos dies Hercules ad oppidum Stymphalum

nam

20

Eurystheus iusserat eum avis Stymphalides occidere. Hae aves rostra ferrea habebant et homines miseros devorabant Ille, postquam ad

locum pervenit, lacum

vidit in

quo aves incolebant Nullo tamen modo

Hercules avibus adpropinquare potuit; lacus enim non ex aqu5 sed e limo cOnstitit.* Denique autem aves ''de aliqua causa perterritae in 25 aurSs volaverunt et magna pars earum sagittis Herculis occisa est
^ quam. What is the force of ^uam with a superlative? ' nounced in English Aw-jyas. Elidis, gen. case of Elis, a * bourn, gen. plur. of bSs. For construction see 501. 1.
1

district of
*

^AugSia, proGreece.

ingenti stabuld,

abl. of

means, but
^

from

ofottft.

our idiom we should say fti a huge stabU. cdnstitit, di aliqaJl oiusi perterritae, frigkUnedfar s0m* rtas9n.

in

202
LIX.

CAPTURING THE CRETAN BULL

HERCULES CAPTURES THE CRETAN BULL AND CARRIES HIM LIVING TO EURYSTHEUS

Turn Eurystheus iussit Herculem portare vivum ex insula Greta taurum quendam saevissimum. Ille igitur navem conscendit nam
ventus erat idoneus
gavit,
5

atque

statim solvit.

Postquam triduum

navi-

incolumis insulae adpropinquavit. Deinde, postquam omnia parata sunt, contendit ad eam regionem quam taurus vexabat. Mox taurum vidit ac sine uUo metu comua eius corripuit. Tum ingenti
labore

monstrum ad navem

traxit

atque

cum hac praeda

ex insula

discessit

HERCULES ET TAURUS

THE FLESH-EATING HORSES OF DIOME'DES

lo in

Postquam ex Insula Creta domum pervenit, Hercules ab Eurystheo Thraciam missus est Ibi Diomedes quidam, vir saevissimus, regobtinebat et omnis a finibus suls prohibebat. Hercules iussus Diomedis rapere et ad Eurystheum ducere. Hi autem equi

num

erat equos

homines miserrimos devorabant de quibus rex supplicium sumere cupiebat. Hercules ubi pervenit, primum equos a rege postulavit, sed
15

rex eos dedere recusavit.

Deinde

ille

ira

commotus regem

occidit et

corpus eius equis tradidit.

eodem

Itaque qui antea multos necaverat, ipse necatus est. Et supplicio equI, nuper saevissima animalia,
is

postquam domini

sui corpus devoraverunt,

mansueti erant.

THE BELT OF HIPPOLYTE

LX.

203

THE BELT OF HIPPOL'YTE, QUEEN OF THE AMAZONS

dicitur

Gns Amazonum *
viris

'omnInO ex mulieribus

fuisse.

Hae cum

proelium committere nOn vergbantur. Hippolyte, Amzonum filia rSgina, balteum habuit pulcherrimum. Hunc balteum possidere
Eurysthei vehementer cupi^bat.

Itaque Eurystheus
Ille

iussit

Herculem
c5n5

impetum

in

Amazon6s

facere.

multis

cum

cSpiis

navem

scendit et paucis diebus in

Amazonum
potuit.

finis

pervenit, ac balteum
cupivit
;

postulaviL

Eum

trSdere ipsa Hippolyte

quidem

reliquls ta-

men Amazonibus* persu5dere non

commlsit.

Postridie Hercules proelium

est.

Multas horas utrimque quam fortissime pugnatum

Denique tamen mulier^s terga verterunt et fuga salutem petienint. Multae autem captae sunt, in qu5 numer5 erat ipsa Hippolytg. Hercules postquam balteum accgpit, omnibus captivis libertatem dedit.

lo

THE DESCENT TO HADES AND THE DOG CER'BERUS

lamque Onus modo 6 duodecim
omnis hie erat
difficillimus.

laboribus relinquebatur sed inter lussus est enim canem Cerberum* ex

Orc6 in lucem trahere. Ex Oreo autem nemo antea reverterat. Praeterea Cerberus erat monstrum maxirafe

horribile et tria capita habebat.

Hercules postquam imperia Eurysthei accepit, statim profectus est et in

Orcum descendit. Ibi vSrQ non sine summo periculO Cerberum manibus rapuit et ingent! cum labore ex Oreo
in lucem et

ad urbem Eurysthei traxit.

illi*

Sic

duodecim labor^s

intrd

duodecim ann5s cOnfectI sunt. DS-

mum

post longam vitam Hercules

filiO

dels receptus est et luppiter

HERCULES ET CERBERUS
*

su5 dedit immortSlitatem.

^ A fabled tribe of warlike women living in Asia Minor. * kofe consisted entirely of women. Amltonibus, 501. 14. berus guarded the gate of Orcus, the abode of the dead.

omalaS,

etc., (a

The dog Cer*

ilU, those famous.

204
P.

THE STORY OF A ROMAN BOY

CORNELIUS LENTULUS
LXI.

THE STORY OF A ROMAN BOYi

:

PUBLIUS

IS

BORN NEAR POMPE'II

erat

P. Cornelius Lentulus,^ adulescens

natus est

nam pater eius, Marcus,

Romanus, amplissima familia* dux peritissimus, cuius virtute*

et consilio

clarissimis maioribus orta est.

5

multae victoriae reportatae erant; atque mater eius, lulia, a Non vero in urbe sed ruri^ Publius

natus

est, et

cum matre

habitabat in
sita erat.

villa

quae

in maris litore et sub

radicibus

magni montis

Mons autem

erat Vesuvius et parva

PUERI ROMANI

urbs Pompeii octo milia* passuum' aberat. In Italia antiqua erant plurimae quidem villae et pulchrae, sed inter has omnis nulla erat put
chrior

quam

villa

Marcl luliaeque.

Frons

villae

muro a maris

fluctibus

lo mOniebatur.

Hinc mare

et litora et insulae longe lateque conspici^

ac saepe naves longae et onerariae poterant.

latere agri feracissimi patebant.

tergo et ab utroque

Undique

erat

copia
1

et

multa ingentium arborum genera quae aestate

is fiction

magna variorum florum umbram

This story

with certain historical facts in Caesar's career as a

However, the events chronicled might have happened, and no doubt ^ did happen to many a Roman youth. ^ Roman had three names, as, Publius (given name), Cornelius (name of the gens or clan), Lentulus (family ^ Abl. of source, which is akin to the abl. of separation ( 501. 32). name).
setting.

*yirtute, 501. 24.

501. II.
^

^ "^ ' ruri, 501. 36. i. milia, 501. 21. passuum, c5nspici, infin. with poterant, 215. Consult the map of Italy for

the approximate location of the

villa.

aestate, 501. 35.

HIS LIFE

ON THE FARM

205

defessis agricolls gratissimam adferebant

Praeterea erant^ in agrls

stabulisque multa animalium genera, n5n sOlum equi et boves sed etiam rarae aves. Etiam erat* magna piscina plena pisdum; nam RSmani piscis diligenter colebant

LXII.

HIS LIFE

ON THE FARM
vilicus
*

Huius
omnia
tant.

villae

Davus, servus MarcT, est

et

cum

Lesbia uxOre

curat.

Vilicus et uxor in casa humill, mediis in agris sita, habi-

A prima iQce Qsque ad vesperum se* gravibus laboribus exercent

Plurima enim sunt
;

ut omnis res bene gerant.*

Vilicus servOs regit

officia

Davi et Lcsbiae.
10

ng

tardi sint*

mittit ali5s qui agrOs arent,* aliOs

qui hortOs inrigent,* et opera in* tQtum

diem impOnit.
facit.

Lesbia autem omnibus

vestimenta parat, cibum coquit,

panem

NOn longe ab hOrum casa et in i-summ5 colle situm surgebat domici- ..^^Bl^B^^^^^^H^^'^ Hum ipsius domini dominaeque amplissimum.
Ibi pluris

'5

annos* Publius

cum matre vitam

gravia
rei

felicem agebat;

nam
^^^^ romana
20

pater eius, Marcus, in terris longinquis

publicae bella gerebat nee

domum'
vivere.

reverfl poterat

Eum

multae res

Neque puerS quidem molestum est rOri* delectant Magnopere amat silvas, agros,

equ6s, boves, galllnas, avis, reliquaque animalia. Saepe pluris boras* ad mare sedet quo* melius fluctus et navis spectet. Nee omnino
sine comitibus erat,

quod Lydia, Davi

filia,

quae erat eiusdem

aetatis, 25

cum eo adhQc infante ludebat, inter quos cum annis amicitia crescebat. Lydia nQllum alium ducem deligebat et Publius ab puellae latere rarO
*

How

are the forms of

sum

translated

when they precede

the subject?

was a slave who acted as overseer of a farm. He directed the * farming operations and the sale of the produce. <, reflexive pron., object * of exercent. For the construction, see 501. 40. in, for. annos,

The

yilicas

"*

501. 21.
line 17.
10

'

domom,
.

501. 20.

rtW, 501. 36.

i.

hOris, of. annSs,

qu6

ipoctet, 349. Z%o.

2o6

MARCUS LENTULUS

IS

SHIPWRECKED
fide-

discedebat.
lissiml,

Itaque sub claro Italiae sole Ptiblius et Lydia, amici

per campos collisque cotldie vagabantur. Modo in silva finitima ludebant ubi Publius sagittis^ celeribus avis deiciebat et Lydia coronis

variorum florum comas suas omabat; modo aquam et cibum portabant ad Davum servosque defessos qui agros colebant; modo in casa parva
aut boras laetas in ludo consumebant aut auxilium dabant Lesbiae,

quae cibum viro

et servis parabat vel alias res domesticas agebat.

LXIII.

MARCUS LENTULUS, THE FATHER OF PUBLIUS, IS SHIPWRECKED JULIA RECEIVES A LETTER FROM HIM

lam
lo

Publius ^decem annos habebat

cum M. Cornelius Lentulus, pater

^ qulnque annos grave bellum in Asia gerebat, non sine gloria domum^revertebatur. Namque multa secunda proelia fecerat, maximas

eius, qui

hostium copias deleverat,multasurbls populo^ Romano inimicasceperat. Primum nuntius pervenit qui a Lentulo missus erat "^ut profectionem

suam nuntiaret. Deinde pluris dies^ reditum viri optimi mater filiusque exspectabant et animis sollicitis deos immortalis frustra colebant. Tum 15 demum has litteras summo cum gaudio acceperunt: ^^ '' Marcus luliae suae salutem dicit. Si vales, bene est; ego valeo.

Ex
ad

te scribo.

Graecia, quo^^ praeter spem et opinionem hodie perveni, has litteras ^*dis est Namque navis nostra fracta est; nos autem

gratia
20

incolumes sumus.
est
et

Ex

Asiae^^ portu
^^nec

navem
iam

leni

vento

solvi-

mus.
coorta
1

Postquam "altum mare tenuimus

ullae terrae apparu-

erunt, caelum undique et undique fluctus, subito

navem vehementissime
.

adflixit.

magna tempestas Ventis fluctibusque

*
.
.

sagittis, 50 1
^

24.

^as

ten years old.

cf.
^

'

ann5s, 50 1 2 1
^

domum,

501. 20.

populo, dat. with inimicas,

?

501. 16.
^

'ut

nuntiaret, 501.40.

Do you
Latin

see one in line 15

First
is

dies, cf. annos, 1. 9. ^ This is the usual

Lentulo, 501. 33. animis, abl. of manner.

form for the beginning of a

the greeting, and then the expression Si vales, etc. usually given at the end, and also the place of writing, i" dis est ^^ if not previously mentioned in the letter. gratia, quo, where. ^^ Asia refers to the Roman thank God, in our idiom. province of that name ^^ 1* altum mare nee in Asia Minor. tenuimus, we were well out to sea.
letter.

we have

The

date of the letter

iam,

and no

longer.

LENTULUS REACHES HOME

*

207

adflictati nee sOlem discemere nee cursum tenere poteramus et omnia praesentem mortem intentabant. Tris dies* et tris noetis* sine remis velisque agimur. Quarto die' primum terra visa est et violenter in saxa, quae non longe a litore aberant, deieeti sumus. Turn

v6r6 maiora perieula timebamus

sed nauta quidam, vir fortissimus,

ex nave

in fluetus iratOs desiluit *ut

rem summo labdre vix eflfeeit Ita igitur et honorem Neptuno debemus, qui deus nos e

funem ad litus portaret; quam omnes servati sumus. GrStils

perieulo eripuit

Nune Athenis* sum, quo eonfugi ut mihi paueas boras ad quietem darem.* Quam primum autem aliam navem eondueam ut iter ad Italiam reliquum conficiam et domum' ad meos earos revertar. Saluta
nostrum Publium amleissime et valetudinem tuam eura
diligenter.

ic

'Kakndis
LXIV.

Martiis."

LENTULUS REACHES HOME

M.

PUBLIUS VISITS POMPEII

WITH HIS FATHER

Post paueos dies navis
Cornell Lentuli portum Miseni*
;

petiit,
1

qui portus non longe a Pompeiis situs est

quo

in

portu classis Rornana

pCnebatur et ad pugnas navalis omabatur. Ibi naves

eonspici poterant.
tulus vehgbatur

omnium generum

lamque

litori

remis impellebatur.
aliqul milites

incredibili celeritate navis longa qua Lenadpropinquavit nam non solum vento sed etiam In alta puppe stabat gubemator et non proeul
;

ROmani eum armis

servl remis

I^entulus.

Deinde

quos elarissimus erat eontendereeessaverunt"; nautae velum

splendidis, inter

20

contraxerunt et aneoras iecerunt.

et

Lentulus statim e navi egressus est

suam properavit. Eum lulia, Publius, totaque familia exeeperunt "Qui eom plexus, quanta gaudia fuerunt "Postridie eius diel Lentulus filiS su5 dixit, " VenI, ml Publi, mfieum.

"ad

villam

25

adfllctiti, perf.

passive part tossed about.

.

What construction ?
*

diS,

Athinis, 501. 36. 1. darem, * Kalendis lUrtils, the Calends Why ox first of March; abl. of time, giving the date of the letter. Misenum had an excellent harbor, and under the emperor Augustus became the chief naval * station of the Roman fleet See map of Italy. Why is the infinitive used

50*- 35-

ut.

.portiret, 501. 40.

cf. portiretf

1.

6.

not ad

domum?

with cesslvirunt?

" See

Plate
i

I,

Frontispiece.

"

Observe that these

words are exclamatory.

PostridiS eius dil, on the next day.

2o8
Pompeios
ria
iter

A DAY AT POMPEII
hodie faciam.

Mater tua suadet^ ut

ut

fructtis et ciba-

emam.
^

rebus

Namque pluris egemus. Ea hortatur

mi

amicos ad cenam vocavimus et multis

quam primum
"

"
proficiscamur.

"

Li-

benter,
5

pater," inquit Publius.

tum

nee Pompeios
celeriter
^

umquam

vidi.

Tecunj esse mihi semper est graSine mora proficisci paratus sum."
et

Tum

currum conscenderunt

ad urbis muros vecti sunt.

Stabiana porta urbem ingress! sunt. Publius stratas vias miratur et saxa altiora quae in medio disposita erant et altas orbitas quas rotae
inter

lo ros, fontis,

haec saxa fecerant. Etiam strepitum miratur, multitudinem, cardomos, tabemas, forum* cum statuis, templis, reliquisque

aedificiis publicis.

LXV. A

DAY AT POMPEII
dixit,

Apud forum

e currti descenderunt et Lentulus

"Hie

sunt

multa tabemarum genera, mi Publi.

Ecce, trans viam est popinal

15

*Hoc genus tabemarum cibaria vendit. Fructus quoque ante ianuam stant. Ibi cibaria mea emam." "Optime," respondit Publius. "At
ubij

mi

pater, crustula

emere possumus

Namque mater

nobis impe-

ravit ut

Timeo ut' ista popina vendat crus^ tula." "Bene dicis," inquit Lentulus. "At nonne vides ilium fontem a dextra ubi aqua per leonis caput fluit? In illo ipso loco est tabema
haec quoque pararemus.

20 pistoris qui sine dubi5 vendit crustula." Brevi tempore^ omnia erant parata,

Deinde Lentulus
'

et filius

iamque ^quinta hora erat. ^ ad cauponam properaverunt, quod fame et

501. 41.
^

What construction follows suadeo?

rebus, 501. 32.

This

takes place, sometimes called the abl. of route. The construction comes under the general head of the abl. of means. For the scene here described, see Plate II, p. 53, and notice espeis

the abl. of the

way by which motion

stepping-stones for crossing the street (saxa quae in medio disposita * The forum of Pompeii was surrounded by temples, public halls, ^ and markets of various sorts. Locate Pompeii on the map. say, this * ut How . kind ofshop; Latin, this kind ofshops. pararemus, 501. 41.
cially the

erant).

We
^

''

is

tempore, ^ conquinta hora. The Romans numbered the hours of the day 501- 35whether long or short, secutively from sunrise to sunset, dividing the day, '^^ fame shows a slight irregularity in that the abl. into twelve equal parts.
501. 42.

ut translated after a verb of fearing?

How

ne? Cf.

ending

-e is long.

LENTULUS ENGAGES A TUTOR FOR HIS SON 209

Ibi sub arboris umbra sederunt et puerO imperasiti* urgebantur. venint ut sibi* cibum et vinum daret. Huic imperiO* puer celeriter pSruit. Turn laeti sS* ex labore refecerunt

Post prandium profecti sunt ut alia urbis spectScula viderent. 1116 tempore fuerunt Pompiis* multa templa, duo theStra, thermae magnumque amphitheStrum, quae omnia post paucOs annOs flammis atque
incendiis

Vesuvi et terrae motu deleta sunt.

Ante banc calamitatem

In amphitheatro quidem

autem homines

nihil

de monte

verifi sunt.

Publius morSri cupivit ut spectacula gladiatOria videret, quae in' ilium ipsum diem proscripta erant et iam *re vera inceperant. Sed Lentu- 10
lus dixit,

et via est longa.

"Morari, Publi, vereor ut possimus. Iam decima hora est Tempus suadet ut quam primum domum revertasolis

mur."

Itaque serv5 imperavit ut equos iungeret, et

occasQ"

ad villam pervenerunt

LXVI.

LENTULUS ENGAGES A TUTOR FOR HIS SON

primls annis quidem lulia ipsa filium suum docuerat, et PQblius 15 et Latine loqul poterat sed etiam commode legebat Iam Ennium" aliosque poetas legerat. Nunc vero et scrlbebat.

n6n solum "pure

Publius "duodecim annos habebat; itaque ei pater bonum magistrum, "virum omni doctrina et virtute omatissimum, parSvit, "qui Graeca,

musicam, aliSsque artis doceret. "Namque illis temporibus omnes fere gentes Graece loquebantur. Cum Publio alii pueri, Lentuli amicorum
^ sitia, thirst, has -im in the ace. sing., -I in the abl. sing., and no plural. Observe that the reflexive pronoun sibi does not here refer to the subject of the subordinate clause in which it stands, but to the subject of the main clause. This so-called indirect use of the reflexive is often found in object clauses * * of purpose. What case? Cf. 501. 14. si, cf. p. 205, 1. 7, and note. ' nihil . veriti sunt, had no fears of the mountain. PompSilfl, 501. 36. 1.

20

Latin well. "What is the literal trans13 1* duodecim . lation } Ennium, the father of Latin poetry. habitat, " Tirom, etc., a very well-educated and cf. p. 206, 1. 8, and note. worthy
pflr*
.
.
,

"

in,

for.

viri, in fact.

vereor ut, 501. 42.

"^^

occAsu, 501. 35.

poterat, freely, could speak

man. Observe the Latin equivalent.

qui . . . dociret, a relative clause of ^ In Caesar's time Greek purpose. Cf. 349, 350. spoken more widely in the Roman world than any other language.

**

WM

2IO
filii/

SCENE IN SCHOOL
discebant.

Nam

saepe apud

Romanos mos

erat ^non in

ludum

mittere sed domi per magistrum docere. Cot5die discipuli cum magistro in peristyle^ Marc! domus sedebant. Omnes pueri buUam
filios

auream, originis honestae signum,

5 praetexta amicti erant, *quod

in

coUo gerebant, et omnes toga

nati sunt.

nondum sedecim annos

PUBLIUS GOES TO ROME

LXVII. PUBLIUS

1 1

GOES TO ROME TO FINISH HIS EDUCATION

Publius, *quindecim annos natus, *primis litterarum dementis confectis, Romam petere voluit ut scholas grammaticorum

lamque

et

philosophorum frequentaret.

philosophiae studio tenebatur, persuasit.

Et facillime patri' suo, qui ipse * Itaque omnibus rebus ad

s

profectionem compaiHtis, pater filiusque equis animosis vecfi* ad

magnam urbem
votis
silvis vestitos

profecti sunt

Eos

proficiscentis Julia totaque familia

pitio

precibusque prosecutae sunt. Tum per loca* plana et coUls viam ingressi sunt ad Nolam, quod oppidum eos hosmodico excepit. Nolae' duas horas morati sunt, quod sol merilo

dianus

ardebat. Tum recta via" circiter viginti milia* passuum* Capuam,* ad insignem Campaniae urbem, contenderunt. Eo^ multa

nocte defessi pervenerunt. "Postridie eius die!, somno et cibo recreati, Capua discesserunt et "viam Appiam ingressi, quae Capuam
tangit et

usque ad urbem

Romam ducit,

ante meridiem Sinuessam per-

venerunt, quod oppidum tangit mare. Inde prima luce proficiscentes 15

villam

Formias" properSverunt, ubi Cicero, orator clarissimus, qui forte apud suam erat, eos benigne excepit. Hinc "itinere viginti quinque

viderunt.

milium passuum facto, Tarracinam, oppidum in saxis altissimis situm, lamque non longe aberant paludes magnae, quae multa milia

passuum undique
viatores vehuntur.

patent.

Per eas pedestris via est gravis

et in

nSve 20

c5nscend6runt,

et,

Itaque "equis relictis Lentulus et Publius navem Una nocte in transitu cOnsumpta, Forum Appi vene-

runt
*

Tum

brevi tempore Aricia eos excepit.

etc., cf. *

Hoc oppidum,
*

in colle

quindecim,
*

abs.
cf.

Cf. 501. 28.

p. 210, 1. 5, and note. patri, dat. with persu&sit.

primis
*

confectis, abl.

omnibus

note 2. about the

*

vecti,

gender
p.
^^

perf. pass. part, of veho. ' of this word? Nolae,

1.

What

is

comparAtis, there peculiar

. .

locative

case,

501.36.2.
*

vil, cf. porti,

208,

7,

and note.

"What

construction?

adv. there.

PostridiS eius diil, on the next day.

" viam

ES,

Appiam, the

most famous of all Roman roads, the great highway from Rome to Tarentum and Brundisium, with numerous branches. Locate on the map the various * towns that are mentioned in the lines that follow. FOrmiis, Formia^ one of the most beautiful spots on this coast, and a favorite site for the villas >* of rich Romans. itinere facts, abl. abs. The gen. mlliam modifies * itinere. equis relictis. What construction? Point out a similar one in
. .
.

the next

line.

212

PUBLIUS PUTS ON THE TOGA VIRILIS

Roma
sedecim milia passuum abest.
ducit ubi

situm, ab urbe

Inde

declivis via

usque ad latum

campum

Roma

stat.

Quem

ad locum ubi

Publius venit et Romam adhuc remotam, maximam totius orbis terrarum urbem, conspexit, summa admiratione et gaudio adfectus est. Sine mora descenderunt, et, medio intervallo quam celerrime superato,

urbem porta Capena

LXVIII.
Publius iam
spectacula

ingress! sunt.

PUBLIUS PUTS ON THE TOGA VIRILIS

totum annum Romae morabatur^ multaque urbis
et

viderat

multos

sibi^

amicos paraverat.

Ei'

omnes
Publius

favebant; *de eo omnes bene

lo scholas

sperare poterant

Cotidie

philosophorum et grammaticorum tanto studio frequentabat ^ut aliis clarum exemplum

praeberet.
res effecit

Saepe erat cum patre

"^ut

in curia ^;

quae

summos

rei

publicae viros et audi-

ret et videret.
15

bullam^

auream

Ubi ^sedecim annos natus est, et togam praetextam more

1

deposuit atque virilem togam sumpsit. autem toga erat omnino alba, sed praetexta clavum purpureum in margine habebat. ^''Deponere praetextam togam et sumere virilem togam
Virilis

Romano

20 erat res gratissima puero

vir et civis
^^

Romano, quod postea

ad uxorem suam has
Si vales,

BULLA

Romanu^ habebatur.
gestis Lentulus
litteras scripsit
:

His rebus

^"Marcus
25 ut

luliae suae salutem dicit.

Accepi tuas litteras. Has nunc Roma de Publio nostro quam celerrime scias.
dedi.
1

bene est; ego valeo. per servum fidelissimum mitto

Nam hodie

el

togam
*

virilem

Ante lucem

surrexl^* et

primum buUam auream de

2

collo eius

morabatur, translate as
.
.

de

if pluperfect. Ei, why si\ii, for himself. poterant, in English, all regarded him as a very promising yojith ; but
i

dat ? what

These bullam, cf. p. 210, 1. 3, and note 4. ^^ His rebus infinitive clauses are the subject of erat. Cf. 216. gestis, i.e. ^^ the assumption of the toga virilis and attendant ceremonies. Compare
^
'^^

does the Latin say ut near the Roman Forum. etc., cf. p. 210, 1. 5, and note.

'

curia, a famous building praeberet, 501. 43. ^ ut . . audiret et videret, 501. 44. sedecim,
.

the beginning of this letter with the one on page 206.

1*

surrexi,

from surgo.

Plate IV

(See page 224)

PUBLIUS JOINS CiBSAR'S ARMY IN GAUL

removi.
vestivi.

213

Hac

Laribus* cOnsecratS et sacrTs

Interim plQres amici

cum

factis, eum toga virili multitudine optimorum civium et

ducerent.

honestorum clientium pervenerant *qui Publium domo in forum deIbi in civitatem receptus est et nomen, Publius Cornelius
Lentulus, apud civis
5

Romanes ascriptum est. Omnes ei amicissimi eo praedicunt. Sapientior enim aequalibus* de magna* est et magnum ingenium habet. *Cura ut valeas."
fuerunt et

LXIX. PUBLIUS JOINS CiESAR'S

ARMY

IN

GAUL
alils

Publius iam adulescens postquam togam virilem sumpsit,

studere incepit et praesertim usu*

rebus

armorum

se' diligenter exercuit.

10

Magis magisque amavit

illas artis

quae militarem animum delectant.

lamque
quod

erant *qul ei cursum militarem praedicerent.

Nee

sine causa,

certe patris insigne exemplum ita multum trahebat. ^"Paucis ante annis C. lulius Caesar, ducum Romanorum maximus, consul

creatus erat et hoc tempore in Gallia bellum grave gerebat.

exercitu eius plures adulescentes militabant,

Atque

in 15

quidam
iter in

Publi.

I lie

Publium crebris

litteris

apud quos erat amicus vehementer hortabatur "ut

ad

Galliam faceret

Neque Publius

recusavit, et, multis amicis

portam urbis prosequentibus, ad Caesaris castra profectus est. Quarto die postquam iter ingressus est, ad Alpis, montis altissimos, pervenit.

His

summa
Galli,

difficultate superatis,

Primo autem

veritus est

ut"

castris

tandem Gallorum in finibus erat. 20 Romanis adpropinquare posset,

obsidebant et vias omnis
induit

quod
n6 a

maximis

copiis coactis,

Romanes

iam clauserant.

His rebus commQtus Publius vestem Gallicam

Gallis caperetur, et ita per

hostium cdpias incolumis ad castra

* The Lares were the spirits of the ancestors, and were worshiped as household gods. All that the house contained was confided to their care, and sacri* fices were made to them daily. dMflcereiit, 350. qui magna, ' ^ Cflri aequiUbaa, 501. 34. great things^ a neuter adj. used as a noun. at Taleis, take good care ofyour health. How does the Latin express this idea } Abl. of means. ' " praedicerent, sC, reflexive object of ezercait. qui ita multum trahibat, had a great influence in that direction. 501.45. ^ Panda ante annis, a few yean before: in Latin, before by a few years, ante being ^ ut . . faceret, f 501. 41. an adverb and annia abl. of degree of difference. * Sec 501. 43. ttt, how translated here?
. . . .
. .

214

HOW THE ROMANS MARCHED AND CAMPED

Intra munitiones acceptus, a Caesare benigne excepImperator fortem adulescentem amplissimis verbis laudavit

pervenire potuit.
tus est.
et

eum ^tribunum

mllitum creavit.

HOW THE ROMANS MARCHED AND CAMPED

5

cumdatus

Exercitus qui in hostium finibus bellum gerit multis periculis cirest. ^Quae pericula ut vitarent, Romani summam curam

IMPEDIMENTA
adhibere solebant.

Adpropinquantes

copiis

hostium agmen

ita

dis-

ponebant ^ut imperator ipse

cum

pluribus legionibus expeditis* pri-

mum

agmen

diSceret.

Post eas copias impedimenta^ totius exercitus

1 The Tnilitary tribune was a commissioned officer nearly corresponding to our rank of colonel. The tribunes were often inexperienced men, so Caesar ^ did not allow them much responsibility. Quae pericula, object of vitarent. It is placed first to make a proper connection with the preceding sentence. * ' ut . expeditis, i.e. without baggage and ready for duceret, 501. 43.
. .

^ impedimenta. Much of the baggage was carried in carts and on beasts of burden, as is shown above; but, beside* this, each soldier (unless expeditus) carried a heavy pack. See also picture, p. 159.

action.

THE RIVAL CENTURIONS

conlocabant.

^Tum

agmen

claudebant.

legiOnCs quae proximg cOnscriptae erant tOtum Equites quoque in omnis partis dimittebantur qui

loca explorarent; et centuriones praemittebantur ut

locum

castris

idOncum

deligerent.

Locus habebatur idoneus

castris

*qul facile
in colle 5

dfendi posset et prope

aquam

esset.

Qua

de causa castra*

ab utraque parte arduo, a fronte

leniter declivi saepe

ponebantur;

vel locus paludibus cinctus vel in fluminis ripis situs deligebatur.

Ad

locum postquam exercitus pervenit, alii militum *in armis erant, alii castra munire incipiebant. Nam *quo tutiores ab hostibus milites essent, n6ve incauti et imparati opprimerentur, castra fossa l5ta et
In castris portae quattuor erant ut eruptiS militum omnis in partis fieri posset. In angulis castrorum erant turrs d6 quibus tela in hosds coniciebantur. "Talibus in castris qu3lia
vall6
alto

10

muniebant.

descripsimus PQblius a Caesare exceptus

est.

LXX.
Illis

THE RIVAL CENTURIONS

duo
centuriones,' fortissimi
alteri virtute*
viri,

in castris erant

T. PuUo et
Inter eos

15

L. Vorgnus,

quorum

neuter

cedere volebat.

controversiae hoc
pervenit,

iam multos annos infensum certamen gerebatur. Turn demum finis modo* factus est. Die tertio postquam Publius
hostes,

castra fecerunt.

Tum

maioribus copiis coactis, acerrimum impetum in PuUo, *cum Romani tardiores" viderentur, 20

"Cur
^

dubitas," inquit, "Vorgne.^

?

Quam

commodiorefn occasionem

exspectas

Hie
*

digs dS virtute nostra iudicSbit"

in the rear,

Haec^* cum

dixisset,

The newest
qui
*

legions were placed

because they were the least

. . . po8et . . . esset, 501. 45. castra, subject of pdnS^ armis erant, stood under arms. qu5 . . . essent. When is * T&libus in castris qud used to introduce a purpose clause? See 350. 1. quilia, in such a camp as. It is important to remember the correlatives tilis . . .

reliable.

bantur.

in

quilis, such

men.

commanded a company of about sixty who had been promoted from the ranks for his courage and fighting qualities. The centurions were the real leaders of the men in battle. There were sixty of them in a legion. The centurion in the
. .

as.

'^

centurion

He was

common

soldier

picture (p. 216) has in his

'

hand a

authority.
501. 46. tive degree.

Abl. of manner. com . . . vidirentur, virtate, 501. 30. ** tardi5r6s, too slow, a not infrequent translation of the compara*'

staff with

a crook at one end, the symbol of his

*

Haec, obj. of dixisset.

It is

connection with the preceding sentence.

What

placed before cum to make a close is the construction of dixiMt?

2l6

THE ENEMY ARE REPULSED

extra munitiones processit et in earn hostium partem quae confertissima ^videbatur inrupit. Neque Vorenus quidem turn vallo^ sese

Pullonem subsequitur. Turn Pullo pilum in hostis immittit atque tinum ex multitudine procurrentem traicit. Hunc
continet, sed

percussum

et

exanimatum hostes

scutis

protegunt et in Pullonem omnes tela coniciunt. Eius scutum transfigitur et telum

in

balteo

defigitur.

Hie casus vaginam

lo avertit et

dextram

manum

eius gladiimi

educere conantis^ moratur.

Eum

ita

im-

peditum hostes circumsistunt. Turn vero *ei laborantl Vorenus, cum

sit

inimlcus,

tamen auxilium

dat.

Ad

hunc

15

confestim ^a PuUone omnis multitudo se

convertit.

Gladio comminus pugnat Vore-

nus, atque,
propellit.

uno

interfecto, reliquos

paulum
infelix,

Sed instans cupidius

fallente, concidit.

^pede se
20

Huic rursus circumvento auxilium dat

Pullo,

atque

ambo

incolumes,

interfectis,

summa

cum

pluribus laude intra

CENTURIO

munitiones se recipiunt. Sic inimicorum alter alteri auxilium dedit nee de eorum virtute quisquam iudicare potuit.

LXXI.
25

THE ENEMY BESIEGING THE CAMP ARE REPULSED

deficerent, atque hostes acrius instarent, et vallum scindere
vir rei militaris peritissimus,

Cum iam sex horas pugnatum esset^ ac non solum vires sed etiam tela
Romanos
fossamque complere incepissent, Caesar,
1

in the other?

videbatur, inrupit. Cf. 190.

Why is
2

valid, abl. of

the imperfect used in one case and the perfect means, but in EngUsh we should say

^ within the rampart. Cf. ingenti stabulo, p. 201, 1. 13, and note. conantis, ^ a * indir. of dat. with ei eius. PullSne, laboranti, obj. pres. part, agreeing pede se fallente, lit. cupidius, too eagerly. from Pullo, abl. of separation. the foot deceiving itself; in our idiom, his foot slipping. pugnatum esset, deficerent, instarent, incepissent. These are all subjunctives with cum. Cf. 301.46.
"^

PUBLIUS GOES TO GERMANY

21 7

suis imperavit ut proelium paulisper intermitterent,* et, sign6 datS, ex

castris erumperent.*

*Quod

iussi

sunt faciunt, et subito ex omnibus

portis

erumpunt. Atque tarn celeriter mllites concurrerunt et tarn propinqui erant hostes*ut spatium pila coniciendi* non daretur. Itaque

reiectis pilis

'comminus

gladiis

pugnatum

est.

Diu

et audacter hostes 5

restiterunt et in

a dextro

comu

extrema spe salutis tantam virtutem praestiterunt ut vehementer 'multitudine suorum aciem Romanam pre-

merent.

^Id imperator

cum

animadvertisset, Publium adulescentem

*

cum

equitatu misit qui laborantibus

auxilium daret.

Eius impetum

sustinere

non potuerunt hostes*

et

omnes terga

vertenint.

Eos

in 10

fugam datos Publius subsecutus est usque ad flumen Rhenum, quod ab eo loco quinque milia passuum aberat. Ibi pauci salutem sibi reppererunt. Omnibus reliquis interfectis, Publius et equites in castra
sese receperunt.
essent,

De hac calamitate finitimae gentes cum certiores factae

et se

ad Caesarem legatos miserunt

suaque omnia dediderunt

15

LXXII. PUBLIUS

GOES TO GERMANY ITS GREAT FORESTS AND STRANGE ANIMALS

Inita aestate Caesar litteris certior fiebat et per expl6rat5rs cognoscebat pluris civitates Galliae novis rebus studere,* et contra populum Romanum coniurare*" obsidesque "inter se dare,* atque cum his

Germanos quosdam quoque sese coniuncturSs esse." His litteris nuntiisque commotus Caesar constituit quam celerrime in Gallos proficisci,** ut eos inopinantis opprimeret, et Labienum legatum cum duabus legiOnibus peditum et duobus milibus equitum in Germanos mittere."
* intermitterent, erumperent. What use of the subjunctive? Quod, etc., as The antecedent of is id which would be the do oniered. understood, quod they ' ut . . daretur. Is this a clause of purpose or of result? object of faciunt.
1
.

20

coniciendi, 402.

'

comminus
*
is

VHU waged with swords.

used as a noun.

gladiis pugnitum est, a hand-to-hand conflut is multitfldine suorum, by their numbers.

aOmm

^ of this expression? Id im' lab^ peri tor. Id is the obj. and imperitor the subj. of animadvertisset. rantibus. This participle agrees with ils understood, the indir. obj. of daret; * daret is a purpose clause, 501. 40. qui . hostis, subj. of potuinint.

What

the

literal translation

Observe that all these infinitives are in indirect statements after he was informed, and cogn5ac<bat, he learned. Cf. $01 48, 49.
.

^"

certior fiibat,
^*

tack othtr.

inter si, /

proftciacl, mittar^.

These

infinitives

depend upon

coBatitiut.

2l8

THE STORMING OF A CITY

;

^Itaque re frumentaria comparata castra movit. Ab utroque^ res bene gesta est nam Caesar tarn celeriter in hostium finis pervenit ut

grave supplicium sumpsit ut Gallls auxilium dare auderet.*

spatium ^copias cogendi non daretur*; et Labienus de Germanis tarn nemo ex ea gente in reliquum tempus

Hoc

iter in

Germaniam Publius quoque

vidit.

multa mirabilia

fecit et, ^cum ibi moraretur, Praesertim vero ingentem silvam mirabatur,

quae tantae magnitudinis esse dicebatur ^ut nemo earn transire posset, nee quisquam sciret aut initium aut finem. Qua de re plura cognolo verat a mllite
incoluit.

lUe

'

inquit;

"nee

qui olim captus a Germanis multos annos ibi " Infinltae magnitudinis est haec silva," quisquam est ^huius Germaniae qul initium eius sciat

quodam

de

silva dicens,

aut ad fInem adierit.

qualia reliquls in locis
1

Nascuntur

illlc

multa

talia

animalium genera

non inveniuntur. Sunt boves qui unum ^^ comu

habent

sunt etiam animalia quae appellantur alces.

Itaque,
si

Hae

nullos cru-

rum^^ articulos habent.

forte conciderunt, sese erigere nullo

modo
atque
20

Arbores habent pro^^ cubilibus; ad eas se applicant quietem capiunt. Tertium est genus eorum qui uri appellantur. Hi sunt paulo minores elephantls.^* Magna vis eorum " est et magna velocitas. Neque homini neque ferae parcunt.^*
possunt.
ita recllnatae

LXXIII.

THE STORMING OF A CITY

^* in Galliam rediit, et ad Publius pluris dies in Germania moratus ferebat Gallos^ eius contulit. Ille moleste castra se Caesaris quia

regionis obsides dare recusavisse et exercitui

frumentum praebere

1 Before beginning a campaign, food had to be provided. Every fifteen days grain was distributed. Each soldier received about two pecks. This he carried in his pack, and this constituted his food, varied occasionally by what ^ 2 Abl. of he could find by foraging. copias personal agent, 501. 33. * audio. auderet is not from i. auderet, daretur, 501. 43. cogendi, 501. 37. ^

ut . . . posset, . . . sciret, 501. 43. cum . . . moraretur, 501. 46. Hie, ^ ^ huius Germaniae, 0/ this part of Germany. qui . . subj. of inquit. ^^ ^^ sciat . . crurum, from crus. unum, only one. adierit, 501. 45.
. .

12

used with
1^

pro, for, in place of. this verb ?

^^
^^

moratus.

parcunt. What case is elephantis, 501. 34. Is this part, active or passive in meaning.''

"

ment depends upon moleste

Gallos, subj. ace. of the infins. recusavisse ferebat.

and

noluisse.

The

indirect state-

THE STORMING OF A CITY

nOluisse, cOnstituit cis
*

219

bellum inferre. Agris vastaUs, vicis incnsis, validissimum ad quod et naturS et arte munitum oppidum pervenit crat. Cingebatur muro viginti quinque pedes* alto. A lateribus duobus man muniebatur; a tertio latere collis, in quo oppidum erat
situm,

praerupt5

fastigio

ad

planitiem

vergbat;

quSrtS

tantum"

latere aditus erat facilis.

Hoc oppidum oppugnare, * cum

opus esset
constituit
difficillimum,

tamen
castris

Caesar.

Et

munitis Publio negotium dedit ut res 'ad oppugnandum necessarias pararet.

nati5 est haec.'

R5man5rum autem ^ppugPrimum tufres

militas

VINEA
15

aedificantur quibus

in

summum murum
ad

vineae* fiunt quibus

tur post

tecti mllites

murum

evadere possint'; succedant plutei* paran;

quos
et

milites tormenta* administrent

qui

murum

portas discutiant.

sunt quoque arietes His omnibus rebus comparatis,

;

deinde "agger ab ea parte ubi aditus est facillimus exstruitur et

^ pedSs, 501. 21. eis, 501. 15. esset, a clause of concession, 501. 46.

cum
.

20

'

cum . . tantum, adv. only. ad oppugnandum, a gerund express-

haec, as follows. ing purpose. vineae. constructions follow.

' possint, subjv. of purpose. Three similar These vineae were wooden sheds, open in front and rear, used to protect men who were working to take a fortification. They were about eight feet high, of like width, and double that length, covered with raw hides to protect them from being set on fire, and moved on wheels or

rollers.

plutei, large

These were used

to protect besiegers while

the engines of war.

screens or shields with small wheels attached to them. moving up to a city or while serving * tormenta. The engines of war were chiefly the cata-

pult for shooting great arrows, and the ballista, for hurling large stones. They ** The had a range of about two thousand feet and were very cflfective. agger, or mound, was of chief importance in a siege. It was begun just out of reach of

attacked.

the missiles of the enemy, and then gradually extended towards the point to be At the same time its height gradually increased until on a level with the top of the wall, or even higher. It was made of earth and timber, and had

covered galleries running through it for the use of the besiegers. Over or beside the agger a tower was moved up to the wall, often with a battering-ram
\arits) in

the lowest story.

(Sec picture,

p. 221.)

220
vineis

THE CITY
ad ipsum oppidum
agitur.

IS

TAKEN
in

Turn turns

aggere promovetur

arietibus qui sub vineis conlocati erant

ballistis,

murus
et

et portae discutiuntur;

catapultis, reliquisque tormentis lapides et tela in

oppidum

agger altitudinem muri adaequant et arietes moenia perfregerunt,^ signo dato milites inruunt
coniciuntur.
et

Postremo cum iam turns

oppidum expugnant.

LXXIV.

THE CITY

IS

TAKEN

THE CAPTIVES ARE

QUESTIONED
Omnibus rebus
necessariis

deliberatur in concilio

ad oppugnandum a Publio comparatis, quod consilium ^oppidi expugnandi ineant.^

Tum
lo vir

unus* ex centurionibus,
militaris

rei

peritissimus,

"

Ego suadeo,"

"
inquit,

ut ab

ea parte, ubi aditus sit^ facillimus, aggerem exstruamus^ et

turrim
15 ariete

promoveamus^ atque admoto simul mtirum

conemur.^
"
^

discutere

Hoc

consilium
ret,

cum omnibus

place-

Caesar concilium

dimisit.

Deinde

milites hortatus ut pri-

20 ores victorias
rent,
iussit

memoria^ teneBALLISTA
exstrui,

aggerem

turrim et arietem admoveri.

ignem

et

omne genus

Neque oppidanis consilium defuit. Alii telorum de miiro in turrim coniecerunt, alii inDiu utrimque acerrime

gentia saxa in vineas et arietem devolverunt.

^ 1 oppidi expugnandi. Is this a gerund or perfregerant, from perfringo. ^ * a gerundive construction? Cf. 501. 37. unus, subj. ineant, 501. 50. ^ This is a so-called subjunctive by attraction, which means sit. of inquit. that the clause beginning with ubi stands in such close connection with the *

subjv. clause beginning with ut, that its verb is attracted into the same mood. ' Hoc consilium, subj. of All these verbs are in the same construction.

placeret.

For the order

1.

cf.

Haec cum,
abl. of

cam,

p. 217,

8.

memoria,

means.

etc., p. 215, 1. 22,

and note;

Id imperator

oppidanis, 501. 15.

THE CAPTIVES ARE QUESTIONED

pugnatum est
*de tenia
vigilia,

221
Tandem,

vulncrSti

quidem pedem
illi

rettulerunt.

Publius,

quem Caesar

open' praefecerat, nuntiavit

partem* muri
arietis

ictibus

^_^

labefactam con-

ddisse.
dita

Qua

rt

au-

Caesar

signum
hos-

dat

militgs inruunt et

magna cum caede

tium oppidum capiunt.

Postridie eius diei,

h5c oppido expugnatO,

^captivorum qui nobilissimi sunt ad im-

peratorem ante praetOrium* adducuntur.

Ipse, iQrica aurata et

TURRES, ARIETES, VINEA

insignis,

15

paludamentO purpureo

captivOs

per interpretem

in

hunc

modum

interrogat:*

Vos

qui estis'?
sitis.

CaptTvT.

Interpres. Rogat imperator qui Filii regis sumus.

ao

Interpres. Dicunt se

ImperAtor. Cur
Interpres.
CapttvT. Iniurias

esse regis. mihi tantas iniurias intulistis

filios

Rogat cur

sibi

tantas iniurias intuleritis.

ei non intulimus sed pro patria bellum gessimus. ROmanis voluimus esse amici, sed Roman! sine causa n6s 25 Semper

domo

patriaque expellere cOnati sunt.

iniurias tibi intulisse,

Interpres. 'Negant s6
gessisse.

'Semper s

voluisse amicos

Romanis

sed pr6 patria bellum esse, sed R5manos

sine causa se
^

dom5

patriaque expellere conatSs esse.

in the morning.
'

Between twelve and three o'clock

^
. .
.

into four watches.

*

opeii, 501. 15.

The night was divided partem, subj. ace. of concidiaae.

' The general's headquarters. aunt, /Af noblest of the captives. direct indirect these questions, and indirect statequestions, Study carefully ' ' ments. See Plate 1 1 1, p. 1 48. Negant, etc., they say that they have not, etc.

captivdnim

Negant is equivalent to dicunt ndn, and the negative modifies intuliaae, but not the ' remainder of the indirect statement. Semper, etc., that they have always, etc.

222
Imperator.
condonata
?

CIVIL
^

WAR BREAKS OUT

fide,

Manebitisne in reliquum tempus in

hac rebellione

Turn vero
esse, et

captivi multis

cum lacrimis

iuraverunt se in fide manstiros

Caesar eos incolumis

domum

dimisit.

LXXV. CIVIL

WAR BREAKS OUT BETWEEN C^SAR AND POMPEY THE BATTLE OF PHARSALIA

Ne
et

confecto^ quidem hello Gallico, ^helium

est.

civile inter

Caesarem
imperium

Pompeium exortum

Nam

Pompeius, qui
rel

summum

petebat, senatui persuaserat ut

Caesarem

publicae hostem* iudicaret

et exercitum eius dimitti iuberet.

Quibus

cognitis rebus

Caesar exertotiens

citum

suum

dimittere recusavit, atque, hortatus milites ut

iniuriis

ducem
et

lo victorem

ab inimlcorum

defenderent, imperavit ut se

Romam
transito

Summa sequerentur. Rubicone^ initium belli

Italiae

cum
civilis

alacritate milites paruerunt,

factum
^

est.

urbes quidem omnes fere

rebus Caesaris favebant et

eum

benigne exceperunt.
15

Qua

re

commotus Pompeius ante Caesaris adven-

tum Roma excessit et Brundisium"^ pervenit, inde ^paucis post diebus cum omnibus copiis ad Epirum mare transiit. Eum Caesar cum septem
legionibus et quingentis equitibus secutus est, et insignis inter Caesaris

comitatum erat Publius.

Pluribus levioribus proeliis
factis,

20 salum in Thessalia sitam castra posuerunt.

1

tandem copiae adversae ad PharCum Pompei exercitus

^ With ne . . . Manebitisne in fide, will you remain loyal? quidem the * The Civil War was caused the two. between word stands by the emphatic in the defeat jealousy and rivalry between Cassar and Pompey. It resulted and subsequent death of Pompey and the elevation of Caesar to the lordship

of the

Roman

world.

Rubicon was a small stream

Caesar's province.
in the year

By
^
"^

The hostem, predicate accusative, 501. 22. in northern Italy that marked the boundary of crossing it with an armed force Caesar declared war
*
^

upon Pompey and the

case
is

Brundisium, a famous port in southern Italy whence ships ^ Greece and the East. See map. paucis post diebus, a few days later; literally, afterwards by a few days. Cf. paucis ante annis, p. 213, 1. 12, and The battle of Pharsalia was fought on August 9, 48 B.C. In impornote. tance it ranks as one of the great battles of the world.
sailed for

49 rebus?

B.C.

existing government. Caesar crossed the Rubicon early rebus Caesaris favebant, favored Ccesar's side. In what

THE BATTLE OF PHARSALIA

essct bis tantus quantus Caesaris,

223

tamcn erant mulU qui veteranas et Germanos Gallos superaverant vehementer timebant. legiSnes quae Labienus* legatus, qui ab Caesare commissum ^ante Qu6s* proelium
nQper defecerat,
ita

adlocutus est:
militum.

"*Nolite existimare hunc esse

interful
proeliis*

exercitum veteranOrum

Omnibus

neque

temerg incognitam rem pr6nunti6. Perexigua pars illlus exercitus qui Gallos superavit adhQc superest. Magna pars occisa est, multi

domum

discesserunt, mult! sunt relict! in Italia.

videtis in citeriore Gallia

isset, iQrSvit

s nisi

Hae copiae quas nuper conscriptae sunt." Haec^ cum dlxvictorem in castra n6n reversQrum esse. 'Hoc

10

idem Pompius et omnes reliqu! iuraverunt, et magna sp et laetitia, sicut certam ad victoriam, copiae e castris exierunt. Item Caesar, animo* ad dimicandum paratus, exercitum suum
eduxit et septem cohortibus ^"praesidio castris relictis copias triplici acie instruxit. Tum, militibus studio pugnae ardentibus, tuba signum 15
dedit.

Milites procurrerunt et pTlIs missis gladios strinxerunt. Neque vero virtus hostibus defuit. Nam et tela missa sustinuerimt et impetum

gladiorum exceperunt et Srdines conservavrunt. Utrimque diu et acriter pugnatum est nee quisquam pedem rettulit. Tum equites

PompI aciem Caesaris circumire

cSnati sunt.

Quod"

ubi Caesar 20

animadvertit, tertiam aciem," quae ad id tempus quieta fuerat, procurrere iussit. Tum ver5 integrorum impetum" defessi hostes sustinere

n5n potuerunt
suis

et

omnSs
in

terga verterunt.

Sed Pompeius de fortunis

desperans s

castra

equ5

contulit, inde

mox cum

paucis
25

equitibus effugit
* ante proeliam commissDm, before the beginQuds, obj. of adlocfltus est. ' battle. Labienus, Caesar's most faithful and skillful lieutenant in the Gallic War. On the outbreak of the Civil War, in 49 h.c, he deserted Csesar and joined Pompey. His defection caused the greatest joy among the
*

ning of the

Pompeian party; but he disappointed the expectations of his new friends, and never accomplished anything of importance. He fought against his old commander in several battles and was slain at the battle of Munda in Spain,
45
^

B.C.

<

Gallil.
'

This name

' * citeriSre Ndlite ezistinULre, don't think. proeliia, 501. 1 5. is applied to Cisalpine Gaul, or Gaul south of the Alps.
"

Haec, obj. of diziaset.

^'

Hoc idem,
^i

obj. of iflrAvimnt.

praesididcaatrfs, 501. 17.

of prdcuxrere.

Quod, obj. of animadvertit. impetom, obj. of tustinire.

animS, 501. 30. ^' aciem, sub j.

224

THE TRIUMPH OF C^SAR

LXXVI.

THE TRIUMPH OF CESAR

eius superatis atque

Pompeio amiclsque
victis,

omnibus hostibus ubique

Caesar imperator

Romam rediit et

-^

extra moenia urbis in

campo

Martio castra posuit. Turn vero amplissimis honoribus adfectus est. Dictator creatus est,
et ei

triumphus a senatu est decretus. ^Quo

in

die de Gallis

hominum

triumphum egit, tanta multitudo urbem undique confluxit ^ut omnia

loca essent conferta.

Templa

patebant, arae

fumabant, columnae sertis ornatae erant. *Cum vero pompa urbem intraret, quantus hominum
fremitus ortus est!
gress!

Primum per portam insunt senatus et magistrates. Secuti

:

sunt tibicines, signiferi, pedites laurea cor5nati " canentes Ecce Caesar nunc triumphat, qui
subegit Galliam," et "Mllle, mille, mllle, mille Gallos trucidavimus." Multi praedam capta-

rum urbium

portabant, arma, omnia belli instrumenta. Secuti sunt equites, animosis atque
splendidissime omatis equls vecti, inter quos Publius adulescens fortissimus habebatur. Ad-

SIGNIFER

ducebantur
Ita longo

tauri, arietes, ^qui dis

^

immortalibus
sacra via per

immolarentur.

agmine

progrediens exercitus

forum

in Capitolium perrexit.

Imperator ipse
vehebant.
1

cum urbem
"^toga

intraret,

undique laeto clamore multi-

25 tudinis salutatus est.

Stabat in curru aureo quern quattuor albi equ!

picta,

Indutus

altera

manu habenas

et

lauream

victorious general with his army was not allowed to enter the city until the day of his triumph. A triumph was the greatest of all military honors.
2

Quo

die,

on the day

that, abl. of time.

ut

essent, 501 43.

.

immolarentur, 501. 40. was a noted street running along one side of the Forum to the base of the Capitoline Hill, on whose summit stood the magnificent temple of Jupiter
intraret, 501. 46.

qui

* Cum The Sacred Way

.

The Capitolinus. This route was always followed by triumphal processions. toga picta worn by a general in his triumph was a splendid robe of Tyrian purple covered with golden stars. See Plate IV, p. 213.
'^

THE TRIUMPH OF C^SAR

tenCbat, altera

225

ebumeum scSptmm. Post eum servus in currQ stSns auream corSnam super caput eius tenebat. Ante currum miserriml
captivi,

regs principesque su-

peratSrum
vincti,

gentium, cat6nls progrediebantur; et vi-

gintl

quattuor l!ct5res* laurea-

tes fascis ferentes et signiferi

currum Caesaris comitabantur.

Concludit

agmen

multitude

captiv5rum, qui, in servitutem

redact!,

^demisso vultu, vinctis*

bracchiis,

cum

sequuntur; quibusveniunt longissimo 5rdine milites, etiam hi praedam vel

15

insignia militSria ferentgs.

Capit5lium asccndisset, in templo lovi Capitolino

Caesar

cum

sacra

fecit.

*Simul
ft

captivOrum
erant,
interfecti

qui , J ^. abducti
.

nObilissimi

LICTORES

CUM FASCIBUS

carcerem,*

sunt

Sacris factis Caesar

militibus suis
distribuit.

honOres

mllitaris dedit elsque

de Capitolio dSscendit et in forS pecQniam ex belli praeda

His omnibus rebus

confectis, Publius

Caesarem 'valere

iussit et

quam celerrime ad villam contendit ut patrem mStremque 'De rebus gestis P. Cornell Lentull hactenus.

salQtaret

25

* The lictors were a guard of honor that attended the higher magistrates and made a way for them through the streets. On their shoulders they carried the

bundle of rods with an ax in the middle, symbolizing Uie power of ^ * dimissd vult&, with downcast countenance. viactis, from vindd. * * The Simul, etc., At the same time those of the captives who were the noblest. prson was a gloomy dungeon on the lower slopes of the Capitoline Hill. ralfee ^ This sentence mark* the end of the story. iuMlt, bade farewell to.
/as:esy a the law.

APPENDIX
NUMERALS,
NOUNS
460.

DECLENSIONS, CONJUGATIONS,
ETC.

Nouns

final letter of

are inflected in five declensions, distinguished by the the stem and by the termination of the genitive singular.
Sing, -ae
Sing,
-i

A-stems, Gen. Second Declension 0-stems, Gen. Third Declension Consonant stems and Fourth Declension U-stems, Gen. Fifth Declension E-stems, Gen.
First Declension

I-stems, Gen. Sing, -is

Sing, -us

Sing, -li

461.

FIRST DECLENSION. l-STEMS

domina, lady

Stem domina-

Base domin-

SlNGULAR
TERMINATIONS

Nom.
Gen.

Dat.
Ace.

domina dominae dominae

-a

-ae

-ae

dominam
domina
filia

-am
-a

Abl.

a.

Dea and

have the termination -abus

226

in the dative

and

ablative

plural.

SECOND DECLENSION
462.

227

SECOND DECLENSION. 0-STEMS

a.

Masculines

in -us

228

THIRD DECLENSION
Basks
^

229

OR Stkms.

230

APPENDIX
b.

Neuters
n.,

flumen,

n.,

river tempus,

time opus,

n,,

work

caput,

n.,

head

Bases

FOURTH DECLENSION
b.

231

Neuters
animal,
animalin.,

Insigne, n., decoration

animal

calcar, n.,
calcari-

spur

TEMs
Hases

insigni-

insign-

animal-

calc&r-

232
467.
dies, m.,

APPENDIX

THE FIFTH DECLENSION. -STEMS

day
Base
dires,
f.,

thing

Stem

die-

Stem

re-

Base

r-

DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES

233

ADJECTIVES
469.

FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS.

a.

O-

AND 1-STEHS

Adjectives in -us
n.,

\)onua,^ood

Stems bono- m. and

bona-

f.

Base bon-

234
pulcher, pretty

APPENDIX
Stems pulchro- m. and

n.,

pulchra-

f.

Base pulchr-

DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES
471.

235

ADJECTIVES OP THE THIRD DECLENSION. /-STEMS

I.

THREE ENDINGS
Stem
icri-

icer, icris, Icre, keen^ eager

Singular
masc.
fem.
acris

nkut.
Sere
Scris
acri

Nom.
Gen.

accr
Scria

acris
acri

Dat.
Ace.

acrf

acrem
acri

acrem
acri

acre
Scri

Abl.

236
472.

APPENDIX

PRESENT ACTIVE PARTICIPLES

amans, loving

Stem amanti-

Base amant-

SiNGULAR
MASC.

Plural

AND FEM.

COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES
plus,

237
plura

more
plurSs

Nam.
Gen.

plus
pluri*

plurium
pluribus
pluris (-es)

plOrium
pluribus
plura

Dat,
Ace.
plus
plure

Abl.

pluribus

pluribus

475.
Positive
bonus,
malus,
-a,

IRREGULAR COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES

Comparative
melior, melius, better
peior, peius,

Superlative
optimus,
pessimus,
-a,

-um, good -um, bad

-um, best -um, worst

-a,

-a,

worse

magnus,

-a,

-om, great

maior, maius,

maximus,

-a,

-um, greatest

greater
multus, -a, -am,

much

plus,

more

parvus, -a, -um, small scnex, senis, old

iuvenis, -^^ young

minor, minus,

plurimus, -a, -um, most minimus, -a, -um, smallest

smaller
senior
iunior
vetustior, -ius
fadlior, -ius
difficilior, -ius

maximus natu minimus natu

vetus, veteris, old

facilis, -c, ecLsy
difficilis, -, difficult

similis, -e,

similar
dissimilar

similior, -ius

dissimilis, -e,

dissimilior, -ius

humilis,

-,

low
slender

humilior, -ius
gradlior, -ius
exterior, outer^

gracilis, -e,

-um -um diffidllimus, -a, -um simillimus, -a, -um dissimillimus, -a, -um humillimus, -a, -um gradllimus, -a, -um
veterrimus,
fadllimus,
-a,

-a,

extents,

outward
below

extremus
extimus

^ outermost
J
,

exterior
Inferus,
inferior,

last

lower

Tnfimus^

imus
posterus, following
posterior, later

>

lowest

postrcmus^^^^
postumus
j

superus, above
[ds, dtri, on this side]
[in, intrS, in, within']

superior, higher

suprSmuaj summus j
dterior, hither
interior,

citimus, hithermost

inner

intimus, inmost

[prae, pr6, be/ore]

prior,

former
further

[prope, near]
[ultr&f

propior, nearer
\i[\cr\ott

primus, first proximus, next

ultimus, furthest

beyond]

2 38

APPENDIX

476.
Positive

REGULAR COMPARISON OF ADVERBS

NUMERALS
Cardinals
15,

239
Ordinals

16,

quindecim sedecim
septendecim

quintus decimus sextus decimus

17,

Septimus decimus

18, duodevlginti (octodecim)

19,

undevigintl(novendecim)
r viginti

20, viginti

duodevlcensimus undevlcensimus vicensimus

Onus or

'\unus

et viginti, etc.

\unus

30, triginta 40, quadraginta

50, quinquaginta

fvicensimus primus or et vicensimus, etc. tricensimus

60, sexaginta
70, septuagintl

80, octdginta 90, nonaginta

100,

quadragensimus quinquagensimus sexagensimus septuagensimus octogensimus nonagensimus

centensimus
etc.

centum
(et)

10 1, centum
1

Onus,

20,

121, (et) viginti unus, etc. 200, ducend, -ae, -a

centum centum

(et) viginti

centensimus (et) primus, etc centensimus vicensimus

centensimus (et) vicensimus primus ducentensimus
trecentensimus

300, trecenti

400, quadringenti
500, quingenti 600, sescenti

quadringentensimus

quingentensimus sescentensimus
septingentensimus

700, septingenti

800, octingenti 900, nongenti 1000, mille

octingentensimus

nongentensimus
millensimus
three,

479. Declension of duo, two, trts,

Masc.
.V.

and

mille,

a thousand.
Sing.

Fem.
duae duabus

Neut.
duo
dudbus

M. AND F.
tres

Neut.
tria

Plur.

duo
duSniin

mille milia
mille

G.
/^. ./.

duirum du6rum
duo duis duo du5bu8

trium
tribus
tris

trium
tribus
tria

milium

dudboa
duds
(?r

mille milibus

or trSs

mille milia mille milibus

A, dudbus

duibus

tribtts

tribus

is

Note. Wile is used in the plural as a noun with a modifying genitive, and occasionally so used in the nominative and accusative singular. For the declension of anue cf. 470.

240

RELATIVE PRONOUN
ille,

241

that (yonder), he

242
483.

APPENDIX

INTERROGATIVE
quis, substantive,

who^ what

Singular

INDEFINITE PRONOUNS
Plural
.

243

Nom.
Gen.

quidam quorun'dam
quibus'dam

quaedam
quorun'dam quibus'dam

quaedam quorun'dam
quibus'dam

Dat.
Ace.

quosdam
quibus'dam

quasdam
quibus'dam

quaedam
quibus'dam

Abl.

486.

quisquam, substantive, any one

MASC.

(at all)

AND FEM.

NEUT.

Nom.
Gen.

quisquam
cuius'quam

quicquam (quidquam)
cuius'quam

Dat.
Ace.

cuiquam

cmquam
quicquam (quidquam)

Abl.

quemquam quoquam
some
one.

quoquam
some

487.

aliquia, substantive,

aliqui, adjective,

Singular'
Substantive

244

APPENDIX

REGULAR VERBS
488.

FIRST CONJUGATION. il-VERBS.

AMO

Principal Parts amo, amare, amavi, amatus

Pres. Stem

ama-

Perf. Stem

amay-

Part. Stem amat-

FIRST CONJUGATION

245

246
489.

APPENDIX

SECOND CONJUGATION. -VERBS. MONEO

Principal Parts moned, monere, monui, monitus
Pres.

Stem mone-

Perf. Stem

monu-

Part. Stem monit-

ACTIVE
INDICATIVE
PRESENT

PASSIVE

I advise,
moneo mones monet

etc.

/ am
monens, monetur
IMPERFECT
-re

advised^

etc.

monemus
monetis

monemur
monemini monentur

monent

/ was monebam
monebas monebat

advising^

etc.

/ was
monebar
monebaris,

advised^

etc.

monebamus
monebatis

monebamur
-re

monebant

monebatur

monebamini monebantur

/ shall advise,
monebo
monebis monebit

etc.

/ shall
monebor
moneberis,

be advised, etc.

monebimus
monebitis

monebimur
-re

monebunt

monebitur

monebimini monebuntur

/ have
monui

advised^

I advised^
monuimus
monuistis

etc.

/ have

been (was) advised,

f sum
.

etc.

f sumus
I

monuisti

momtus,
-re

gg

moniU,
-^^'-^

^^^.^

monuit

monuenmt,

-*'-"^

lest

[sunt

PLUPERFECT

I had advised,
monueram
monueras monuerat

etc.

/ had been
f

advised^
.

etc.
f

monueramus
monueratis

eram

eramus

monuerant

"^^"^t^^'Jeras -*'-"^

eratis "^"^^^'J '" '

lerat

FUTURE PERFECT

I shall have
monuero
monueris monuerit

advised,

etc.

J shall have
Tero

been advised,
.

etc.

monuenmus
monueritis

ferimus
I

monitus,

^^^

moniti,
-*^>-^

^^-^.^

monuerint

^'-"^

lerit

lerunt

SECOND CONJUGATION
SUBJUNCTIVE
PRESENT

247

nioneam
inoneas inoneat
iiionerem inoneres inoneret

mone&mus
moneatis

monear
monearis,
-re

moneimur
moneamini moneantur

moneant

moneremus
moneretis

moneatur IMPERFECT monerer

monereris, -re

moneremur
moneremini monerentur
.

monerent

moneretur

PERFECT

monuerim
inonucris nionucrit

monuerimus
monueritis
sis
sit {aim

f
I

simua
g-^jg

moniti,

monuerint

-^^'-^Isint
.

PLUPERFECT
nionuissem
inonuisses

monuissemus
monuissetis

essem

essemus

"^"'^'J eases
-A,

monuisset

monuiaaent

-um

"^^""'J essetis

y^^^^

^e, -a
^533^^^

IMPERATIVE
PRESENT

mone, advise thou monete, advise ye

.

monetS, thou shalt advise monet6, he shall advise monetSte, you shall advise rnonentd, they shall advise
Pres.

monere, be thou advised monemini, be ye advised FUTURE monetor, thou shalt be advised monetor, he shall be advised
monentor, they shall be advised

INFINITIVE
Perf.

monere, to advise monuiaae, to have advised

monitfima, -a, -um ease, to be about to advise

moneri, to be advised monitus, -a, -um esse, to have been

advised
Fut.

[monitum
advised

iri],

to

be about to be

248
490.

APPENDIX

THIRD CONJUGATION. -VERBS. REGO

Principal Parts rego, regere, rexi, rectus

THIRD CONJUGATION

249

250
491

APPENDIX

FOURTH CONJUGATION. /-VERBS. AUDIO

Principal Parts audio, audire, audivi, auditus

Pres. Stem audi-

Perf. Stem audiv-

Part. Stem audit-

FOURTH CONJUGATION

251

252
492.

APPENDIX

THIRD CONJUGATION. VERBS IN

-10.

CAPIO

Pres. Stem cape-

Principal Parts capio, capere, cepi, captus Perf. Stem cep- Part. Stem capt-

DEPONENT VERBS
FUTURE

253

2d Pers.

capito
capitS

capitote

jd Pers.

capiuntd

254

IRREGTTT,AR
/ shall be
thou wilt be
he will be
,

VERBS
trimus,
critis,

255
shall be
be

ert,
eris, erit,

we

you will

eruot, they will be

Perfect
fui,

/ have

been^ tu&s

fuimus,
fuiatis,
_ ^

fuisti,

fuit,

thou hast been^ wast he has been^ was

we have you have

}

beeii^

been^

were were

fuSnmt, *

they have been, were

Pluperfect
fueram,
f uerat,

/ had been
had been

fueramus,
fueratis,
f uerant,

we had been

fueras, thou hadst been

he

you had been they had been

Future Perfect / shall have been f uerimas, we shall Jiave been fueris, thou wilt have been fueritis, you will have been f ueriti he will have been f uerint, they will have been
f uer5,

Present
singular sim
sis
sit

Subjunctive
simns
sitis

plural

singular essem
essSs
esset

Imperfect plural
essSmua
essStis

sint

essent

Perfect
fuerim
fueris
fuerit

Pluperfect
fuerimus
fueritis

fuissem
fuissSs
fuisset

fuissemus
fuissetis

fuerint

fuissent

Imperative
PRESENT

future
thou

2d Pers. Sing, 2d Pers. Plur.

es, be

2d Pers.
2d Pers.

Sing,

estfi,

thou shall be
he shall be

este, be ye

jd Pers. Sing.

estS,

jd
iNriNiTivE
"rt-s.

Plur. estSte, ye shall be Pers. Plur. svaM, they shall be

Participle

esse, to be
fuisse, to

rf.
I- lit.

futfirus, -a,

have been -um esse or

to be

fore,

futfirus, -a,

-nm, about to be

to be

about

256
495.

APPENDIX

possum, be able, can

Principal Parts possum, posse, potui.

Indicative

Subjunctive

IRREGULAR VERBS
487.
Principal \ n616, nOlle, nSlui, Parts [ malO, malle, malui,
f toW, Telle, Tolul,
,

257

be willing^ will^ vnsh be unwilling^ will not be more tvilling^ prefer ,

vol6,
is

11616

mild

for

and mal6 are compounds of vol6. N616 is for ne (no() + ma (from magis, more) 4- vol6. The second person vis
Indicative

and from a

different root.

258

IRREGULAR VERBS
Gerund
(rift.

Supine
Ace.

(Active Voice)

ferendl

ferendum
ferendo

Ace.

[latum]
[lata]

Pat.

ferendo

Abl.

Abl,

499.

^, go
Principal Parts eB, ire, ii Pres. Stem iPbrf. stem
(ivi),
i-

Itum

(n. perf. part.)

or iv-

Part. Stem

it-

26o
Indicative
Pe?f.
f actus, -a,

APPENDIX
-um sum -um eram -um ero

factus, -a,

Plup. F. P.

factus, -a, factus, -a,

Subjunctive -um sim factus, -a, -um essem

Infinitive
Pres.
fieri

Participles
Perf. Ger.
factus, -a,

Perf.

factus, -a,

-um esse

faciendus,

-um -a, -um

Fut.

[factum

Tri]

CASTRA MURO FOSSAQUE MUNIUNTUR

APPENDIX
501.

II

RULES OF SYNTAX

Note. The rules of syntax are here classified and numbered consecutively. The number of the text section in which the rule appears is given at the end
of each.

Nominative Case
1.

The

question

Who?

subject of a finite verb or What? 36.

is

in the nominative

and answers the

Agreement
2.
its

A A

finite

verb must always be in the same person and number as

76. 81.
65.

subject.

28.

3.

predicate

4.

An

noun agrees in case with the subject of the verb. appositive agrees in case with the noun which it explains.
nouns
in gender,

5. Adjectives agree with their

number, and

case.

predicate adjective completing a complementary infinitive agrees in gender, number, and case with the subject of the main verb. 215. a.
6.
7.

A
;

relative

number
224.

but

its

case

pronoun must agree with its antecedent is determined by the way it is used in

in
its

gender and

own

clause.

Pr^>ositions

8.

noun governed by a preposition must be

52.

in the accusative or

ablative case.
Genitive Case

9.

The word denoting

the

owner or possessor of something

is

in the

genitive

and answers the question Whose ? 38.

10. The possessive genitive often stands in the predicate, especially after the forms of sum, and is then called th^ predicate genitive. 409. 11. Words denodng a part are often used with the genidve of the whole,

known

as the partitive genitive. 331. 12. Numerical descripdons of measure arc expressed by the genitive

with a modifying adjective.

$ 443.
a6i

262
Dative Case 13.
14.

APPENDIX

II

The The

indirect object of a verb is in the dative. 45. dative of the indirect object is used with the intransitive verbs

credd, fave5, noceo, pared, persuadeo, resisto, studeo,

and others of

like

meaning,

154.

15. Some verbs compounded with ad, ante, con, de, in, inter, ob, post, prae, pro, sub, super, admit the dative of the indirect object. Transitive compounds may take both an accusative and a dative. 426. 16.

The

dative

is

used with adjectives to denote the object toward which

the given quahty

Jit,

is

directed.

Such

are, especially, those

meaning near,

also

friendly, pleasi7tg, like, and their opposites. 143. 17. The dative is used to denote the purpose or end for which; often with another dative denoting the person or thing affected. 437.

Accusative Case

18.

The

direct object of

a transitive or

verb
37.

is

in the accusative

and

answers the question

19.

Whom?

What?

20.

The subject of the infinitive is in the accusative. 214. The place to which is expressed by ad or in with the

accusative.

Before names of towns, small islands, domus, and rus the preposition is omitted. 263, 266. 21. Duration of time and extent of space are expressed by the
accusative.
336. 22. Verbs of making, choosing, calling, showing, and the like, may take a predicate accusative along with the direct object. With the passive voice

the two accusatives

become nominatives.

392.

Ablative Case

23. Cause is denoted by the ablative without a preposition. the question Because of what? 102. 24. Means is denoted by the ablative without a preposition. the question By means of what? or With what? 103. 25.

This answers

This answers
This answers
of an action. This answers

Accompaniment

is

denoted by the ablative with cum.

the question With whom? 104. 26. The ablative with cum is used to denote the

manner

Cum may be omitted, if an adjective is used with the the question How? or In what manner? 105.
27.
\ssieAx.o ^'SSOQXitXh't

ablative.

With comparatives and words implying comparison

measure of difference. 317.

the ablative

is

RULES OF SYNTAX
28.
iple in
:

263
partiis

The

ablative of a
is

noun or pronoun with a present or perfect

agreement
I.

used to express attendant circumstance. This

called

le

ablative absolute.

381.

Descriptions of physical characteristics are expressed by the ablative with a modifying adjective. 444. 2. Descriptions involving neither numerical statements nor physical char29.
acteristics

may be

expressed by either the genitive or the ablative with a

445.
is

modifying adjective. 30. The aJjlative

i^

used to denote in what respect something

is true.

The place from which is expressed by a or ab, de, g or ex with separative ablative. This answers the question Whence.'* Before names of towns, small islands, domus, and rus the preposition is omitted. 264, 266.
the

39831.

32. Words expressing separation or deprivation require an ablative to complete their meaning. This is called the ablative of separation. 1 80. 33. The word expressing the person from whom an action starts, when not the subject, is put in the ablative with the preposition a or ab. This is
called the ablative

of the personal agent.

degree,
if

181.
is

34.

The comparative

quam

omitted,

is

followed by the

separative ablative.

309.

35. The time when or within which anything happens is expressed by he ablative without a preposition. 275. 36. I. TYit. place at or in which is expressed by the ablative with in. Before names of towns, small islands, This answers the question Where
I
.-*

and
2.

riis

the preposition is omitted. 265, 266. Names of towns and small islands, if singular and of the
268.

first

or

second declension, and the word domus express the place in which by the
locative.

Gerund and Gerundiot

is a verbal noun and is used only in the genitive, and ablative singular. The constructions of these cases are in general the same i& those of other nouns. 406. 2. The gerundive is a verbal adjective and must be used instead of gerund -f object, excepting in the genitive and in the ablative without a

37.

The gerund

dative, accusative,

i .

preposition.
usual.

Even

in tht*se instances the gerundive construction is

more

406. 2.

38.

The

with cau8&,

is

accusative of the gerund or gerundive with ad, or the genitive used to expcess purpose. 407.

266

APPENDIX

III
^
:

503. Give the Latin of the following words

word

Underline the words you do not remember. till you have gone through the entire list.

Do

Then

not look up a single drill on the words

you have underlined.

flight

REVIEWS
505.
Fill

267
first

out the following

summary
'

of the

declension":

Thb

2.

FiftST

OR X-Dbclbnsion

3.

4.

in the nominative singular Rule for gender Case termmations ^, , Pural 1^. ^ Irregular nouns

Ending

-^

II.

REVIEW OF LESSONS IX-XVII

:

506. Give the English of the following words

Nouns of the First Declension

agri cultura

c6pia

266

APPENDIX

III
^
:

503. Give the Latin of the following words

word

Underline the words you do not remember. till you have gone through the entire list.

Do

not look up a single

drill

Then

on the words

you have underlined.

flight
story
tells

new
lives (verb)

away from who why

forest

wreath
deep, high

dinner

out from

my
where
tru7npet lady, mistress

who7n
island

wide
504. Review Questions. are words divided into syllables.?

How many

syllables
is

has a Latin word?

How

What

antepenult.? When is a syllable short.? the law of Latin accent.? Define the subject of a sentence; the predicate; the object; the copula. What is inflection? declension? conjugation?

the ultima.? the penult? the When is a syllable long.? What is

What

is

the plural? What case

the ending of the verb in the third person singular, and what in What does the form of a noun show? Name the Latin cases.
is

relation is expressed
object.

used for the subject? the direct object? the possessor? What by the dative case? Give the rule for the indirect

How are questions answered in Latin ? What is a predicate adjecan attributive adjective? What is meant by agreement? Give the rule for the agreement of the adjective. What are the three relations expressed by the ablative? What can you say of the position of the postive?
sessive

base ?
first

pronoun? the modifying genitive? the adjective? What is the is grammatical gender ? What is the rule for gender in the declension? What are the general principles of Latin word order?

What

REVIEWS
505.
Fill

267
first

out the following

summary
1
.

of the

declension':

Ending

in the nominative singular

Thb FimsT OR X-Dbclbnsion

2.

3.
"^

4.

Rule for gender Case terminations ,* ^. , Plural \^. ^ Irregular nouns

-I , ,

II.

REVIEW OF LESSONS IX-XVII

:

506. Give the English of the following words

Nouns of the First Dfxlension

agri cultura

268
Verbs

APPENDIX

III

REVIEWS
is

269

Decline bonus, liber, pulcher. How can we tell whether an adjective in -tr declined like liber or like pulcher ? Why must we say nauta bonus and

bona? Name the Latin possessive pronouns. How are they With what does the possessive pronoun agree ? When do we use tuus and when vaster ? Why is suus called a reflexive possessive ? What is
not nauta
declined ?

omitted

the non-reflexive possessive of the third person? When are possessives What four uses of the ablative case are covered by the relations ?

expressed in English by tvith f Give an illustration in Latin of the ablative of manner; of the ablative of cause ; of the ablative of means ; of the ablative of accompaniment. What ablative regularly has cum ? What
ablative

sometimes has cum ?

What

uses of the ablative never have

cum

the nine pronominal adjectives, with their meanings. Decline alius, niillus. Decline is. What does is mean as a denaonstrative adjective or

Name

pronoun
509.

What

other important use has it?

Fill

out the following

1.

summary

of the second declension

2.

3.

Endings in the nominative Rule for gender Case terminations of nouns

in -us
a.

( a.

Singular
Plural

Thb Second or
O-Dbclension
4.

\
J

b.

The
-um

vocative singular of nouns in -us

a.

Case terminations of nouns

in
Peculiarities of

Singular
Plural

\ b.
nouns
in -er in

5.

6.

Peculiarities of

nouns

and -ir -ius and -ium

III.

REVIEW OF LESSONS XVIII-XXVI

:

510. Give the English of the following words

Nouns of the First Declension

discipUna

poena
potentia

rSglna
superbia

tristitia

fSrma

ludus

Nouns of the Second Declension Omamentom sacrum socins

Adjectives of the First and Second Declensions

Terbtim

amicus
antiquus
finitimus

gritus iddneos

interfectns
Trtus

molestus
perpetuus

septem
snperbtis

inimldis

iMtnt

prozimus

270
Adverbs

APPENDIX

III

REVIEWS
What
:ive
I

271

is mood? What are the Latin moods? When do we use the indicamood? Name the six tenses of the indicative. What are personal iidings? Name those you have had. Inflect sum in the three tenses you

have learned.

distinguished? :10m the present stem?

is

How many regular conjugations are there? How are they How is the present stem found? What tenses are formed

What is the tense sign of the imperfect? What the meaning of the imperfect? What is the tense sign of the future in the first two conjugations? in the last two? Before what letters is a final
long vowel of the stem shortened
of a present, as of
?

What

are the three possible translations

pugn6? Inflect aro, sedeo, mitto, faci6 and veniS, in the present, imperfect, and future active. What forms of -16 verbs of the third conjugation are like audid? what like regS? Give the rule for the dative
with adjectives. Name the special intransitive verbs that govern the dative. What does the imperative mood express? How is the present active imperative formed in the singular ? in the plural ? What three verbs have a

shortened present active imperative

port5, deleo, ag5, facid, munid.

Give the present active imperative of

IV.

REVIEW OF LESSONS XXVII-XXXVI

:

513. Give the English of the following words

Nouns of the First Declknsion

aU

cura

mora

porta

prSvincia

vita

Nouns of the Second Declension

animoa
bracchium

272

REVIEWS
516. Review Questions.
>icc ?

273

What are the personal endings in the passive the letter -r sometimes called ? What are the distinguishing >wels of the four conjugations ? What forms constitute the principal parts ? What
is

What What

are the three different conjugation stems? How may they be found? are the tenses of the indicative? of the infinitive? What tense of

the imperative have you learned? stem ? on the perfect stem ? on the

What

participial

forms are built on the present stem ? What are the endings

of the perfect active indicative ? What is the tense sign of the pluperfect active? of the future perfect active? How is the present active infinitive formed? the present passive infinitive? How is the present active impera-

formed? the present passive imperative? How is the perfect active formed ? the perfect passive infinitive ? How is the future active infinitive formed? What is a participle? How are participles in -us declined? Give the rule for the agreement of the participle. How are the perfect, pluperfect, and future perfect passive indicative formed ? Conjugate the verb sum in all moods and tenses as far as you have learned it ( 494)What is meant by the separative ablative ? How is the place /rom which
tive
infinitive

expressed in Latin ? Give the rule for the ablative of separation for the ablative of the personal agent. How can we distinguish between the abla;

tive of means and the ablative of the personal agent ? What is the perfect definite? the perfect indefinite ? What is the difference in meaning between the perfect indefinite and the imperfect ? What two cases in Latin may be

<:^ovemed by a preposition ? Name the prepositions that govern the ablative. What does the preposition in mean when it governs the ablative? the
accusative?

What

questions ?

Explain the force of each.

are the threeanterrogatives used to introduce ^y^j-and-//^? What words are sometimes used for

yes and no t

What

are the different meanings and uses of ubi ?

V.

REVIEW OF LESSONS XXXVII-XLIV

:

517. Give the English of the following words

Nouns
FIRST DECLENSION

274
iudex

APPENDIX

III

REVIEWS
519. Review Questions.
infinitive?

275
What
is

Give the conjugation of possum.

an

lish?

What three What is the case

uses has the Latin infinitive that are like the Engof the subject of the infinitive? What is meant by

a complementary infinitive ? In the sentence The bad boy cannot be happy^ what is the case of happy f Give the rule. Decline qui. Give the rule for

two uses of the interrogative? How is the stem formed from the base ? Are the stem and the base ever the same ? How many declensions of nouns are there ? Name them. What are the two chief divisions
of the third declension
?

the agreement of the relative. What are the I>edine quia. What is the base of a noun ?

How are

the consonant stems classified

Explain

the formation of lapis from the stem lapid-, miles from milit-, rex from reg-. What nouns have i-stems ? What peculiarities of form do i-stems have,
masc., fem., and neut.
?

Name the five nouns

rules for

that

have

-i

and

-e in the abl.

Decline turris.

Give the

gender

in the third declension.

Decline

miles, lapis, rex, virtus, consul, legio, homo, pater, fliimen, opus, tempus,

caput, caedes, urbs, hostis, mare, animal, vis,

iter.

520.

Fill

out the following scheme

Gender
Endings

Feminine Neuter {Masculine

I.

Tmb Third
Declension

Consonant Stems

Masc. and fem.

Neuters

Case Terminations
II.

/-Stems

Masc. and fem.

ft

Neuters

iRRBGuuut Nouns

VI.

REVIEW OF LESSONS XLV-LII

:

521. Give the English of the following words

276
THIRD DECLENSION
aestas

APPENDIX

III

FOURTH DECLENSION

REVIEWS
522. Translate the following words.
if not^ unless

277
Give the genitive and the

gender of the nouns and the principal parts of the verbs.

adversity

tm account of

unharmed
public

commonwealth
leap down, dis-

mount
lead across

remain
call together

friendship
footprint, trace

each

fear (noun)
hope
thenfore
behind, after so great

equal
in truth, indeed

that (yonder)

a certain
fall down owe, ought
lOsure,

mode

eye

name
wave, billow
Jhing, matter
exploits

republic

prosperity

clined.^

523. Review Questions. By what declensions are Latin adjectives deWhat can you say about the stem of adjectives of the third
to

declension?
tell

pftr.

Into what daases are these adjectives divided? How can you which of the classes an adjective belongs? Decline &cer, omnia, What are the nominative endings and genders of nouns of the fourth

278
or Ti-declension
?

APPENDIX
What nouns
domus.

III

tus, lacus, cornu,

the place to
is

are feminine by exception ? Decline advenGive the rules for the ordinary expression of which^ the place from which^ the place in which. What

special rules apply to the locative case?

names of towns, small

islands,

and rus

What
is

What words have

a locative case?

What

the

form of the locative case ? Translate Galba lives at home., Galba lives at Rome., Galba lives at Pompeii. What is the rule for gender in the fifth
or e-declension ? Decline dies, res. When is the long e shortened ? What can you say about the plural of the fifth declension ? Decline tuba, servus, pilum, ager, puer, miles, consul, flumen, caedes, animal. How is the time when expressed? Name the classes of pronouns and define each class.

Decline ego,

tii,

is.

What

are the reflexives of the

first

and second per-

sons?

the reflexive of the third person? Decline it. Translate / see myself he sees himself he sees hifn. Decline ipse. How is ipse used? Decline idem. Decline hie, iste, ille. Explain the use of these
is

What

words.
aliquis,

Name and

translate the

commoner

indefinite pronouns.

Decline

quisquam, quidam, quisque.

VII.

REVIEW OF LESSONS

LIII-LX
:

524. Give the English of the following words

Nouns
first declension

second declension
aedificium

aquila

fossa

imperium
negotium

captivus concilium

spatium Valium

REVIEWS
Adjectives first and second declensions
aequus

279

28o

APPENDIX

III

525. Translate the following words.

Give the genitive and the

:

gender of the nouns and the principal parts of the verbs

on account of

REVIEWS

281

526. Review Questions. What is meant by comparison? In what two ways may adjectives be compared? Compare clarus, brevis, veldx, and explain the formation of the comparative and the superlative. What arc
the comparative of yel5z.
acer, pulcher, liber.

the adverbs used in comparison? Compare brevis by adverbs. How are adjectives in -er compared?

Decline

Compare

nd superlative?
limus.
;c

What are possible translations for the comparative Name the six adjectives that form the superlative in

Translate in two ways Nothing is brighter than the sun. Give for the ablative with comparatives. Compaie bonus, magnus, nalus, multus, parvus, ezterus, inferus, posterns, superus. Decline plus, ompare citerior, interior, propior, ulterior. Translate That route to Italy
rule

\ much shorter. Give the rule for the expression of measure of difference. Name five words that are especially common in this construction. How re adverbs usually formed from adjectives of the first and second declenKjns? from adjectives of the third declension? Compare the adverbs care, iibere, fortiter, audacter. What cases of adjectives are sometimes used as Iverbs? What are the adverbs from facilis? multus? primus? plurinus? bonus? magnus? parvus? Compare prope, saepe, magnopere. How e numerals classified ? Give the first twenty cardinals. Decline iinus, duo, tres, mille. How are the hundreds declined? What is meant by the partitive genitive? Give the rule for the partitive genitive. What sort of words
1

commonly used with this construction ? What construction is used with quidam and cardinal numbers excepting mille? Give the first twenty ordiare
nals. How are they declined? How are the distributives declined? Give the rule for the expression of duration of time and extent of space. What is the difference between the ablative of time and the accusative of time?

What is a deponent verb? Give the synopsis of one. What form always has a passive meaning? Conjugate amd, moned, reg5, capid, audid, in the
active

and

passive.

VIII.

REVIEW OF LESSONS LXI-LXIX

first

527. Review the vocabularies of the

seventeen lessons.

See

S02 503 506, 507. 528. Review Questions.

time
is

denoted by these tenses ?

Name the What

tenses of the subjunctive. What are the mood signs of the present

subjunctive?

How may

the imperfect subjunctive be formed?

How

do

the perfect subjunctive and the future perfect indicative active differ in form? is the pluperfect subjunctive active formed? Inflect the sub-

How

junctive active and passive of cur5, dele6, Tinc6, rapid, moniO.

Inflect the

282

APPENDIX

III

subjunctive tenses of sum; of possum. What are the tenses of the participles in the active? What in the passive? Give the active and passive participles of amo, moneo, rego, capio, audio. Decline regens. What par-

do deponent verbs have? What is the difference in meaning between the perfect participle of a deponent verb and of one not deponent ? Give the participles of vereor. How should participles usually be translated ?
ticiples

Conjugate volo, nolo, malo, fi5. What is the difference between the indicative and subjunctive in their fundamental ideas? How is purpose usually expressed in English?. How is it expressed in Latin? By what words is a Latin purpose clause introduced ? When should quo be used ? What is meant by sequence of tenses ?

Name the primary tenses of the indicative and of the subjunctive; the secondary tenses. What Latin verbs are regularly followed by substantive
clauses of purpose ? What construction follows iubeS ? What construction is consequence or result expressed in Latin? follows verbs oi fearing? is a result clause introduced? What words are often found in the

How

How

principal clause foreshadowing the

coming of a

result clause?

How may

negative purpose be distinguished from negative result? What is meant by the subjunctive of characteristic or description ? How are such clauses

introduced?

Explain the ablative absolute.

Why

is

the ablative absolute

of such frequent occurrence in Latin? Explain the predicate accusative. After what verbs are two accusatives commonly found? What dc these

accusatives

become when the verb

is

passive ?

IMPERATOR MIHTES HORTATUR

SPECIAL VOCABULARIES
The words
in

heavy type are used

in Caesar's

" Gallic

War."

LESSON
Nouns
dea, goddess (deity)

IV, 39

Verbs
est,

he

{she, it) is; sunt,

they are
killing,

Dia'na,
fera,

Diana
(fierce)

a wild beast

necat, he {she, does kill

it) kills, is

Lato'na,

sagit'U,

Latona arrow
^^^

Conjunction

^^^

Pronouns
quis, interrog. pronoun,

nom.

sing.,

who ?
sing.,

cuius (^pronounced cooi'yobs,

two

syllables), interrog.

pronoun, gen.

whose ?

LESSON
Nouns
cord'na, wreath, garland,
fa'bula, story (fable)

V, 47

Verbs
crown
dat, he {she,
narrat,
it)

gives

he

{she, it) tells (narrate)

*

pecu^nia,

money

(pecuniary)

pugna, battle (pugnacious)

victS'ria, victory

Conjunction
quia or quod, because

cui (pronounced cdbi,

one syllable),

interrog. pronoun,

dat

sing., to

whom t

for

whom ?

LESSON
bona,

VI,

56

Adjectives

good
large, great

P^TTa, small,

little

grata, pleasing

pulchra, beautiful, pretty

sftla,

magna,
mala,
'

alone

bcul^

wicked
is

K conjunction sentences.

a word which connects words, parts of sentences, or

83

284
Nouns
anciria,
lulia,

SPECIAL VOCABULARIES
Pronouns
mea,

maidservant

my ;

tua,

//zy, _y<??^r

(possessives)
ace.

Julia

quid, interrog. pronoun,

sing.,

nom. and

Adverbs 1
cur,

what?

why J

non, not

-ne, the question sign, an enclitic ( 16) added to the first word, which, in a question, is usually the verb, as amat, he loves, but amat'ne ? does he love ? est, he is j estne ? is he f Of course -ne is not used when the

sentence contains quis, cur, or some other interrogative word.

LESSON
Nouns
casa, -ae,
f.,
f.,

VII,

62
Verbs
he
{she, it) lives, is living,

cottage

ha'bitat,

cena, -ae,

dinner
f.,

does live (inhabit)

laudat, he {she,
it)

galli'na, -ae,
in'sula, -ae,

hen^ chicken
/j/??^ (pen-insula)

praises, is prais-

f.,

ing, does praise (laud)

Adverbs
deiu'de, then^ in the next place
ubi,

parat, he {she, it) prepares, is pre-

paring, does prepare

vocat, he {she, it) calls, is calling, does call J invites, is invititig^

where
Preposition

ad,

to,

with ace. to express motion

does invite (vocation)

toward

Pronoun
quern, interrog. pronoun, ace. smg.,

whom f

LESSON
Nouns
Italia, -ae,
Sicilia, -ae,
f., f.,

VIII, 69

Adjectives
alta, high,

Italy
Sicily

deep

(altitude)

clara, clear, bright;

lata, 7vide (latitude)

famous

tuba, -ae,
via, -ae,

f.,

f.,

trumpet (tube) way, road, street

longa, long (longitude)

(viaduct)
1

nova,

new

(novelty)

An
;

adverb
as,

adverb
early.

is a word used to modify a verb, an adjective, or another She sings sweetly ; she is very talented she began to sing very
;

SPECIAL VOCABULARIES
LESSON
bellum,
-1,

285

IX,

n
-I,

Nouns
n.,

war(re-bel)
con-

mums,

m.,
-i,

wa// (mural)
m.,

cdnstAntia, -ae, f., firmness^ stancy, steadiness

oppidanus,

oppidum,
pilum,
servus,
-i,
-i,

-i, n.,

townsman town
{p\\e driver)

dominus,
inate)

-I,

m., master, lord {6.0m-

-i, n.,

spear

m., slave, servant

m., Sextus

equns,

-i,

m., horse (equine)

-i, n.,

Sextus,

frumentum,
legatus,
sczrt'^r
..-i,
(

grain

Verbs

m., lieutenant,

ambas
curat, '

he

1 Marcus, -i, m.,

V

legate)

M^^^.. H^^^t, Marcus, Mark

\ t -.s ? . v^ovtxa.t,he {she, tt) hastens

(she, it) cares for,

with ace.

LESSON
amicus,
-i,

X,

82

Nouns
m.,_/W^// (amicable)
-ae,
i.,

populus,

-i,
-i,

Germania,

f.,

Germany

Rhenus,
vicua,
-i,

m., people m., the Rhine

patria, -ae,

fatherland

m., village

LESSON
arma, armdrum, fima,
-e,
f.,

XI, 86
helmet
booty, spoils (preda-

Nouns
n,, plur.,

pecially defensive

arms, weapons

es-

galea, -ae,

f.,

praeda, -ae,
tory)

f.,

rumor;

reputation,

fame

\.^vaa.y-\^xi.,weapon

ofoffense, spear

Adjectives durus, -a, -um, hard, rough; unRdmanus, -a, -um, Roman. As a noun, RSmanus, -i, m.,a Ronmn feeling, cruel; severe, toilsome
(durable)

LESSON
Nouns
filias, fili, m.,

XII,

90
Adjectives

son

(filial)

flnitimus, -a, -um, bordering upon,

fluvius, fluvT, m.,

river (fluent)
jze;^r((/

neighboring, near to.

As

a noun,

gladius, gladi, m.,

(gladiator)

finitimi, -drum, m., plur., //^/]f^^<7rj

praesidium, praesi'di,

n.,

garrison,

guard, protection
proelium, proeli|
n., battle

Germanus, -a, -um, German. As a noun, Germanus, -i, m., a G^^fwa multus, -a, -um, much; plur., many

Adverb
Mepe, often

286

SPECIAL VOCABULARIES

LESSON
ager, agri, m.^ field (acre)
copia, -ae,
f.,

XIII, 95

Nouns
plenty, abundance (co-

praemium, praemi, (premium)

n.,

reward, prize

pious); plur., tt^oops, forces Cornelius, Cornell, m., Cornelius lori'ca, -ae, f., coat of mail, corselet

puer, pueri, m., boy (puerile)

Roma,

-ae,

f.,

Rome
shield (escutcheon)
(virile)

scutum,

-i, n.,

vir, viri, m.,

man, hero

Adjectives
legionarius, -a, -um,^ legionary, belo7igi7ig to the legion.
,

pulcher, pulchra, pulchrum, pretty^

As

a noun,

beautiful
_,

legionarii, -orum, ' legion^ ' m., plur., ^ ^

ary soldiers
liber,

,.'

Preposition
V
}

libera, Uberum., free (liberty). a noun, liberi, -orum, m., plur., children (lit. the free born)

s^

As

Conjunction
sed, but

LESSON
auxilium, auxili,
iliary)

XIV, Nouns

99

n., help,

aid

(aux-

consilium, consili,
diligentia, -ae,
f.,

n.,

plan
m.,

(counsel)

diligence, industry

castrum,

-i,
(\\t.

n.,

fort

(castle)

plur.,

magister,

magistri,

master,

camp
cibus,
-i,

forts)

teacher^

m.,food
Adjectives
miser, misera, miserum, wretched,

aeger, aegra, aegrum, sick

creber, crebra, oxobrava., frequent

unfortunate (miser)

LESSON XV,
Nouns
camis,
-i,

107
Adjectives
-a,

m., cart,

wagon

armatus,
validus,

-um,

armed

inopia, -ae, f., want, lack; the opposite of copia

infirmus, -a, -um,w^(2>^,y^^<^/^ (infirm)

-a,

-um, stnmg, sturdy

studium, studi,
(study)

n.,

zeal,

eagerness

1 The genitive singular masculine of adjectives in -ius ends in -ii and the ^ Observe that vocative in -ie ; not in -i, as in nouns. dominus, as distinfrom the means master sense of owner. in magister, guished

SPECIAL VOCABULARIES
Verb
maturat, he {she^
properat
if)

287

Adverb
hastens,
if.
xdiVCi^

already

now

-que, conjunction, and; an enclitic (cf. 16) and always added to the second of two words to be connected, as arma tela 'que, arms and weapons.

LESSON
agri cultura, -ae,
f.,

XVII,

117

Nouns
domicilium,
femina, -ae,
domicili,

agriculture abode, n.,

Gallia, -*e,

f.,

Gaul
a Gaul
tear

Gallus,

-i,

m.,

dwelling place (domicile)

f.,

lacrima, -ae,

f,,

woman
ripe,

(female)

numenis,

-i,

m., //w^^r (numeral)

Adjective
maturus,
-,

Adverb
mature
quo, whither

-um,

Verbs
arat,

Conjunction
misses, longs

he

{she, it) plows (arable)

it)

desiderat, he {she,

an, or, introducing the second half of a double question, as Is he a

for (desire), with

ace.

Roman or a Gaul, Estne Romanus an Gallus ?

LESSON
Nouns
ludus,
socius,
-T,

XVIII,

124

Adjectives
Tratus, -a, -um,

m., school
m.,

soci,

companion, ally

laetus, -a,

angry furious (wztxt) -um, happy, glad

,

(social)

Adverbs
hodie, to-day ibi, there, in that place

nunc, now, the present

diate past

moment
imme-

nuper, lately, recently, of the

mox, presently, soon, of the immediate future

LESSON XX,
Nouns
fOrma, -ae, {.,form, beauty
poena, -ae,
i.,

136

rSgina, -ae,

f.,

queen
f.,

(r^;al)

punishment, penalty
f.,

superbia, -ae,
tristitia, -ae,

pride, haughtiness
sadness, sorrow

potentiA, -ae,

power (potent)

f.,

Adjectives
septem, indeclinable, seven
superbus,
(superb)
-a,

Conjunctions
ndn sOliun sed etiam, not only but also
. . . . .
.

-um, proud, haughty

288

SPECIAL VOCABULARIES

LESSON
Nouns
sacrum,
-T,

XXI,

140
Adjectives

n., sacrifice^ offerings rite

interfectus, -a,

-um, slain

verbum,

-i, n.,

word (verb)
Verbs

molestus, -a, -um, troublesome, an-

noying

ix^oX^st)

sedeo, -ere, sit (sediment)

volo, -are,7?K (volatile)

perpetuus, -a, -um, perpetual, con-

ttnuous

ego, personal pronoun,

/ (egotism). Always

emphatic in the nominative.

LESSON
disciplina, -ae,
f.,

XXII, Nouns

146

training, culture,

Gaius, Gai, m., Caius, a

Roman

first

discipline

name
-i, n.,

binkmentum,

ornament, jeit/el

Tiberius,

Tibe'ri,
first

m.,

Tiberius, a

Roman
Verb
doceo, -re, teach (doctrine)

name

Adverb
mazime, most of all, especially
Adjective

antiquus, -qua, -quum, old, ancient (antique)

LESSON XXVII,
Nouns
ala, -ae,
f.,

168
Adjectives
-um, moved, excited
-um, greatest (maxifierce,

ivirig

deus,

-1,

m.,

god (deity)
-i,

commotus, maximus,

-a, -a,

monstrum,
7nonster

n.,

omen, prodigy j

mum)
saevus,
-a, -Mvci,

savage

oraculum,

-T,

n.,

oracle

Adverbs
ita, thus, in this

Verb
vasto, -are, lay waste, devastate

way, as follows
time

turn, then, at that

LESSON
Verbs
responded, -ere, respond, reply
servo, -are, save, preserve

XXVIII,

171

Conjunction
autem, but, moreover, now. Usually stands second, never first

cams,

-a,

Adjective -um, dear (cherish)

Noun
vita, -ae,
f.,

life (vital)

For the declension of deus, see

468

SPECIAL VOCABULARIES

289

LESSON XXIX,
Verb
supers, -are, conquer^ overcome (in-

176

Adverbs
seniper,

always
Prepositions

superable)

tamen, yet^ nevertheless

Nouns
cura, -e,
locus,
-i,
f.,

care, trouble

d8,

with

abl.,

down from,
through

m., plcLce, spot (location). Locus is neuter in the plural and is declined loca, -drum, etc.
-1, n.,

ceming
per, with ace.,

Conjunction
si,//

periculum,

danger^ peril

LESSON XXX,
Verbs
absum, abesse,
tive abl.
irreg.,

182

be

away, be

discedd, -ere, depart, go

away,

leave,

absent, be distant, with separa-

with separative with separative

abl.

egeo, -ere, lack, need,

be without,

adpropinquo, -are,
contined, -re,

near, ap* proach (propinquityX with dative

draw

abl.

interficia, -ere, kill

hold together, hem

in,

prohibeo, ere, restrain, keep

(f)rohibit)

from

keep (contain)

vulnerS, -are,

wound (vulnerable)
Adjective

Nouns
pr5vincia, -ae,
f.,

province

defessus, -a, -um, weary,

worn out

yinum,

-i, n.,

imne

Adverb
long5,/rr, by far,

far away

LESSON XXXI,
Nouns
aunim, -T, n., gold (oriole) mora, -ae, f., delay navigium, navi'gi, n., boat, ship
ventus,
-i,

188
Adjectives
-a,

attentus,

-um, attentive, careful

faithless^ treacher-

dubius,

-diy

-um, doubtful (dubious)

perfidus,

-a, -\xvc\,

m.,

wind (ventilate)

ous (perfidy)

Verb
nayig5, -ire, sail (navigate)

Adverb
antei, before, previously

Preposition
sine, with abl.,
^

without

This verb governs the dative because the idea of nearness to is stronger than that of motion to. If the latter idea were the stronger, the word would be used with ad and the accusative.

290

SPECIAL VOCABULARIES

LESSON XXXII,
Nouns
animus,
-i,

193

Adjectives
spirit,

m., mind, heart;

adtversuSy

-a.,

-um, opposite; adverse.

feeling (animate)

contrary
xi.,

bracchium, bracchi,
porta, -ae,
f.,

forearm,

arm

plenus, -a, -um, full (plenty)

gate

(portal)

Preposition
pr5, with abl., before; in behalf of;

Adverb
dm, for a long

time, long

instead of

LESSON XXXIV,
Adverbs
celeriter,

200

quickly (celerity)

graviter, heavily, severely (gravity)

subito,

denique, finally

suddenly

Verb
reports, -are, -avi, bring back, restore;

win, gain (report)

LESSON XXXVI,
dexter, dextra, dextnim, right (dextrous)

211

sinister, sinistra, sinistnim, left frustra, adv., in vain (frustrate)

to wage war gero, gerere, gessi, gestus, bear, carry on; wear; bellum gerere, occupo, occupare, occupavi, occupatus, seize, take possession of (occupy)

postulo, postulare, postulavi, postulatus,

demand (ex-postulate)

recuso, recusare, reciisavi, recusatus, refuse

sto, stare, steti, status,

stand
keep, hold (tenacious)
in the sense of
:

tempto, temptare, temptavi, temptatus, try, tempt, test; attempt

tene5, tenere, tenui,
,

The word
ubi

ubi,

which we have used so much

where

in

asking a question, has two other uses equally important

1.

= w^<r;?,

as a relative conjunction denoting time; as, Ubi monstrum audiverunt, fugerunt, when they heard
the monster, they fled a relative conjunction denoting place; as, Vide5 oppidum ubi Galba habitat, / see the town where

2.

ubi

= where, as
Galba

lives

Ubi
and

is called

pronoun.

When

a relative conjunction because it is equivalent to a relative in the first sentence is equivalent to at the time at which;

in the second,

where

is

equivalent to the place

in which.

SPECIAL VOCABULARIES
LESSON XXXVII, 217
neque or nee, conj., iit-itlitt\ nor, not ; neque and neque,
. . . .
.

291

ca8tellum,-i,n.,
cotidie, adv.,

r^</<7/^/,y5?/T^ (castle)

daily

neither

nor

cesso, cessare, cessavl, cessStus, cease^ with the infin.

incipiS, incipcre, incepi, inceptus, begin (incipient), with the oppugn5, oppugnare, oppugnavi, oppugnatus, storm, assail
infin.

peto, petere, petivi or petii, petitus,

aim

at^ assail,

storm^ attack; seek^

ask

(petition)

p6n6, ponere, posui, positus, place^

put

(position)

castra p5nere, to pitch

camp
be able, can (potent), with the infin. possum, posse, potui, , veto, vetare, vetui, vetitus,y^r^/V/(veto), with the infin. ; opposite of iubed,

command
incS, vincere,
vici, victua,
,

conquer (in-vincible)

vivo, vivere, vixi,

live, be alive (re-vive)

LESSON XXXIX,
hax\>dsxi% J -eL,-Mmy strange, foreigfi,

234

pedes, peditis, m., foot soldier {podestrian)

barbarous. As a noun, barbari, -5nim, m., plur., savages^ barbarians

dux, duels, m., leader (duke). the verb diic5
Cf.

pes, pedis,i \x\.,/oot (pedal)

princeps, principis, m., chief {^nncipal)

rex, regis, m.,

eques, equitis, m., horseman^ cav-

sununus,

-a,

king (regal) -um, highest, greatest

f.,

alryman

(equestrian)
xn.,

(summit)
virtus, virtutis,

iudex, iudicis,

judge

manliness, cour-

lapis, lapidis, m., stone (lapidary)

age (virtue)

miles, militis, m., soldier (militia)

LESSON
Caeaar, -aria, m., Ccesar
eaptivua,
-i,

XL,

237
-I,

impedimentum,

n.,

hindrance

m., captive, prisoner

(impediment); plur. impedimenta,

c5nsul, -is, m., consul

frater,

-^mm, baggage
(frater-

fritris, m.,

brother

impeiitor,

nity)

mander

imperitOris, m., comin chief, general (em-

hcmO, hominis, m., man,

being
^

human

peror)

Observe that

is

hng in

the nom. sing, and sk^rt in the other cases.

292
legi5, legi5nis,
f.,
f.,

SPECIAL VOCABULARIES
legion
pater, patris, m.,y2zM<?r (paternal)
salus, salutis,
f., safety (salutary) soror, sororis, f ., sister (sorority)

mater, matris,

//z^M^r (maternal)

ordo, ordinis, m., row^

rank

(order)

LESSON
calamitas, calamitatis,
f.,

XLI,

239

loss^ dis-

orator, oratoris, m., orator

ripa, -ae,
f.,

aster^ defeat (calamity)

bank

(of a stream)
n.,

caput, capitis,

n., ^^<a;^ (capital) n.,

tempus, temporis,
poral)

time

(tern

flumen, fliiminis,

river (flume)

labor, laboris, m., labor^ toil

terror, terroris, m., terror^ fear

opus, operis,

n.,

work, task

victor, victoris, m., victor

accipio, accipere, accepi, acceptus, receive^ accept

confirms, confirmare, confirmavi, confirmatus, strengthen, establish, en

courage (confirm)

LESSON
animal, animalis (-ium^),
avis, avis (-ium),
f.,

XLIII,

245

n.,

animal

inimicus, which

means a personal

bird (aviation) caedes, caedis (-iiun), f., slaughter

civis, civis (-ium),
(civic)

enemy
ignis, ignis (-ium), m.,fre (ignite) insigne, insignis (-ium), n., decoration,

calcar, calcaris (-ium), n., spr^r

m. and

f.,

citizen

badge (ensign)
n.,
f.,

cliens, clientis (-ium), m., retainer,

mare, maris (-ium 2), navis, navis (-ium),

turris, turris (-ium),

sea (marine)

ship (naval);

finis,

depe7ide7it (client) finis (-ium), m,,

(final); plur.,

navis longa, ma7t-ofwar

end, limit
f.,

tower [pixx^'C)
city (suburb).

country, territory

urbs, urbis (-ium),

f.,

hostis, hostis (-ium), m. and f ., enemy in war (hostile). Distinguish from

An
dum

urbs

is

larger than an oppi-

LESSON XLIV,
arbor, arboris,
collis,
f.,

249

tree (arbor)

mensis, mensis (-ium), m.,

month

coUis (-ium), m., hill dens, dentis (-ium), m., tooth (dentist) fons, fontis (-ium), m.. fountain,

moenia, -ium,
cations.

n., plur.,

walls,fortifi-

Cf.

murus

spring; source
iter,

itineris,

n.,

march, journey,

mons, montis (-ium), m., mountain; summus mons, top ofthe mountain numquam, adv., never
pons, pontis, m., bridge (pontoon)
is

route (itinerary)
1 The genitive plural ending -ium genitive plural of mare is not in use.

written to

mark the

i-stems.

The

SPECIAL VOCABULARIES
sanguis, sanguinis, m., blood (san-

293

trans, prep, with ace., across (transatlantic)

guinary)

summus,

-a,

-um, highest^ greatest

vis(vis),gen. plur.virium,f., j/r^/r^/t,

(summit)

force^ violence (vim)

LESSON XLV,
leer, acris, acre,

258

sharps keen^ eager

omnis, omne, every, all (omnibus)

par, gen. paris, equal (par)

(acrid)

brevis, breve, shorty brief

difficilis, difficile, difficult

pauci,

-ae,

-a,

few, only a few

(paucity)

facilis, idiZxXt^ facile,

easy
severe, serious

fortis, forte,

brave

(fortitude)
^

secundus, -a, -um, second;favorable^ opposite of adversus

gravis, grave,

heavy

signum,

-i, n.,

signal, sign,

standard

(grave)

velox, gen. veldcis, swift (velocity)

conlocS, conlocare, conlocavi, conlocltus, arrange, station, place (collocation)

demSnstro, demonstrare, demonstravi, dem5nstratus, point out, explain (demonstrate) mandd, mandare, mandavi, mandatus, commit, intrust (mandate)

LESSON XLVI,
adventus, -Qs, m., approach, arrival
(advent)
ante, prep, with ace, before (antedate)

261

impetus, -us, m., attack (impetus); impetum facere in, with ace, to

make an
lacus,
-lis,

attack on
dat.

and

abl. plur. lacu-

comu, -fls,

horn, wingoi an army (cornucopia); a dextrd comu, on

n.,

bus, m., lake

manus,

-us,

f.,

hand; band, force

the right wing; a sinistr5 cornii, on the left wing

equitatus, -us, m., cavalry
exercitus, -us, m.,

(manual)

harbor (port) post, prep, with ace., behind, after

portus, -us, m.,

army

(post-mortem)

crem5, cremare, cremavi, crematus,

bum

(cremate)

ezerced, exercere, exercui, exercitus, prentice, drill, train (exercise)

LESSON
Aihcnae, -5rum,
'

XLVII, 270
Geniva,
-ae,
f.,

f.,

plur.,

Atluns

Geneva
plur.,

orinthus,

-I, f.,

Corinth
doml, f., house^ Cf. domicilium

Pompeii, -drum, m.,

domus,

-&8, locative

d^ in

Campania.

Pompeii, See map

home

(dome).

!94

SPECIAL VOCABULARIES
tergum,
tergi, n.,
Jiind^ in the

propter, prep, with ace, on account

because of rus, ruris, in the plur. only nom. and

of^

back; a tergo, rear

n.,

be-

vulnus, vulneris,
nerable)

wound

(vul-

acc. riira, n.,

country

(rustic)

committo, committere, commisi, commissus, intrust^ commit; proelium

committere, join battle
convoc5, convocare, convocavi, convocatus, call together, be afraid (timid) timeo, timere, timui, , fear;
verto, vertere, verti, versus, tu?'n, the backs, hence to retreat

summofi (convoke)

change (convert)

terga vertere, to turn

LESSON
acies, -ei,
f.,

XLVIII, 276
liix,

line

of

battle

liicis,

f.,

light (lucid);

prima
plur.,

aestas, aestatis,

f,,

summer

liix,

daybreak
-e,

annus,

-i,

m.,

dies, diei, m,,

fides, fidei,

year (annual) day (diary) no plur., i., faith, trust;

meridies, ace. -em, aW.

no

m,, jnidday (meridian) nox, noctis (-ium), f., night (nocturnal)

pro7nise, word; protection ; in fidem venire, to coine under the

primus,
res, rei,

-a,
f.,

protection
fluctus, -lis, m,,

-um, first (prime) thing, jnatter (real); res

(lit.

wave, billow
winter

(fluc-

gestae, deeds, exploits

thitigs

tuate)

performed)
f.,
f.,

res adversae,

adver-

hiems, hiemis,
hora, -ae,

sity; res secundae, prosperity

spes, spei,
f.,

hour

hope

LESSON XLIX,
amicitia,
cable)
-ae,
f.,

283

friendship (amiso, therefore, ac-

nQntius, niinti, m., messenger.

niintid

Ct

itaque, conj.,

and
a
a

pax, pacis,

f.,

peace

(pacify)

cordingly
littera, -ae,f.,

regnum,
letter of the alphaletter,

-I,

n.,

reign, sovereignty,

kingdom
supplicium, suppli'ci,
n.,

bet; plur.,

an
n.,

epistle

punishde,

metus, metiis, m.,fear

nihil,

ment;
nothing
with

supplicium

stimere

indeclinable,

abl., inflict

punishment on;

(nihilist)

supplicium dare, suffer punishment. Cf. poena

placeo, placere, placui, placitus, be pleasing to, please, with dative.

siimo, siimere, sumpsi, siimptus, take up,

Cf

54

assmne

sustineo, sustinere, sustinm, sustentus, sustain

SPECIAL VOCABULARIES
LESSON
corpus, cori>oris,
n.,

295

L,

288

body (corporal)

Slim, adv., formerly, once

upon a

densus, -a, -um, dense

time
pars, partis (-ium), direction
f.,

Idem, e'adem, idem, demonstrative

pronoun, the same (identity) ipse, ipsa, ipsum, intensive pronoun,
self; e7>en, very

part^ region,

quoque, adv., also.

Stands after the

mirus, -a, -um, wonderful^ marvel-

word which it emphasizes s61, sSlis, m., sun (solar)

verus, -a, -um, true, real (verity)

ous (miracle)

debed, debere, debul, debitus, owe^ ought (debt)

JripiS, eripere, eripui, ereptus,

snatch

from

LESSON
hie,

LI, 294

haec, hoc, demonstrative pro-

ndmen, n5minis,
nate) oculus,
-1,

n.,

name

(nomi-

noun, this (of mine); he, she, it ille, ilia, illud, demonstrative pronoun, that (yonder); he, she,
it

m., eye (oculist)

pristinus, -a, -vany former, old-time

(pristine)
piiblicus, -a,

invisus, -a, -um, hateful, detested, with dative Cf. 143

iste, ista, istud,

demonstrative proit

to the state ; res piiblica, rei

-um, public, belonging pu-

noun, that (of yours); he, she,

libertas, -atis,
f.,

blicae,

f.,

the

commonwealth, the
n.,

liberty

state, the republic

modus,

-1,

m.,

measure; manner,

vestigium,
v6x, vOcis,

vesti'gi,

footprint,

way, mode

track; trace, vestige

f.,

voice

LESSON
incolumis, -e,

LII, 298
satis, adv.,

unharmed

enough, sufficiently (satis^

ne

quidem, adv., not even. The emphatic word stands between ne

.

faction)

tantus, -a, -um, so great

yerO, adv., truly,

and quidem
nisi, con]., unless,

indeed, in fact.

if

not

As

paene, adv., almost (pen-insula)

dScidS, decidere, decidi,
,

a conj. but, however, usually stands second, never first

fall

down

(deciduous)

deailio, desilire, desilui, desultus, leap

down, dismount maned, manure, mansi, mansurus, remain

triducd, traducere, traduxi, traductus, lead across

296

SPECIAL VOCABULARIES

LESSON
aquila, -ae,
f.,

LIII, 306
,

eagle (aquiline)
audacis,
adj.,

audax, gen. audacious

celer,
celeris,

bold^

tal).

mentis (-ium), Cf. animus

f.,

mind (men-

celere,
.

swift, quick

opportiinus, -a, -um, opportune quam, adv., than. With the superlative

(celerity).

Cf velox
-oris,

quam

explorator,
(explorer)

m.,

scout,

spy
huge,

possible,
viri,

gives the force of as as quam audacissimi

7nen as bold as possible

so.

ingens,

gen. ingentis,

adj.,

recens, gen. recentis, adj., recent

vast

tam, adv.,
jective

Always with an

adis

medius, -a, -um, middle, middle paTi:

^t/"

(medium)

or adverb, while ita generally used with a verb

.

quaero, quaerere, quaesivi, quaesitus, ask, inquire, seek (question).

Cf peto

LESSON
alacer, alacris, alacre, eager, spirited,

LIV,

310
from nulm. and f., no 07te nobile, well known, noble
plur.,
abl.),

(gen. nuUius, abl. nuUo,

lus),

excited (alacrity)
celeritas, -atis,
f., jr/^*?^^

no

(celerity)

nobilis,

clamor, clamoris, m., shout, clamor

lenis, lene, 7nild,

noctu, adv. (an old

(nocturnal)

by night

gentle (lenient)
f.,

mulier, muli'eris,

woman
ace.

statim, adv., im,m.ediately at once

,

multitudo, multitudinis, f ., multitude

subito, adv.,

nemo,

dat.

nemini,

neminem

tardus, -a,

suddenly -um, slow (tardy)

(cupidity)

cupio, cupere, cupivi, cupitus, desire,

wish

LESSON
aedificium,
aedifi'ci,
n.,

LV,

314

building,

reliquus, -a, -um, remaining, rest of.

dwelling (edifice) imperium, impe'ri, n., command, chiefpower ; empire mors, mortis (-ium), f ., death (mortal)
abdo, abdere, abdidi, abditus, hide

As

a noun, m. and n. plur., the

rest (relic)
scelus, sceleris, n.,
servitiis, -utis,
f.,

crime

slavery (servitude)
f.,

valles, vallis (-ium),

valley

contendo, contendere, contend!, contentus, strain, struggle; hastett (contend)

occido, occidere, occidi, occlsus, cut

down,

kill.

Cf. neco, interficio

perterreo, perterrere, pertemii, perterritus, terrify, frighten recipio, recipere, recepi, receptus, receive, recover; se recipere, betake one's
self,

withdraw, retreat
give over, surrender,
delii'er (traitor)

trado, tradere, tradidi, traditus,

SPECIAL VOCABULARIES
LESSON
aditus, -us, m., approach^ access ;

297

LVI, 318
nam, conj.,y&r
obses, obsidis, m. and f., hostage paulo, adv. (abl. n. of paulus), by
little^

entrance
civitas, civitatis,
f.,

citizenships

body
inter,

of citizens, state (city)

prep, with

somewhat

ace,

between;

among (interstate commerce)

incolo, incolere, incolul,
,

transitive,

inhabit; intransitive, dwell.

Cf.

habits, vivd
relinqu5, relinquere, reliqui, relictus, leave, abandon (relinquish) statuo, statuere, statui, statutus, fix. decide (statute), usually with infin.

LESSON
aequus,
-a,

LVII, 326
gens, gentis (-ium),
f.,

-um, even, level; equal

race, tribe,

cohors, cohortis (-ium), f., cohort, a tenth part of a legion, about 360

nation (Gentile)
negotium, neg6ti,n., ^j/>/^jj,^7^;r,

men
(course)

matter (negotiate)

curr5, currere, cucurri, cursus,

run

regio, -onis,

f.,

region, district

rumor, rumoris, m., rumor, report.

f.,

difl&cultas, -atis,

difficulty

Cf.

fama
conj.,

fossa, -ae,

f.,

ditch (fosse)

simul atque,

as soon as

suscipio, suscipere, suscepT, susceptus,

undertake
(ex-tract)

traho, trahere, traxi, tractus, drag,

draw

valeo, valere, valui, valiturua, be strong; pliirimum valere, to be

most

powerful, have great influence

(value).

Cf validus
.

LESSON
commeatua,
longitudo,
tude)
-fis,

LVIII, 332
mercator,
mercatoris,
m.,
trader,

m., provisions

latitudo, -inis,

f.,

width
f.,

(latitude)

merchant
munitid, -5nis,
nition)
f.,

-inis,

length (longi-

fortiflcation (mu-

magnitiidd, -inis,

f.,

size,

magni-

tude

spatium, spati, tance; time

n.,

room, space, dis-

cogndscS, cogndscere, cognSvi, cognitus, learn; in the perfect tenses,

(re-cognize)
c6g6, c5gere, coegi, coactus, collect ;

know

compel {cogent)

defends, defendere, defend!, de^ensus, defend

298

SPECIAL VOCABULARIES
to,

incendo, incendere, incendi, incensus, set fire

obtineo, obtinere, obtinui, obtentus, possess, occupy,

burn (incendiary). Cf cremo hold (obtain)

.

pervenio, pervenire, perveni, perventus,

come through, arrive

I

LESSON
agmen, agminis,
n., line

LIX, %ZZ1
Eelvetii, -orum, m., the Helvetii, a Gallic tribe

of tnarch,
;r^r

coluimi;^ivssyVira.d.%,vci^r\.^thevan;

novissimum agmen,

//z^

passus,

passus,
feet;

atque, ac, conj., <2;^<^y atque is used before vowels and consonants, ac

Roman
mile

m., a pace, five mille passuum, a

thousand

{of) paces,

Roman

before consonants only. Cf. et and

-que
concilium, concili,
sefnbly
n.,

qua de causa, for this reason, for

council, as-

what reason
vallum,
-i, n.,

earthworks, rampart

cado, cadere, cecidi, casurus, fall (decadence)

dedo, dedere, dedidi, deditus, surrender, give up; with a reflexive pronoun, surrender ofie's self, submit, with the dative of the indirect object

premo, premere, pressi, pressus, press hard, harass

vexo, vexare, vexavi, vexatus, annoy, ravage (vex)

LESSON
aut, conj., or; aut
.
. .

LX,

341
f.,

aut, either

opinio, -onis,

opinioft, supposi-

or

tion, expectation

causa, abl. of causa,ytfr the sake of, becajise of Always stands after

res frumentaria, rei friimentariae,

(\\t.thegrai?t affair), grain

f.

the gen. which modifies

fere, adv., neatly,

it

ahnost

timor, -oris, m.,^(a;r. undique, 2id.v.,from all sides

supply Cf. timeo

Conor, conari, conatus

egredior, egredi, egressus

sum, attempt, try sum, move out, disembark ; progredior, jnove

forward, advance (egress, progress) motor, morari, moratus sum, delay

orior, oriri, ortus

proficiscor, proficisci, profectus

revertor, reverti,

usually active, Note the following comsequor, sequi, secutus sum, follow (sequence). pounds of sequor and the force of the different prefixes consequor {follow
:

spring ; begin ; be born {from) (origin) sum, set out reversus sum, return (revert). The forms of this verb are and not deponent, in the perfect system. Perf. act., reverti

sum,

arise,

with), overtake; insequor {follow against),

pursue; subsequor {follow

under), follow close after

LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
Translations inclosed within parentheses are not to be used as such
to
;

they are inserted

show etymological meanings.

ad-ferd,

ad-ferre,

at-toli,

ad-lfttns,

a or ab, prep, with abl./rvm, by, off. Translated on in & dextid comQ, on
the right wing ; & fronte, on the front or in front ; k deztri, on the right ;
ft

bring,

convey

report,

announce;

render, give (426)

ad-fici5, -ere, -fSci, -fectus [ad, to,
facid, do], affect, visit

+
of

latere,

on the side ;

etc.

adflictatus,

-a,

-um,

adj.

[part,

ab-d6, -ere,

-didi, -ditus, hide,

conceal

adflictd, shatter], shattered

ab-ducd,
lead

-ere, -dfixi, -ductas, lead off,

ad-fligd, -ere,
strike

-flixi, -flictus,
;

dash upon,

away
-cidi, -cisos [ab(s), off,

upon

harass, distress
-ui,

abs-cid5, -ere,

ad-hibe5, -re,

-itus

[ad,

to,

caedS, cut], cut off

ab-sum,

-esse, ftfui, ftfuturus, be

away,
ft

habeo, hold], apply, employ, use ad-hiic, adv. hitherto, as yet, thus far

be absent, be distant, be off; with

aditus,

-us,

m.
cucess

[aded,
;

crab and

abl.,

501.32
to,

approach,

approach], entrance. Cf.

ac, conj., see atque

adventus

ac-cipi6, -ere, -cpi, -ceptns [ad,

capid, take\, receive, accept

ad-ligO,

-ftre, -ftvi, -fttus,

bind to, fasten

accr,

ftcris,

ftcre,

adj.

sharp

figura-

tively, keen, active, eager

acerbus,
acies,
b.

-a,

{471) -um, adj. bitter, sour

sharp], edge
:

ad-loquor, -loqui, -locutus sum, dep. verb [ad, to, -f loquor, speak], speak to, address, with ace.

ad-ministr5,
direct

-ftre, -ftvi, -fttus,

manage,

-Ji, f . [ftcer,

line of

'tie

admiratid,
[ftcer,

-dnis,

f.

[admlror,

wonder

acriter, adv.

sharp],

compared

at],

admiration, astonishment
-ire, -m6vi,

ftcrius, ftcerrimi,

sharply, fiercely

ad-moveS,
to
;

-mdtus, move

ad, prep, with ace. to, towards, near. With the gerund or gerundive, to,for

apply, employ
-ftre,

ad-propinqud,

-tvi, -fttus,

come

ad-aeqa5, -ftre, -&!, make level with

-ftttis,

maJke equal,
to

near, approach, with dat.

ad-sum,
;

-ease, -fui, -futflrus,

;

ad-ducO, -ere, -dOxI, -dactaa, lead move, induce

ad-5,
-Ire, -li,

ent

assist

with dat., 426

f.

adulSacSna, -entia, m. and

adolSscS, grow]t

[part, of

-itus,

go

to,

approach,

o youth, young man,

draw

near,

i/isit,

with ace. (413)

young person
290

300
adventus, -us,

LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
adyentus
m.
[ad,
to^

ancilla

venio.

alacriter, adv. [alacer, active"],

comp

come\, approach, arrival ( 466) adversus, -a, -um, adj. [part, of adverto,

alacrius, alacerrime, actively, eagerly

albus, -a, -um, adj., white

aloes,
-is, f.

io\ turned towards ^ facing; contrary^ adverse, res adversae, ad-

turn

elk
f.

Alcmena,
aliquis

-ae,

Alcm/na, the mother

-qua, -quid
(-quod),
(

versity

of Hercules
[aedific5, build],

1 1

aedificium, aedifi'ci,n.
building, edifice

(-qui),

indef. pron.

some one, some

alius
. .
.
. .
.

487)
adj.

aedifico, -are, -avi, -atus [aedes, house,

4- facio,

alius, -a, -ud (gen. -ius, dat.

-i),

make], build
sick, feeble

another, other,
. .

alius,

one
.

aeger, aegra, aegrum, adj.

another,
1

alii

alii,

some

aequalis,
the

-e,

adj. equal, like.

-is,

As

others (

10)

noun, aequalis,

m. or

f.

one of

same age
-a,
-I,

Alpes, -ium, f. plur. the Alps alter, -era, -erum (gen. -ius, dat. -i), adj.
the one, the other (of two),
alter, the

aequus,
fables

Aesopus,
aestas,

-um, adj. even, level; equal m. .^op, a writer of

f.

alter
1

one

the other (

10)

altitiido, -inis,

f.

[altus, high], height

tall,

-atis,

summer,

inita aestate,

altus, -a, -um, adj. high,

deep

at the beginning

of summer

Amazones, -um,
ambo,

f.

plur.

Amazons, a

aetas, -atis,

f.

age
f.

fabled tribe of warlike

Ethiopia, a country

women

Aethiopia, -ae, in Africa

Africa, -ae,
f.

-ae, -0, adj. (decl. like duo), both

Africa

amice, adv. [amicus, yhVwdf/j/], superl. amicissime, in a friendly manner

amicio,
-ire,

Africanus,

-a,

-um,

name given

adj. of Africa. to Scipio for his

iacio,

-ictus [am-, about, , throw], throw around, wrap

victories in Africa

about, clothe

ager, agri, m.field,farm, land ( 462. c)

amicitia,

-ae,

f.

[amicus, friend],

agger,

-eris,

m.

mound

friendship

agmen, -inis, n. [ago, drive], an army on the march, column, primum agmen, the van
ag5,
-ere, egi, actus, drive, lead; do,
life

amicus,
friend
a-mitto,

-a,

friendly.

As

-um, adj. [am5, a noun, amicus,

love],
-i,

m.

-ere,

-misi,

-missus,

send
be

perform. \ita.m,agere, pass

agricola, -ae, m. [ager, field,

cultivate]
,

colo,

farmer
f.

agri cultiira, -ae,

ala, -ae,
f.

agriculture

away; lose amo, -are, -avi, fond of ( 488) amphitheatrum,

amplus,
an, conj.
-a,

-atus,

love,

like,

-i,

n.

amphitheater
large,

wing

-um, adj.

ample;

alacer, -oris, -ere, adj. active, eager. Cf. acer

alacritas,
-atis,
f.

honorable, noble
or,

introducing the second

f.

[alacer,

active],

part of a double question

ancilla, -ae,

eagerness, alacrity

maidservant

LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
ancora
ancora, Hie,
f.

301

auritus
-um, adj. steep Aricia, -ae, f. Aricia, a town on the Appian Way, near Rome [mw

ofuAor

arduus,

-,

Andromeda,

f. Andnym'eJa, -ee, daughter of Cepheus and wife of Perseus

aries, -etis,

m. battering-ram
n.

(p. 221),

angnlus,

-I,

m, an^e^ comer

arma, -drum,
7veapons.

plur.

arms, armor,

anim-adverto, -ere, -ti, -eus [animus, mind, 4- adverts, turn to], turn the

Cf. telum

armatus,

-a,

-um, adj. [arm5, arm],

mind to,
(465.'^)

notice
n.

armed, equipped
ar5, -ire, -Svi, -itus, plow, till
ars, artis,
f.

animal, -Alis,

\9ssiTaA^breaih\animal

art, skill

anim5sus,

-a,

-um, adj. spirited

animus,
heart

-i,

m. [anima, breath\, mind^

m. joint ascribd, -ere, -scrips!, -scrlptus [ad, in

articulus,
-1,

; spirit, coura^, feeling, in this sense often plural

addition,
enlist

scribS,

7vrite],

enroll,

annus,

-1,

m. year

Asia, -ae,

f.

Asia,

i.e.

Asia Minor

ante, prep, with ace. before antea, adv. [ante], before, formerly

at, conj. but.

Cf. autem, sed

antiquus,

-um, adj. [ante, before]^ former, ancient, old apcr, apri, m. vnld boar
-a,

Athenae, -irum, f. plur. Athens Atlas, -antis, m. Atlas, a Titan was said to Jiold up the sky

who

Apoll5, -inis, m. Apollo, son of Jupiter and Latona, brother of Diana

at-que, ac, conj. and, and also, and what is more, atque may be used before either vowels or consonants,
ac before consonants only

ap-pare5, -re,

-ui,

[ad

p&reo,

appear], appear

attentus,
tends,

-a,

-uin,

adj.

[part of at-

ap-pell5, -4re, -ivl, -Atus, call by name^ name. Cf. n5min5, voc5

direct

(the

mind) toward],

attentive, intent on, careful

Appius,
turn

-a,

-um, adj. Appian

at-tonitus, -a, -um, adj. thunderstruck^

ap-plic6, -ire, -Svi, -Stas, apply, direct,

astounded
audacia, -ae,
f.

[audiz, bold], boldness^

apud, prep, with ace. among; thi- house of

aqua,
-ae,
f.

at^ at

audacity audacter, adv. [aud4x, bold],

-icis, adj. bold,
-re,

compared

7oater

audftcius, audicissimC, boldly

ara, -ae,

aquila, -ae, f. eagle f. altar

arbitror, -Ari, -itus sum, think, suppose ( 420. ^). Cf. exIstimS, put5

audax,
aude5,
audid,

daring ausus sum, dare

or
-ii,

-ire, -Ivi

-itus, hear, listen

to (420.</,

491)

arbor, -oris,

f.

tree ( 247.

i.

a)

AugSis,

-e,

m. Aug/as, a king whose

air, breeze

Arcadia, -ae, f. Arcadia, a district in southern Greece

arded, -re, irsi, irsOms, be on fin,
blaze,

stables Hercules cleaned

aura, -e,

f.

auritus,

-am, adj. [aoram, gold],

bum

mubnud vnik

gM

302
aureus,
golden
-a,

LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
aureus
-um, adj. [aurum, gold],

casa

C
C. abbreviation for Gaius, Eng. Caius

aurum,
autem,
first,

-i,

n.

aut, conj. or.

gold aut

cad5, -ere,
.

ce''cidi,

casurus,/^//

aut, either

.or

caedes,

-is, f.

[caedo, cut], [a cutting

( 465. a)

conj., usually

second, never

in the clause, but, moreover,

caelum,
Caesar,

down), slaughter, carnage -i, n. sky, heavens

-aris,

however.,

now.

Cf. at, sed

assist-

m.

Ccesar, the

auxilium, auxili, n. help, aid, ance ; plur. auxiliaries

a-vertO, -ere, aside
avis,
-is, f.
-ti,

general, statesman,

famous and writer

calamity, defeat,

calamitas, -atis,
disaster

f loss,
.

-sus, turn

away, turn

calcar, -aris, n. spur ( 465. b)

i)

bird ( 243.

Campania,

-ae,

f.

6
ballista, -ae, f. ballista, an engine for hurling missiles (p. 220)

trict of central Italy.

Campania, a See map

dis-

Campanus,
campus,

-um, adj. of Campania m. plain, field, esp. the Campus Martius, along the Tiber
-a,
-i,

balteus,

-i,

m.
n.

belt,

sword

belt

just outside the walls of

Rome

barbarus,

-i,

m. barbarian, savage
war. bellum inferre, with

canis,

-is,

m. and

f.

dog
,

bellum,
dat.

-i,

cano, -ere, ce'cini,

sing
[cano,

make war upon

canto, -are, -avi, -atus

sing],

bene, adv. [for bone, from bonus], com-

sing

pared melius, optime, -ivell benigne, adv. [benignus, kind], combenignus,

Capenus,

pared benignius, benignissime, kindly -a, -um, adj. good-natured, kind, often used with dat

-a, -um, adj. of Capena, esp. the Porta Cape'na, the gate at Rome leading to the Appian Way

capio, -ere,

cepi,

captus, take,

seize,

capture (492)

bini, -ae, -a, distributive numeral adj. two each, two at a time ( 334)
bis, adv. twice

Capitolinus,

-a,

-um, adj. belonging

Capitoline

to the Capitol,

Capitolium,

bonus,

-a,

-um, adj. compared melior,

optimus, good, kind ( 469. a) bos, bovis (gen. plur. boum or bovum, dat. and abl. plur. bobus or bubus),

n. Capitoli, [caput, head], the Capitol, the hill at Rome on which stood the temple of

capsa,

Jupiter Capitolinus and the citadel -ae, f. box for books

-i,

m. and

f.

ox,

cow
n.

captivus,

m.

[capio, take], captive

bracchium, bracchi,
brevis, -e, adj. short

arm
sea-

Brundisium,

-i,

n.

Brundisium, a

Capua, -ae, f. Capua, a large Campania. See map caput, -itis, n. head ( 464. 2.
career, -eris,
va.

city of

b)

port in southern Italy. See map bulla, -ae, f. bulla, a locket made of
small concave plates of metal fas-

prison, jail

carrus,

-i,

m.

cart,

wagon

cams,

-a,

-um,
f.

adj. dear, precious

tened by a spring

(p.

212)

casa, -ae,

hut, cottage

LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
castellum
castellum,
-i,

coUum
<.t

n.

[ciiin.

castrum,

yiwTj, rtdoubt^Jort
\

Cimbri, -^rum, m. plur. the Cimbri Cimbricus, -a, -um, adj. Cimbrian
cinctus, -a, -um, adj. [part, of cingS,

castmm,
plural,

-i,

n. fort.

Usually in the
a military

castra,

-5rum,

surround],

girt,

surrounded

camp, castra ponere, to pitch camp casus, -us, m. [cado, /a//], chance;
misfortune^ loss

cingo, -ere, cinxi, cinctus, gird, sur-

round
circiter, adv.

about

catapulta, -ae, f. caiapulty an engine for hurling stones

catena, -ae,
f.

circum, prep, with ace. around

circum'-d5, -dare, -dedi, -datus, place

chain
f.

around, surround, inclose

circum''-e6, -ire,
-ii,

caupona,

-ae,
f.

inn
cause, reason,

-itus,

go around
,

causa, -ae,

qua de

circum-sisto, -ere, circum'steti,

cau&i, for this reason

stand around, surround

circum-venio,
-ire, -veni,

cedo, -ere, ceasi, cesafinis, ^ive way,

retire

-ventus (come

atvund), surround
citerior,
-ius,

celer, -eris, -ere, adj. swift, fleet

adj. in

comp., superl.

celeritas, -itis,
tiess,

f.

[celer, swift], swift-

citimus, hither, nearer (475)

civilis, -e, adj. [civis], civil

speed

celeriter, adv. [celer, swift\,

celerius, celerrimS, swiftly

compared

civis, -is,

m. and
f.

f.

citizen ( 243. 1)

civitas,

-fttis,

[civis, citizen],

(body

cena, -ae,

f.

dinner

centum,

indecl.

numeral

adj.

hundred
Ciphea),

of citizens), state; citizenship clamor, -oris, m. shout, cry

Centuri5, -onis, m. centurion, captain

clams,

Cepheus

(dissyl.), -ei

(ace.

-a, -um, adj. clear; famous, renoxcned ; bright, shining

-is, {.fleet

m. Cepheus, a king of Ethiopia and

father of

classis,

Andromeda

claudo, -ere,
clavus,
-i,

-si,

-sus, shut, close.

Cerberus, -i, m. Cerberus, the fabled three-headed dog that guarded the

m.

stripe

cliens, -entis,

m. dependent

''''"-.

entrance to Hades

client ( 465. a)
[certd,

certamen,
certe,

-inia,

n.

struggle],

COCleS,

-itiS,

m. {blind in one

eye).

^if^gg^f^ contest, rivalry

Codes, the surname of Horatius

adv. [certus, sure],

compared
certain,
{to

C0-gli68c5, -ere, -gndvi, -gnitus, learti,

certius, certissimS, surely, certainly

knoio, understand. Cf. scid ( 420. b)

certus,
sure,

-a,

-um,

adj. fixed,

C6g6, -ere, cogi, coictus [co(m)-,

to-

aliquem certidrem facere make some one more certain),

gether, -f ago, drive], {drive together),

collect ; compel, drive cohors, cohortia, f. cohort, the tenth part of a legion, about 360 men

to

inform some one cervus, -I, m. stag, deer

cesso, -ire, -ivi, -Atus, delay^ cease
cibaria, -drum, n. \\\ix.food^ provisions cibus, -i, vn.food, victuals

collis, -ia,

m.

hill,

in

summd
2.

coUe, on

of the kill {%2^j. collum, -5. n neck

top

a)

304

LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
col5

con-scend5
con-curro, -ere, -curri, -cursus [com-j
together,
rally,

COlo, -ere, colui, cultus, cultivate., till ;

worship ; devote one^s self to columna, -ae, f column, pillar

honor.,
.

curro, run],

run

together;

gather
f.

com-

(col-,

con-,

cor-,

co-),

a prefix,

condicio, -onis,
dico,

[com-, together, \-

together, with,

or intensifying the meaning of the root word

f.

talk],

agree?nent,

condition,

terms

coma, -ae, f. hair comes, -itis, m. and

con-dono, -are,
[com-, together,

-avi, -atus,

pardon
bring
one's

con-d\ic5, -ere, -duxi, -ductus, hire

companion, comrade COmitatus, -us, m. [comitor, accomeo, go]^,

con-fero,
together,

-ferre,

-tuli,

-latus,

se

conferre,

betake

pany],
comitor,

escort,
-ari,

company
sum, dep. verb

self

-atus

[comes, companion], accompany

COn-fertus, -a, -um, adj. crowded, thick COnfestim, adv. immediately

con-ficio, -ere, -feci, -fectus [com-,

com-meatus, -us, m. supplies COm-minus, adv. [com-, together, manus, hand], hand to hand

com-

pletely,

facio, do],
,

make, complete,

accomplish fin ish

com-mitt5, -ere, -misi, -missus, yif^m together; commit, intrust, proelium committere, join battle, se committere with dat, trust one^s self to

con-firmo, -are,

-avi, -atus,

make firm,

establish, strengthen, afiirm, assert

con-fluo, -ere, -fluxi,

,flow together

con-fugio, -ere, -fugi, -fugiturus, flee

commode,

adv. [commodus,

fit],

com-

pared commodius, conunodissime, cottveniently, fitly

for refuge, flee con-ici5, -ere, -ieci, -iectus [com-, intensive,

iacio,

throw], hurl

commodus,
com-motus,
com-paro,
tensive,

-a,

-a,

-um, adj. suitable, fit -um, adj. [part, of com-

con-iungo,
together,

-ere, -iunxi, -iunctus [com-,

+ iungo, Join], Join together,

moveo, m,ove], aroused, moved

-are, -avi, -atus [com-, in-

unite

con-iiiro, -are, -avi, -atus [com-, together,

-f iuro, swear],

paro, prepare], prepare;

unite by oath, con-atus [com-,

to-

provide, get

spire
-plevi, -pletus

com-pleo,

-ere,
-{-

[com-,

con-loco,
gether, station

-are,

-avi,

^\^, fill], fill up complexus, -us, m. embrace

intensive,

loco, place],

afrange, place,
n.

com-primo,
[com-,

-ere,

-pressi,
\-

-pressus

conloquium,
gether,
-f-

conlo'qui,

[com-, to-

together,

premo, press],
[com-, inten-

loquor, speak], conversation,

press together, grasp, seize

con-cid5, -ere,
sive,
-cidi,

conference

Conor,

-ari,

-atus sum, dep. verb, en-

Cdid.0,

fall], fall

down

deavor, attempt, try

concilium, concili, n. meeting, council

con-cludo, -ere, -clusi, -clusus [com-, intensive, + claudo, close], shut up,
close; end, finish

con-scendo,

-ere,

-scendi,

-scensus

[com-, intensive, -f scando, climb],

climb up, ascend,

navem consceu'

dere, embark, go on board

LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
cfln-eciibS

crSscS
-scrfptus

c6n-scriM,
[com-,

-ere,

-ecripsi,

C0ntr5versia, -ae,

f.

dispute, quarrel

togtther,

scribd,

wriU],

con-venio,
together,

-ire,
-f-

-vni, -ventus

[com-,
to-

(wriU
sive,

together), enroll, enlist

yenid, come],

come

cOn-aecrO, -Are, -4vi,

^tus

[com-, inten-

gether, meet, assemble

8cr5, consecraie], consecrate,

t/ez'ote

con-vert5, -ere, -verti, -versus [com-, intensive, + vertS, turn], turn

c5n-sequor, -sequi, -sectitus sum, dep. verb [com-, intensive, + 8eq\ioT,/ollo7o],

COn-VOCO,

-ftre,

-ftvi,

-fttus

[com-, to-

gether, -f voco, call], call together

pursue ; overtake; win

-ftre, -ivi,

co-orior,

-iri,

-ortus sum,
-|-

dep. verb

c5n-8crv6,
tensive,

-atus [com-, inseryo, save'\, preserve, save

[com-, intensive,

orior, rise], rise,

break forth
copia, -ae,
f.

cdnsilium, consili, n. plan, purpose,

design
;

[com-, intensive,

ops,

wisdom

wealth], abundance, wealth, plenty.

riur. copiae, -firum, troops
-ere, coxi, coctus, cook
-i, f. Corinth, the famous on the Isthmus of Corinth
f.

con-8ist5,

-re, -stiti, -atitus [com-, intensive, -f sisto, cause to stand], stand fimtly, halt, take one^s stand

C0qu5,

Corinthus,
city

c5n-spici5, -ere, -spSx!, -spectus [com-, intensive, -f spicid, spy\, look at attentively, perceive, see

Cornelia, -ae,

Cornelia, daughter of

Scipio and mother of the Gracchi

steeuiiness,

constantia, -ae,
perseverance

I.

firmness ,

Cornelius, ComSli,

m. Cornelius, a

Roman name
cornu, -fls, n. horn ; wing of an army, ft dextrd cornu, on the right wing(% 466) C0r5na, -ae,
-stfttfinis
f.

c6n-stitu6, -ere, -ui, -fltus [com-, intensive, -f 8tata5, se(\, establish, de-

termine, resolve c5n-t5,

certain
-ftre,
-f-

garland, wfsath ; crown

-titi,

[com-,

coronatus,
corpus,

-a,

-um, adj. crowned

together,
;

sto,

stand], agree;
( 464. 2. a)

be

-oris, n.

body

consist

consul, -ulis,

of m. consul

cor-ripi6, -ere, -ui, -reptus [com-, in-

tensive, -f rapid, seize], seize, grasp

con-sumS,

-ere,

-sdmpsi,

-sumptus

[com-, intensive, -f sumo, take], con-

cotidianus, -a, -um, adj. daily cotidie, adv. daily

creber, -bra, -brum, adj. thick, crowded,

sume, use up
C0n-tend5, -ere,
ten
;

-di, -tus,

strain

has-

numerous, frequent
cred5, -ere, -didi, -ditus, trust, believe, with dat. ( 501. 14)

fight, contend, struggle

to-

con-tined, -re, -ol, ^entus [com-,

gether,

hem

tened, hold], hold together, in, contain ; restrain

crem5,
cre6,

-ftre, -ftvi, -fttus,

-ftvi,

bum
make;
elect,

-ftre,

-fttus,

COntri, prep, with ace. against, contrary to

-trftzl, -trftctus

appoint

con-trahO, -ere,
together,
-f

[com-,
to-

Credn, -ontis, Corinth

crescO, -ere,
increase

m. Creon, a king of
rise,

trahS, draw],

draw

crftrl, crfttus,

grow,

gether; of sails, shorUn^furi

306

LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
Creta

densus
de-cido, -ere,
CdidOy fall],

Creta, -ae, f. Crete, a large island in the Mediterranean

-cidi,

[dj

down,

fall

down

Cretaeus,

-a,

-um, adj. Cretan

n. pastry,

decimus,

-a,

-um, numeral adj. tenth

crus, cruris, n. leg

declivis, -e, adj. sloping

downward

criistulum,
cubile,

-i,

cake

-is, n.

bed
f.

de-do, -ere, -didi, -ditus, give up, surrender. se dedere, surrender one's self
de-diico, -ere, -duxi, -ductus [de,
-f

cultura, -ae,

culture, cultivation

down,

cum, conj. with the indie, or subjv. when; since; although ( 501. 46) cum, prep, with
abl.

duco, lead], lead

-di,

down,

escort

de-fendo, -ere,
repel,

-fensus,

ward

off,

with

( 209)

defend

cupide, adv. [cupidus, desirousl, com-

de-fero, -ferre, -tuli, -latus [de, down,

pared cupidius, cupidissime, eagerly

cupiditas, -atis,
desire, longijig
f.

fero, bring],
(

bring down

report,

[cupidus, desirous'\,

announce
de-fessus,

426)

-a,

-um, adj. tired out, weaiy

cupio, -ere, -ivi or wish. Cf. V0I6

ciir,

-ii,

-itus,

desire,

de-ficio, -ere, -feci, -fectus [de,

from,

facio,

make], fail, be wanting;

-fixi, -fixus [de,

adv. why, wherefore

f. f.

revolt from

cura, -ae,
curia, -ae,

care,

pains ; anxiety senate house

de-figo, -ere,

down,

figo, fasten] , fasten, fix

euro, -are, -avi, -atus [cura, care\, care for, attend to, look after curro, -ere, cucurri, cursus, currus, -us, m. chariot

de-icio, -ere, -ieci, -iectus [de,

-f iacio,

down,
bring

hurl], hurl

down

run

down,

kill

cursus, -us, m. course

custodio, -ire, -ivi, -itus [cust6s,^/ar^]
,

de-inde, adv. {from thence), then, in the next place

delecto, -are, -avi, -atus, delight deleo, -ere, -evi, -etus, blot out, destroy

guard, watch

delibero, -are, -avi, -atus, weigh, deliberate,

ponder
gather], choose, select

Daedalus, -i, m. Dad'alus, the supposed inventor of the first flying

de-ligo, -ere, -legi, -Iectus [de, from,

-f lego,

machine
Davus,
-i,

m. Davus, name of a slave

de, prep, with abl.

down from, from

-a, -um, adj. Delphic demissus, -a, -um [part, of demitto, send down], downcast, humble

Delphicus,

concerning, about, for ( 209). qua de causa, for this reason, wherefore

de-monstro,
-f

-are, -avi, -atus [de, out,

dea, -ae,

f.

goddess { 461. a)
-ui,

monstio, point], point out, sho7v demum, adv. at last, not till then, tum

debe5,

-ere,

-itus

[de,

from,

+
'

demum, then
denique,
postremo
adv.

at last

habeo, hold], owe, ought, should decern, indecl. numeral adj. ten

at

last, finally.

Cf.

de-cerno, -ere, -crevi, -cretus [de,/ww,

-f

dens, dentis, m. tooth

( 247. 2. a)

cemo, separate],

decide, decree

densus,

-a,

-um, adj. dense, thick

LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
de-pendeo
de-pendeo,
-f

307
from
faci-

dis-tribu5
[d,
^

-re,

down,

differ,

differre inter se, differ

peDdeo, hatig\y

hang from hang

each other
dif-ficilis, -e,
lis,

down
de-pldr5, -4re, -Svi, -fttus [d, intensive, 4- ploro, wv;//], bewail^ deplore

adj. [dis-, not, -H

easy], hard, difficult ( 307)

f.

difficultas, -atis,
difficulty

[diffieilis,

hard],

de-pdn5, -ere, -posui, -positus [d8, down,

pond, put],

put down

diligenter,

adv.

[dOigens,

careful],

de-scendo, -ere, -di, -scensus [d*, down, + scandd, cltmb\,climb down, descend
de-scribo, -ere, -scripsi, -scriptus [d8, do7t>n, + scribo, 7vr/te], write down

compared

diligentius,diligenti8sime,

industriously, diligently

dnigentia, -ae,

f.

[diligens,

careful],

industry, diligence
-fivl,

desidero, -are, -avi, -atus, long/or

de-silio, -ire, -ui, -sultus [de,
salid, leap'], leap

di-mic6, -are,

-Situa,fght, strtdggle
[di-, off,

down,

di-mitto, -ere, -misi, -missus

do7vn

+
away

mittd, send], send away, dismiss,

de-spero, -4re, -4vi, -atus [de,

from,

spero, hope], despair

de-spicio, -ere, -8pxi, -spectus [de, do7vH], look down upon, despise

dimittere animum in, direct mind to, apply one's self to Diomedes, -is, m. Dt-o-me'des, a name

disband,
one's

dis-, di-, a prefix

expressing separa-

de-sum,
frqm,
deus,
-1,

-esse, -fui,>futuru8 [d,

away

tion, off, apart, in different directions.

sum,

be\^

be wanting, lack,

Often negatives the meaning

dis-cedd, -ere,
-cessi,

with dat. ( 426)

-cessus

[dis-,

m. god
-ere,

( 468)

apart, -f ch^o, go], depart frvm, leave,

de-volv6,

-volvi,

-volutus

[de,

withdraw, go away

do7vn, 4- volvo, roll], roll

down

dia-cemo,
apart,
-\-

-ere,

-crevi,
sift],

-cretus

[dis-,

de-voro, -ire, -4vi, -&tus [di, down^

-f voro, swallow], devour dexter, -tra, -trum (-tera, -terum), adj. to the right, right, ft dextr5 comO,

eemo,

separate; dis-

tinguish
dlsciplina, -ae,
ing, discipline
f.

instruction, train-

on the right wing

discipulus,
disciple

-i,

m.

[disco, learn], pupil,

Diana,
died,

Diana, goddess of the moon and twin sister of Apollo

-ae,
f.

disco, -ere, didici,

learn
[dia-,

-ere,

dixl,
tell.

dictus

(imv.

die),

dis-cutid, -ere, -cussi, -eussus

say, speak,

Usually introduces indirect discourse ( 420. a)

-dria,

apart, \- quatiS, shake], shatter, dash

to pieces

dictator,
dictator,

m.

[diets,

dictate],

a chief magistrate with unlimited power digs, -*i or diJ, m., sometime*; f. in
sing.,

dis-p5n5, -ere, -posui, -positus [dis-, apart, -f- pono, put], put here and
there, arrange, station
ai-

dis-tflmilis, -e, adj. [dis-, apart,

-|-

day

( 467)

milis, like], unlike, dissimilar (% 307)

dif-fer6, -ferre, distull, dllitus [dis-,

di-tribu5, -ere,
distribute

-ul,

-fltus,

divide,

apart,

fer6,

carry], carry apart

308
diu, adv.,

LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
diu
eruptiO
diutius, difitis

compared

ecce, adv. seel behold! there! here!

e-diico, -ere, -duxi, -ductus [e, out, -h

simef /or a long time, long (477)

d5, dare, dedi, datus, give,

dare, dare,

in

fugam

duco, lead^, lead out,

draw out
[ex,

put

to flight,

alicui

negotium

ef-ficio, -ere, -feci, -fectus

thor-

employ some one

-ui, -tus, teach,

doceo, -ere,
doctrina,

show
teacher\y

oughly, cause
ef-fugio,

+ facio, do^y work out;

-ere,

make^

-ae,

f.

[doctor,

-fugi,

-fugiturus

[ex,

teaching, learning,

wisdom

from,
with

iMgio, fleel, escape

,

dolor, -oris, m. pain, sorrow

ege5, -ere, -ui,

be in need of, lack,

domesticus,

[domus, hou5e\, of the house, domestic

-a,

-um,

adj.

abl. ( 501. 32)

ego, pers. pron. /; plur. nos,

e-gredior,
[e,
-i,

domicilium,

domicili,
Cf.

n.

dwelling,

we ( 480) egressus sum, dep. verb

gradior,

house, abode.

domus

out

of,

go\ go

out,

go

domina,

-ae,

f.

mistress (of the house),

forth,

e navi egredi,

disembark

e-ici5, -ere, -ieci, -iectus [e, forth,

dominus,

-i,

m. master
(

(of the house),

iacio,

hurl], hurl forth, expel

-i,

owner, ruler

462)

elementum,
ciples,

n.,

in ^\\xx. first prin^

domus,
dormio,

-us, f house,
.

home, domi, loca-

rudiments
-i,
f.

tive, at

home

468)

elephantus,
Elis, Elidis,

-ire, -ivi, -itus, sleep

m. elephant ^lis, a district of so.uth-

draco, -onis, m. serpent, dragon

ern Greece

dubito, -are, -avi, -atus, hesitate

dubius, -a, -um, adj. [duo, two^ {mo-ving two ways), doubtful, dubious
du-centi,
-ae,
-a,

em5, -ere, emi, emptus, buy, purchase enim, conj., never standing first, for,
iji

fact, indeed.

Cf.

nam

numeral

adj.

two

hundred
duco, -ere, duxi, ductus (imv. due), lead, conduct

Ennius, Enni, m. Ennius, the father of Roman poetry, born 239 B.C.
eo, ire,
ii (ivi),

iturus, go ( 499)

e5, adv. to that place, thither

dum,
duo,

conj. while, as long as

duae,

duo,

numeral

adj.

two

Epirus, -i, f. Epi'rus, a north of Greece

eques,
-itis,

district in the

(479)

m. [equus,

horse], horse-

duo-decim, indecl. numeral

durus,
-a,

adj. twelve

mafi, cavalryman

-um, adj. hard, tough ; harsh,

f.

pitiless, bitter

equitatus, -us, m. [equito, ride^cavalry equus, -i, m. horse

e-rigo, -ere, -rexi, -rectus [e, out, rego, make straight], raise up
e-ripio, -ere, -ul, -reptus [e, out
rapio, seize], seize; rescue
-f-

dux, ducis, m. and

leader,

[cf.

dQc5,

lecul'l,

commander

E
e or ex, prep, with abl. out of, from,
of,

of

e-rumpo,

-ere, -rupi,

-ruptus

[e,

forth,

of

(% 209)
-a,

+
adj.

rumpo, break], burst forth

f.

ebumeus,

-um,

of ivory

eruptid, -^nis,

sally

LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
Erymanthius
Erymanthius, -a, -um, adj. Erymant/tiiiHt of Erymanihusy a district in southern Greece
et, conj.

fama
expI5rator,
-oris,

m.

[expldro, investi-

gate], spy, scout

explOrS, -ire, -ivi, -itus, examine, explore

-ire, -ivI, -itus [ex, out,

and^

also,

et

et, boi/t

and. Cf. atque, ac, -que

ex-pugn5,
[et, also^

etiam, adv. (rarely conj.)

pugjD6,yf^///j, taMe

iam, n(nu]tyei, still; also, besides. Cf. sed etiam, not quoqae. ndn sdlum

exsilium, exsi'll, ishment, exile

by storm, capture n. [exsul, exile], ban-

but also only Etrusci, -drum, m. Jhe Etruscans^ the people of Etruria. See map of Italy
.
. .

ex-specto, -ire, -4vi, -itus [ex, out,

spectd, look], expect, wait

ex-stru5, -ere,
out,

-strflxi,

-structus [ex,

Eur5pa,

Europe Eurystheus, -i, m. Eurys'theus^ a king of Tiryns, a city in southern Greece

-ae,
f.

struo, build], build up, erect

-a, -um, adj., compared exextrgmus or extimus, outside,

extenis,
terior,

e-vado, -re,

-vJisi,

-v&aus

[S,

out,

v&d5, go\y gofortky escape ex, see e

outer {% 112) extra, prep, with zcc.beyond, outside of

ex-traho, -ere, -trixi, -trictus [ex, out,

exanimatus,

exanimo, put out of breath (anlma)], adj. out

-a,
lifeless

-um

[part, of

traho, drag],
-a,

drag out, pull forth

adj., superl. of ex-

extremus,

-um,

of breath, tired;
-f capio, take\,

terus, utmost, farthest (312)

ex-cipio, -ere, -cfpi, -ceptus [ex, out,

welcome, receive

exemplum,

-i,

n.

example, model

ex-6,-ire,-ii,-ituru8 [ex, out,

eo,^],

fibula, -ae, facile, adv.

story, tale,

fable

[facilis, easy],

compared

go out, go forth (413)

ex-erceS, -re, -ui, -itus [ex, out,
exercise, use

faciiius, facillime, easily ( 322)

facilis, -e, adj. [cf. facid,

mahe], easy,

arced, shut\, {shutout), employ, train,

without
facid,

difficulty (
fci,

-ere,

307) factus (imv.

fac),

exercitus, -Qs,

m. [exerceC,
-ftvl,

train],

make, do ; cause, bring about,

impeiter

army
ex-istimS, -&re,
aestimd,
-Atus [ex, out,
estimate;

tum

facere in,

make an

attack upon.

proelium facere, fight a battle,

facere,

rechon],

think.

make a march or journey.

certi5rem
facere,

ez-orior,

Judge (420.r). Cf. arbitror, puto -iri, -ortus aum, dep. verb [ex, forth, + orior, rise], come forth, rise

aliquem

inform
factus

some one. iaceie verba

behalf
of.

pr6, speah in
fieri,

Passive

fio,

expeditus, -a, -um, adj. without baggage

ex-pell6, -ere, -pull, -pulsus [ex, out, + pelld, drive], drive out

um, be done, happen,

be informed

certior fieri,

fallO, -re, fefelll, falsus, trip, betray,

ex-piO, -ire, -irl, -itus [ex, intensive, -f- pi5, atone for], muJu amonds for*

deceive
fiLnuti -ae,
f.

report^

rumor; renown,

akmo for

fame,

reptttaiion

310
fames,
-is (abl.
f.

LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
fames
fame),
f.

fuga

hunger

fliimen, -inis, n. [cf. Hud, flow], river

familia, -ae,

servants, slaves; house-

(464.

2.

/5)

hold, family

fluo, -ere, fluxi, fluxus,y?^7/

i.

fasces, -ium (plur. of fascis),

(p.

fasces

fluvius, fluvi, m. [cf. fim,flow], river

225)
fasti'gi,

fastigium,
descent

n.

top;

slope,

fodi5, -ere, fodi, fossus, dig fons, fontis, m. fountain ( 247.

2. a)

forma,
w.fate, destiny
f.

-ae,

i.form, shape, appearance ;

f.

fatum,

-i,

beauty

fauces, -ium,

YAux.jaws, throat

Formiae, -arum,

Formiae, a town of

faveo, -ere, favi, fauturus, be favorable to, favor, with dat. ( 501. 14)
felix, -ids, adj. happy, lucky
f.

LatiumontheAppianWay. See map

forte, adv. [abl. of fors, chance], by

chance
fortis, -e, adj. strong; fearless, brave

femina,

-ae,
f.

woman.

Cf. mulier

fera, -ae,

[ferus, wild},

wild beast

fortiter,

adv.

[fortis,

strong],

com-

ferax, -acis, did], fertile fere, adv. about, nearly, almost

fero, ferre, tuli, latus, bear, be or moleste ferre,

pared
bravely

fortius, fortissime, strongly;

graviter

fortiina, -ae,

f.

[fors, chance],

chance,

annoyed
iron'],

fate, fortune

(498)
ferreus, -a, -um, adj. [ferrum, made of iron

forum,

-i,

n.

market place, esp. the

life

Forum RomSnum, where the

of

Rome
in

centered

fidelis, -e, adj. [fides, trust], faithful,

Forum Appi, Forum ofAppius, a town

Latium on the Appian
f.

true
fides, fidei
(?r fidS, trust, faith ;

Way

word ;

protection,

promise, in fidem venire,

fossa, -ae,

[cf. fodio, dig], ditch

fragor,

-oris,

m.

[cf.

frango, break],

come under the protection, in fide manere, remain loyal filia, -ae (dat. and abl. plur. filiabus),
f
.

crash, noise

frangS,

-ere, fregi, fractus,

break

frater, -tris,

m. brother
attend

daughter
fill

461 a)
.

fremitus, -us, m. loud noise

filius,

(voc. sing,

fili),

m. son
end; in
boundPlur.

frequento, -are,
fretus, -a, -um,

-avi, -atus,

finis, -is,

m. boicndary,
-a,

limit,

plur. territory, country ( 243. i)

finitimus,

-um, adj.

[finis,

supported, trusting. Usually with abl. of means f rons, f rontis, i. front, a fronte, infront
did],

ary], adjoining, neighboring.

finitimi, -orum,

fructus, -us, m. fruit

m. neighbors fio, fieri, factus sum, used as passive of faci5. See faci5 ( 500)

friimentarius,
to

-a,

-um, ^d]. pertaining

frumentaria,

grain,

res

grain

supplies
f riimentum,
-i,

flamma,

-ae,

i.

fire, flame

n.

grain
fugio, flee], flight.
to flight

flos, floris, r^. flower

frustra, adv. in vain, vainly

fluctus, -us,

m.

[cf. fluo,

flow], flood,

fuga, -ae,
in

f.

[cf.

wave, billow

fugam ^axe^put

LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
fngiS
tnglO, -ere,
axwidt
fflgi, f ugitflrus, yKf*,

311

honestus

run;

gratia, -ae,

thanks, gratitude

shun
, ,

gratus,

fumd,
funis,

-4re,
-is, TO.

smcke
madness.

-um, adj. acceptable, pleasing. Often with dat. ( 501, 16)

-a,
-,

ropt
[furS, rage\^

gravia,

iiror, -Sris,

m.

serious,

adj. heavy; disagreeable; dangerous ; earnest, weighty

in f urorem incidere,

go

mad

graviter, adv. [gravis,

heavy], com-

pared gravius, gravissimg, heavily ;

greatly,
seriously,

graviter

ferre,

Gaius, Gil, m. Gaius, a Roman name, abbreviated C, English form Cains Galba, -ac, m. Gaiboy a Roman name
galea, -e,
Gallia, -ae,
f.

bear

ill,

take to heart
-ri8,

gubernator,
pilot

m. [gnbemO,

pilot],

helmet

H
-ae, -re,
f.

Gauly the country comprising what is now Holland, Belgium, Switzerland, and France
f.

habena,
habed,

halter, rein
-itua,

-ui,

have, hold;

regard, consider,

deem
[cf.

Gallicus, -a, -urn, adj. Galite gallina, -ae, f. hen, chicken

habits, -4re, -4vi, -itus

have],
dwell,
abide,
incolo, viv6

habeO,
Cf.

inhabit.

Gallus,

-1,

m. a Gaul
in

gaudium, gaud!, n.joy Genava, -ae, f. Geneva, a

Switzerland

hac-tenus, adv. thus far

city

Helvetii, -orum, Gallic tnbe

m.

the

Helvetii^

gens, gentia,

family

gignd, beget], nue, people, nation, tribe

f.

[cf.

Hercules,
strength

-is,

m.

Hercules,

son of

Jupiter and Alcmena, and

the

god of

genus,

-eris, n.

kind, variety
f.

Germania,

-ae,
-!,

Germany

Hesperides, -um,

f.

Hesperides,

Germanus,

m. a German

daughters of Hesperus,
haec,
hoc,

who kept
adj.

gerS, -ere, gessi, gestua, carry, wear: uui^r. bellum gerere, wage war. ris
gestae, exploits,

the garden of the golden apples

hie,

demonstrative

bene gerere, carry

and pron.
hie, adv. here

this (of
it

mine)

as pera.

on successfully

pron. he, she,

(481)

-om, adj. gladiatorial gladiua, gladi, m. sworJ

gladiatShus,
gI5ria, -ae,

-a,

hiema, -emia,

f.

winter

i.

glory, fame

Gracchus, -I, m. Gracchus^ famous Roman family

Graeca, -Orum, n. plur. ings, Greek literature
GraecS, adv. in Greek
Graecia, e,
f.

name

of a

hine, adv. [hie, here], from here, hence Hippol3rtS, -*8, f. Hippolyte, queen of
the

Amazons
this day], to-day
f.

gracilis, -e, adj. slender ( 307)

ho-diS, adv. [modified form of hOc dii,

Greek writ-

on

hom5, -inia, m. and man, person

hOUMTtU,
-a,

{human

being),

Greece
-I,

-um, adv. [honor, honor],

gramnuticiu,

m. gmmmariam

nsptcted,

honorabU

312
honor,
-oris,
f.

LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
honor
m. honor
im-mitt5,
against, let in

in-cautus
-ere,

-misi,

-missus

[in,
;

hora, -ae,

hour

+ vaitto, send'\, send against

upon,

Horatius, Hora'15, m. Horatius, a

Roman name
horribilis, -e, adj. terrible^ horrible

immol5,
meal ;

-are, -avi, -atus [in,

mola, meal], sprinkle with sacrificial

offer, sacrifice

hortor,
urge^

-ari,

-atus sum, dep. verb,

exhort^

incite^

encourage

im-mortalis,
talis,

-c, adj.

[in-, noty

nior-

(493)
hortus,
-i,

mortal], immortal
-atis,
f.

m. garden
hospi''ti, n. [hospes, host^,

im-mortalitas,

[immortalis,

hospitium,
hostis,
-is,

immortal], immortality

hospitality

im-paratus,

-a, -ixm, adj. [in-, not,

m. and

f.

enemy, foe
307)

paratus, prepared], unprepared

(465.^) humilis,
-e, adj.

impedimentum,
low,

-i,

n. [impedio, hin-

humble

Hydra,

-ae, f. the Hydra, a mythical water snake slain by Hercules

hindrance ; in plur. baggage impeditus, -a, -um, adj. [part, of imder],

pedio, hinder], hindered,

burdened
[in,

im-pell5,
against,
iacio, -ere, ieci, iactus, throw,

-ere,

-puli,

-pulsus

pello,

strike],

strike

hurl

against ; impel, drive, propel

iam, adv. now, already, no longer

laniculum,
ianua, -ae,
-i,

nee iam,

and

imperator,

-oris,

m.

[impero,

com-

n. the

Janiculum, one

of the hills of
f.

Rome

mand], general imperium, impe'ri, n. [impero, command], command, order; realm., empire
;

door

power, authority
-are,'

ibi, adv. there, in that place

impero,
order.

-avi,

-atus,

command,

Icarus,

-i,

m. Ic^arus^ the son of m.

[cf. ico, strikel,

Usually with dat. and an ob-

Daedalus
ictus, -us,

blow

ject clause of purpose (501.41). With ace. object, levy, impose

idem, e'adem,
pron.
[is
-}-

idem, demonstrative dem], same ( 481)

impetus,

-us,

m.

attack,

impetum
upon
[in,

facere in,

make an

attack

idoneus,

-a,

-um, adj. suitable, fit

im-pon5, -ere, -posui, -positus

assign

upon^

igitur, conj., seldom the first word, therefore, then. Cf. itaque

+ pon5, place]t place upon ;

upon, towards ; with

impose^

ignis,

-is,

m.fire { 243.

247. 2:

in, prep, with ace. into, to, against, aty

abl. in, on.

465, I)

in

ignotus,

-a,

-um, adj.

[in-,

not,

reliquum
in-,

tQva.i^nB, for

the future

(g)n6tus, known'\,
ille, ilia, illud,

unknown, strange

demonstrative adj. and

inseparable prefix. With nouns and adjectives often with a negative

force, like English un-, in-

pron. that (yonder); as pers. pron.

he, she, it
illic,

(481)
yonder, there

in-cautus,

-a,

-um, adj.

[in-,

not,

adv.

[cf. ille],

cautus, careful], off one*s

guard

LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
incenditun
m-fltru5
Cf.

313

incendium,

incendi,

i\.

Jlame, fire.

ingenium,
mous,

inge'ni, n, talent, ability

ettor-

ingens, -entis, adj. vast, huge,

in-cendd, -re,
-dl,

-cSnaat, set fire

to,

large.

Cf.

magnus

burn
in-id6, -ere, -cidi,
cd^Ao,

in-gredior, -gredi, -gressua

[in, in,

sum

[in, in,

on,

-f gradior,

walk], advance, enter

in

fall], fall in, fall on : happen. furorem incidere, go mad

[in,

inimicus,

-a,

-um, adj.

[in-,

not,

amicu8,/rfV<//>'], hostile.

As a noun,

in-cipi5, -ere, -c*pi, -ceptus

4- capio, take\,

on,

inimicus,

-i, va.

enemy, foe. Cf. hostis

begin
[in-, not,

in-cognitus, -a, -um, adj.

cognitus,

entrance, beginning initA initus, -a, -um, part of ineo.

initium,

ini''ti,

known^ unknown
[in, in,

aestate, at the beginning of

summer
in-

in-colo, -ere, -ui,

(i~ccll],

colo,

iniiiria, -ae,

f.

[in,

against,

ius, law],

inhabit ; live
-c,

injustice, xvrong, injury,

safe,

alicui

incolumis,
injured,

adj.

sound,

un-

iurias inferre,

inflict

wrongs upon
needy], want,

unharmed
-,

some one
[in-,

in-credibilis,

adj.

not,

inopia, -ae,
need, lack

f.

[inops,

credibilis, to be believed], incredible

xnde, from that place, thence

in-opinans, -antis,
opinins,

adj.

[in-, not,

induo, -ere,

-ui,

-fitU8,/w/ on

thinking],

not

expecting,

indutus,

-a,

-um, adj. [part of induo,

-itus [in, //<?,

/;// on], clothed

in-eS, -ire,

-ii,

+
+

e5, jv],

taken by surprise inquiti said he, said she. Regularly inserted in a direct quotation
iil-rig5, -are, -avi, -atus, irrigate,

go into
(413)

enter upon, begin, with ace.

water

in-nimpo,
[in-, not,

-ere, -rupi, -ruptus [in, into,

In-fans, -fantis, adj.

fins,

rumpo, break], burst

-ere, -rui,

in, break in

speaking], not speaking.

As

a noun,

inniS,

[in, in,

ruo,

m. and

f.

infant

rush], rush in

in-felix, -ids, adj. [in-, not,

flix,

in-sequor, -sequi, -secOtus sum, dcp.

happy], unhappy, unlucky

verb

[in,

on,

\-

sequor, follow], foldecoration

infensas,

-a,

-um,

adj. hostile

low on, pursue

lO-signei
-is,

in'-fcr5, infer're, in'tuli, inli'tus [in,

n.

badge,

against,

+
5)-

ferS, bear],

bring against
insignis, -e, adj. remarkable, noted instans, -antis, adj. [part, of insto, be

or upon,
( 50**

inflict,

with ace. and dat bellum inferre, wifh Hnf

.

make war upon

infenis,
_

at hand], present, immediate

adj.
/..<
.

-a,

-um, -um,

rr^^..-

in-sto, -ire, -stiti, -staturus [in, upon,

(3'

2)
-a,

+
adj. [in-, not,

8t5,

stand], stand upon

be at

in-finitii8,
finitus,

hand ; pursue,
Instnunentum,

press on
n.

bounded], boundless, endless

-a,

-I,

instrument

in-firmu8,

-um, adj. [in-, not, firmus, itrong], weak, infirm

in-etrud, -ere, -striixi, -strOctus [in, on,

struo, build],

draw up

314
insula, -ae,
f.

LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
insula
island
iste, -a,

lacus
-ud, demonstrative
adj.

and

integer, -gra, -grum, untouched^whole ;

pron. that (of yours), he,

she, it

fresh y

new

(481)
ita, adv. so, thus.

intellego, -ere, -lexl, -lectus [inter, be-

Cf. sic

and tam

tween,

+ lego, choose\,, perceive, under( 420. </)

Italia, -ae,

f.

Italy
so, therefore

stand

intento, -are, -avi, -atus,

aim ;

threaten

ita-que, conj. and item, adv. also

iter, itineris,
vs..

inter, prep, with ace. between,

among;

journey, march, route

during, while ( 340) interfectus, -a, -um, adj. [part, of interficio,

way, passage { 247. i.a\ 468).

iter facere,

iter

^axQjgivea right of way, allow to pass.

kiWl, slain, dead

-ere,
-feci,

march (see

p.

59)

inter-ficio,

-fectus

[inter,

between,

faciS,
.

make\, put out of

iubeo, -ere, iussi, iussus, order, command. Usually with the infin. and
subj. ace. (213)

the way, kill. Cf neco, occido, trucidd interim, adv. meanwhile

interior, -ius, adj. interior, inner {^2^^)

iudex,

-icis,

m. and

f.

judge

464.

iudico, -are, -avi, -atus [iudex, y^(?],

inter-mitto, -ere, -misi, -missus, leave

off,

suspend
f.

lulia,

judge, decide ( 420. c) -die, Julia, a Roman

name

interpres, -etis, m. and

interpreter

lulius, luli, m. Julius, a

Roman name

inter-sum, -esse,
between,

inter-rogo, -are, -avi, -atus, question -fui, -futurus [inter,

iungo, -ere, iunxi, iunctus, join ; yoke, harness

f. funo, the queen of the gods and wife of Jupiter luppiter, lovis, m. Jupiter, the su-

+ sum,
-i,

bel, be present, take

luno, -onis,

part

in,

with dat.

( 501. 15)

inter-vallum,
intra, adv. in

n. interval, distance

and prep, with

ace. within^

preme god
iur5, -are, -avi, -dX\i&,swear, take an oath

intro, -are, -avi, -atus, go into, enter

iussus, -a, -um, part, of iubeo, ordered

in-venio,

-ire, -veni,

-ventus

[in,

upon,
L., abbreviation for Lucius

venio, cornel, find

-a,

invisus,

-um, adj. [part, of invideo,

envy], hated, detested

labefactus,
a friend of
facio,

-a,

-um,

adj. [part, of labe-

lolaus,

-i,

m.

I-o-ld'us,

cause

to shake],

shaken, weak-

Hercules
ipse, -a, -um, intensive pron. that very,
this very; self, himself, herself, itself,
_

ened, ready to fall

Labienus,

-i,

m. La-bi-/nus, one of

Caesar's lieutenants

(481)
f.

ira, -ae,

wrath, anger

labor, -oris, m. labor, toil laboro, -are, -avi, -atus [labor, labor],
labor; suffer, be hard pressed f. tear

iratus, -a, -um, adj. [part, of irascor, be angry], angeredy enraged

is, ea, id,

lacrima, -ae,

demonstrative

adj.

and pron.

this,

that; he, she,

it (

481)

lacus, -us (dat. m. lake

and

abl. plur. lacubus),

LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
laete

315

magis
leris, -, adj. light
lex, legis,
f.

UetC, adv. fUetus, giad], compared

laetius, laetissimg, gladly

measure, law

laetitia, -ae,

f.

\\aiCt\xs,
vl^].

glad], joy

libenter, adv. [libSns, willing],

com-

laetus, -a, -um,

glad, joyful

pared

libcntius,

libentiasimS, will-

lapis,-idi8,m.j/</(247.2.a;464.i)

'gh'^ giadly
liber, -era, -erum, 2id'].free (469. b)
liberi, -drum,

Lar, Laris, m.; plur. LarSs, -um (rarely -iom), ih Lares or household gods
late,

m.

[liber, free],

children

adv.

[Utus,

7vide],

compared

libero, -are,

-ftvi,

-&tu8 [liber, /;r^], set

latius, UltisaimS, widely Latins, adv. in Latin. Latln6 loqui, to speak Latin

free, release, liberate

libertas, -atis,
liberty

f.

[\\bex, free],

freedom,

latitude, -inis,

f.
f.

[latus, ivide\y

width

lictor, -oris,

m.

lictor (p. 225)

Latona,

-ae,

Latona,

mother of

limus,

-i,

m.
a

mud
a letter of the alphabet ;

Apollo and Diana

latus, -a, -um, adj. wide'

littera, -ae,
in plur.

f.

letter, epistle

latus, -eris, n. side, flank, latere, on each side

ab utr5que

litus, -oris, n. seashore, beach

locus,

-i,
x\.),

m.

(plur. loci

and

loca,

m.

laud5, -are, -avi, -atus [laus, praise],

praise
laurel

and

place, spot

longe, adv. [longus,/<j^], comp.longif.

laurea, -ae,

us, longissime,
-^vith

a long

way

off;

byfar

laureatus, laurel

-a,

-um, adj. crtysnvai

longinquus, -a, -um, adj. [longus, long\

distant, remote

laus, laudis,
lectulus,
-i,
-i,

f.

praise

longitiido, -inis,

f.

[longus, long], Ir.tgth

legatus,

m. couch, bed m. ambassador; lieutenant

f.

longus,

-a,

-um, adj. long

loquor, loqui, locutus sum, dep. verb,

talk,

legio, -onis,

[cf. legS,

gather], (body

speak
f.

0/ soldiers),
( 464. 2. a)

legion,

about 3600

men

Idrica, -ae,

[lorum, though, coat of

mail, corselet
-a,

legidnarius,

-um, adj. legionary.

liido, -ere, lusi, lusus,

play

riur. legionArii, -drum,

m. the soldiers

ludus,

-i,

m. play
f.

school, the

elemen-

of the legion
legs, -ere, 16gi, ISctus, read
lenis, -e, Ad\. gentle, smooth,

tary grades.
liina, -ae,

Cf. schola

moon
f.

mild

liix,

lucis,

(no gen.

plur.),

light.

leniter, adv.

[Ifinis,

gentle],

compared

linius, linisaimt, gently

prima lux, daybreak Lydia, -ae, f. Lydia, a

girl's

name

Lentulus,
family
led, -onis,

-i,

m. Lentulus, a

Roman
M., abbreviation for lUrcus

name
m. lion
-a,

Lernaeus,
Lesbia,

-um, adj. Lemeean, of I.crnat in southern Greece

-e,
f.

magicus,

-a,

-um, adj. magic

in

magis, adv.

comp. degree [magnua,

a higher degree ( 323)

Lesbia, a girl's

name

great], more, in

316

LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
magister

mmmie
matrimonium, matrimo'ni,
riage,
n.

magister,
teacher

-tri,

m. master, commander;

mar-

in

matrimonium ducere, marry

Cf.

magistratus, -us, m. [magister, master},

matiirO, -are, -avi, -atus, hasten.

contend, propero

magistracy ; magistrate
-inis,
f.

magnitudo,

[magnus, greaf],

maturus,

-a,

-um, adj.

ripe,

mature
\mdi:xX-

greatness, size

maxime,

adv. in superl. degree

magnopere, adv. [abl. of magnum opus], compared magis, maxime,

greatly, exceedingly (323)

compared magnopere, magis, maxime, especially, very much

vcms, greatest\,

(323)
maior,

magnus, -a, -um, adj., compared

maximus,
medius,

maximus, great, large; strong, loud

-a, -um, adj., superl. of magnus, greatest, extreme (311) -a,

(3")
maior, maius,
-oris,

-um, adj. middle part;

adj.,

comp. of

middle, intervening

magnus, greater, larger (311) maiores, -um, m. plur. of maior, ancestors

melior, -ius,
<^^//^r

-oris, adj.,

comp. of bonus,

{311)
better

melius, adv. in comp. degree, com[magis, more,

mal5, malle, malui,

pared bene, melius, optime,

(323)

+ V0I6, wisK\,wish more, prefer ( 497)

malus,
-a,

-um,

adj.,

compared

peior,

pessimus, bad,

evil, zcicked (

311)

mando,

-are, -avi, -atus

do, //],

[manus, hand, {put in hand), intrust;

order,

command

memoria, -ae, f. [memor, mindful^, memory, memoria tenere, remember mens, mentis, f. mind. Cf. animus mensis, -is, m. month ( 247. 2. a) mercator, -oris, m. [mercor, trade\,
trader,

maneo,

-ere, mansi, mansurus, stay, remain, abide Manlius, Manli, m. Manlius, a Roman

merchant
-a,

meridianus,
noon'\,

-um,

adj.

[meridies,

of midday
(ace. -em, abl. -e),

name
mansuetus,
-a,

meridies,

m.

-um,

adj.

[part, of

[medius, mid,

dies, day'X,

noon

mansuesco, tame^, tamed

metus,

-us, m.fear,
-a,

dread

manus,
Marcus,
first

-us,
-i,

f.

hand;

force,

band

meus,
miles,

-um, possessive adj. and

( 98) (

m. Marcus, Mark, a

Roman

pron. my, mine

-itis,

name
-is, n.

m. soldier

464.

i)

mare,

(no gen. plur.), sea..m3XQ tenere, be out to sea marg5, -inis, m. edge, border
-i,

militaris, -e, adj. [mfles, soldier], miliscience of war tary, res militaris,

maritus,

m. husband

milito, -are, -avi, -atus [miles, soldier], serve as a soldier

mille, plur. milia, -ium, numeral adj.

Marius, Mari, m. Marius, a Roman name, esp. C. Marius, the general Martins, -a, -um, adj. of Mars, esp. the Campus Martius
mater,
-tris,
f.

and subst thousand ( 479) minime, adv. in superl. degree, compared parum, minus, minime, least, very little; by no means (323)

mother

LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
minim as
minimus,
degree,
-a,

2>^1

nauta
in

-um,

adj.

superl.

compared parvus, minor,

-5ris, adj. in comp. compared parvus, minor,

minimus, Uast, smallest (311)

moneO, -re, -ui, -itus, remind, tuiviie, warn (489) m5ns, mentis, m. mountain{% 247. 2. a)

minor, minus,
degree,

mSnstrum,

-i,

n.

monster

Minds,

minimus, smaller^ less (311) -ois, m. Minos, a king of Crete

in

mora, -ae, f. delay moror, -4ri, -fttus sum, dep. verb

[mora, delay], delay, linger; impede mors, mortis, f. [cf. morior, die], death m6s, moris, m. custom, habit

minus, adv.

comp. degree, comless

pared parum, minus, minime,

m5tus,

-us,

m.

[cf.

moved,
terrae

move],

Minyae, -&rum, m. the Minyae, a people of Greece mirabilis, -e, adj. [miror, wonder a/],
'ivondetful,

motion,

movement,

mdtus,

earthquake

marvelous
-itus

moved, -Sre, m5vi, mdtus, move mox, adv. soon, presently

mulier,
-eris,
f.

miror,

-4ri,

sum,

dep.

verb
,

woman
f.

[mirus, w0HdeTful\y wonder^

marvel

multitiido,

-inis,

[multus,

much],

admire
minis,
-a,

multitude

Misenum,

-um, adj. xvondetful -i, Afis/num, a promonthe coast of

multum
(477)

(multd), adv. [multus, much],

plus,

compared
multus,
miiniS,
-a,

plurimum,

much
plQs,

tory and harbor on

Campania. See map

miser, -era, -erum, adj. wretchedy unhapfy, miserable

-um,

adj.,
;

compared

plurimus,

much

plur.
-ii,

many

(311)

-ire, -ivi

or

-itus, fortify,

-um, part, of mittd, sent mitts, -ere, misi, missus, send

missus,

-a,

defend
miiniti5, -dnis,
f.

[munid, fortify], deCf. moenia

modicus,

-a,

-um [modus, mectsure^

fense, fort ifcation

modo, adv.
no7v.

modest, ordinary [abl. of modus, measure,

0], </>',
.

mums,

-i,

m.

7vall.

miisica, -ae,

f.

music

with shortened

merely, just
.
.

modo
.

sometimes

modo, now sometimes

now^

N
nam, cony for. nam-qne, conj., a strengthened nam,
introducing a reason or explanation, /ir,

Cf. enim

modus, kind

-i,

m. measure; manner, way;

n. plur. [cf. mfiniS, for-

moenia, -ium,
tify^, walls,

and

in fact

seeing that

ramparts
molestius,

molests, adv. [molestus, troublesome],

narrO, -ire, -AvI, -itus, tell, relate nascor, nisei, nitus sum, dep. verb,
be

compared
annoyed
molestus,
tti,

annoyingly.

molestS

molestissimi, ferre, to be

bom, spring from

f.

natura, -ae,

nature

natus, part, of nisoor

-a,

-um, troublesome, annoy( 501. 16)

nauta,

-ae,

m. [for nivita, from nivia,

unpleasant

ship], sailor

318
navalis,

LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
navalis
-e, adj. [navis,

num
ship\ naval

nihilum,
Niobe,

-i, n.,

see nihil

navigium,
nayigo,

navi'gi, n. ship, boat

-are, -avi, -atus [navis, ship,

ago, drive], sail, cruise

-is

-es, f. Ni'obe, the queen of Thebes whose children were destroyed by Apollo and Diana

nayis,

(abl.

-i

( 243. i).

navem

or -e), f. ship conscendere, emsolvere,

nisi, conj. [ne, not,

si,

if], if not,

unless, except

bark, go
set sail,

on board, navem

nobilis, -e, adj. well

known ;

noble

navis longa, man-of-war ne, conj. and adv. in order that not, that (with verbs of fearing), lest;
not.

noceo, -ere,
noctii, abl.

-ui, -iturus [cf. neco, kill],

hurt, injure, with dat. ( 501. 14) used as adv. [cf. nox, night],
at night, by night

ne

quidem, not even

-ne, interrog. adv., enclitic (see 16,

210).

Nola,

-ae,

f.

Nola, a town in central

Cf. nonne

and num
[ne, not,

Campania. See map

nec or neque, conj.

and\,

+
.

and
. . .

not, nor.

nec

que, nec or

nol5, nolle, nolui,

[ne, not,

volo,

wish], not to wish, be unwilling{ 497 )

neque

neque, neither
-a,

nor

nomen,

-inis,

n.

[cf.

nosco,

know],

necessarius,

-urn,

adj.

needfod,

[means of knowing), name

necessary neco, -are, -avi, -atus

kill.

nex, death], Cf. interficio, occido, trucido

[cf.

nomino, -are, -avi, -atus [n5men, name], name, call. Cf. appello, voco
non, adv. [ne, not, + unum, one], not. non solum sed etiam, not only
. .

negO,

-are, -avi, -atus, deny,

say not

(420. )

but also

negotium, nego'ti,
negotium dare,

n. [nec, not,

+ otium,
alicui

non-dum, adv. not yet

non-ne, interrog. adv. suggesting an affirmative answer, d7/.? (210). Cf.
-ne

ease], business, affair, Tnatter.

to

employ some one Nemaeus, -a, -um, adj. Neme'an, of Neme'a, in southern Greece nemo, dat. nemini (gen. nuUius, abl.
nuUo, supplied from nuUus), m. and
[ne, not, + homo, man], {not a man), no one, nobody Neptunus, -i, m. Neptune, god of the
f.

and num

nos, pers. pron.

noster,
-tra,

we

(see ego) ( 480)

-trum,

possessive

adj.

and pron. our, ours. Plur. nostri, -orum, m. our men ( 98) novem, indecl. numeral adj. nine
novus,
-a,

-um, adj. new. novae res, a

f.

sea, brother of Jupiter

revolution

neque, see nec

neuter, -tra, -trum (gen. -trius, dat. -tri), adj. neither (of two) ( 108)
ne-ye, conj. adv.

nox, noctis,
at night

night.

multS nocte,

late

nullus,

-a,

-um

(gen, -ius, dat.

-i)

adj.

and not, and that not,

[ne, not,

+ uUus, any], not any, none,

and

lest

no

( 108)

nihil, n. indecl. [ne, not,

hilum, a

num,

whit], nothing,

nihil posse, to

have

ative

interrog. adv. suggesting a neganswer (210). Cf. -ne and

no power

nonne.

In

indir. questions,

whether

LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
nmnenis
nomenis,
rfer\,
-i,

319
a//], altogether^

orior

m. number

Omi^nO, adv. [omnia,

numquam,

adv. [ni, not,

umquam,

wholly, entirely

never

omnis,

-e, adj. all, every.

Cf. tStua

nunc, adv. now. Cf. iam

nuntid, -ire, -*vi, -fttus [nflntius, nussenger\y report,

oneraria, -ae, f. [onus, load], with n4vi8 expressed or understood,

announce

( i^-^

'^

merchant
onus,

vessel, transport

nuntius, nOnti, m. messenger

nup>er, adv. recently, lately,

-eris, n, locui,

burden
[opinor,

jus i now

opinid,

-dnia,

f.

suppose],

nympha,

-ae,

f.

nymph

opinion, supposition, expectation

oppidanus,

-i,

m. [oppidum, town],
town, stronghold

townsman
ob, prep, with ace. on account of. In compounds it often means in front
of,

oppidum,

-i,

n.

opportiinus,

-a,

-um, adj. suitable,

against, or

is

intensive,

quam

ob

opportune, favorable

xvcdy for this reason ( 340)

op-primo,
against,

-ere, -preaai, -preaaua [ob,

-f-

obses,

hostage ob-side6,-ere,-85di, -eessna \p\against,

-idis,

m. and

f.

premd,
;

press'\,

{press

against), crush

surprise
f.

+
+

sedeo,

j//],

besiege

oppugnatio,

-onis,

storming, assault

obtine5, -re,

-ui,

-^entus [ob, against,

oppugno,

-ire, -ftvi, -itua [ob, against,

teneo, ho/<f\, possess, occupy, hold

i.

\- '^\x^gBSi,fight],fight again st, assault.

occasid, -5iU8,

favorable opportunity,

stonn, assail

favorable moment occasus, -us, m. going down, setting

occido, -ere,
-cidi, -cisus [ob,
;

optime, adv. in superl. degfree, compared bene, melius, optimi, very well,
best

down,

\-

of all
-a,

( 323)

caedo, strike], strike doton

kill.

cut down,

optimus,
gree,

-um,

adj. in superl. de-

Cf. interfidS, neo5

-ftre, -ivi,

compared bonua,
best,

melior, opti-

0ccup5,
4of,

-itoa [ob, completely, capio, take], seize, take possession occupy. Cf. rapid

mus,
opus,

most excellent (311) n. work, labor, task -eris,

n. [5r6, speak], oracle

( 464. 2. b)

oc-curr6, -ere,-carri,-cur8U8[ob,dr^mj/,
-f-

6raculum,
orbis,
-ia,

-i,

carr5, run],

run towards ; meet,

Orator, -oris, m. [6r5, speak], orator

with dat ( 426)

5ceanu8,
oculus,

-i,

m. the ocean

mm,
Orcua,
OrdS,

m. ring, circle, the earth, world

f.

orbia terri-

0Ct6, indecl.
-i,

numeral

adj. eight

orbita, -ae,
-i,

[orbia, wheel],

rut

m. eye

officium, offl'cl, n. duty Slim, adv. formerly^ once

m. Ortus, the lower woHd m. row^ order, rank^ -inia,

-inia,
f.

upon a time

( 247. 2. a)

Omen,

-inia, n. sign, token,

omen

orfgO,

[orior,

rise\,

source,

0-mitt6, -ere, -mial, -fniaaoa [ob, over,

past, 4- mittd,

origin
orior,
rise
-Iri,
;

send], let go, omit. cdnailiom omittare, give up a plem

begin

ortua sum, dep. verb, arise, ; spring, be bom

320
drnamentum,
ornatus,
-a,

LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
omamentum
-i,

per-suade5

n.

[orno,

//

out],

pax, pads,
pecunia,
pedes,
pedester,
-itis,

f.

(no gen.
f.

^^\\xx.),

peace

ornament, jewel
fit out], fitted

-ae,

[pecus, cattle], mo7tey

\^ls, foot], foot soldier

-um, adj. [part of orno, out ; adorned

m.

-tris, -tre, adj. ]j^lB,foot],

on

orno, -are, -avi, -atus,yf/ out, adorn

foot; by land
peior, peius, -oris, adj. in comp. de

gree,
P., abbreviation for Publius

compared malus,
f.
i.

peior, pessi-

mus, worse (311)

pellis, -is,

paene, adv. nearly, almost

skin, hide

paliidamentum,
palus, -udis, panis,
-is,
f.

-i,

n.

military cloak

penna,
per,

-ae,

S7vamp, marsh

prep,

feather with ace.

through,

by

m.

bj-ead
iii)

means of on account of In composition

it

par, paris, adj. equal ( 471.

often has the force of

paratus,

-a,

-um,

adj.

[part, of paro,

prepare], prepared, ready

thoroughly, completely, very (340) percussus, -a, -um, adj. [part, of percutio, strike through], pierced

parco, -ere, peper''ci (parsi), parsurus, spare, with dat. (501. 14)

per-duco, -ere,
through,
-f

-duxi,

-ductus

[{)er,

pareo,

-ere, -ui,

obey,

with dat.

(501-14)
paro, -are, -avi, -dXns^ prepare for, pre-

duco, lead], lead throug/i. fossam perducere, to construct a ditch

per-exiguus,

-a,

-um, adj. [per, ve?y,

,

pare; provide, procure

pars,
partis,
f.

exiguus, small] very small, very short

part,

share;

side,

perfidus, -a, -um,

erous, false

did],

faithless, treach-

direction

panim,
parvus,

adv.,

compared minus, minime,

enough (323)
adj.,

too little, not

-a,

per-fringo, -ere, -fregi, -fractus [per, through, + frango, break], shatter

-um,

compared minor,

pergo, -ere, perrexi, perrectus

through,

[per,

minimus, small, little (311) passus, -us, m. step, pace, mille passuum, thousand paces, mile (331. <^)
pateo,
open
pater,
patior,
-ere, patui,
;
,

+
-i,

rego,

conduct], go on,

proceed, hasten

periculum,

n. trial, test;

danger

lie

open, be

stretch,

extend
( 464. 2. a)

peristylum, -i, n. peristyle, an open court with columns around it

peritus, -a, -um, adj. skillful

-tris,
-i,

m. father
permit

passus sum, dep. verb, bear,

f.

perpetuus,

suffer, allow,

patria, -ae,

[cf. ^qXax, father], father-

-a, -um, did], perpetual Perseus, -ei, Perseus, a Greek hero, son of Jupiter and Danae

land, {one^s) country

persona,
plur.),

-ae, f part, character,

.

paucus,

-a,

-um, adj. (generally

per-suadeo,

-ere, -suasi,

person -suasus [per,

few, only afeiv

paulisper,

adv.>r
little,

little

while

paulo, adv. by a

little, little

thoroughly, + suadeo, persuade], persuade, advise, with dat. ( 501. 14), often with an object clause of pur-

paulum, adv. a

somewhat

pose

501.41)

LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
per-terre^)

321

potentia
pluteus,
-I,

per-terreO, -re, -oi, -itus [pr, thoroughly.,

m. shield, parapet
{.

terre<5,

frighten^, thor-

poena,

-ae,

punishment, penalty
procession

oughly

terrify,
-ire,

alarm
-vSnl,

poeta, -ae, m. poet

-yentus
[per,

per-vcniS,
through,

pompa,

-ae,

i.

+ ytv^fComt], arrive, rtiuht

re-

conu

to

Pompeii, -drum, m. Pompeii, a city of Campania. See map

p8, pedis, m./oot. pedem referre,

treat (247. 2. a)

Pompeius,

Pomp6l,

m. Pompey, a

pessimus,
gree,

-a,

-nm,

adj. in superl. de-

Roman name pomum, -i, n. apple

pon5,
-ere, posui, positus,

compared malus,
1)
-ii,

peior, pessi-

put, place.

mus, worst (31

pets, -re, -ivi or
seek, beg,

castra ponere, pitch

-itus, strive for,

camp
( 247. 2. a)

pdns, pontis, m. bridge

ask

make

for, travel

to.

popina,

-ae,
-i,

f.

restaurant

V{. postul5, quaerS, rogd

populus,

m. people

Pharsalus,
lia,

-i, f.

Pharsa'lus or Pharsa'-

Porsena,
porta, -ae,

-ae,

a town in Thessaly, near which Caesar defeated Pompey, 48 B.C.

Etruria, a district of Italy.

f.

m. Porsena, king of See map

gate, door

philosophia, -ae, {.philosophy philosophus, -i, m. philosopher

pictus, -a, -urn, adj. [part, of pingS,
paint], colored, variegated
n. spear,
f.

porto, -ire, -avi, -atus, bear, carry

portus, -us, m.

[of.

porta, ^/<f], harbor

possideo, -ere,
07vn, possess

-sedi,

-sessus,

have,

pTlum,

-i,

javelin (462.^)

possum,

posse, potui,
-f-

irreg.

verb

piscina, -ae,

[pi8cis,/j/4],/j-4

pond

[potis, able,

piscis, -is, va.fish

( 495).

nihil

sum, I am\,be able, can posse, have no power

ace. after, behind

pistor, -oris, m. baker

post,
be pleas-

prep, with

placed, -re,

-a!, -itXLS, please,

(340)
postea, adv. [post,
after,
4- ei, this\,

ing, with dat. ( 501. 14)

planities,

-i,

f.

[pUnus,

level],

plain

afterwards
(posterns), -a,

planus,
plenus,

-a,
-a,

-am, adj.
adv.
in

level, flat

-um,

adj.,

compared

-um, adj.///
superl.

^ postenor, postremus or postumua,

degree,

pliirimiun,

compared multum,
very

plus, plflrimtun,

postqoam,
last],

following, next (312) conj. after, as soon as

[abl.

m uch

plflrimum valtre, be most

postrem5, adv.

of

postrSmus,
Cf.

influential ( 322)

at last, finally.

demum,
-|-

plurimns,
gree,

-a,

-am, adj. in superl. deplQs, plOri-

compared maltos,

mas, most, very

pliia,

many
in

(311)
plOrimns;
plur.

denique ( 322) postridig, adv. [posters, next, day], on the next day

dii,

plOris,

adj.

comp. degree,
plfls,

postulft, -ire, -ivi, -itos, ask,

require.

demand,

compared maltua,
more, several (J 31

Cf. pet6, quaerd, rogS

f.

ting. n. as substantive,

m^re;

potentia, -ae,
force

[potSns, able], might,

322
prae-beo, -ere,

LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
prae-be5
-ui, -itus
offer,

pr5-pell5
[prae,
yi>r;?/4,

princeps,

-cipis,

m. [primus, ^rr/,

-|-

habeo, hold},
-ae,
f,

give

capio, take}, {taking the first place).,

chief, leader ( 464. i)

praeda,

booty, spoil,

plunder
[prae,

prae-dico, -ere, -dixi, -dictus

before,

prior, prius, -oris, adj. in

comp. degree,
former^ previ-

dico, teW}, foretell, predict

superl. primus, y^?7w^r ( 315)

prae-ficio,
before,

-ere,

-feci,

-fectus

[prae,

pristinus, -a, -um,

Sid].

facio, make'\,

place in com( 501. 15)

ous
pro, prep, with abl. before; for, for the sake of, in behalf of; instead of, as ( 209).. In composition, forth,

mand,yf\th. ace.

and dat

prae-mitto,
forward,

-ere, -misi,

-missus [prae,

mitto, send}, send for-

ward
praemium, praemi, n. reward, prize praeruptus, -a, -um [part, of praerumpo,
b7-eak off],

forward
pro-cedo, -ere, -cessi, -cessurus [pro,

forward,
proceed

cedo, go},

go forward,

broken

off,

steep

praesens, -entis, adi.present, immediate

procul, adv. far, afar off pro-curro, -ere, -curri (-cucurri), -cursus [SiXO, forward, + curro, run}, run

praesertim, adv. especially, chiefly

praesidium,

praesi''di,

n.

guard, gar[prae, be-

rison, protection

forward
proelium,
proelium
proeli,

prae-sto, -are,
fore,

-stiti, -stitus

n.

battle,

combat.
battle.

sto,

stand}, (stand before),

committere.

Join

excel, surpass,

with dat

( 501. 15)

proelium facere, fight a battle

profectiS, -onis,
proficiscor,
set out,
-i,
f.

show, exhibit

departure

prae-sum,

-esse, -ful, -futfirus [prae,

-fectus

sum, dep. verb,

before,-\-%yxn\.^ be},

be over, be in com( 501. 15)

march.
-i,

Cf. egredior, exeo

mand of

with dat.

pro-gredior,

-gressus sum, dep. verb

gT^SL^ox^ go},

praeter, prep, with ace. beyond, contrary to ( 340) praeterea, adv. [praeter, besides,
this}, in addition, besides,

\$ro, forth,

proceed, advance.

go forth, Cf. pergo, pr5ced5

[pr6, forth,

ea,

progressus, see progredior

moreover

prohibeo,

-ere, -ui, -itus

praetextus, -a, -tun, adj. bordered, edged

awayfrom,

+ habeo, hold}, keep away

[pro,

praetorium,

praet6''ri, n.

pmtorium

prandium, prandi, n. luncheon prem5, -ere, pressi, pressus, press

hard, compress; crowd, drive, harass
(prex, precis), i. prayer prim5, adv. [primus, /y/], at first, in
the beginning { 322) primum, adv. [primus, first}, first. quam primum, as soon as possible

from, hinder, prevent pr5-move5, -ere, -movi, -m5tus

forward, + moved, move}, move forward, advance

pr5-nunti6, -are, -ivi, -atus [pr5,^^>i,
\-nnriXiOfannounce},proclaim, declare

prope, adv., compared propius, proxime, nearly. Prep, with ace. near
pr6-pell6,
forth,
-ere,
-puli,

-pulsus

[pro,

primus,

-ft,

-um, adj. in superl. degree,

prior,

pello, drive}, drive

forth;

compared

primu,yfrj/ (5 315)

move, impel

LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
properd
proper^, -Are,
[propenis, Cf. coni/uiik]y go quickly, hasten.
-4vi,

323

qui
pulcher, -chra, -chrum, adj. beautiful^
pretty (469-^; 304) Pullo, -onis, m. Pullo, a centurion

-Atus

tendo, mdturo

propinquus,

-a,

-um, adj. [prope, near\y

pulso, -are, -avi,

-fttus, strike,

beat
f.

near, neighboring

puppis,

-is (ace. -im, abl. -i),

stem

propior, -ius,
gree,

-^ris, adj. in

superl.

comp. defuunr proximus,

of a ship, deck piire, adv. [puru8,/^],

comp. pOriua,

(3'S)
propius, adv. in comp. degree, com-

purely

purgo,
red

-are, -4vi, -Atua, cleanse, clean

-a,

pared prope, propiu8,proxim8,/r<j?rr

(323)
propter, prep, with ace. on account
of,

purpureas,

-um, adj. purple, dark

put5, -Ire, -avi, -atus, reckon, think

( 420, r).

because 0/ {% T^AO)

Cf. arbitror, existimd

pro-scribo, -ere, -scripsi, -scriptus [pro,

forth, 4- scTibdf 7arite], />rvc/aim,publish. Cf. proDuntio

Pythia,

f. Pythia, the inspired priestess of Apollo at Delphi

-ae,

pr5-sequor, -sequi, -secfltus sum, dep.

verb
escort,

[pr6, forth, -f sequor,

follow^

qua de causa, for

fore

this reason^ where-

attend
profui, prSfutflrus
be\, be useful^ bene-

pr5-sum, prodesae,
[pr6,yt;r, -f
fit,

qua

re, therefore, for this reason

-ere,
-sivi,

sum,

quaerd,
qualis,

-situs,

seek,

ask,

with dat. (496; hoi.x^)

inquire.
-e,

Cf. peto, postuld, rogo

pr5-teg6, -ere, -t6xi, -tSctus [pr6, in front, + tego, co'i)er\, cover in front,
protect

interrog.

what

sort,

pronom. adj. of what kind of. talis

. . .
.

quaiis, such

as
after a compara-

pr5yincia, -ae, f. territory^ province proxime, adv. in superl. degree, compared prope, propius, proximS, nearest,

quam,
tive,

adv.

how;
,'
.
.

than
.

with a superlative, transcu possible,

lated as

quam

prl-

next;

last,

proximus,

-a,

most recently (323) -um, adj. in superl. de-

mum,

as soon as possible
-a,

quantus,

-um,

adj.

[quam, how],
. . .

gree, compared propior, proximus, nearest^ next (315)

piiblicuB,
ple\,
-ft, -um, adj. [populus, /^oof the people^ public. rJa pflblica, the commonwealth
f.

how

great, hortv

much, tantus

quantus, as great as

quartus,

-a,

-um, numeral adj. [quat-

ttior , fou r] , fou rth

quattuor, indecl. numeral

ad'],

four
adj.

puella, -ae,
boy\, girl,

[diminutive of puer,

quattuor-decim, indecl. numeral

fourteen
-que, conj., enclitic,
ac, atque, et
rel.

maiden
( 462. c)
i.

puer,

-eri,

m. boy; slave

and

(16).

Cf

pugna, pugn5,
fight,

-ae,

fight, battle. Cf. proeliom

-ire, -4vi, -itua [pugoa, battle],

qui, quae, quod,

pron. and adj

($

Cf. oontendo, dimico

who, which, what, that

4S2)

324

LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
quia
re-linqu6
rar5, adv. [rarus, rare^, rarely
re-

quia, conj. because.

Cf. quod

quidam, quaedam, quiddam (quoddam), indef. pron. and adj. a certain one,
a certain, a
(

rarus, -a, -um, adj. 7-are or red-, an inseparable

prefix,

485)

again, back, anew, in return

rebellio, -onis,
lion
f.

quidem, adv.
deed,

to be sure, certainly, in. .

renewal of war,

rebel-

ne

quidem, 7wt even

repose

quies, -etis,

f.

rest,

recens, -entis, adj. recent

re-cipio, -ere, -cepi, -ceptus [re-, back,

quietus,

-a,

-um,

adj. quiet, restful

quindecim, indecl. numeral 2^6.). fifteen quingenti, -ae, -a, numeral adj. five

capio, take\, take back, receive,

se

recipere,

withdraw, retreat

hundred
quinque, indecl. numeral adj.yfz/^ quintus, -a, -um, numeral did], fifth
quis
(qui), quae, quid (quod), interrog.

re-clinatus, -a, -xun, part, of recline, leaniftg back

re-creatus,
refreshed

-a,

-um, part, of recreo,

pron. and adj.

who

what ? which

rectus,

-a,

-um, adj. [part, of rego, keep

(483)

straight^, straight, direct

quis

(qui),

indef. pron.
nisi, ne,

qua (quae), quid (quod), and adj., used after si, num, anyone, anything, some

re-ciiso, -are, -avi, -atus, refuse

red-actus,

-a,

-um, part, of redigo,

re-

duced, subdued red-0,

-ire, -ii, -itus [red-,

one, something, any, some ( 484) quisquam, quicquam or quidquam (no fern, or plur.), indef. pron. any 07te
(at all),

back,

eo,

gd\, go back, return (^^x-}^). Cf.revertS

reditus, -us,
return,

m.

[cf.

redeo,

return],

anything

(at all) (

486)

going back
[re-,

quisque, quaeque, quidque (quodque),

indef. pron.

and

adj. each, each one,

re-duco, -ere, -duxi, -ductus + duco, lead}, lead back

back,

every ( 484)

re-fero, -ferre, rettuli, -latus [re-, back,

rel.

quo, interrog. and where

quo, conj. in order

adv. whither,

+ fero, bear'\
referre,

bear back ; report, pedem

retreat

withdraw,

to, that,

with comp.
Cf. quia

re-ficio, -ere, -feci, -fectus [re-, again,

degree ( 350) quod, conj. because, in

+
that.

facio,

make], make again, repair.

se reficere, refresh one's self

quoque, word,

conj., following
also, too.

an emphatic

regina, -ae,
regio, -onis,

f. f.

[rex, king\,

queen

Cf. etiam

region, district
;

quot-annis, adv. [quot,

how many

regnum,

-i,

n. sovereignty

kingdom
rex, king\,

annus, year\ every year, yearly quotiens, interrog. and rel. adv.
often ? as often as

how

rego, -ere, rexi, rectus govern, rule ( 490)

[cf.

re-icio, -ere, -ieci, -iectus [re-, back,

iacio,

-}-

hurl], hurl back; throw

away
be-

re-linquo, -ere, -liqui, -lictus

[re-,

radix,

-Icis, f . root ;

foot
seize,

hind, snatch
leave,

linquo, leave], leave behind^

rapi5, -ere, -ui, ^tus,

abandon

LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
reliquus
reliquus,
/tii7Y],

325

sapiens
[cf.

-a,

-um, adj.
tmer,
rest

relinqu5,

left

remaining.

As

noun, plur. the

R5ma, -ae, f. Rome. See map RSmanus, -a, -um, adj. [Rdma, Rome], Roman, follows its noun. As a
noun, m. and
rosa, -ae,
f. f.

remdtus,
re-move6,
-I-

-a,

-um, adj.

[part, of

re-

Roman

mo veo, remove^

remote, distant

rose
n.

-ere, -movi,

-motus

[re-, hacky

rdstmm,
in the

-i,

mo veo, move\ remove

-i,

plur., the rostra,

beak of a ship. In the speaker's stand

remus,

m. oar

Roman Forum
f.

re-perio, -ire, repperi, repertu8,yf^

rota, -ae,

wheel

re-porto, -Are, -vi, -atus

[re-,

back,

ports,

carry],

carry back, bring

Rubico, -onis, m. the Rubicon, a river in northern Italy. See map

riimor, -oris, m. report, rumor riirsus, adv. [for reversus,
back], again, tn turn
riis, ruris

back, win,
res, rei,
f.

gain
.

thing, business, matter, deed,

turned

event, circumstance ( 467 )

quam

ob

rem, for this reason. rSs adversae,

adversity.
supplies.

(locative abl.

rflri,

no

gen.,

r8

frumentlria, grain
rSs

dat.,

or abl. plur.), n. the country

Cf. ager, patria, terra

rSs

gestae, exploits.

( 501- 36. 1).

milit&ris, science

of war. rSs
rSs

piiblica,

the

commr''''-

secundae,

prosperity
re-8cixid5,
-ere,

-semi, -scissus
cut],

[re-,

back,

-\-

scindo,

cut

off,

cut

Sabinus, -a, -um, adj. Sabine. As a noun, m. and f. a Sabine. The Sabines were an ancient people of
central Italy.

down
re-8ist5, -ere, -etiti,
\- 8i8t5, ccutse to
sist,

See map
[sacer,

[re-,

back,
re-

sacnun,

-i,

n.

consecrated],
sacrifice
;

stand], oppose,

something consecrated,

usu-

with dat.

( 501. 14)

ally in plur., religious rites

re-spondeo,
(re-,

-re,
\-

-spondi,

-sponsus

saepe, adv., compared saepius, saepissime, often, frequently

in return,

spondeo, premise],

answer, reply ( 420. a) or dep. verb re-Tert6, -ere, -I, ,

re-vertor,
-i,

saevus,

-a,

-um, adj. cruel^ savage

f.

sagitta, -ae,

arrow
saltus,ym/
safety;
health,
salfl-

-us

sum

[re-,

back,

-\-

salio, -ire, -ui,

saliis,

verto, turn],

turn back, return. Usually active in the pcrf. system

-vinxi,

-utis,

f.

tem

dicere,

send greetings

re-vinci6, -ire,
back,
-f-

-vfnctas

[re-,

vincid, bind], fasten

salutd, -&re, -Avi, -AtusXsalfla, kealtk], greet, salute

salve, imv. of salved, hail, greetings sanguis, -inis, m. blood ( 247. 2. a)

rex, rJgia, m. [cf. regS, rule], king Rhenus, -i, m. the /Chine, a river of

Cicrmany
ripa, -ae,
f.

s&nitas, -itit,

f.

[ainos, sound]^ healthy

banh
Cf. petS,

sanity

rogS, -ire, -tvi, -4tua, ask.

poatulo, quaarS

sapiens, -entis, adj. [part, of sapid, be wise], wise, sensibU

326
satis, adv.

LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
satis

solvo
'

and

indecl. noun, enough^

servus,

-i,

m. slave

sufficient, sufficiently

sese, emphatic for se

saxum,

-i,

n. rock, stone

scelus, -eris, n. crime, sin

sex, indecl. numeral adj. six Sextus, -i, m. Sextus, a Roman

first

sceptrum,
schola,
grades.
scientia,

-i,

n. scepter
f.

name
the

-ae,

school,

higher

si, conj,

if

Cf. ludus
-ae,
f.

sic, adv. thus, in this

way. Cf.

ita,

tam

[sciens,

knowing\,

Sicilia, -ae,

f.

Sicily.

See map

skill, knowledge, science scindo, -ere, scidi, scissus, cut, tear

sic-ut, just as, as if

signifer,
(5).

-eri,

m. [signum, standard,

scio,

-ire,

-ivi,

-itus,

know

(420.

fero, bear], staiidard bearer (p. 224)

Cf. cognosco

signum,
buckler
similis,

-i,

n. ensign,
f.

standard ; sigftal
similior,

scribo, -ere, scripsi, scriptus, write

silva, -ae,

wood, forest
adj.,

scutum,

-i,

n. shield,

-e,

compared

se, see sui

simillimus, like, similar ( 307)

secum

se

+ cum

secundus,

-um, adj. [sequor,y27//^w], followitig, next, second ; favorable,

-a,

simul, adv. at the same time simul ac or simul atque, conj. as soon as
prep, with abl. withotU ( 209) singuli, -ae, -a, distributive numeral
sine,
adj.

successful,

res secundae, prosperity

sed,

conj. but, on the contrary,

.
.

non
. . .

sdlum

sed etiam,

not only

one at a time, single

334)

but also

sedecim, indecl. numeral

adj. sixteen

sinister, -tra, -trum, adj. left Sinuessa, -ae, f. Sinues'sa, a

town

in

sedeo, -ere, sedi, sessus, sit semper, adv. always, forever

Campania. See map

sitis, -is (ace. -im, abl.
-i,

no

plur.),

f.

senatus, -us,
cil

m.

[cf.

senex,

old'l,

coun-

thirst

of elders, senate
-ire,

situs, -a, -um, adj. [part, of sino, set],

sentio,

sensi, squsms, feel,

. .

know,

perceive ( 420. d ) Cf intellego, vide5 septem, indecl. numeral adj. seven

situated, placed, lying socius, soci, m. comrade, ally

sol, s51is (no gen. plur.),

m. sun

Septimus,
seventh

-a,

-um,

numeral

adj.

soleo,

sum, semi-dep. verb, be wont, be accustomed

-ere,
-a,

solitus

sequor,

-i,

secutus sum,
493)
f.

dep. verb,

sollicitus,

-um,

adj.

disturbed,

follow
serpens,

anxious
[serpo,

-entis,

crawl],

serpent, snake

s51um, adv. [solus, alone], alone, only. sed etiam, not only non solum
. . .
.
.

sertae, -arum,

f.

plur. wreaths, gar-

but also

lands
servitus,
-utis,
f.

s51us, -a,
[servus,
slave],

-um

(gen. -ius, dat.

-i),

adj.

alone, only ( 108)

slavery, servitude

servo, -are, -avi, -atus, save, rescue, keep

S0lv5, -ere, solvi, solutus, loosen, unbind, navem solvere, set sail

LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
8011UIU8

327

super-sum

somnus,
spatium,

-i,

m.
f.

sleep

Stymphalus,
district
I

soror, -oris,

sister
n.

of

m. Stympha'lus, a -I, southern Greece with

all

spati,

town, mountain, and lake,

of

time; ofportunitv
spectacolttm,
-i,

the
Ispecto,

same name
-re,
-si,

8uade5,

-sus, advise, recom-

shcnv, spectacle

mend,
at, wii-

with

subjv.

of

purpose
under,

spectS, -re, -Avi, -Atus, lock

ttfSS

{50-4i) sub, prep, with ace. and

below,

abl.

8pcr6, -ire, -ivi,

-itus
c)

[spSt, Aope],

hipe, expect ( 420.

spes, spei,

f.

hope
adv.

( 273. 2)

at or to the foot of sub-ig5, -ere, -gi, -Actus [sub, under, -f- ago, dri7)e], subdue, reduce

up

to

splendide,

[splendidus],

com-

pared

splendidius,

splendidissime,

subit5, adv. [subitus, sudden],suddenly sub-sequor, -i, -secutus sum, dep. verb
[sub, below,

spUndiiUy, handsomely

sequor, follow], fol-

splendidus,

-a,

-am,

adj.

brilliant,

low

close after, follow

-ere,

up
-cessus
[sub,

gorgeous, splendid

8UC-ed5,
belo7v,

-cessi,

Stabianus,

-a,

-um, Stabian

cedo, go], folloiu, succeed

stabulum,

-i,

n. [cf. stS, stand], stand-

sui, reflexive T^ron.

itself,

ing place,

stable, stall
[cf.

themselves) (480).

of himself (herself, sScum =

statim, adv.

stS, stand],

on the

s5 -f cum. sSse, emphatic

form of sS

spot, at once, instantly

sum,
place,
set],

esse, fui, futurus, irreg. verb, be;

^tatua,
iiatue

nae,

f.

[sisto,

exist ( 494)

summus,
determine

-a,

-um,

adj.

in

superl.

statu5, -ere, -ui, -iltua [status, station],

decide,

degree, compared superus, superior, suprgmus or summus (312), supreme,

highest; best, greatest, in on the top of the hill

"^tilus, -i,

st5, -ire, steti, status,

m. iron pencil, style stand

(p. 210)

summo colle,

stratus, -a, -um, adj. [part, of stemo,

sum5,

spread],

paved
-Qs,

(of streets)

strepitus,

m.

[strepd,

make a
bind

-ere, sOmpsi, sOmptus, take up ; assume, put on. sfimere supplidum d8, inflict punishment on
abl. over,

noise], noise, din

string^,

-ere,

strinzl,

strictus,

super, prep, with ace. and above

tight; draw, unsheathe

superbia, -ae,

f.

[superbus, prvud],

studed, -*re,
to,

-ol,

give attention

pride, arrogance

studiom,

be eager, with dat. ( 501. 14) studl, n. [cf. studed, be eager

superbus,

-a,

-um, adj. proud^ haughty

[superus,

/or], eagerness, desire, teal, devotion

superior, comp. of superus super5, -ire, -*vi, -itus

above],

stultus, -a, -um,

Sid).

foolish, stupid

go over; subdue, overcome;

-esse, -ful,

Stymphalis,

-idis, adj. f. Stymphalian^ of Siymphaflusf a lake in southern

surpass, excel

super-aum,

kg over,

Greece

survive, with

dat

($ 501.15)

328
superus,
superior,
-a,

LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
superus

times
Tarracina, -ae, f. Tarraci'na, a town in Latium. See map
taurus,
n.
-i,

compared supremus or summus, adove,

-um,
adj.,

upper

{% 2)^2)

m. bull
[part,

supplicium,
torture,
flict

supplied,

[supplex,

tectus, -a, -um, adj.

of tego,

kneeling in entreaty], punishment,

supplicium sumere de, in-

cover], covered, protected

dare,

punishment on. supplicium suffer punishment

[sub, froin

telum, -i, n. weapon temere, adv. rashly, heedlessly

tempestas,

-atis,

f.

[tempus, time\
shrine

surgo, -ere, surrexl,

below,

storm, tempest

+ +

rego, straighten], rise

-ere,

templum,
[sub,

-i,

n. temple,

sus-cipio,

-cepi,

-ceptus

tempto,

-are, -avi,-atus, try, test;

make
in

under,

capio, take], undertake, as-

trial of, attempt

sume, begin
suspicor,
-ari,

tempus,
-atus sum, dep. verb,
-tentus

-oris, n.

time

( 464. 2.

(5).

reliquum tempus, y^r the future

teneo, -ere, tenui,
,

suspect, surmise, suppose

hold, keep

sus-tineo, -ere, -tinui,

[sub,

tergum,
rear,

-I,

n. back,

a tergo, on the

under,

teneo, hold], hold up, bear,

tergum

vertere, ret?-eat,flee

sustain, withstand

term,
adj.

-ae, -a, distributive

numeral

adj.

suus,

-a,

-um, reflexive possessive

th7'ee each,

and pron.,

his, her, hersy its, their,

terra, -ae,

f.

334) earth, ground, land, orbis

(

by threes

theirs ( 98)

T
shop, stall

terrarum, the whole world

terror, -oris, m. [cf. texxeo, frighten], dread, alarm, terror

T., abbreviation of Titus

taberna, -ae,
tabula, -ae,
f.

f.

tertius, -a, -um,

numeral

adj. third

tablet for writing

talis
. . .

Teutones, -um, m. the Teutons

qualis,

talis, -e, adj. such,

such

as

tarn, adv. so, such. Cf. ita, sic tamen, adv. yet, however, nevertheless

theatrum, -i, n. theater Thebae, -arum, f. Thebes, a city of Greece Thebani, -orum, m. Thebans, the

tandem, adv. at
tango,

length, finally

-ere, tetigi, tactus, touch

people of Thebes thermae, -arum, f. plur. baths

Thessalia, -ae, f. Thessaly, a district of northern Greece

tantum, adv.

[tantus], only tantus, -a, -um, adj. so great, such. tantus . . . quantus, as large as

tardus,

-a,

-um, adj. slow, late; lazy

f.

Thracia, -ae, f. Thrace, north of Greece

Tiberius,
Tibe'ri,
first

district

Tarpeia,

-ae,

Tarpeia (pronounced

m.

Tiberius,

Tar-pe'ya), the maiden who the citadel to the Sabines

opened

Roman

name
[cf.

tibicen, -inis, m.
flute player

i5bmy pipe], piper,

,fear, be afraid of.

Tarquinius,

Tarqui'ni,

Roman

king.

Tarquin, a With the surname

timeo,

-ere, -ui,

Superbus, Tarquin the Proud

Cf. vereor

LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
timor
timor,
-dris,

329

m.

[cf.

timed, fear\yfeary

triamphus,
sion,

-i,

m. triumphal procesagere,

litfad,

alarm.

Cf.

metus
f.

Tiryns, Tirynthis,

Ti'ryns,

an an-

triumph, triumphum celebrate a triumph

trucidO, -ire, -4vi, -itus, cut

cient town in southern Greece, where Hercules served Eurystheus

to pieces,

toga, -ae,

f.

[cf.
-i,

tego, cover], toga

n.

slaughter. Cf. interficio, neco, occido tu, tui (plur. v6s), pars. pron. thou,

tormentum,

engine of war

you (480)
tuba, -ae,
f.

totiens, adv. so often, so many times lotus, -a, -urn (gen. -ius, dat. -I), adj.
all,

trumpet

the whole, entire { 108)

Tullia, -ae, f. Tullia, a Roman turn, adv. then, at that time

turris, -is,
f.

name

tra-dd, -ere, -didi, -ditua [trius, across,

tower

( 465. 2)

dS, deliver], give /,

hand

over,

tutus, -a, -um, adj. safe

surrender, betray

tuus, -a, -um, possessive adj. and pron.

tTa-duc5, -ere,
across,

-ductus [tr&ns, duc6, lead], lead across

-diixi,

your, yours ( 98)

trah5, -ere, trixi, trJictus, draw, pull,

drag,

multum long much

ixahtxty protract, pro-

ubi,

rcl.

and interrog.adv.

- '

''//

ubique, adv. everywhere

ullus, -a,

tra-ici6,-ere,-ifci,-iectus [trins, across,

-um

(gen. -ius,

ciai. -11,

adj.

hurl], throw across; transfix tra-n6, -ftre, -ivi, -itus [trins, across, + n6, sivim], S7uim across
iacio,

atiy ( 108)
ulterior,-ius,-6ri8, adj. in
ultimu8,yi//t//<r/-,

comp.. superl.
in superl. de-

more remote (315)

trans,
(

prep,

with ace.

across,

over

ultimus,

-a, -imi, adj.

340)
-ire, -ii, -itus [trins, across,

trans-eo,

gree (see v\Xvm)y farthest (315) umbra, -ae, f. shade

eo, go],

go

across, cross
-fix!,

(413)
[trins,

umerus,

-i,

m, shoulder

trans-figd, -ere,

-fixus

umquam,

adv. ever, at

any time

through,
transitus,
[cf.

fig6, drive], transfix

(ace.

-am,

abl. -fl),

m.

una, adv. [Onus, one], in the same place, at the same time
undecimus,-a,-um, numeral adj. [unus,
one,

trftnsed,

cross

over],

passage

across
trfs, tria,

decimus, tenth], eleventh

numeral

adj. three ( 479)

nndique, adv. from every quarter, #

(///

triduum,

tridui, n. [tr^s, three,

dite,

sides, -,

everywhere

days], three days' time, three days

unus,
urbs,

-am
adj.
f.

(gen.

-Ius,

dat.

-I),

triginta, indecl. numeral adj. thirty

triplex, -ids, adj. threefold, triple
tristis, -e, adj.

numeral
-is,

one; alone ( 108)

city ( 465. a)
,

sad;

severe, terrible

urged, -re, onl,

crowd,
^iXMAy
-I,

press upon,

tristitia, -ae,

f.

[titetis, sad], sadness,

hem

in

sorrow

m. wild ox, urus

triumphs,

-Are, -4vl, -ttt;s [triumphas,

triumph], celebrate a triumph

&sque, adv. ail the way, nam tMOMf -flt, m. use, adfmnUige

330

LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
ut
Via
velocitas, -atis, ness
f.

ut, conj. with the subjv. that, in order

that, that not (with

[velox, swift], swift-

verbs of fearing),
-i), in-

so that, to ( 350. i)

vel5x,

-ocis, adj. swift, fleet

-i,

uter, -tra, -trum (gen. -ius, dat.

terrog. pron.
( 108)

which of two? which?

velum, vends,
venio,

n. sail

-ere, vendidi, venditus, sell

-ire, veni,
-i,
-i,

ventus,

cojtie,

go

uterque,

utraque, utrumque, indef. pron. each of two, each, both, ab utraque parte, on both sides

ventus,

m. wind
n.

verbum,
vereor,

word,

verba facere pro,

speak in behalf of
-eri,

utilis, -e, adj. [utor, use'l, useful

-itus

sum,

dep.

verb,
Cf.

utrimque, adv. [uterque, each of two'], on each side, on either hand

iiva, -ae,
f.

fear; reverence, respect (493). . timeo

grape, bunch of grapes

f.

Vergilius, Vergi^i, m. Vergil, the poet

uxor,

-oris,

wife

vergo, -ere,

turn,

lie

vero, adv. [verus, true],in truth, surely; conj. but, however, turn vero, then

vagina,
vagor,

-ae, sheath,
-ari,

scabbard

you may
verb,

be sure, introducing the

-atus

sum,

dep.

cHmax

of a story
-ti,

wander
valeo, -ere,
-ui, -iturus, be powerftil, be

verto, -ere,

-sus,

turn,

change.

tergum vertere,
verus,
-a,

retreat, flee

well; in the imperative as a greeting, /atr^w^//.

-um, true, actual

plurimum
f.

valere,

have

vesper,

-eri,

m. evening

the most

power
-inis,

vester, -tra, -trum, possessive adj.

[valeo,

and

valetudo,
health

be

well],

pron. your, yours

98)
n.
[cf.

vestigium,
-a,

vesti'gi,

vestigo,

validus,

-um, adj. [cf. valeo, be strong], strong, able, well

-is,
-i,
f.

track], footstep, track, trace

vestimentum,
garment
vesti5,

-i,

n. [vestis, clothing],

valles,

valley

vallum,
varius,

n.

rampart, earthworks

-ire, -ivi, -itus [vestis,

clothing],

-a,

-um, adj. bright-colored

clothe, dress

vasto, -are, -avi, -atus [vastus, empty], {make empty), devastate, lay waste
vectigal,
-alis, n. tax, tribute

vestis,
robe

-is, f.

clothing, attire, garment,

vestitus,
eager],

-a,

-um, adj. [part, of vestio,

vehementer, adv. [vehemens,

sime, eagerly, vehemently

clothe], clothed

compared vehementius, vehementisveho, -ere, vexi, vectus, convey, carry. In the passive often in the sense of
ride, sail

Vesuvius, Vesu'vi, m. Vesuvius, the volcano near Pompeii. See map

veteranus,
vet5, -are,
-a,

-um, adj.

old, veteran

-ui, -itns,

forbid, prohibit

vexo,
vel
.
. .

-are, -avi, -atus, trouble, -ae,

f.

annoy
way,

vel, conj. or.

rel, either ... or.

via,

way, road,
iter

street;

Cf. aut

manner. Cf.

LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
viator
viator, -oris, m. [via], traveler
victor, -oris, m. [vinc5, conquer\, convis, (vis),
f.

331
power
vitam

vulpes
strength,

violence ( 468) Vita, -ae, f

[cf. viv5, live\, life,

queror, victor. In apposition, with adj. force, victorious

victSria, -ae,
f.

agere, spend or pass life

vlt5, -ire, -Svi, -Htus, shun, avoid Cf. habitd, litie. , viv5, -ere, vixi,
incolo

[victor, victor\, victory

vicus,

-1,

m. village
vidi,
;

vided, -re,

visas, see, perceive.

Pass, be seen
vigilia, -ae,
f.

seem

( 420. t/)

vivus,

-a,

-um, adj.

[cf. vivo, live], alive,

[vigil, awaJke],

watch. d6

tertii vigiliA,

about the third watch

living vix, adv. scarcely, hardly

viginti, indecl. numeral adj. twenty

vilicus,
-i,

voco, -are, -avi, -atus,

invite.

call,

summon,

m.

[villa,

fann\, steward,

Cf. appelld, ndmino

overseer of a /arm
villa, -ae, i./ami, 7nlla

V0I6, -are, -avi, -aturus, //v

, irreg. verb, will, V0I5, velle, volui, be ivilling, wish ( 497). Cf. capiS

vinciS,
fetter
vincft,

-ire,

vinxi, vinctus, hind,

tie,

voliimen,
-ere,
vici,

-inis, n. roll,
-i,

book

victus,

conquer,

Vorenus,
rion

m. Vor/nus, a centu-

defeat, overcome.

Cf. sabigd, supero

(p.

vinea, -ae,

f.

shed

219)

v6s, pers. pron.

you

vinum,

-i,

n.

wine
[violentus,
7tiolent\,

votum, -i,

n. [neut.

(see tfi) (480) part of voveo, vow],

violenter,

adv.

V070, pledge,

prayer
voco, calf], voice, cry
;

compared violentius, violentissime, violen tly, fu riously vir, viri, m. man, husband; hero
(

VOX, v5ci8,

f.

[cf.

word
vulnero,
-are,
-avi,

-atus

[vulnus,

462. c)

virilis, -e, adj. [vir,

virtus,

-fitis, f. [vir,

man^, manly man], manliness

wound], 7vound, hurt vulnus, -eris, n. wound, injury

;

vulpes,

-is,

i.fox

courage, valor; virtue (464. i)

QUBS ROMANUS

ENGLISH-LATIN VOCABULARY
This vocabulary contains only the words used in the English-Latin exercises. For details not given here, reference may be made to the Latin-English vocabulary. The
figures
I, 2, 3, 4,

after verbs indicate the conjugation.

and
a, an,

so, itaque
-ae,/".

commonly not translated

possum, posse, potui,

able

(be),

Andromeda, Andromeda, angry, Iratus, -a, -um

animal, animal,
-alis, n.
i

(495) abode, domicilium, domical, n.

announce, nuntio,
another,
alius, -a,

about about about

[adv.)^ circiter

annoying, molestus,
abl.

-a,

-um

{prep.), de,

with

-ud

( 109)

to, expressed by fut. act. part.

any,

ullus, -a,

-um

( 108)

abundance, copia,

-ae,/.

across, trans, with cue. active, acer, acris, acre

any one, anything, quisquam, quam or quidquam { 486)

appearance, forma, -ae,/.
appoint, creo,
i

quic-

advance, progredior, 3 advantage, usus, -us, m.

advise, moneo, 2 after {conj.), postquam ;' often expressed

approach, adpropinquo, i, with dat. are, used as auxiliary, not translated ;

as a copula,
arise, orior, 4

sum

494)

by the per/, part. after {prep.), post, with

against,
in,

ace.

contra, with ace.

aid, auxilium, auxi'll, n.

all,

omnis, -e

totus, -a,

-um

( 108)

arm, bracchium, bracchl, n. armed, armatus, -a, -um arms, arma, -orum, n. plur. army, exercitus, -iis, m.
around, circum, with
ace.

allow, patior, 3
ally, socius, sod,

m.

arrival, adventus, -us, m.

almost, paene
already, iam

fere
;

arrow,

sagitta, -ae,/.

alone,unus,-a,-um solus, -a,-uni( 108)

art of war, res mllitaris

as possible, expressed by
superl.

quam and
i

quoque always, semper ambassador, legatus, -\,m. among, apud, 7vith ace. ancient, antlquus, -a, -um
also,
iind, et
;

ask, peto, 3
assail,

quaero, 3
i

rogo,

oppugns,

at, in, with ace. or abl.

; with names of towns, locative case or abl. without a

;

atque (ac)

-que

preposition ( 268)

time when,

abl.

332

ENGLISH-LA
at once
at once, statim at the beginning of
aestatc

IN

VUCAJU l.ARY
carry
boat, navigium, navi'gT, n.

333

summer,

inita

body, corpus, -oris, n. bold, audax, -acis fortis, -c

;

Athens, Athenae, -arum,/. attack, impetus, -us, m.

attempt, conor,

boldly, audacter; fortiter

boldness, audacia, -ae,/

away

tempto, i from, a or ab, with abl.

i
;

booty, praeda, -ae,/

[utrumque
et

both, each {of two), uterque, utraque,

both

B
bad, malus,
-a,

boy, puer,
brave,

and, et -eri, m.

-urn

fortis, -e

baggage, impedimenta, -orum, n.plur. bank, ripa, -ae,/.

barbarians, barbarl, -orum,
tn.

bravely, fortiter
bridge, pons, pontis, m.
bright, clarus,
-a,

plur.

-um
i

battle, proelium,proeli,w.;pugnc,-ae^.
be,

bring back, reports, bring upon, Infero,

li'ith ace.

sum (494)
;

-ferrc, -tuli, -latus,

(

be absent, be far, absum ( 494) be afraid, timeo, 2 vereor, 2

be away, absum ( 494) be in command of, praesum, with dat.
(494. 426) be informed, certior fio be off, be distant, absum

and dat.
-tris,

426)

brother, frater,

m.
//.

building, aediiicium, aediii'ci, incendo, 3 burn, cremo, i

;

( 494) ( 180)

business, negotium, nego'tl, n. but, however, autem, sed by, a, ab, with abl. ; denoting means,
abl.

be without, egeo, with abl. beast (wild), fera, -ae,/.

alone: sometimes implied in a

participle

beautiful, pulcher, -chra, -chrum

by night, noctu

because, quia ; quod because of, propter, with ace; or abl.

of cause
,

before, heretofore {adv.)^ antt a

Csesar, Caesar, -aris, m. calamity, calamitas. -atis,

call, voco,
I
;

/i

before {prep.), ante, 7vith ate; pro,

T.'/M abl.

appello,

nomino,

call together,

convocS,

begin, incipid, 3 believe, cred5, 3, with dat. (153)

camp,

castra, -orum, n. plur.

can, could,

possum, posse, potu!,

occupd,
i

belong

\fi^

predicate genitive (409)

(495)
capture, capio, 3
care, cura, -ae,
/I
i ;

best, optimus, superl.

^ bonus
<?/"

betray, tradd, 3
better, melior, comp.

bonus

care for, euro,

between,

inter,

with

a.

careftil, attentus, -a,

-um
latus ( 498)

billow, ductus, -us, m.

bird, avis, -is,/ ( 243. i)

carefulness, dlligentia, -ae,/

carry, ferS, ferre,
ports,
I

tuli,

blood, sanguis,

iois,

m.

334

ENGLISH-LATIN VOCABULARY
carry on

dwelling

carry on, gero, 3 cart, carrus, -i, m.

cause, causa, -ae,/.

D
daily, cotldie

danger, periculum,
-us,

-i,

n.
(.67)

cavalry, equitatus,
cease, cesso, \~

m.
m.

daughter,
day, dies,

filia,

-ei,

-ae,/ m.

Cepheus, Cepheus,
certain
(a) ,

-i,

daybreak, prima lux

dear, carus,
-a,

quidam, quaedam, quoddam

(

-um

(quiddam)

485)

death, mors, mortis,/

deed,
res, rei,/ deep, altus, -a, -um

chicken, gallina, -ae,/.

chief, princeps, -cipis, m.

children, llberl, -orum, m. plnr.

defeat, calamitas, -atis,/

choose, deligo, 3 choose, elect, cre5,

citizen, cTvis,
-is,
i

m. and f.

( 243.

defend, defends, 3 delay (noun), mora, -ae,/ delay [verb), moror, i

city, urbs, urbis,/.

demand,

postulo,
-a,

clear, clarus, -a,

-um

dense, densus,

-um
;

cohort, cohors, -rtis,y.

depart, discedo, 3
ciscor, 3
i,

exe5, 4

profi-

come, veni5, 4

command,
{ 45)
;

impero,
iubeo,
2
;

with

dat.

dependent,
desire,

cliens, -entis,

m.

praesum,

with

design, consilium,
cupio, 3

consi'li, n.

dat.

{426)
res publica, rel publi-

commit, committo, 3

destroy, deleo, 2

commonwealth,
cae

Diana, Diana, -ae,/

differ, differs, differre, distuli, dilatus

concerning, de, with

;

abl.

(498)
different, dissimilis, -e
difficilis, -e

conquer, super5, i vinco, 3 construct {a ditch), perduco, 3 consul, consul, -ulis, m.

di&cult,

difficulty, diffrcultas;

atis,/

contrary to, contra, with

Corinth, Corinthus,
-T,/.

ace.

diligence, dlligentia, -ae,/

dinner, cena, -ae,/

disaster, calamitas, -atis,/
tn.

Cornelia, Cornelia, -ae,/.

Cornelius, Cornelius, Corne'lT,

corselet, lorTca, -ae,/.

distant

(be),

absum,

-esse, afu!, afu-

turus ( 494)
ditch, fossa, -ae,/ do, agS, 3 faciS, 3 ; when used as auxiliary, not translated
;

cottage, casa, -ae,/ country, as distingtcished from the city.,

rus, ruris, n.\ as territory, fJnes,-ium,

ni.,plur. </ finis

down from,
drive, agS, 3

de, with abl.

courage, virtus, -utis,/

crime, scelus,
-eris, n.

drag, traho, 3

cross, transeo, 4 ( 499)

dwell, habits,

incolS, 3

vivo, 3

crown, corona,

-ae,/.

dwelling, aedificium,

aedifi^ci, n.

ENOMSH
each

ATIN VOCABULARY
full

335

each, quisque, quaeque, quidque (quodque) (484)

find, reperi5, 4

finish, conficio, 3
fire, ignis, -is,

m.

( 243.1)
-2x,yf.

each of two, uterque, utraque, utrum

firmness, constantia,
first,

que each other, inter with

alacre

primus,
3

-a,

-um

ace.

of a

reflexive

flee, fugio,

eager, accr, acris, acre; alacer. nlacris,

flight, fuga,
fly, vols,
I

-ae,/

eager

(be),

studeS, 2

foe, see

enemy

eagerness, studium, stud!, n.

eagle, aquila, -ae,/.
easily, facile

follow close after, subsequor, 3 food, cibus, -1, m.

foot, pes, pedis, tn.

easy, facilis, -e
either
.

foot-soldier, pedes,
.

-itis,

m.

or, aut

aut

empire, imperium, impc'ri, n. employ, negotium do

encourage, hortor,
i

for {conj.), enim, nam for {prep.), sign of dat.; d, pro, with
abl.;
to

express purpose, ad, Tvith

ace.

gerundive; implied in

of time

enemy,
cus.
-T.

hostis,
in.

-is,

m. and /.; inimi-

and of extent rf space

for a long time, diu

enough,

satis
-a,

forbid, veto,
-urn ( 108)
.rinic,
/-.

entire, totus,

forces, copiae, -arum,/,//r. <7/"c6pia

forest, silva, -ae,/
fort, castellum,
-I,

expectation, opTn;^
eye, oculus,
-T,
//

.; castrum,

-T,

fortification, munitio, -5nis,/

F
faithless, perfidus,
-a,

fortify, munio, 4

um

fortune, fortuna, -ae,/

famous,
far,

clarus, -a,

-um

fourth, quartus,
free, liber, -era,

-a,

-um
i

longe

-erum

farmer, agricola, -ae, m.

farther, ulterior, -ius
father, pater, patris, m.

free, liberate, libero,

frequent, creber, -bra, -brum

friend, amicus,
-I,

m.
-a,

fatherland, patria, -ae,/.

favor, faveO, 2

friendly

{adj.),

amicus,

-um

friendly {adv.), amice

-a,

favorable, idQneus,
-a,

-um secundus,
;

friendship, amicitia, -ae,/

frighten, pertcrreo, 2 from, a or ab, de, e, ex, with aSi. Often
expressed by the separative etbleUive

-um
m.

fear, metus, -Qs, m,\ timer, -Oris, fear,

be afraid, timed, 2
-ae, -a

few, pauci,

without a prep.

field, ager, agri,

m.

from each other,

reflexive pron.
,.-t,''
'

inter,

with

tuc.

ef a

fifteen, qulndcci

fight, contendo, j,

full, '^i'">'<

-a,

-ura

336

ENGLISH-LATIN VOCABULARY
Galba
in

have no power,
Galba, Galba,
-ae,

nihil
;

possum
or not expressed

m.

he,

is

hie

iste

ille

garland, corona, -ae,/.

garrison, praesidium, praesi'dl, n.
gate, porta, -ae,/.

head, caput,

-itis,

n.

hear, audio, 4
heart, animus,
-1,

m.

Gaul, Gallia, -ae,/

heavy, gravis,

-e

Gaul

(a),

Gallus,

-i,

m.
-oris,

general, imperator,

m.

Helvetii (the), Helvetii, -orum, m.plur. hem in, contineo, 2

her, eius
ive,

Geneva, Genava,
gentle, lenis, -e

-slq.,/.

hen, gallina, -ae,/ huius istlus

; ;

illius

reflex-

German, Germanus, -a, -um Germans (the), Germanl, -orum, m.

plur.

suus,

-a,

-um -um

( 116)

hide, abdo, 3

high,

altus, -a,

Germany, Germania, -ae,/

get {dinner), paro,
girl, puella,
i

highest, summus,
hill, collis,
-is,

-a,

-um

m.

-ae,/
trado, 3

himself,

sui.

See

self

give, do, dare, dedl, datus

give over, surrender, dedo, 3 give up, omitto, 3

go, eo, 4 ( 499)

hindrance, impedimentum, -T, . his, eius huius istlus illius reflexive,

;

suus,

-a,

-um

( 116)

god, deus,

go forth, progredior, 3 -I, m. ( 468)

( 67)

hither, citerior, -ius (315) hold, teneo, 2

goddess, dea, -ae,/ gold, aurum, -1, n.

good, bonus,
-a,

home,domus, -us,/ domi ( 267)

(468).

at home,

-um

hope (noun), spes, spei,/ hope {verb), spero, i

horse, equus,
-1,

grain, frumentum, -1, . grain supply, res friimentaria

m.
-itis,

horseman, eques,
hostage, obses,

m.

magnus, -a, -um greatest, maximus, -a, -um summus, -a, -um
great, ingens, -entis
;

-idis,

m. and/.

hostile,' inimlcus, -a,

-um
domicilii,
n.;

hour, bora, -ae,/

guard, praesidium, praesi'di, n.

house,

domicilium,
(

domus, -us,/
hurl, iacio, 3

468)

hand, manus, -us,/ happy, laetus, -a, -um harbor, portus, -us, m.
hasten, contendo, 3
pero,
I
;

I)

sgo

(
if

280)

or not expressed

maturS,

pro-

if, SI.
ill,

not, nisi

-um haughty, superbus, -a, -um

hateful, invisus,
-a,

aeger, -gra, -grum immediately, statim

in {of place),

in,

have, habeo, 2

of specification)

with abl.; {of time or abl. without prep.

ENGLISH-LATIN VOCABULARY
in order that
in order that, ut, with subjv.
;

337

love
in order

L
labor (noun), labor, labor (verb), laboro,
-oris,
I

that not, lest, ne, 7vith subjv. in vain, frustra

m.

industry, dlligentia, -ac,/.

inflict injuries upoiii iniurias infero

lack (noun), inopia, -ae,/ lack (verb), egeo, 2, with abl. ( 180)
lady, domina, -ae,/
lake, lacus, -us, m. ( 260. 2)

with dat.
inflict

426)

punishment on,

supplicium

sumo de inform some

facio

land, terra, -ae,/

one, aliquem certiorem

language, lingua, -ae,/

large, ingens, -entis
larger, maior, maius
;

magnus,

-a,

-um

injure, noce5, 2, with dat. ( 153)

injury, iniuria, -ae,/.

into, in, ivith ace.

intrust, committo, 3
invite, voco,
is,
i

mando,

nuper Latona, Lat5na, -ae,/ law, lex, legis,/

lately,

lay waste, vasto,

lead, duco, 3

used as auxiliaryy not translaUd; as a copula, sum ( 494)

is;

leader, dux, ducis, m. and/.

learn,

island, insula, -ae,/.

it,

know, cognosco,

hie;

iste;

ille;

or not ex-

leave, depart from, discedo, 3

pressed
Italy, Italia, -ae,/
its,

left, sinister, -tra,

illlus;
re-

leave behind, abandon, relinquo, 3 -trum

eius;

huius; istius;

legion, legio, -onis,/

flexive, suus, -a,

itself, sul.

-um

( 116)

legionaries,

legionaril,

-orum,

m.

See

self

plur.

J
join battle, proelium

length, longitudo, -inis,/ lest, nc, with subjv.

committo
468)

letter

(0/ the alphabet),

littera,

-ae,

journey,

iter, itineris, n. (
-icis,
i

(an epistle) litterae, -arum,

judge {noun), iudex, judge

just
i^verb),

m.

plur.

iudico,

lientenant, legatus,

-1,

m.

Julia, lulia, -ae,/

now, nuper

light, lux, lucis,/ like (adj.), similis, -c

like, love,

amo,

line of battle, acies, aciei,

/:

keep, contineo,

prohibeo, 2 tenedj 2
;

little,

parvus,
1

-a,
;

-um
;

keep on doing something, expressed

by the imp/, indie.
kill, interficio, 3; nec6, king, rex, regis, m.
i
;

live, habito,

incol5, 3

occldo, 3

long, longus, -a, -um long, for a long time, diu

kingdom, rcgnum, -I, n. know, cogndscd, 3, in per/.

long for, desidcro, look after, duro, i

;

tciO, 4

lore, amd,

33^

ENGLISH-LATIN VOCABULARY
maid
once

M
maid, maid servant,
ancilla,

N
-ae,/

name, nomen,

-inis, n.

make,

facio, 3

nation, gens, gentis,/

infero 7c>M

make war upon, bellum

dat. ( 426)

near, propinquus,
nearly, fere

-a,

nearest, proximus,
-inis,

-a,

-um -um

man, homo,
viri,

m. and /.;

vir,

m.
plur. of multus

man-of-war, navis longa

many,

multl, -ae,

-a,

neighbor, finitimus, -T, m. neighboring, finitimus, -a, -um neither, neque or nee neither
;
.

notj

march, iter, itineris, n. ( 468) Mark, Marcus, -1, m. matrimatrimonium, marriage

J

neque (nee)
never,

neque (nee)

numquam
-a,

nevertheless, tamen

mo'ni,

71.

new, novus,
-i,

-um

master, dominus, -tri, m.

matter, negStium,
rei,y.

m.;

magister,

next day, postrTdie eius diel next to, proximus, -a, -um
night, nox, noctis,/
nine,

neg6''tT,

;;.

res,

novem
repeat verb

means, by means

of, the abl.

no,

minime; or

with a

messenger, nuntius, nunti, m.

negative ( 210)

midnight, media nox

mile, mllle passuum (331. miles, milia passuum
b)

no, none, nuUus,

-a,

-um (109)

mind, animus,

-1,

m.\

ripens, mentis,/",

no one, nemo, nullius nor, neque or nee not, non

not even, ne not only
.
. .
.
.

mine, meus, -a, -um mistress, domina, -ae,/.

quidem but also, non s5lum

.

money, pecunia,

-ae,/.

sed etiam
-1,

monster, monstrum, -I, n. month, mensis, -is, m.

nothing, nihil or nihilum,

n.

moon, luna, -ae,/ more {adj.)^ plus, pluris (313); or a

comparative.

now, nunc number, numerus,

-1,

m.

Adverb, magis
-a,

most

{adj.),

plurimus,

-um
;

superl.

obey, pareo,
of, sigfi

2,

with dat.

53)

degree. Adverb,

maxime

plurimum

mother, mater, matris,/ mountain, mons, montis, m.

of gen.; de, with e or ex, with abl.

abl.; out of,

often, saepe

move, moveo, 2 moved, commotus,

on [of place),
-a,

in,

with abl.; {of time)

-um

abl.

without prep.
of, propter,

much

(by),

multo

on account
abl.

with ace.; of

multitude, multitudo, -inis,/ my, meus, -a, -um

of cause

on

myself, me,

reflexive.

See

self

all sides, undique once {upon a time), olim

ENGLISH-LATIN VOCABULARY
rest

339
(
ace.

one, finus,

-a,

-um

( io8)
. . .

prefer, malo, malle, malul,

alius

497)

one
(

another, ulius

prepare for, paro,

protection, fides,

i,

with

MO)
{adv.)f

press hard, premo, 3

only

solum; tantum
-a,

fidci, /.

opportune, opportunus,
opposite, adversus,
oracle, oraculum,
-T,

-um

province, provincia, -ae,/.

public, publicus,
-a,

-a,

um

-um

Publius, Pablius, Publi, m.

orator, orator, -oris, m.

order, impero,
i
;

punishment, poena,
cium, supplied, n.
n.
-1,

ajic, y".;

suppli-

iubeo, 2

ornament, ornamentum,
other, alius,
-a,

-ud ( 109)

purpose, for the purpose of, ut, qui, or quo, 7vith siibjv.; ad, with i^er-

others (the), reliqui, -drum, m. plur. ought, debeo, 2 our, noster, -tra, -trum
ourselves, nos, as reflexive
self
object.

und or gerundive;
the genitive of a

causa, following

gerund or gerun-

dive

See

pursue, Insequor, 3

overcome, superd,

vinco,

Q
queen, reglna, -ae,/.
quickly, celeriter
quite, expressed by the comp. degree

own

(his, her, its, their),

suu

part, pars, partis,

/'.

peace, pax, pacis,

/.

R
m.

people, populus,

-I,

Perseus, Perseus,

-I, ///.

rampart, valium, -I, //. rear, novissimum agmen

reason, causa, -ae,/.
receive, accipid, 3
; excipiS, 3 recent, recens, -entis

persuade,
(53)

persuadeo.

pitch camp, castra ponu

place {Mouft), locus,
-i,

m.
i

recently, nuper

place, arrange, conloco,

redoubt, castellum,
refuse, recuse,
i

-i,

n.

place, put, pono, 3 place in command, praeficio, 3, 7virA

aci.

remain, maneo,

2
-a,

and
(a),

dai. ( 426)

remaining, reliquus,
reply, respondeo, 2
c
''''/

-um
nr.

plan

consilium, c5nsi1I, n.
2,

please, placed,

with
-a,

'^

report (w"/*/^
-oris,
/'.

fanii

/; rumor,
.^../..j-d

pleasing, gratus,

-uv

plow,

aro,

report

....-.
(:

Pompeii, Pompeii, -drum, m. plur.

possible (as), expressed by
superl.

(498'
tepublic, res puDiica
require, postuld,
i
1

quam and

powerful

(be), valc5, 2
i

resist, resists, 3, with dat. (

54)

praiM, laudd,

rest (the), reliqui, -onmi, m. plur.

340

ENGLISH-LATIN VOCABULARY
restrain

stand
she, ea; haec; ista;
expressed
ilia

restrain, contineo, 2
retainer, cliens, -ends, m.
retreat,

(115); or not
[navi'gl, n.

pedem

refero; terga vert5

ship, navis,

-is,/. (

243. i); navigium,

return, redeo, 4; reverter, 3

short, brevis, -e

revolution, res novae

shout, clamor,

-oris,
i

m.

Rhine, Rhenus,
right, dexter,

-T,

vi.

show, dem5nstr5,
fluvius, fluvi, 7n.

-tra,

-trum
71.
;

Sicily, Sicilia, -ae,/

sick, aeger, -gra,

river, flumen,-uiis,

-grum

road, via, -ae,/.

side, latus, -eris, n.

Roman, Romanus, -a, -um Rome, Roma, -ae,/.

row, ordo,
-inis,

siege, obsidio, -onis,/ since, cum, with subjv. (396); the abl.

m.
rumor,

abs.{%^ZY)
sing, cano, 3
;

rule, rego, 3

cant5,

rumor, fama,
run, curro, 3

-ae,/".

-5ris,

m.

sister, soror, -oris,/

sit,

sede5, 2

S
sacrifice,

size,

magnitude, -inis,/
-a,

skillful, peritus,

-um

sacrum,

-T,

n.

slave, servus,

-I,

m.

safety, salus, -utis,/.

sail,

slavery, servitus, -utis,/

navigo^
m.
c^wssi, followtTtg

slow, tardus,

-a,

sailor, nauta, -ae,

small, parvus,

-a,

-um -um

sake, for the sake of, a gen.

snatch, rapio, 3
so, ita; sTc; tarn

same, idem, eadem, idem { 287) savages, barbari, -orum, m. phir.

save, serv'o,
i

so great, tantus, -a, -um so that, ut so that not, ut non

;

soldier, miles,

-itis, tu.

say, dico, 3
school, ludus,
-1,

some, often not expressed; quis

m.; schola, -ae,/
-oris,

(qui),

qua (quae), quid (quod);

qua, aliquod

aliqul, ali-

scout, explorator,
sea, mare,
-is,

m.

n.
-a,

second, secundus,
see, video, 2

-um

some some

one, quis; aliquis ( 487)

. . .

others,

alii

alii

(110)

seek, pet5, 3

something, quid; aliquid (487) son, filius, fili, m.

2,
i
;

seem, videor,
seize, occupd,
self, ipse, -a,

passive

<?/"

video

rapio, 3
( 286); sul ( 281)

soon, mox space, spatium, spati, n.

spear, pllum,
spirited,
-I,

-um

n.
acris,

send, mitto, 3 set fire to, incendo, 3

set out, proficlscor, 3

acer,

acre;

alacer,

alacris, alacre

spring, fons, fontis, m.

spur, calcar,
-aris, n.

seven, septem

Seztus, Sextus,

-1,

m.

stand,

sto,

ENGLISH-LATIN VOCABULARY
state
state, clvitls,
-atis. /.
i

341

tree

that, in order that, in purpose clauses,

ut; after :>/,. ,u /-,/,;,/-.

station, conloco,

( 349,

steadiness, constaniia, -ae,/!

stone, lapis,
-idis,
i

m.

366,37that not, Ittol,

after verbs

in j'li/jwic clauses, ne;

storm, oppugns,
street, via, -ae,/.

of fearing, ut ( 349,

story, fabula, -ae,/.

366, 372)the, not expressed

their, gen. plur. of is; reflexive, suus,
-a,

strength,
strong,

vis, (vis),/,
;

fortis, -e

validus,

-um

-a,

-um

16)
-a,

sturdy, validus,
such,
suffer
talis, -e

-a,

-um

their

own,

suus,

-um

16)

then, at that time, turn then, in the next place, deinde, there, as expleti-,>e, not txpressed
there, in that place,
-a,

suddenly, subito

tum

punishment, supplicium do

sufficiently, satis

ibi

suitable, iddneus,

-um

therefore, itaque

summer,
sun,
s*")!,

aestas, -5tis,/.
solis,

they,

ii

hi

isti
i

ill!

or not expressed
i
;

m.

think, arbitror,
third, tertius,
this, hie,
i

existimo,

puto,

supplies, commeatus, -us, m.

surrender, trado, 3
suspect, suspicor,
swift, celer,
-eris, -ere;

-um haec, hoc

-a,
;

is,

ea, id
(

velox, -ocis

though, cum, 7iuth subjv. thousand, mlUe (479)

three, tres, tria ( 479)

396)

word, gladius,

gladi,

m.

through, per, tc/M

thy, tuus,
take, capture, capi5, 3 take part in, intersun
-futurus, -with dat. ( 426)
li.

ace.

-a,

-um
-oris,
I
1:

time, tempus.
to, sign

of dat.

ad,

\\\.

take possession
tall, altus, -a,

of,

occupo,

pressing purpose, ut, qui, xvtth subjv. ; ad, with gerund or o miuli-cto each other, inter
reflexive pron.

-um

</ a

task, opus, operis, n.

teach, doceo, 2
teacher, magister, -trt, m. tear (^), lacrima, -ae,/.
tell, dico,

to-day, hodie toilsome, d virus,

-a,

-um -um

tooth, dens, dentis, m.

nSrro,

top
-a,

of,

summus,

-a,

ten,

decem
-um

tower,

turris, -is,/. ( 243. 2)

-I,

terrified, pertcrritus,

town, oppidum,

n.
-I,

terrify, pcrterreS, 2

townsman, oppidanus,

m.

than, quam that {conj. after verbs of saying and tht like), not expressed

trace, vestigium, vcstrgi, n.

trader, mercator, -5ris, m. train, excrccS, 2

tree, arbor, -oris,/.

that (/nni.),

is; iste; ille

342

ENGLISH-LATIN VOCABULARY
tribe

woman
weak, inflrmus, -a, -um weapons, arma, -5rum, n.plur.;
-orum, n. plur.
tela,

tribe, gens, gentis,/.

troops, copiae, -arum,/. plur.

true, verus,
-a,

-um
tempto,
i

trumpet, tuba, -ae,/

try, Conor,
i
;

wear, gero, 3 weary, defessus,

-a,

-um

twelve, duodecim

what, quis
(

(qui),

quae, quid (quod)

two, duo, duae, duo

479)

483)
(

when,ubi; cum
under, sub, witA
ace.

396)

often expressed

by a participle

or

abl.

undertake, suscipio, 3

unharmed, incolumis,
unless, nisi unlike, dissimilis, -e

-e

where, ubi which, qui, quae, quod ( 482) which of two, uter, utra, utrum (108)
;

while, expressed by a participle

whither, quo

unwilling
(

(be), nolo, nolle, nolul,-

who {rel.), qui, quae

quis ( 483)

482); {interrog.)

497)

up

to, sub, with ace.

whole,

totus, -a,

-um (108)

US, nos, ace. plur. of ego

whose, cuius; qu5rum, quarum, qu5rum, gen. ^qui, quae, quod, rel.; or
-a,

yeXYy superl. degree; maxime; ipse,

why,

</quis, quid, interrog. cur

-a, -um -um

-um(285)
victor, victor, -oris, m.

wicked, malus,
wide,
latus, -a,

victory, victoria, -ae,y.

village, vicus,
-1,

m.

width, latitud5, -inis,/ wild beast, fera, -ae,/

willing
(497)
(be), volo, velle, volui,

violence, vis, (vis),/.

violently,

vehementer

voice, vox, v6cis,y!

win

[a victory), report5, I

W
wage, gero, 3 wagon, carrus,
wall,
-1,

m.

wind, ventus, -i, m. wine, vinum, -i, n. wing, cornu, -us, n. winter, hiems, -emis,/

mums,

-T,

m.

wisdom, consilium,
;

consi'li, n.

want, inopia, -ae,/". war, bellum, -1, n. watch, vigilia, -ae,/.

water, aqua, -ae,/

wish, cupio, 3 volo, velle, voluT, { 497); wish not, nolo, nolle, nolui,
(497)
_

with, cum, with

alone

abl.; sometimes abl.

wave, fluctus, -us, m. way, iter, itineris, . ( 468) via, -ae,/ way, manner, modus, -1, m.
;

withdraw,
without,

se recipere

sine,

with

abl.
;

we,

nos, plur. of ego

or not expressed

woman,

femina, -ae,/

mulier, -eris,/

ENGLISH-LATIN VOCABULARY
wonderful
wonderful, minus, -a, -um word, verbum, -i, . work, labor, -Sris, m. opus,
;

343

seal

year, annus,
-eris, .

-i,

m.

yes, certc;

worse, peior, peius, comp. of malus

worst, pessimus, malus
-a,

-um, superl. of
-eris, n.
i

vcro; or^ more usually^ repeat the verb ( 210) yonder (that), ille, -a, -ud
ita;
;

you, iing. tu plur. v6s

expressed

480)

or not

wound wound

{noun)y vulnus,
{verb)y vulnero,

wreath, corona, -ae,y*. wretched, miser, -era, -erum

your, sing, tuus, -a, -um; plur. vcster, -tra, -trum ( 98. b)

wrong,

iniuria, -ac,/.

seal, studium, studi, n.

INDEX
The numbers
in all cases refer to sections.

a-declension of nouns, 57, 461

a-verbs, conjugation of, 488 ablative case, 48, 50

formation, regular, 320, 321

irreg-

323 agent, expressed by the

ab, 181

ular, 322,

abl.

with a or

absolute, 381 after a comparative, 309 of accompaniment, 104

agreement
of adjectives, 65, 215. a of appositives, Si of predicate nouns, 76 of relative pronouns, 224 of verbs, 28
aliquis,

of agent, 181 of cause, 102 of description, 444, 445 of manner, 105 of

means or instrument, 103

487

of measure of difference, 317 of place from which, 179, 264 of place where, 265 of separation, 180 of specification^ 398 of time, 275
accent, 14-16

alius, T08,

no, 470

alphabet, 1-3 alter, 108,

no
9.

antepenult,

accent

of,

apposition, 80, 81
article,

not used in Latin, 22. a

accompaniment,

abl. of,

104

base, 58
cardinal numerals, 327-329, 478
case, 32. 2

accusative case, 33 as subject of the infinitive, 214

object, 37 of duration

of place to

and extent, 336 which, 263, 266

causal clauses with cum, 395, 396 cause, expressed by the abl., 102
characteristic, subjv. of, 389,

predicate, 392 with prepositions, 340 adjectives, 54, 55 agreement, 65 comparison, regular, 301 by adverbs, 302; irregular, 307, 311,
;

comparative, declension

of,

390 303

comparison
abl. of,

309 degrees of, 300

of

adjectives, 300-315;
31 1-3 1
5'

irregular,

312,315
declension of comparatives, 303
of
first

473' 475
;

of adverbs, regular, 320, 476

83,

irreg-

and second declensions,

93,

469

477 positive wanting, 315

ular, 323,

of third declension, 250-257, 471 with the dative, 143

adverbs, 319

comparison, 320, 323

six adjectives in -lis, 307 complementary infinitive, 215 compound verbs, with the dative, 425, 426

344

INDEX
oonceMhre

345
370-

cUnsM

with cum, 395,

fearing, subjv. after verbs of,

396
conjugation stems, 184 conjugations, the four regular, 126.

372 fero, conjugation

fifth
fflia,

of,

498

or S-declension, 272, 273, 467

488-491
consonants, 2
copula, 21

irregular,

494-500

fflius,

declension of, 67 declension of, 87-89

defined, 173
of,

finite verb,
fio,

cum, conjunction, 395 cum, preposition, 209

dative case, 43 of indirect object, 44, 45 of purpose, or end for which, 437

conjugation

first conjugation,

500 488

first or a-declension, 57, 461 fourth conjugation, 491 fourth or u-declension, 259, 260, 466

with adjectives, 143 with compound verbs, 426 with special verbs, 1 53
dea, declension of, 67

from, how expressed, 178-181 future participle, formation of, 374.*: future perfect, formation of, active,
187. 3 passive, 202 future tense, formation of, 137, 156
;

expressed by the 317 demons^ative adjectives and pronouns, 1 1 2-1 1 5, 290-292, 481 deponent verbs, 338, 339, 493
abl.,

declension, 23, 32 degree of difference,

gender
in

English and

in I^tin,

60

in the first declension, 61 in the

second declension, 72
247 260

in the third declension,

descriptive ablative

and

genitive,

441-

in the fourth declension,

445
descriptive
relative

clause,

with the

in the fifth declension, 272 general observations on declension, 74

subjv., 389, 390 deus, declension of, 468

genitive case

measure diphthongs, 6
difference,

of, 316,

317

English equivalents of, 33. of description, 443, 445 of nouns in -ius ?nd -ium, 87
partitive, 331

direct statements, 414 distributive numerals, 327. 3,

334

domi, locative, 267 domus, declension of, 468 duo, declension of, 479
duration of time, expressed

possessive, 38, 409 gerund, a verbal noun, 402, 403 gerundive, a verbal adjective,

404 with ad to express purpose, 407

of, 290,

by the
hie,

ace, 336
^-declension of nouns, 272, 273, 467 -verbs, conjugation of, 489

declension and use

to read Latin,
1

291

how
i,

consonant, j

conjugation of, 490 ego, declension of, 280, 480 enclitics, 16

ft-verbs,
ed,

i-stems of nouns, 231, 241-244

I-verbs, conjugation of, 491

idem, declension of, 287, 481

iins,
ille,

conjugation of, 49^) extent of space, expressed by the ace.

declension of, 472 declension and use

of,

290-293,

481

346
imperative, formation of, i6i, 175;
regular, 161.2; in

INDEX
ir-

commands, 161 imperfect indicative, formation and use

oi, 133' i34> 165.
I

means, abl. of, 103 measure of difference, abl. of, 316, 317 mflle, declension of, 479 construction
;

imperfect subjunctive, 354

indefinite pronouns

with, 2,31. a, d moods, defined, 121

-ne, enclitic, in questions,

and adjectives, 296,

210 with negative clauses of purpose, 350. II with verbs of fearing, 370 nine irregular adjectives, 108-110
ne, conj., ^Aat
not.,
lest.,
;

297, 484-487

independent clauses, 219

indirect object, 44, 45 indirect questions, 430-432
indirect statements,
infinitive

414-419

as object, 213 as subject, 216

conjugation of, 497 nominative case, 35, 36

n615,

complementary, 215
definition of, 173

nonne, in questions, 210 nos, declension of, 280, 480

does not express purpose, 352 formation of, 126, 174, 205, 206
in indirect statements,

415-419 used as in English, 213-216

inflection, defined, 23 instrument, abl. of, 100./^, 103

nouns, 19. 2 first declension, 57, 461 second declension,7 1-74, 87-92, 462 third declension, 230-247, 463-465 fourth declension, 259, 260, 466
fifth

declension, 272, 273, 467

num,

in questions,

210

intensive pronoun, i^se, declension

and

use of, 285, 286, 481 interrogative pronouns and adjectives,

225-227, 483
intransitive verbs, defined, 20. a
;

number, 24 numerals, 327-334, 478, 479

o-declension of nouns, 71-74, 87-92,

with

462
direct, 37 object, 20 order of words, 68
;

the dative, 1 53 io-verbs of the third conj., 492 ipse, declension and use of, 285,481
irregular adjectives, 108 irregular comparison, of adjectives, 307, 311, 312 ; of adverbs, 323

indirect, 44, 45

ordinal numerals, 327.

2,

478

participial stem, 201. 2

participles, defined,

irregular nouns, 67, 246, 468 irregular verbs,

is,

agreement
formation,

of,

203 204

494-500

declension and use of, 113-116 iste, declension and use of, 290, 292,
iter,

of present, 374. b ; of of future, 374. c, d perfect, 201 of deponent verbs, 375

;

481 declension

tenses
of,

of,

376

468

Latin word order, 68

locative case, 267

translated by a clause, 377 partitive genitive, 330, 331 passive voice, defined, 163; formation
of, 164,
;

202
1

magis and maxime, comparison by, 302 maid, conjugation of, 497 manner, abl. of, 105

penult, 9. 3 accent of, perfect indicative

formation, in the active, 185, 186; in the passive, 202

INDEX
meaning
of,

347
'
.

190

pronunciation, 4-7

definite, 190

indefinite, 190

prosum, conjugation purpose

distinguished from the imperfect,

190
perfect infinitive, active, 195
;

passive,

205
perfect passive participle, 201 perfect stem, 185 perfect subjunctive, active, 361
sive,
;

dative of, 436, 437 expressed by the gerund or gerundive with ad, 407 not expressed by the infinitive,

352 subjunctive of, 348-350, 365-367

pasquality, gen. or abl. of, 441-445 quam, with a comparative, 308

362

person, 122

personal endings, active, 122; passive,

quantity, 11-13

164
personal pronouns, 280, 4S0

question8,direct,2io; indirect, 430-432

qui, declension

place,where,whiiher,whence, 263-265;

names
tiis,

of towns and domus and 266-268

indicative,

pluperfect

active,

187.2;
361
;

passive, 202 pluperfect

and use of, 220,221, 482 quidam, declension of, 485 quis, declension and use of, 225-227, 483 quisquam, declension of, 486 quisque, declension of, 484
reflexive pronouns, 281 relative clauses of characteristic

subjunctive,

active,

passive, 363
plus, declension of,

313
of,

or

possessive pronouns, 97, 98

possum, conjugation
predicate, defined, 19

495

description, 389, 390 relative clauses of purpose, 348, relative pronouns, 220, 221

349

predicate adjective, defined, 55

predicate noun, 75, 76
prepositions, with the abl., 209; with the ace,

result clauses,

384-387

reviews, 502-528 rfls, constructions of, 266

340
1

present indicative, 128, 130, 147

present stem,
26.

distinguished from ipse, 285. a second conjugation, 489

se,

present subjunctive, 344

primary tenses, 356

principal parts, 183

second or o-declension, 71-93, 462 sentences, simple, complex,compound,

219
separation, abl. of, 180
1 78-1 81 sequence of tenses, 356-358 space, extent of, expressed by the ace, 336

pronouns
classification of, 278

separative ablative,

defined, 19.

2.

demonstrative, 481
indefinite, 297,

484-487

intensive, 285, 286, 481

interrogative, 483

specification, abl. of,

398
;

personal, 480 possessive, 97, 98 reflexive, 281

relative, 220, 221

stems, of nouns, 230; of verbs, 184 of the infinisubject, defined, 19. 2

214 subjunctive, formation of the present, 344

tive, 213,

34^
of the imperfect, 354 of the perfect, 361, 362

INDEX
i-stems, 241-244, 465

of the pluperfect, 361. subjunctive constructions

c,

363

irregular nouns, 246 time, abl. of, 275 time, ace. of, 336

characteristic or description, 389,

390
indirect questions, 430-432

purpose, 349, 366, 372

result, 385, 386 time, cause, or concession, with cum,

towns, rules for names of, 266, 267, 268 transitive verb, 20. a tres, declension of, 479 tu, declension of, 280, 480 tuus, compared with vester, 98. b

395' 396

u-declension of nouns, 259, 260, 466

ultima, 9. 3

subjunctive ideas, 346 subjunctive tenses, 342, 343 subordinate clauses, 219
sui,

verbs

declension

of, 281, of,

sum, conjugation suus, use of, 98.

syllables, 8
of,
;

480 494
;

agreement

of,

28

(T,

116
quantity

conjugation of, 126, 488491 deponent, 338, 339, 493

irregular,

division of, 9

494-500
of, 122,

13 sjmtax, rules of, 501

personal endings

164

principal parts of, 183 vester, compaied with tuus, 98. b

vis,

temporal clauses with aim, 395, 396 tense, defined, 120

tense signs

declension

of,

468

vocabularies

imperfect, 133
future, 137, 156 pluperfect active, 187. 2

future perfect active, 187. 3

tenses, primary

English- Latin, pp. 332-343 Latin-English, pp. 299-331 special, pp. 283-298 vocative case, 56. a of nouns in rtis of the second declension, 73. b
\)i

and secondary, 356;

357, 358

sequence

of,

proper nouns in

-ius

and of

third conjugation, 490, 492 third declension of nouns

classes, 231,

ftlius, 88
voice, defined, 163
V0I6,

463

conjugation

of,

consonant stems, 232-238, 464

gender, 247

vos, declension of, 280,

vowels, sounds

of, 5,

497 480 6 quantity

;

of,

12

TEACHERS'

MANUAL

LATIN

OR BEGINNERS

\AUN
MK

L.

DOUGK
normal

in(;AN ^r.MK

TEACHERS'

MANUAL

TO ACCOMPANY

LATIN FOR BEGINNERS

BY

BENJAMIN
PROFESSOR
IN

L.

D'OOGE

THE MICHIGAN STATE NORMAL COLLBGB

GINN AND COMPANY

BOSTON

NEW YORK CHICAGO LONDON

Copyright,

191

By

GINN and COMPANY

ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Oil. 10

fltftenaeam 3Pre<< CINN AND COMPANY- PROPRIETORS BOSTON U.S.A.

tCfte

TEACHERS' MANUAL
INTRODUCTORY
Note. In presenting this Manual the author wishes it clearly underit has been prepared primarily for inexperienced teachers of first-year Latin and that even for them its contents are to be taken as suggestive merely. Ultimately every strong teacher must develop his own method, and the stronger he is the less he will feel bound to follow the methods recommended by others.
stood that

ENGLISH GRAMMAR AND LATIN GRAMMAR

1. As a rule pupils beginning Latin are not well prepared in English grammar. To meet this defect it has been customary to devote some pages to a review of English grammar before

the Latin

grammar

is

begun.

It

has seemed a wiser plan to

combine the review of the former with progress in the latter. Accordingly, in this beginners' book explanations of grammatical terms and concepts are introduced at the points where the study
of the Latin the Latin syntax
syntax.

makes a knowledge of them necessary. Similarly is compared with the corresponding English

Pupils may, therefore, begin the Latin lessons at once with no preceding review of English grammar.

THE INTRODUCTION
duction.
first assignment of work will naturally be the IntroCall the pupils' attention to the Review Questions on p. 4, and use them in the recitation. Besides locating Latium and Rome on the map, pronounce the names and have the pupils

2.

The

locate the other districts of Italy

the Alps, lUyricum, Sicily,

and the surrounding seas. Also and Africa should be pointed out

LATIN FOR BEGINNERS

PRONUNCIATION

3.
first

For the second

class period, read over with the pupils the

seven sections and pronounce the Latin examples for them to imitate. Go over the examples again and again, for an incorrect pronunciation acquired at the outset
is

the pronunciation of the examples and

class period.

8-io

apt to persist. Assign for the third

Begin the third class period with the pronunciation of the examples in 5-7. Then have the exercise in 10 written on the board and the words divided into syllables and pronounced,
being careful about the placing of the accent. You will notice that the rule given for the division of combinations of two or

more consonants
still

differs

given in

many

books.

from the one formerly observed and The old rule has been shown to be

For the fourth class period assign the following incorrect. lesson: Memorizing of the Latin in the exercise in 10 and the study of 11-16.

For the fourth class period have ready on the board a list of twenty words with long vowels marked, including, for the most part, words used before. First have the pupils recite individually and then in concert the Latin exercise in 10. Then, using the word list, let the pupils divide the words into and pronounce the syllables, give the length of each syllable, words. Pupils always confound length of vowel and length of distinction syllable (cf. 13.2, note). Dwell on this point until the
at least
is

clear to

all.

fifth class period in reviewing the whole subject of pronunciation and on the reading of the poem ( 18). One or more stanzas may be assigned for memorizing. The recitation in concert of stanzas learned is sure to be stimulating.

Spend the

outlined above, the average class will be ready to begin Part II after five recitations. This does not mean that the

As

subject of pronunciation

is

finished.

Much

patient effort for

will

many weeks to come will be necessary before your pupils pronounce even tolerably well

TEACHERS' MANUAL

the

4. Probably lack of time will prevent your securing during first year more than the correct pronunciation of the in-

dividual

words

in

a sentence.

If

you have the opportunity,

however, and wish to train your pupils more thoroughly, the following suggestions are offered which will lead to musical,
fluent,
a.

and

effective reading.

When

a vowel at the end of a word

is

followed by a word

beginning with a vowel or ^, the final vowel is only slightly sounded and is run on to the next vowel. Compare English

M'

If the

all-important day has come. Thus, atqu alia, atqu haec.' two vowels are the same they sound like one vowel
:

only
b.

Galba arat

like Galbarat.

So, too, final

feebly or not at described above.

all,

before an initial vowel or h is sounded and the two vowels are run together as Thus, tubam auream is pronounced tub*()
lose their

auream,
c.

omnem hominem as omii^(^) hominem.^ The words es, you are^ and est, he {she, it) vowel when preceded by a word ending in a vowel
pare English you
es, ille est,
're,

is,

or m.

Comtfl

he V, she 's,

it 'j,

mum

the word.

Thus,

meum est, are pronounced tiis,

illest,

meumst (sound

the second

feebly or not at

all).

MARKING OF QUANTITIES
5. For the past few years it has been customary to print Latin textbooks with marked quantities, to assist the pupil in giving the correct pronunciation. Pupils have sometimes been

required to mark all the long quantities in their written work. This, in my judgment, is a mistake, especially in the first year, when so many vital matters of far more relative importance

are demanding attention. For the beginner the quantity of the penult and that of the ultima are of more importance than
the quantity of the other syllables, the former because it determines the word accent, the latter because it often differentiates
1 Do not sound the h counted as a consonant

at

all.

It

always has a feeble sound and

is

not

LATIN FOR BEGINNERS

For this reason it is suggested that marking of quantities on the part of the pupils be limited to vowels in the penult when long by nature and followed by a single consonant, as in dominarum, and to long vowels in the ultima. When a long vowel in the penult is followed by two
one form from another.
the

consonants, as in infirmus, the quantity mark is not needed to determine the accent because the syllable is long irrespective of
the length of the vowel

and the pupil

will

presumably pronounce

the

word

correctly without marking the vowel.

Some go

so far

as to say that pupils who mark all the quantities pronounce no better than those who mark none. This is, indeed, an exaggeris no doubt that the importance of marking quantities during the first year has been much overdrawn and has led to the neglect of weightier matters. The

ated statement; but there

course that

is

here suggested seems to

me

reasonable in

demand

and has been proved

practical in results.

CONDUCT OF THE LESSONS

6.

The Recitation

Period.

Always devote the

first five

min-

utes of the recitation period to the explanation and development of the work for the next day. Make the assignment definite

and do not give more than the class can learn and than you are sure you can cover in the time allotted. Explain all rules. Pronounce paradigms and vocabularies and have the class repeat
them.

Do

not allow pupils to accent the

final syllables

when

repeating paradigms. After the lesson for the next day has been assigned, review rapidly the work of the preceding day. Insist on quick and accurate replies to your questions. Blundering and hesitation
are to be expected in the advance; but the pupil should be made to understand that they are not excusable in the review.

Allowing that one third of the recitation period has been spent as outlined above, the remaining two thirds can be devoted to the lesson of the day. Emphasize its proper subject
strongly in the recitation of each pupil.

Each pupil should be

TEACHERS' MANUAL
called

on

at least once,

and work
rule.

at the

board as well as oral

recitation should
7.

be the daily
Insist

Memorizing.

on the thorough memorizing of para-

digms, vocabularies, and rules. The importance of this cannot be overestimated. Without it progress is impossible. Forms must be known so well that they are recognized at once and

without deliberation. Pupils should be able to give instantly the English for the Latin or the Latin for the English of the

words in a vocabulary, and to recite rules accurately and without hesitation.

8.

Learning the Forms.

drill
is

To

learn the forms thoroughly in-

cessant

blackboard.
year,

necessary, both orally and by the use of the The inflectional system must be mastered the first
far

and requires
a noun
is

more

practice than

any textbook can

provide.

When

to

be declined either orally or at the board,

always to give the meaning, the gender, and the base before giving the declension. In the written work have them
train pupils

put a hyphen between the base and the case termination and have them mark the long vowels in the terminations. In the
third declension the
in

order that consonant

stem should be given as well as the base stems and i-stems may be clearly

distinguished.

When
nouns.

declining an adjective follow the

same method as with

full
its

When
first.

a verb
its

always have
It is

stems given far better for pupils to learn the verb by stems than

be conjugated either in meaning, its principal parts, and

is

to

or in part,

by moods.

Knowing

the stems, tense signs,

mood

signs,

and

personal endings, and what stem to use for whatever form, the pupil is soon able to recognize any form at sight and to give instantly any form of any verb of which he knows the principal
parts.
this

He

should be

made

to understand that until

he can do

he does not know the verbs.

It is a good plan to write near the top of the blackboard before the recitation a number of nouns, adjectives, and verbs, one

6
for each

LATIN FOR BEGINNERS

member
of the class, choosing such

words as occur

in

the lesson of the day. Send the pupils to the board and let each write the meaning of the word falling to him, give its inflection, and construct a sentence which shall contain the

word

in question.

This exercise

may be

varied by the teacher

writing beforehand English instead of Latin words. The pupils will then, first of all, have to write the equivalent Latin.

rapid recitation of paradigms by successive pupils is for example, one giving the nominative, another the genitive, and so on. Daily practice with the blank declension
helpful
;

The

and conjugation schemes to be explained later (see pp. 12, 27) that drill on strongly recommended. It all comes to this, forms cannot be overdone. Especially after the class has been
is

over

all

the regular declensions

should be constant and- merciless.

until

and conjugations this drill And the work is not done

every pupil knows every form.

The learning of words is of no less importance than the learning of forms and cannot be emphasized too much. The special vocabularies should in each case be thor9. Vocabulary.

oughly mastered before beginning to read the accompanying exercises. Train pupils from the very outset to give nouns with
the genitive and the gender, adjectives with their different gender
terminations,

and verbs with

their principal parts.

is

For example,

in reply to the question "

for master the " to the quespupil should answer, dominus, domini, masculine tion "What is the word for goodV the pupil should answer, " " and to the question " What is the word for bonus, -a, -um

"What

the

word

advise

" the reply should be moneo, monere, monui, monitus." However well the vocabularies are learned, earnest efforts on
'i

"

the part of both pupil

retain them.

assistance.
lish

and teacher will be found necessary to reading of reviews and at sight will be of Attention should also be called to the kindred Eng-

Much

words that are given in the vocabularies, and the pupil should be encouraged to think of others. In the textbook provision is made for thorough reviews of words at short intervals.

The

test

on these should be

rigid.

Teachers

will

be able ta

TEAc

Ill.KS-

MANUAL

devise various interesting methods of drilling on words. The following, which may be called the vocabulary roll call, has been

found especially useful. When the class enters the room let it remain standing, each pupil at his place. Pronounce words to the different pupils, English words to be translated into Latin
or vice versa, and
seats, the others
let

those that answer correctly take their

same.

Much

remaining standing until they have done the enthusiasm can be aroused by letting two pupils
a spelling match, for a vocabulary contest.
is

choose

sides, as in

so planned that all the words to be memorized are reviewed three times. This fact, as well as that no

The textbook

vocabularies are assigned after Lesson LX, should give ample time and opportunity for drill and study. 10. Translation. Suggestions for translating from Latin into

new

English are given in the textbook,

p.

194.

Call the pupils' at-

tention to these early in the year and emphasize the importance of forming correct habits from the beginning. It is advisable at
intervals to call for a written translation of passages of connected

Latin.

In these translations

demand good

idiomatic English.

have corrected the papers, have two or three of the best ones read as models for the rest. This practice will do much
to correct the translation jargon that pupils are

When you

prone to employ.

Pupils always find it much harder to translate from English into Latin than from Latin into English. For this reason more

help should be given them for this work. For the first few weeks go over the English-Latin exercise with the class when you assign Do not fail to insist upon a it, and explain all difficult points.
correct order of words.
It is

arrange the English sentence mentally before turning it into Latin.

a good plan to train pupils to in the proper Latin order

If more practice seems to be needed in turning English into Latin than the book provides, invent some sentences yourself, or have the pupils, with closed books, translate into Latin at

your dictation the English of the preceding Latin exercise. Do not have the translation of the English sentences written
in

blank books, which are likely to be handed

down from

class

8
to class.

LATIN FOR BEGINNERS

The Latin Composition
will

Tablet, published by

and Company,

be found serviceable for

this purpose,

Ginn and

much
is

the system suggested there of marking the errors will save you time.
11. Sight Reading.

distinguishing feature of the textbook of simple Latin it contains in the form of dialogues and stories. This material will be found well adapted for sight translation, since the selections contain, as a rule, but

the large

amount

few words not previously learned. power more quickly than work of

this

Nothing develops reading kind and it should be

Pupils need

practiced as frequently as possible. 12. General Vocabulary and Index.

some

in-

struction in the use of the general Latin- English vocabulary and the index. This instruction should be given as early as 136,

where the general vocabulary must be used for the first time. 13. Reviews and Formulas. The lesson of the preceding day
should always be reviewed before the work of the day is taken up (see above, 6). In addition the reviews provided for by the textbook at frequent intervals should be made thorough. You will
find
it

profitable to

make each
in the

the subject of a written

test.

book provide for a review of all the constructions that have been discussed. An unusually careful Study of these Lessons is advisable just before taking up Caesar. It would be a good plan, therefore, to go over them a
last three

The

Lessons

second time at the beginning of the second year.

To

insure completeness

and uniformity
:

in

the answers to

certain constantly recurring questions, the following formulas

are suggested,

i For describing nouns dominam, accusative singular from domina, dominae, feminine. Follow this with the rule for the case. 2. For describing adjectives bonarum, genitive plural feminine from the adjective bonus, -a, -um to agree
.
:

with the noun

of adjectives.
sative plural

Follow with the rule for the agreement For describing relative pronouns quos, accumasculine from the relative qui, quae, quod. It is
.

3.

masculine plural to agree with its antecedent (give the rule for the agreement of the relative); it is in the accusative case

TEACHERS' MANUAL

because (give the reason), according to the rule (give the rule for the case of the relative). 4. For describing verbs ament,
:

active subjunctive present

third
is

from amO, amfire, amivi, amatus,

.

in

It person plural number to agree with its subject the subjunctive mood because (give the reason for the

mood and
It

the rule).

leads to better results for the teacher to designate in advance in the reading lessons such words as are to be inflected

and parsed.

THE LESSONS
Part
11

three of which are reviews.

contains sixty Lessons and Part III nineteen, the last This makes a total of seventy-sue

advance Lessons.
culty in

A class of average ability should

first sixty

have no

diffi-

Lessons, with the accompanying reading selections, by the Easter recess. This will leave sufficient time for the completion of the book by the end of the year.

completing the

The
tain

first six

Lessons are used to review and reestablish cer-

fundamental grammatical principles and to develop the meaning and value of the case forms. American boys and girls have no conception of an inflected language, and it is of no profit to

them to recite paradigms, be it ever so glibly, unless they have some comprehension of what inflection means. The different cases have, therefore, been introduced one at a time, and their
fundamental values established as a prime essential to all progress. It is not until Lesson VII, after all the cases have been gone over individually, that the first declension is given in full.

These

first Lessons will be found very simple, but they have a peculiar value in laying the foundation for all that is to follow.

LESSON
All others arc to the textbook.

Note. References preceded by M. are

to sections in this Manual.

The
matical

object of this Lesson

is

to establish the simplest

it,

concepts.

When

assigning

grampronounce and have

lO

LATIN FOR BEGINNERS

all

repeated by the class

to prepare

the Latin sentences.

Ask

the pupils

and be ready

to give English sentences illustrating

the subject, object, predicate, and verb or copula.

Place special emphasis upon

22. a.

LESSON

II

When assigning this Lesson, pronounce and have the class repeat not merely the Latin words in 26,30, but also the Latin sentences, 31. 11. There are three rules to be learned, 25,28,29. Always
make a
point of having
all

rules

memorized verbatim.
III

LESSON
Pronounce and have the
in

class repeat the Latin sentences

32.1, 34.
Point out that the gist of

32

is

contained in the

last

sentence

in 32.^.

table

In teaching % 2,2) have ready on the board the left half of the which shows the English cases. Then construct the other

half of the table in the recitation period at the dictation of the

pupils.

LESSON IV

When assigning this

have the

Lesson, turn to p. 283 and pronounce and

class repeat the first vocabulary,

this

importance of learning

on the

exercises, 39.

and emphasize the thoroughly before beginning work There should be no need of turning back
properly learned. (See M. 9.) class repeat the Latin sentences in

to the vocabulary

if it is

Pronounce and have the

39' 40In answering such questions as occur in the Conversations, as in 40, train the class to answer by a complete sentence and

not merely by a single word. For example, the answer to the first question is not merely dea, but Diana est dea.

In the English-Latin exercise, order of words. Unless emphasis

39. II,
is laid

insist

upon

this point

upon proper from

TEACHERS' MANUAL

1 1

the very outset, pupils quickly get the idea that the order of words is of little consequence. Have the sentences written on the board
correction.

and corrected. Then have them handed

(See M. lo.)

in for further

LESSON V
This Lesson is especially important because it aims to give the fundamental concept of the dative case. In 43 the pupil is warned against using the dative to express motion through space. If he is curious to know how such a relation is expressed,
tell him that the Latin uses the accuThat mere statement will satisfy him without diverting his attention from the dative, the chief business of the hour. It will be well to have the class memorize the last " But the dative is used," etc. sentence in 43, beginning
it

will

not do any harm to

sative with ad or in.

After the class has pointed out the dative relations in 43. a^ ask the pupils for other examples in English and give some of

your own. Treat the new vocabulary as

in Lesson IV and continue the same method in the succeeding Lessons. Follow the suggestions in M. 9. Pronounce and have the class repeat the Latin sentences in

47.1.

On

the review

it

is

often well for the teacher to read the

Latin sentences to the class and have the class translate with

books closed. In the same way, let the review English-Latin sentences be given orally from dictation.

LESSON VI
This Lesson does for the ablative what Lesson
the dative and
is

does for

relations expressed
fixed in mind.

equally important. by the ablative ( 50.

The

three fundamental

i, 2,

3) must be firmly

After the ablative relations in 50. ^ have been pointed out, ask the pupils to give English sentences containing other examples.

12
In
tive

LATIN FOR BEGINNERS

54 the statement is made that the ending of the adjecshows to which noun it belongs. This is true, but be care-

ful not to say that the adjective

and noun must have the same

ending. See 84. In connection with 55. <3;, have the class give additional examples in English of predicate and attributive adjectives.

In
to

56 we have the first of the dialogues. It is a good plan have some of these memorized and spoken in parts on the

review.

LESSON
correct

VII

insist on the marking of the quantities in terminations (see M. 5) and have the translation of each case written out as in 57. Effective drill on declension forms may be secured by placing on the board a blank declension scheme as follows
:

In the written declension of the nouns (59)

NoM. Sing.
Base Declension

Singular

Plural

NOM.
Gen. Dat.
Ace. Abl.

Using a variety of nouns, point

calling for

to the blank spaces at

random

varied by your giving the English and calling on the pupil for the equivalent Latin form and its location in the scheme. Urge the students
replies.

immediate

The

exercise

may be

to

make blank schemes

of their

own and

drill

by themselves.

Pupils will take an interest in giving the Latin names for the persons and objects in the picture (p. 27). Doubtless the best
in the class will want to know the Latin for other objects than those covered by the preceding vocabularies. It will do no harm to satisfy this encouraging curiosity, though the pupils should not

be expected to remember the words.

Among these

are the door

TEACHERS' MANUAL
(Unua) and window (fenestra) of the cottage
at the left
; ;

the water jar

(uma)

at the right of the

;

the wall (mttrus) door the

;

vine (vitis) growing against the cottage the oil flask (guttus) on the window sill the bowl (patella) from which the farmer
;

eating the basket (canistrum) from which the girl is scattering the grain (frfimentum); and the villa (villa) on the hill (collis) with its buildings (aedificia) and trees (arborfis).
is
;

LESSON
agreement of the nouns drill on the rule, 65.

VIII
in
63.

Begin the recitation by asking the questions

The
up
to

and adjectives

will naturally lead

When

adjectives

and nouns are declined together, either

orally

or at the board, do not permit pupils to give first the noun complete and then the adjective complete, but let each noun form be followed at once by its corresponding adjective, as, domina
bona, dominae bonae, dominae bonae, etc.
Cultivate in your pupils from the very outset a proper regard In 69 note the special emphasis resting on Long^ae in i, on mei in 2, on litA in 3, on altas in 4, on tui
for the order of words.

and mea in cUra in 9.

6,

on

lata

and Longft

in 7,

on fUiabus

in 8,

and on

FIRST REVIEW
It

would be well
first

the

to

to spend two days on this review, devoting a review of the vocabulary and the second to a

review of the grammar. A good way to handle the vocabulary review is to allow two pupils to choose sides, and engage in a

vocabulary contest, conducting it like a spelling match. Go over both the Latin- English and English-Latin vocabularies. The grammar review may most profitably be made the basis
of a written test.
Fill
;

out the summary,

it

505, on the board,

the pupils dictating

or include

in the written test.

14

LATIN FOR BEGINNERS

LESSON IX

Note that

in the declension of

nouns

in -us the vocative sin-

gular should be given because

it is

different

from the nominative.

Tell the pupils that in Early Latin the endings -us and -um were -os and -om. That will make clearer to them the reason for calling this the (9-Declension. Make a blank scheme of the Second Declension as of the First

you did

and

drill in

the

same way.

Be sure

that every pupil can repeat the five general rules for

declension, j^-.a-e.

pronounce the vocabulary (p. 285) emphasize the between the sound of long and short in such words as constantia and oppidum. Note that equus is a word of two Explain that the legatus, syllables (see 7, sound of qu). Roman army, an officer in the translated was, Izeu^enanf, usually
distinction

When you

of high rank and second in

command

to the general himself.

LESSON X
The nouns and adjectives assigned for declension at the end of 79 should be declined both orally and at the board. Make a blank scheme of noun and adjective together and
use
it

for

drill.

In pronouncing the vocabulary

(p.

285) the word populus

.needs special care. Pupils are prone to sound the long or not. as in short the sound of else to give it 0, English In 82. 1. 10, be sure that laborant is accented on the penult

In 82. 11. I and 3, refer the pupils to 77, footnote the correct translation of does praise and does love.

i,

for

LESSON XI
declension and

Place on the board a blank scheme of the complete adjective drill on it until replies are immediate.

84

will

In

86. 1. 4, drill

need careful explanation and illustration. on the pronunciation of Populus Romanus

to bring out the distinction

between long and short

0.

TEAC'HKKS'

MANUAL
XII

LKSSON
Have

the words assigned for declension at the end of 89 declined both orally and at the board. Point out the fact that

words

in -lus

and -ium are declined exactly

like

words

in -us

and -um except for the genitive and vocative singular. In 90. II we have the first selection of connected reading. Take special pains with the pronunciation and try to secure
effective reading.

Have

the class review 17.

LESSON

XIII
class to

When
that the
in

nouns

taking up in -us and

this

Lesson refer the

71, and show

those ending

-um being disposed

of,

and -ir remain to be discussed. Emphasize the fact mentioned in 92. ^. To the words assigned for declension in 94 add servus pulchcr and equus aeger (sick) to afford drill on a -ue noun
-er

with an -er adjective. Use blank schemes of the complete adjective and of adjective with noun for thorough drill on the whole subject of first- and second- declension nouns and adjectives. When selection 95 is read, the introductory

map

of Italy

should be used for reference.

the dialogue 96 is read, have the pupils find in the offensive and defensive weapons of the legionary. the picture

When

LESSON XIV
The
is

table of possessives in

exceedingly important and

will

98 should be memorized. 98. need careful explanation and

is

full illustration.

In the vocabulary,

p.

286, be sure that magister

accented

on the

penult.
'S.9X.

99.1.2.

there
7.

is.

4.

Note the emphasis on tua as

is

shown by
1 1
.

its

position.

Tua
is

Translate,

Our camp
The camp

99.11.6.
castra
is

emphatic. 8. Mea is emphatic. yours. 1 2. Cf. 2. w castra sunt, because in Latin

plural

l6

LATIN FOR BEGINNERS

LESSON XV

The important point to emphasize in this Lesson is that the expression of cause, means, accompanimeiit, and manner are all included in the with relation of the ablative (cf. Lesson XXX,
where ih^from
relation
is

discussed).

After disposing of io6 the pupils should be asked to give other examples in English expressing similar relations. In 1 07. 1, place the emphasis upon the different uses of the
ablative.
107. II. 5, point out that not only with but also because or for may be used in English to denote cause. Sometimes of from has the same signification, but it is not included here be-

In

cause it is better to keep this preposition free for the expression of the separative ablative and not to confuse the pupil's mind by using it in other relations.

LESSON XVI
Be sure
penult.

that the pupils accent the genitives in -ius

on the

Have
.

the

list

recited several times

and have
alius.

it

put on the

board with English equivalents. 1 1 1 1. 7. Alterius is used here instead of

(See
6.

o^.a.)

So

also in 9.
1
1 1.

II. 4.

/ our fort

in castris nostris.

To

the other

town, not the dative.

LESSON XVII
is

1 1 4. The comparison suggested between the declension of and that of alius shows that the case terminations are practi-

cally the

same.
This table need not be memorized, but should be care-

15.

fully read and used for reference.

116.

The

distinction

between suus and

is

expressing pos-

of vital importance, and pupils are usually slow to grasp it. In the examples it may be pointed out that Galba eius filium vocat may mean also Galba calls her son, and lulia eius
session
is

TEACHERS' MANUAL
liberOs vocat

may mean

Julia calls his children.

Ask

the class

to translate Viri

e&rum puerOs laudant.

In the vocabulary
agriculture
is

qu6 is of motion and

out that the English word (j). 287) point regularly written in Latin as two words. The adverb often translated where, but qu6 is always used with verbs
is

pressions of rest.

thus distinguished from ubi, where, used in exFor example, Ubi est Galba ? where is Galba 1
is

but Qu6 Galba properat ? where 117. The point should be

tives,

Galba hastening 1
that while other adjec-

made

unless emphatic, usually follow their nouns, demonstrative therefore say is carrus, adjectives usually precede them.

We

ea fftma, etc.

In the dialogue ( 118) departures from the normal order shown by Neutrius filius est puer ad latSs Sexti agrOs ; Bellum amant Galli, nOn agri culturam Agricolaene sunt Galli
are
; ; ;

Apud

eds

laudat eds

saepe

Mala

saepe

miseri

multis.

SECOND REVIEW
Conduct
this

review like the

first

one (see

p. 13).
all

The

fol-

lowing Lesson should not be taken up until covered thus far has been mastered.

the ground

LESSON XVIII
It will

be well to make sure that the class can conjugate the

regular English verb in the indicative before taking Latin conjugation.

120.

up the

Compare

the

names given

to the tenses in Latin with

those used in English.

123.

The
s

present stem of

sum
is

is es-,

sometimes weakened
r,

to 8-.

An

between two vowels

regularly changed to

hence

eram, erO, etc. are for esam, esO, etc. The vowels following the stem in the present are thematic vowels, those following it in the imperfect and future are tense signs. These facts should be known to the teacher to meet possible inquiries of bright pupils. If no

questions are asked, nothing need be said about tln-m at this stage.

I8

LATIN FOR BEGINNERS

Be sure
that your pupils give the correct
will

sound of S in these sound it lo7ig if not warned. Make a blank scheme of these three tenses and drill on them until the pupils can give any form and its translation instantly. In writing these inflections, instruct the class to separate by a hyphen the personal ending of each form from what precedes.
forms.

They

The dialogue in 124 brings into use every form of sum thus far learned. Have it memorized, or, on the review, have
the class, with books closed, translate
as you read
it.

it

sentence by sentence

In

125. 9, explain that because is

not a conjunction but a

is

preposition, and that because of industry

to be translated

by

an ablative of cause.

LESSON XIX
126.

The word

stem

is

here used for the

will

first

time.

It is

explained from the teacher.

Instill

in the footnote,

but

need additional explanation

reciting

from the outset correct methods of

(See M.
8.)

and writing

verb forms.
129.

Pronounce each verb

class repeat.

in this

list

with

its infinitive,

and

have the
130.

In English the three forms of expression are called respectively the /r<?j-^;z/, \h^ progressive present and the emphatic
^

present.

Vary the

recitation of verbs

by

calling for the active indicative

present of the verbs love and advise in English, requiring pupils

to translate each person

and number

into Latin.

LESSON XX
Have
students at the board write both the present and imperfect of the verbs in 129. Require them to separate the component parts of each form by hyphens, as, ama-s, ama-ba-s.

In the oral work

make

Lay

stress

on

134.

sure that the accent is properly placed. After students have learned the perfect

they are inclined to the error that either the imperfect or perfect

TEACHERS' MANUAL
may be used
outset.

I9

tinctive force of the imperfect should

indiscriminately to express past time. The disbe made clear from the

136. Insist on the correct pronunciation of proper names. Here, for example, NCo-be has three syllables with the accent

on the first. At this point

vocabulary.

instruct the class in the use of the Latin-English

LESSON XXI
Conduct the written work as
dents should
in the

preceding Lesson.

Stu-

now be asked

to write the first three tenses of the

verbs in 129. The accent of the future

will

shown
stem.

that

it

rests throughout

on the

give no trouble if pupils are final vowel of the present

1 40. Note the emphatic order of Du5s liberOs habet LStOna ; quattuordecim habeO ego, and the emphatic position of mea. After completing 1 40 the whole story should be read through

from the beginning.

LESSON XXII
Before taking up this Lesson read to the class, sentence by sentence, the story of Niobe, and have them translate it with

books closed.

141.
it

Put on the board a blank scheme of these three tenses

for
9.
drill.

and use
145.

1.

Ask why ad silvam

Gi-l-U8

could not be expressed by

the dative.

Vocabulary, p. 288.
Iso an-ti'quu8.

See

7 for

is a word of three sound of qu.

syllables.

So

146.

'all

attention to the difference

Let the class try to translate this selection at sight. between the Latin and English

pronunciation of the tion of magnO.

name

Cornelia.

Note the emphatic

posi-

20

LATIN FOR BEGINNERS

LESSON XXIII
Be sure
that the class

knows

the

first

three tenses of the

first

and second conjugations before taking up the third and fourth. 147. Pronounce these paradigms before assigning them.

Note

that the e in rego

48.

is

short.

Require the class to learn the meanings of these verbs. Call for both oral and board work on these inflections.
After completing 150 the whole story should be read from the beginning. Ask the class to explain the different positions of mei and mea.

LESSON XXIV
151.4.

Have some

verbs of the

first

tions inflected along with those of the third

and second conjugaand fourth.

153. Make prominent the fact that the verbs in the list are intransitive in Latin, and that their meaning is such as to

demand an
155.

indirect object.

English-Latin sentences calling for the use of the dative with intransitive verbs will be found in 158. II. 6-12.

LESSON XXV
156. Pupils always find difficulty in mastering this tense because of the new tense sign and this Lesson will require an unusual amount of drill.

Have verbs of the first and second conjugations inflected in the future along with those of the third and fourth.
158.11.6.
because
precede
it is

emphatic.

The pronoun /(ego) needs 7. The possessive our

9.

expression here (nostris) should

is

its

noun because of the emphasis.

ii.

They

emphatic

express by

LESSON XXVI
% 160.
Write on the board
in parallel

columns the

first

three

tenses of audio and capiO.

Impress upon

the class the resem-

blances and differences.

TEACHERS' MANUAL
i6o. 2.

21

Require the pupils to learn the meanings of these

four verbs.

The imperative mood is introduced at this point rather 161 than later because of its being formed on the present stem, thus completing the formation of the active tenses on this stem in
.

the indicative, infinitive,

and imperative.

THIRD REVIEW
Conduct the vocabulary review like the first one (see p. 13). number of words is less than usual to permit of more concentration on the review of the verb forms.
I'he

For reviewing the verb, place upon the board the following blank scheme and use a variety of verbs for drill on the different
conjugations
:

Verk

Present Infinitive

Present Stem
I'LUR,

Present

{
r

Indicative

Mood

Imperfect Tense sign -ba-

FUTURE
Tense
ri, ii,-bi-

^s"liii.iv,-a..^ 1
Imperative

Mood

Present
j^

{=

511. Make the review questions the basis of a written lesson.

LESSON XXVII
lie

sure that the active forms are thoroughly learned before

taking up the passive. 164. Require the pupils to write side by side the active and the passive personal endings for the purpose of comparison.

22
165.

LATIN FOR BEGINNERS

When
assigning these

paradigms pronounce them

and have the

class repeat.

times before they are given

You may have to do this several correctly. The future will give the
in the case of the active

most

trouble.

In written work require the pupils, as

forms, to

stem, tense sign, separate the component parts form of each personal ending by hyphens. 166. Intransitive verbs are sometimes used impersonally

in the passive, as

maturatur, it is hastened, but there is no advantage in burdening the beginner's mind with that point at
this time.
167. II. 3
is

and

5.

It is well to

remember
in

that the verb

move

always

transitive in Latin

and

a sentence would have an

object.

Such expressions, therefore, as you move and you will move are inserted simply for practice on the paradigms.

Vocabulary, p. 288. learned at this time.

Have

the declension of deus, 468,

LESSON XXVIII
169.

Treat
c.

this article the

same
of the

as 165.
first

169.

Assign some verbs

p.

tions for inflection along with those of the third

Vocabulary,
class the
171.

288.

and second conjugaand fourth. In connection with autem teach the

postpositive.

meaning of the word

Call attention to the emphatic position of

Mala and

the emphatic order of Earn

amabat Cepheus maxime.

LESSON XXIX
172.

In connection with work on the

-iO

verbs assign for

inflection

of the fourth conjugation for comparison. Vocabulary, p. 289. The word locus has also the regular
loci
;

some verbs

masculine plural

but this does not

mean localities,

but places

ox passages in books.

TEACHERS' MANUAL
LESSON XXX

23

177. In synopses give first the active voice throughout and then the passive. This exercise may be varied by giving an active form and then its corresponding passive. Also the teacher
call for the corresponding synopses is laid on the third person, singular and plural, because these forms occur in reading much more frequently than the others.

may

give the synopsis in English and

Latin.

The emphasis

in

178. The constructions flowing from ^t from relation of the ablative are as important as those based on the with relation.

(See Lesson XV.) They are

ablative so called, but
it is

all

embraced under the separative

well to

make

to avoid confusion in the beginner's

mind between

sparing use of this term it and the

ablative of separation. By using the expression the ablative denoting from for the general term all danger of confusion is avoided.
181.

translating

While the English idiom requires the use of by ft or ab with the ablative of the personal agent, it

in
is

important for the pupil to remember that to the

preposition always 181.^. Write

Roman

the

meant yrt/w. on the board a number of simple Latin

will require clear

sentences to illustrate this point.

181.
r.

This point
examples.

explanation and

many

illustrative

Vocabulary, p. 289. In absum do not forget that b before s has the sound of/. (See 7.)
182.
5.
I
.

Place, in the dative. 3. Island, ad with the accusative.

ft

They are kept from the land,

terrft

prohibentur.

LESSON XXXI
With this Lesson we take up the perfect stem and the tenses formed from it
185. in the

Require the class to

inflect

some

regular English verbs

active.
is

present perfect, past perfect,

and future perfect

Oftentimes failure to translate the Latin tenses correctly

to ignorance of the

due

meaning of the corresponding English

tenses.

24

LATIN FOR BEGINNERS

86.

Observe that these endings are not called personal endings though they do serve to point out person and number. Historically they are made up of personal endings and other
elements,

some

of which are of

unknown

origin.

(See Allen and

class repeat these paradigms before assigning them as a lesson. The perfect is the tense that will make the most trouble owing to the shifting accent.
188. Note the emphatic position of Alii, multum, Dubia, magno, semper, saepe. 189. 7. Observe that the English present are may have the force of the future perfect and must then be so translated.

Greenough, 163. a, footnote 3.) 187. Pronounce and let the

LESSON XXXII
190.

It will

pay

to

spend considerable time on

this article.

Use a

variety of English sentences to illustrate the difference between the perfect definite, the perfect indefinite, and the imperfect.
indefinite

Pupils usually fail to distinguish between the perfect and the imperfect.

191.

The
This

perfects of
is

all

four conjugations are here given

together.

contrary to the usual custom, but, as the for-

same for all, nothing would be gained by and there would be a loss of time and of unity them, separating of treatment. Pronounce the paradigms before assigning them.
mation
is

exactly the

191.

I.

It is

obvious that the perfect

is

apt to be quite

different in

form from the present.

:

It is generally

formed

in

one of four ways 1. By adding a suffix to the root or to the present stem, as, amavi (ama-vi), monui (mon-ui), rexi (rgg-si), audivi (audi-vi).

To

this

2.

we may compare the English By a change in the root vowel,

suffix -ed^ as in love^ loved.

as, Pres. capiS, Perf. cepi
;

Pres. veni5, Perf. vgni.

3.

By

Cf. English teach^ taught. letter of the verb, usually with a the first repeating
;

vowel, as, dO,

I give, dedi, I have given reperiS, Ifind, repperi, I have found i^i^x^ only the/ is repeated and no vowel appears).
Compare
English, do^ did.

TEACHERS* MANUAL
4.

25

Sometimes the perfect stem

is like

the present stem,as, vertO,

I turn, verti, I have

How much

turned. Cf. English mt (pres.), cut (past). of the above may be safely given to a class of

beginners must be left to the judgment of the individual teacher. 192. These verbs are already familiar to the class and the
perfects are the only
193.

new

forms.

Review 168, 171, before reading this selection. Kequire the pupils to point out words and expressions that

are emphatic.

LESSON XXXIII
This

Lesson completes the consideration of the forms based

on the perfect stem.

All four conjugations are treated together as in the preceding Lesson. Pronounce the paradigms and have the class repeat before assigning them.

LESSON XXXIV
197. Pupils should be able to reproduce this table of tense formations from memory.

Emphasize the importance of being able to give synopses rapidly and accurately, and make the drill on the
198.

verbs in 198. i severe. 199. The verbs in this

include
all

list together with those in 192 the verbs studied in the preceding lessons excepting the regular verbs of the first conjugation.

200. Ask the pupils to close their books, and read to them, sentence by sentence, the preceding portion of the story, and call on individuals for the translation.

Ask
of
all

for the principal parts and inflection in the tense used the verbs in this paragraph.

LESSON XXXV
of unusual importance because it introdiirr*; the participial stem and the tenses and forms built on it. 203. Emphasize the point that a participle is declined like an
is

This Lesson

adjective

and agrees with

its

noun

in gender,

number, and

case.

26

LATIN FOR BEGINNERS

204. A compound tense is one made up of a participle and an auxiliary verb. Write on the board a number of simple Latin sentences to

illustrate this principle of

agreement, and, leaving

call

off the termi-

nation of the participle in each case, the proper terminations.

206.

on the

class to supply

ciple

and

its allied

Call attention to the fact that the future active partiform, the future active infinitive, are the only

forms

in the active voice

based on the

participial stem.^
is

207.

The

point to emphasize in this exercise

the agree-

ment

of the participle. In I. 7, ask what vocati

sumus would have meant.

LESSON XXXVI
208.

See to

it

that the principal parts

and meanings of these

verbs are thoroughly learned. Caution against mistakes in accent and pronunciation, especially in

the following

ab'sum
resis'to

abes'se
resis'tere

a'fui
res'titi

afutu'rus

repe'rio

reperi're

rep'peri

reper'tus

Point out the changing quantity of

and have the

videre, venit
209. 1, 2.

class distinguish

i in video and of e in veniO, between such forms as videre and

and v6nit. These articles summarize preceding scattered work on prepositions. Show that by learning what prepositions govern the ablative we can recognize those that govern the accusative.

The complete list of prepositions governing the ablative includes also absque, cOram, prae, and tenus. They are omitted
from the textbook because of

their relatively infrequent use.

210.^.

The

enclitic is
is

added

e in -ne has a very short, quick sound. The to the emphatic word in the question and that

usually the verb.

1

The

supine

is

not discussed in this book and hence

is

not included.

TEACHERS' MANUAL
Vocabulary,
p.

27

290. Caution on the accent of sinis'ter. word ubl is never used in the sense of interrogative when. For that the Latin uses quandO.

Note

that the

FOURTH REVIEW
This review,
like the third,

contains but a short word

list,

vocabularies in the preceding lessons having been reduced to a minimum to permit of greater concentration on the verb. To
facilitate

leave

form

verb drill place on the board the following scheme and there for daily use until the pupils can give instantly any of any verb of which they know the principal parts.
it

Verb
Prin. Parts

Stems

28
2 1 3-2 16.

LATIN FOR BEGINNERS

that the pupils understand these English before taking up the corresponding ones this end write on the board a number of simple

Be sure

infinitive constructions

in Latin.

To

English sentences illustrative of these different uses of the inAfter discussing them from the English standpoint, finitive. show how they would have to be expressed in Latin and, if the
;

sentences are simple enough, they

may be

translated into Latin.

214.

You might

explain that the subject of the infinitive

was and

thought of as the object of the principal verb for that reason it was placed in the accusative case.
originally

215. A verb of incomplete predication is one that requires another action of the same subject to complete its meaning. Vocabulary, p. 291. Observe that veto is an irregular verb of

the

conjugation. Look out for the accent in ve'tui, ve'titus. 217. 1. 2. Cibo et vino, ablative of separation with egere, which is the subject of est. 11. Id occupari, subject of erit.
first
.
.

Romanis, dative with gratum.

LESSON XXXVIII
221. Pronounce this paradigm when assigning it. Note the ending -ius in the genitive and -i in the dative, as in the nine
irregular adjectives ( 108).
226. Quis is not infrequently used as an adjective, but it seems better not to mention it in this connection in order that the distinction between pronoun and adjective may be left as

clear as possible.
228. 1. In this exercise place the emphasis upon the forms and constructions of the interrogatives and relatives. With the

relative dwell especially

upon the point

that

its

case

is

determined

by the

way
life

it is

used

in its

own

clause.

of the

1 00 should afford material for a brief discussion and customs of the ancient Germans. Note the return home of the warriors, and the captive Roman with fettered hands. Perhaps you have enough ingenuity to construct a litde

The

cut on p.

Latin story with the picture as a text. 229. Let the class try to read this passage at sight.

TEACHERS' MANUAL
LESSON XXXIX

29

Up

to this point, in discussing declensions

base, as this is of

we have worked

from the

learning the forms.

practical value to the student in In the third declension, however, the start-

more

ing point
classified

must be the

stem, because third-declension

nouns are
to

according to their stem ending.

Take time

make
stem.

clear to the pupils the difference

p.

between the base and the

291. Call attention to the difference in quanVocabulary, a foot soldier, and pedes, feet, the plural tity between pedes,
of p6s.

234.11.1. The word

4.

to

be used for ship

is

nivigium.

Translate y>v/w by d6 (see 179. a).

LESSON XL
235. It is important to emphasize the point that nouns of Class II are exactly like those of Class I except for the absence of -s in the nominative singular. The multiplicity of paradigms
is

apt to confuse the beginner unless their practical identity

clear.

is

made very

Vocabulary, p. 291. Point out that the declension of homd, hominis is exactly like that of 6rd6, Ordinis. 237. II. 2. To your dwelling, why not render by the dative }
3.

From wrong, what use

of the ablative

6.

The baggage,

etc.,

see 213.

LESSON XLI
238. Note that these neuter of consonant stems.

nouns

also belong to Class II

There

is

more

difference here between the base

and the

nominative.

This increases the importance of always learning

the genitive with the nominative.

238.
I.

The most important

9.

of these rules as applied to

this declension is 74. ^.

239.
abl. of

I.

means.

Bracchiis suis, in his arms, in Latin by his armSf 10. Virtute, abl. of cause.

30

LATIN FOR BEGINNERS

For saving the life of a citizen in battle the reward was a crown of oak leaves known as the corona civica. See the cut,
p. 1 06, of a coin bearing the corona civica and the inscription ob civis servatos, for the savmg of citizens.

LESSON XLII
Dwell on
this

Lesson

until

you are sure that consonant stems

this selection

of the third declension have been mastered.

In connection with the translation of

the class from

read to

some Roman

history a short

and

spirited account

of the invasion of the Cimbri and Teutones and the great battle
in

which they were destroyed by Caius Marius.

240. Dili et acriter

pugnatum

est, the battle

was

lo?ig

and

fiercely contested.

LESSON

XLIII

241. Teach the class that the first thing always to be done with a noun of the third declension, before it can be declined, is to determine whether or not it is an i-stem. To do
this,

mastery of the rules

in this article is absolutely essential.

Call

on each pupil

to repeat them,

and review them

at frequent

intervals.
243. When writing declensions of i-stems, require pupils to write both the stem and the base., as shown in the paradigms. 243. I.

Require

this list to

be memorized.

244.

2.
-i-

Animal and
of the stem.

the final

244. 3.
calcar.

examples of the dropping of In insigne it has been changed to -e. Note the shortening of a in the nominatives animal
calcar are

and

245. 1. 7. In connection with this sentence and the cut below, refer the class to the description of the Roman galley " in Wallace's Ben Hur."
245. II. I. Because of the lack, abl. of cause. 2. Imperator should be placed first because it is the common subject of the principal and subordinate clauses. This rule of order is usually

observed in careful writers.

TEACHERS' MANUAL
LESSON XLIV

31

246. Point out that these nouns are irregular only in having two bases. Note the shortening of i before m in vim (of. 1 2. 2). Pronounce and have the class repeat the forms of iter. Show

that in spite of irregularities they follow 74.^,^. 249. L Refer to the historical fact that Caesar built the

first

bridge over the Rhine. Imperfttor, vir clirus, in English simply

the distingtiishcd

commander.
the position oi foot soldiers^ see

249. IL 245. IL I.

7.

On

Manual on

FIFTH REVIEW
of the

Review the word lists in the usual way. Put the emphasis "Review Questions" on the third declension. Fill out the summary, 520, on the board, the pupils dictating; or include

it in the written test. In this review, as in all others, include questions on the conjugation of verbs. Drill on verbs cannot be

overdone,

LESSON XLV
254. Observe that in the declension of ftcer the masculine and feminine forms are alike in all cases except in the nominative singular, and that the neuter ficre is declined just like

insigne.
256. I. As we are told in 257, there are some adjectives of one ending having consonant stems. Many of these have

adopted
-i

all

the forms of i-stems, but frequently

we

find both

and

- in the ablative singular.

Fjcplain that the letters S. P.

cut stand for Senfltus Populusque

Q. R. below the eagle in the ROminus. They were used

with great frequency on all sorts of objects to mark the power or sanction of the Roman government. By an interesting survival the

same

letters

may

still

be seen

in

modem Rome on
to the

fire

engines, public wagons,

and other objects belonging

dty

government

32

LATIN FOR BEGINNERS

LESSON XLVI

first,

Along with this Lesson conduct a brief oral review of the second, and third declensions. 260. Pronounce the paradigms for the class when assigning them. Also write on the board the declension of exercitus and drill the class on the pronunciation and accent of the forms.

LESSON XLVII
This Lesson may be simplified by pointing out that the different relations of place are regularly expressed by prepositions with their objects (cf. 263-265), but that names of towns,

domus and rus omit the preposition (cf. 266). The remains to be explained is the use of the locative that only thing case ( 267, 268). Simple as this whole matter is, you will
small islands,
find
it

Vocabulary,
is

necessary to do a good deal of drilling here. p. 294. Explain that propter with the accusative
to express cause than the

somewhat more frequently used

especially of

ablative,

a cause lying

outside of

the

person
read

affected.

271.

It will

amuse and

interest the pupils

if

you
"

will

to them, in connection with this story, the travesty and Icarus," in the poems of John G. Saxe.

Daedalus

LESSON XLVIII
this Lesson you should assign for inflecnouns from all five declensions. 273. Pronounce and have the class repeat these paradigms. Be especially careful about the sound of long and short e. 275. Write on the board some simple English sentences which, if rendered into Latin, would illustrate this construction. Pupils will understand time when more readily than time within

In connection with

tion

which.

277.

Note the emphasis on minim,

1.

6.

TEACHERS' MANUAL
LESSON XLIX
With
which
is

33

this

Lesson begins an intensive study of pronouns, continued through the next three Lessons. Review

the possessive ( 98), relative ( 220), and interrogative ( 225) pronouns by way of preparation for the consideration of the

whole subject.
280. I. Remind the pupils that the personal endings of the verb take the place of unetnphatic personal pronouns used as subjects.

282.
is

In connection with this article remind the class that

cum
j).

similarly placed with relatives

I.)

and

interrogatives.

(See

100, footnote

283. Li,
possessives.
II
-.7.

2.

Have

the class explain

tti

the position of the

}

5.

Why

are

and ego expressed

Make you and /emphatic by expressing them. emphatic. 6. Make / emphatic. 7. Us and you
I
.

4.

Make
of

are,

ourse, datives.

284.

Have

the story read through from the beginning.

LESSON L
285.
287.

Explain the meaning of intensive. Pronounce the forms in this paradigm and have the

lass repeat.

The

class will find the accent troublesome.

Insist

on the

distinction

between idem and idem.

Vocabulary,
etc.,

p. 295. Caution on the accent of corpus, cor 'ports, as distinguished from labor, labO'ris, etc.

LESSON

LI

290.

Explain that demonstrative mtzns pointing out.

Tell the pupils that the c of hie is the remnant of -ce, an enclitic particle added for emphasis. Compare the colloquial

291.

t/iis

here. Without this the dative singular would end in -I, like the dative singular of is or ipse. Call attention to the form haec as the only variation in the plural from the plural of bonus. Call

34

LATIN FOR BEGINNERS

nouns that have
illi'us.

for the declension of hie in combination with

lately occurred.
292.

Caution on the accent of isti'us and

noun.
p.

293.

Observe that the demonstrative adjective regularly

its

precedes

Vocabulary,
pris'tinus.
294. I.
1.

295.

Caution on the accent of

liber 'tas

and

5.

Silvas, feras, montes, objects of timent.

The

chief drill in this exercise should be

on the declension

and meaning of the demonstratives.

LESSON
You
this

LII

will probably have to devote three recitation periods to Lesson. Pupils always find difficulty with indefinite pronouns.

297.

This whole
all

article

on the board meaning and

the indefinite pronouns given and

needs very thorough study. Write drill on their

illius follows its

use.

298. 1. 10.

Observe that

noun.

In

this

position ille has the

298. II. 3. thing to some one, alicui aliquid. 6. Some one, aliquem quemquam. 7. Unless some one, nisi quia.
1.

meaning that well-known^ that famous. Caution on the position of Pompeii. 4. Some;

any

one,

299.

Have

the story read through from the beginning.

5.

Ei, indirect object of dedit.

SIXTH REVIEW
This review is especially important and may well occupy the time of three recitation periods. One of these should be devoted to the vocabulary another to adjectives of the third declension,
;

declensions, the expressions of place, and the ablative of time; the third to indefinite pronouns. Strong classes may combine the last two in a single written lesson.

the fourth and

fifth

LALHLKb MANUAL
LESSON
302.
It

35

LI 1 1

well to tell the class that comparison by mostly poetic and that it is usual only with e or i. adjectives ending in -us preceded by Vocabulary, p. 296. Caution on the accent of a'quila.

may be
is

using adverbs

306.
its

I.

5.

Longius, quite long.

12.

Quidam

usually follows

noun.

Cf.

quoddam

in 10.

306. IL 5. Quite ill, aegrior. 6. Some, aliquOs or quOsdam according as the word is considered to be more or less indefinite. " " The Labors of Hercules (p. 197), which may be begun at
this point, will

be found very easy to translate.

as possible.

It

is

recom-

mended
ticed as

that with these selections translation at sight be prac-

much

No

exercise will be found

11.)

more

helpful in acquiring reading

power. (See M.

LESSON LIV
307. Gracilis and humilis are not as common as the other words, but it is about as easy to learn the complete list of six

as to learn four, and the knowledge will be useful later on. Vocabulary, p. 296. Caution on the accent of alacris.
is

The

penult being divided into syllables thus a-la-cris. See9.2.; 13. i.<j. 3io.L In the Latin- English sentences, have the pupils
:

short because

it

does not end

in

a consonant, the word

change such as contain the ablative after a comparative without

quam

into sentences using the alternative construction.

II.

310.

ing a comparison (i,

Require the pupils to write the sentences contain2, 3, 8) both with and without quam.

LESSON LV
311, 312, are very comparison should be thoroughly learned. 313. Observe that in the plural plQs
adjectives in
i-stem, excepting the

The

common and
is

their

declined like an

form plQra.
c(ipia, translate, quite

3 1 4.

1.

9.

Maior

supply.

36

LATIN FOR BEGINNERS

LESSON LVI
315. The meaning and comparison of these adjectives

should be memorized, but they need not be learned as a list. 316. Review 50 to make clear the point that the measure

of difference
words.

is

an ablative

relation.

317.^. Require the pupils to learn the

Vocabulary,
p.

meaning of these

297.

Remind

the class that b in obses has the

sound of

p.

318.

I.

Call attention to the agreement of infirmi with

4.

Romani and
7.

refer to 2 15. ^.

Have

this

given without quam.

Note the emphatic 318. IL 2. Have

position of optimos.
this

sentence given both with and with-

out quam.

LESSON LVII
320.^. Of course the neuter accusative singular
the
will

be

same

in forn) as the neuter

is

comparative adverb
adverbially
(cf.

nominative singular, but the the accusative case of the adjective used
is

322). 323. Explain that magnopere

the ablative singular of

magnum opus used adverbially. Vocabulary, p. 297. Caution on the accent of cucur'ri. Note
the change of quantity of e in gens, gentis.

326.

7.

Ask what

aliquae would
all

mean

instead of quaedam.

Require the comparison of

this exercise.

the adjectives and adverbs in

LESSON

LVIII

328. Write several sets of Arabic numbers on the board before the recitation, one set for each pupil, and send the class

to the board to write the Latin equivalents.

Mistakes in

spell-

ing are sure to be made.

Drill orally also.

Repeat

this drill for several days.

329. 3. Observe that tres is declined exactly like the plural of omnis (255), and that the plural of mille is like that of

insigne ( 244).

TEACHERS' MANUAL
330-

37

Warn

the

numbers

the class against using a partitive genitive when and words of quantity include the whoUy and not

must then use a case in agreement, and not For example, all of us would not be expressed in Latin by omnSs nostrum, but by omnCs nOs {we all). 33 1 <^. You will need to drill on the construction with mille.
merely a part.
the partitive genitive.
.

We

Dictate several simple examples to pupils at the board. Vocabulary, p. 297. Caution on the accent of merci'tor and
cog'nitus,

and note the long

in mOnitiO.

332.1.1. Ask the pupils burrud all of the buildings.

to give

the

Latin for

Orsar

LESSON LIX

333.

Conduct the work on the ordinals as on the

cardinals.

334. Only the first three of these are given, because they are the most frequently used.
336. It is important that you point out to the class that the accusative expressions of time and space are adverbial in character and hence are used to modify verbs, adjectives, or

adverbs.

In Lesson

LXXVI we

shall see that adjective expres-

sions of time
days, a 7vall

and space are of ten feet.

p.

in the genitive, as,

a march of ten

Vocabulary,
literally
is

298.

the neivest line,

and

Explain that novissimum agmen means that it signified the rear because that

be trusted

where the newly enrolled soldiers marched. They could not in a place of danger or responsibility. C'aution on the accent of ce'cidi. Explain that a Roman pace was the distance from where the

where the same foot touched the ground not a single, but a double, step. again. 337. I. Mention here that Caesar's seven years of campaigning in Gaul are the subject of his famous Commentaries. 337. n. Call attention to the phrase For tivo hours in 6
foot left the

ground

to

It is therefore

and In

three hours in 7.

the latter time within which.

The former expresses extent of time, What cases must be used ?

38

LATIN FOR BEGINNERS

LESSON LX

493 the full synopsis of deponents is given. of course, learn the synopsis only as far as they have gone in their study of conjugation, omitting the subjunctive, etc. 340. There is no profit in requiring pupils to learn this
339. Students
will,
list.

In

Have them
list

learn simply the meanings.

The

case

is differ-

ent with the

of prepositions governing the ablative. Vocabulary, p. 298. Caution on the accent of e'gredi, con'-

sequor, in'sequor, sub'sequor.

341.1. 7-11. It may be well to about Caesar's invasion of Britain.

tell

the class something

SEVENTH REVIEW
Its length,

This review covers a larger vocabulary than any of the others. however, is more apparent than real. It will not

if you will point out to them the fact that irregular adjectives are given in their different degrees, and that the adverbs are, in general, known by the adjectives from which they are derived.

appear so formidable to the pupils

It is

the

suggested that two days be devoted to this review, first, on the vocabulary; the second, a written lesson on

the review questions.

PART

III

Read over with the pupils the introductory note and discuss with them what remains to be done. Point out that the succeeding Lessons contain no special vocabularies and that the words already studied are to be gone over again. " The Story of a Roman Boy " contains much general information pertaining to Roman life and customs, and still more of
special information dealing with the
is

Roman
and
is

art of war.
to

This

found especially

in the latter part

designed

form a

suitable introduction to the reading of Caesar.

It is suggested in the note that the story may be read either along with the Lessons or after the Lessons are finished. Experience seems to show that the former is the better plan. The

TEACHhRb MANUAL
cussed

39

successive chapters of the story illustrate the constructions disin the Lesson immediately preceding, and, coming as

they do between the Lessons, pupils have a chance to digest what they have just learned before they are called upon to take up something new.

LESSON LXI
Pronounce and have the class repeat these paraExplain the formation fully in each conjugation and emphasize especially the importance of .the mood sign.
344.

digms.

346. The importance of a thorough mastery of this article cannot be overestimated. It lays the foundation for all future work on the syntax of the subjunctive. It would be well

to

have the class memorize the Latin sentences with their

,

translations.

347- Write on the board other English sentences, some

of which would in Latin require the subjunctive and others the indicative, and have the class specify in each case.

LESSON LXII
350. Require the class to

memorize

this

article

and the

examples
352.

in

351.

Dwell on the point that Latin prose does not use the
express purpose.

infinitive to

Prepare additional simple sentences containing purwhich the class tan translate orally or at the board clauses, pose from dictation.
353.

LESSON
i^

LXIII

354. I'ronounce and have the class repeat these paradigms. 356. The law of tense sequence is of great importance. Write the table in 357 on the board, and keep it there until

every pupil has mastered

I.

its theory and its practice. the 360. Change principal verbs in these sentences to a the class make the necessary changes tense and have primary

in the tenses of the

dependent subjunctives.

40

LATIN FOR BEGINNERS

360. II. After these sentences have been correctly written them again, changing the tenses of the verbs from

assign

secondary to primary.

LESSON LXIV
361-364. Pronounce and have the class repeat these paraIn the perfect and pluperfect passive subjunctive call attention to the similarity in formation between the subjunctive

digms.

and

indicative.

make

366. Require the class to memorize these examples, and clear, by reference to 348, the reason for the use of the

subjunctive mood.
368. 1. 7. Explain that with peto, postulo, and quaero the person from whom something is asked is expressed by the ablative with a preposition. The usual preposition with peto
is a or ab, with quaero it may be a or ab, de, or ex. a subjunctive clause follows these verbs the person asked may be omitted after the verb of asking and expressed merely as the subject of the subjunctive verb. See 366, example 3.

and postulo

When

368.

II. 3.

They will ask him^

5.

etc.,

cL note on

I.

above.

5. Cf. 366,

example

LESSON LXV
369. Pronounce and have the class repeat the paradigms of the subjunctive of possum. For the formation of the imperfect

subjunctive,

cf.

354-

370,371. Dwell on the point that the reason for transdifferlating ut by that not and ne by that or lest is due to the ence between the English and Latin idioms, and that in the Latin itself ut and ne have the same meaning after verbs of fearing
as after other verbs.

LESSON LXVI
374. Write on the board the participles, active and passive, of the English verb to love, and emphasize the point that Latin

has no present passive participle {being loved) nor any perfect

active participle {having loved).

TEACHERS' MANUAL

4I

374.^. Require the pupils to give the meanings of the

participles as well as the forms.

made

375. This article is very important, especially the point in a that the perfect participle of a deponent verb is pas-

sive in

377.
lay lated

form but active in meaning. Insist on a careful study of these model sentences, and stress on the fact that as a rule a participle should be transby a
clause.

LESSON LXVII

379.

The

ficulty are the

subjunctive. pupils accent the penult in the first and second persons plural of the present and imperfect subjunctive, and compare the similar

tenses of these verbs which will give most difpresent indicative and the present and imperfect Give them especial attention. Be sure that the

tenses of possum.

For the formation of the imperfect sub-

junctive, cf. 354.

380, 381. Possibly no Latin construction is so much used as the ablative absolute, and you will do well to make the work

on these

articles exceedingly thorough. Among the points to be emphasized are: a. The ablative absolute must not be used when a noun and

participle

form the subject or object of a sentence (sec 381,

ablative absolute should not as a rule be translated
If).

note
d.

2).

The

literally
c.

(see 380.

English absolute construction containing a perfect active participle must be changed to the passive voice unless the verb

An

happens

late,

to

be deponent (see
6. Translate, C?

382.

381, note 3). hearing the shoutings

etc.

7.

Trans-

After Ccesar
this

had encouraged

the legions^ etc.

8. Translate,

When

was
4.

kncnvn, etc.

382. n.

To advance, the subjunctive of purpose.

381, note
i.

5.

Since

Casarwas

lecuUr, see

42

LATIN FOR BEGINNERS

LESSON LXVIII

The reason for the use of the subjunctive to express not discussed, being a subject too difficult for the average beginner to understand. It is better for him to accept the fact than to labor with the theory. (Teachers are referred to

384.
is

result

Allen and Greenough's

Grammar,

534.)
result
is

Emphasize the point that the subjunctive of lated like an indicative (see 384. c).

trans-

Note the object clause of result. There is another 12. Note the negative purpose. Ask how the sentence would be translated if ne were ut non. 388. II. Observe that sentences 4 and 6 contain result clauses, and 5 and 7 purpose clauses.
5.

388 L

in the eighth sentence.

LESSON LXIX
389. Have these model sentences memorized. 391. This construction may be profitably compared with

that of the double object in English. non visa sint, such as have 394. 1. I. Quae
. . .

fiof

been seen,

a relative clause of characteristic.

sent, by

4.

Quo mortem
7.

prohibere pos-

which they could ward off death.

not the
II. 4.

Translate,

The Ger-

mans are

394.

men to, etc. Not the man to,

cf. I. 7.

EIGHTH REVIEW
527. We here begin the second review of the vocabularies, without counting the work done on each special vocabulary in the recitations on the Lessons. After all that preceding study this final review should not be difficult, but should serve to fix the

minds beyond fear of losing them. not already done so, add the subjunctive have you 528. mood and the participles to your blank scheme of the verb (see p. 27) and drill on all moods and tenses as a daily exercise.

words

in the pupils'

If

To

the question Why " occurrence in Latin

.?

'*

is
it

the ablative absolute of such frequent may be answered that the absence of

TEACHERS' MAM UAL

a perfect active participle is an important reason leading use of this construction (cf 381, note 3).
.

43
to tin-

LESSON LXX
395. Dwell on the point that the reason for the use of the subjunctive in a cum clause and in a relative clause of description is the same ( 389. a). It will help the student to tell him that an indicative clause

with cum fixing the time of the main action is very often preceded by tum or some other expression of time. See the first example under 395, and 400. L 10 IL i. further, cum concessive is often followed by tamen, nevertheUss.
;

397.

<7.

The

ablative of specification

is

closely akin to the

ablative of

manner and shows some resemblance to that of means and of cause. It, therefore, comes under the with or by

ablative relation.
399. The idioms included in this and the following lessons are very common in Caesar. Require the class to memorize them. The labor spent will be well rewarded later.

Explain that certior in certior

and must agree with the subject,

facere
is

fieri is a predicate adjective just as certiOrem in certiOrem

a predicate adjective agreeing with the object.

LESSON LXX

404.
like

Remind

does

in -us, is declined like bonuSf-a,

the class that the gerundive, ending as it -um, and agrees with its

noun

405.
a.

any adjective. This article merits very careful study.

Have

the class

memorize the examples and

especially the observations under If these are well understood the pupils will have no trouble

with the gerund and gerundive. Point out to the class that a gerund must end in

-i, -,

or -um,

and

that

any other ending

will

mark

the form in question as

gerundive.
406. 2.

Observe that the presence of a preposition forbids

the use of a gerund -f object

44

LATIN FOR BEGINNERS

411. I. In teaching this exercise require the pupil in every case to distinguish between the gerund and the gerundive. If the gerund has an object, ask him to give the corresponding

gerundive construction. In the case of a gerundive, ask for the corresponding gerund construction and whether it would be

good Latin.

LESSON LXII

412.

In connection with the study of

eo,

have the

class

learn the declension of iens, the present participle (see 472). 413. Point out the force of the prepositional prefix in each

of these

in

compound verbs. Be sure that the class understands indirect statements English before taking them up in Latin. 415. To make the comparison more easily, write the Eng414.

lish

and Latin

direct

and

indirect statements
a, b,

side

by

side.

Dwell especially upon

Point out that

and

c in this

upon the board and the

preceding

article.

we have

here a use of the

infinitive quite foreign

to the English uses discussed in Les-

son

XXXVII.

420. Write a number of simple English sentences containing indirect statements introduced by verbs of saying, tellifig, k?iowing, thinking, and perceiving, and discuss with the class
If you make the sentences easy enough, the class, with your aid, will be able to render them into Latin. 422. I. 2. Remember that in a form like iisse the two i's

their Latin translation.

are usually contracted into long i. 5. In this sentence and in those that follow require the class to give the Latin for the direct form of the indirect statements. In this case, for example, the direct

form would be Galli flumen transigrunt.

LESSON LXXIII

424.

Remind
I.

the class of the rule for the formation of the

imperfect subjunctive,

354.
Call

Caution on the accent of these compounds. attention to the force of the prefix in each verb.
424.

TEACHERS' MANUAL

45

425. Emphasize the point that it is the meaning of the compound verb that calls for the dative, and not the preposition with which the verb is compounded. 426, note I. Caution on the accent of these verbs.

428.

II. 4.

We

have been informed,

in Latin,

We have been

made more

certain.

LESSON LXXIV
430.

Students usually have trouble

indirect questions.

in

distinguishing be-

tween direct and

Give a number of English

examples of each.
stress

These examples should be memorized. Lay great b, and c. 434. I. Write the direct form of the indirect questions on the board and have the pupils compare it with the indirect form.

43

on

</,

LESSON LXXV
Ask whether ad locum dgligendum 439. a gerundive construction. The form would be
I. 2.

is

a gerund or

the

same

for

either, but the

presence of the preposition shows that it must be a gerundive (cf. 406). 3. Translate ipsum, veryid. 285).

LESSON LXXVI
these examples memorized. Give other examples in English calling for the same construction if rendered into Latin.
442.

Have

447.
10.

I.

3.

Ask why qu5

2 is
if

Footnote

preferred here to ut Cf. 350. I. very important. Illustrate the point by freis

quent examples
447. II.

necessary.

Have

sentences admitting either the genitive or

the ablative written in both ways.

LESSONS LXXVII-LXXIX
These Lessons, embracing as they do a review of all the consiructions used in the book, assume an unusual importance. Make the review as searching and rigid as possible. (See M. 13.)

.'\/v.Arf.; :f-^

'J,:

,'Vt
'

'^J^Lii'^'t^-<' -J

-'^

-''"'

-.''-

.,^*>*-''
;-

>i--f'i
.

i-:.'^

*'*.,

.^-'^/r'
.

"t?*--/^-

-.:

.'c-':

<
i-

"^

'i^

^-^/^

V^.-,

>:-:- ..'-.^-

"

'

;;/ .-]-^

'

iV^

.'

*.

,r->

f^"^^^::-g,...
?i3;v

/.r^..
",:',,

fJ^;.^.j>f-"."^''-,' ./-:V^^^-\-V'-- -x^''^-&-?'-.'; >^^v'^'ivV'^

-'f'-V

;-'*:.

--'

^^g^:^:^^^.u,y

RETURN TO

the circulation desk of any

University of California Library

or to the

NORTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY

BIdg. 400,

FACILITY

Richmond

Field Station

University of California

Richmond,

CA

94804-4698
7

ALL BOOKS MAY BE RECALLED AFTER

(415) 642-6753

DAYS

2-month loans may be renewed by calling

1-year loans
to

may be recharged by

bringing books

NRLF

Renewals and recharges may be made 4 days prior to due date

DUE AS STAMPED BELOW

JUL

1991

YB 36240

700948

UNIVERSITY OF CAUFORNIA

UBRARY

P!

liii'ii'iiiliiii